Service Manual 632e e 635g - 47997aeng

632E/635G SKIDDER
SERVICE MANUAL
SERIAL NUMBER 6320101 TO 6320300
SERIAL NUMBER 6353001 TO 6353200
PRELIMINARY ISSUE 1.1, OCTOBER 2017
Tigercat Industries Inc.

P.O. Box 637
Brantford, Ontario
Canada N3T 5P9
Tel: (519) 753-2000
Fax: (519) 753-8272
ii
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................. v
MACHINE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS..................................................................................... vi
SAE STANDARDS FOR MACHINE OPERATOR PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES.............................................vii
NON-APPROVED FIELD PRODUCT CHANGES.............................................................................................viii
REGULATORY INFORMATION.......................................................................................................................... ix
SAFETY...............................................................................................................................................................1
CONTROLS & OPERATION................................................................................................................................2
LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE......................................................................................................................3
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTERS.......................................................................................................................6
ENGINE START AND STOP................................................................................................................................7
DRIVE..................................................................................................................................................................8
COOLING SYSTEM...........................................................................................................................................10
DOZER BLADE..................................................................................................................................................14
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its
constituents are known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects and
other reproductive harm.
632E/635G AVAILABLE LITERATURE

Operator's Manual...........................................................................................................................Part No. 47996AENG
Service Manual (this manual)..........................................................................................................Part No. 47997AENG
632E Parts Catalog.........................................................................................................................Part No. 47998A
635G Parts Catalog.........................................................................................................................Part No. 50926A
Vehicle Moving and Transporting Instructions.................................................................................Part No. 41604AMUL
iii
iv
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................. v

INTRODUCTION
An Operator's manual, Service manual and a Parts catalog are made available by Tigercat to assist the dealer,
customer and operator in becoming familiar with the features of the 632E/635G Skidder.
SERIAL NUMBERS:
632E 6320101 to 6320300
635G 6353001 to 6353200
The 632E/635G Skidder is designed for skidding trees in selective felling and clear felling applications in plantations
and natural stands.
The Operator's manual will assist the operator with the techniques of proper and safe operation of the 632E/635G
Skidder. The service manual contains safety and servicing procedures and a preventive maintenance schedule to
ensure optimum machine performance.
Section 1 in both the Operator's manual and the service manual contains safety information that must be followed. As
well, throughout the rest of the manuals, DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION notices are displayed where necessary,
drawing attention to possible hazards when performing certain procedures.
Only trained personnel are allowed to operate or work on the machine.
The information contained in this manual is current at time of printing. Improvements to the machine are on-going and
may not be covered, therefore in these cases contact your Tigercat dealer for the appropriate information.
Tigercat reserves the right to make changes to the machine after this manual release date that may not immediately
appear in this manual.
If the machine in question was built after the release date of this manual and there is a discrepancy, call Tigercat
service department.
Tigercat reserves the right to change information contained herein at any time without prior notice.
All product or company names that may be mentioned in this publication are trade names, trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
v
MACHINE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS..................................................................................... vi
Introduction Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder
MACHINE IDENTIFICATION AND

SERIAL NUMBERS
Please record all serial numbers related to this machine
below and have ready before calling for assistance.
Engine Identification Label Location
The engine identification label is location
Machine Serial Number Plate Location– Cab Engine Date of Manufacture:_______________________
The machine serial number plate is located inside the

cab above the right door.
Engine Serial Number Plate Location
The engine serial number is also stamped location.
Machine Serial Number Stamp Location– Upper Frame Engine Serial Number:___________________________
The machine serial number is also stamped on the front

chassis and rear chassis near the centre joint on the
right side of the machine.
Machine Model Number:__________________________
Machine Serial Number:__________________________
Model Year:____________________________________
vi
SAE STANDARDS FOR MACHINE OPERATOR PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES.............................................vii
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Introduction
SAE STANDARDS FOR MACHINE OPERATOR PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES

THE OPERATOR ENCLOSURE FOR THIS MACHINE MEETS THE FOLLOWING STANDARDS:
• ISO 8082:2003 ROLL OVER PROTECTION STRUCTURES (ROPS)
• ISO 8083:2006 FALLING OBJECTS PROTECTION STRUCTURES (FOPS)
• ISO 8084:2003 OPERATOR PROTECTION STRUCTURES (OPS)
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIRS

The integrity of the ROPS, FOPS, OPS structure and its continued ability to provide the level of protection it was
designed for could be seriously affected by any modifications to the structure, its mounting or to the chassis to which it
is attached.
Tigercat emphasizes that the certification of approval of the ROPS, FOPS, OPS structure will become void if any such
modifications take place.
Tigercat may officially grant approval for modifications only by:
• Written approval of repairs or modifications signed by the Tigercat Engineering Manager; or
• Approved modifications officially released by Tigercat.
Both of the above are provided that the work is carried out in the factory approved manner.
Unauthorized modifications and/or repairs made or contributed to by a customer or a Tigercat distributor may result in
creating a dangerous situation and therefore the customer or Tigercat distributor will be considered to have assumed
the risk involved or be negligent in creating this situation.
Tigercat will not be held responsible for situations arising from having created unauthorized modifications/changes to
the structure.
Operator cabs are designed to ROPS, FOPS, OPS standards so that they will withstand force and absorb energy
during a roll over (ROPS), when resisting the impact of a falling object (FOPS) and minimize the possibility of operator
injury from penetrating objects (OPS). When a permanent deflection of the structure occurs, the structure can no
longer provide the original designed level of protection and should be replaced. Attempts to straighten the structure,
particularly by the application of heat, can reduce still further the structures remaining capability to protect.
The mounting and the frame or chassis to which the cab is attached is considered an PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES
integral part of the ROPS, FOPS, OPS and is included in the design, test and certification of CERTIFICATION
the product. FOR USE ON ALL Tigercat
600 SERIES MACHINES
Contact the Tigercat Service department before attempting any modifications or repair to THIS OPERATOR ENCLOSURE
roll-over protective structures. MEETS THE FOLLOWING
PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
STANDARDS:
ISO 8082:2003 (Roll Over)
Tigercat Industries Inc. Maximum Machine Mass
23 360kg / 51,500lb
ISO 8083:2006 (Falling Object)
Drop Energy Level: 11,600J
ISO 8084:2003 (Operator)
TO MAINTAIN OPERATOR
PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE
STRUCTURES CERTIFICATION
• All damaged protective
structures must be replaced,
not repaired.
• Any alterations must be
approved by manufacturer.
MANUFACTURED BY
Brantford, Ontario, Canada
30590AUNI R1
vii
NON-APPROVED FIELD PRODUCT CHANGES.............................................................................................viii
NON-APPROVED FIELD PRODUCT CHANGES

The installation of any unauthorized attachment or changes made of any kind to this Tigercat product could affect the
product's ability to perform as originally intended. The product's integrity, stability and it's ability to perform safely could
be at serious risk.
IT IS Tigercat POLICY THAT NO CHANGES ARE TO BE MADE TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING DELETIONS OR
ADDITIONS OTHER THAN A Tigercat APPROVED OPTION FITTED IN THE FACTORY APPROVED MANNER.
Official approval to make changes or install options is only to be undertaken as follows:
• The relevant options for that product must be shown or listed on current Tigercat documentation or literature such
as a printed specification sheet, price list, parts manual, or product literature issued by Tigercat.
• Approved options or product changes authorized in writing by the Tigercat Engineering Manager.
Authorization by any other person is unacceptable.
Unauthorized changes made or contributed to by a person or organization may result in creating a dangerous
situation and therefore the person or organization will be considered to have assumed the risk involved or be
negligent in having created this situation.
Weight is an important factor when considering the addition of options or an attachment, Refer to your Tigercat
distributor for information on maximum permissible operating weight and the effect the addition of various options may
have on your machine.
Tigercat will not be held responsible for any situation that may arise resulting from Non-approved Field Product
Changes to its product.
Should Tigercat become involved in a dispute resulting from changes made to the product without proper
authorization by Tigercat as stated above, Tigercat will take whatever action is appropriate to protect its interests.
The product warranty policy and the certification on any safety items installed on the modified product will become
NULL and VOID if the above policy is not adhered to as specified.
Non-approved product changes also nullify warranties given to Tigercat by its component manufacturers.
viii
REGULATORY INFORMATION.......................................................................................................................... ix
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Introduction
REGULATORY INFORMATION
The operator's cab is equipped with standard or optional equipment that is capable of
emitting radio frequency fields.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi exposure limits are significantly less than the maximum
permitted for public use.
IMPORTANT!
The RemoteLog™ telematics satellite antenna is externally mounted to the operator cab. When transmitting, the
external antenna should always be separated from personnel by a minimum distance of 20 cm (8 in). Transmissions
can be silenced by placing the telematics system in repair mode.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION NOTIFICATIONS TO USER

INTERNAL (OPERATOR'S CAB):
Telematics Module (Wi-Fi) Contains FCC ID: NCMOCG2101
IQAN-G11 (Bluetooth) Contains FCC ID: VPYLBZY
Radio (Bluetooth) Contains FCC ID: OPDJHD36A
Radio (Bluetooth) Contains FCC ID: OPDJHD1635BT
Radio (Bluetooth) Contains FCC ID: OPDJHD3630BT
EXTERNAL:
Inmarsat Modem (Satellite) Contains FCC ID: B92IDP1XX
Iridium Modem (Satellite) Contains FCC ID: Q639603N
These devices comply with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to
comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
INDUSTRY CANADA NOTIFICATIONS TO USER

INTERNAL (OPERATOR'S CAB):
Telematics Module (Wi-Fi) Contains IC ID: NCMOCG2101
IQAN-G11 (Bluetooth) Contains IC ID: VPYLBZY
EXTERNAL:
Inmarsat Modem (Satellite) Contains IC ID: B92IDP1XX
Irridium Modem (Satellite) Contains IC ID: Q639603N
These devices comply with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-
102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to
comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
ix
x
SAFETY...............................................................................................................................................................1

SECTION 1 - SAFETY
Read and understand this Safety section prior to operating any equipment.
Read and understand all manuals for any attachments or accessories.
CONTENTS - SECTION 1 ISSUE 2.0 FEBRUARY 2017
ARTICULATION LOCK............................................................................................................................. 1.31

BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH......................................................................................................... 1.11
BATTERY SAFETY.................................................................................................................................... 1.8
CAB EXITS.................................................................................................................................................1.9
CAB SAFETY CABLE.............................................................................................................................. 1.16
CAB SUPPORT BRACE.......................................................................................................................... 1.16
COOLING SYSTEM................................................................................................................................. 1.15
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)............................................................................................................... 1.9
EMERGENCY CAB EXITS......................................................................................................................... 1.9
EXHAUST FUMES................................................................................................................................... 1.16
FIRE PREVENTION................................................................................................................................. 1.23
DRY CHEMICAL CLEANUP PROCEDURES....................................................................................... 1.27
FIRE PREVENTION GUIDELINES....................................................................................................... 1.23
WHAT TO DO AFTER A MACHINE FIRE HAS OCCURRED............................................................... 1.26
WHAT TO DO TO PREPARE FOR A MACHINE FIRE......................................................................... 1.24
WHAT TO DO WHEN A MACHINE FIRE OCCURS............................................................................. 1.25
FIRST AID..................................................................................................................................................1.6
FLUID INJECTION INJURY..................................................................................................................... 1.18
FLUID LEAKS..........................................................................................................................................1.14
GREASE INJECTION INJURY................................................................................................................. 1.19
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE HAZARD........................................................................................................ 1.15
LIGHTNING SAFETY AWARENESS....................................................................................................... 1.20
LOOSE CLOTHING HAZARD.................................................................................................................. 1.15
NOISE LEVEL INSIDE CAB....................................................................................................................... 1.3
PARKING THE MACHINE........................................................................................................................ 1.10
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING......................................................................................................................... 1.4
SAFETY LABELS..................................................................................................................................... 1.28
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, GENERAL....................................................................................................... 1.4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, OPERATING.................................................................................................... 1.9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, SERVICING................................................................................................... 1.13
SAFETY SYMBOLS................................................................................................................................... 1.4
SIGNAL WORDS........................................................................................................................................ 1.4
VIBRATION LEVELS INSIDE CAB............................................................................................................ 1.3
WELDING, PRIOR TO............................................................................................................................. 1.13
WORKING WITH OIL................................................................................................................................. 1.6
Safety Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder
1.2
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Safety
VIBRATION AND NOISE LEVEL INSIDE
CAB
VIBRATION AND NOISE LEVEL INFORMATION
TO FOLLOW, NOT AVAILABLE AT TIME OF
PRINTING.
Wear suitable hearing protective device such as

earmuffs or earplugs to protect against noise.
Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause
permanent hearing loss. This machine exceeds
70dB(A) in the cab and exceeds 85dB(A) when
servicing machine engine.
Check with your local Safety Commission to
determine if hearing protection is required at these
levels.
1.3
SAFETY SYMBOLS GENERAL

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Remember that safety is a prime responsibility of
all.
To minimize the risks and promote safety at all
times, this section of the operator’s manual details
a number of safety rules which should always be
This safety alert symbol means ATTENTION! followed and obeyed.
BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
Always read the operator’s manual before
The safety alert symbol identifies important safety operating the machine. Pay close attention to
messages on machines, safety signs, in manuals, WARNINGS and HAZARD identifications.
or elsewhere. When you see this symbol, be alert
Study all the safety messages in this manual and
to the possibility of personal injury or death. Follow
on the labels on the machine carefully.
the instructions in the safety message.
Understanding Signal Words
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury. Follow all instructions from safety inspector and
supervisors.
WARNING You must be fully trained to operate this piece
of equipment. Know the capabilities and the
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous limitations of the equipment. Learn the most
situation which, if not avoided, could result in efficient operating techniques.
death or serious injury.
Do not let an untrained person operate the
machine.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE indicates a potentially damaging situation

which, if not avoided, may result in property
damage and is not related to personal injury.
Use recommended protective clothing and safety

devices such as gloves, safety boots, safety hat,
goggles, and ear protection when necessary.
1.4
These safety rules highlight both general and
specific measures the operator should be familiar WARNING
with and adhere to. More specific measures are
illustrated with pictograms which may also be
attached to the machine in locations pertinent to
their respective message. Keep safety labels in
good condition. Repair or replace damaged labels.
Avoid mounting or dismounting the

machine in areas with slippery surfaces.
Dry, deice, clean up or cover slippery
surfaces with an anti-slip material before
mounting or dismounting the machine.
Wear suitable hearing protective device such as
earmuffs or earplugs to protect against noise.
Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause WARNING
permanent hearing loss.
Do not walk on machine surfaces with steel
Always use the handrails and steps provided when
cleated foot wear. Steel cleats on steel
mounting and dismounting from the machine.
surfaces are slippery and do not provide a
safe foot hold.
WARNING
It is not recommended to walk on machine
surfaces that are not designated walking
areas.
No attempt should be made to walk on
angled steel surfaces or surfaces that are
Do not jump off the machine at any time. irregular in shape.
Do not try to climb onto or off of a moving Walking surfaces on the machine must be
machine. covered with anti-slip materials to provide
Do not use the joystick as a handle when entering a safe foot hold and prevent slipping.
or leaving the cab. These anti-slip surfaces should be
When mounting or dismounting the machine maintained on a regular basis. If the
always use the 3 point technique - Use one hand surface shows signs of wear, the anti-slip
with 2 feet or 2 hands with one foot. material must be replaced immediately.
1.5
To reduce the risk of fire, machines should Check all fluid levels.
be completely cleaned of debris at least
Do not operate the machine with any of the
daily, particularly around the engine exhaust
exhaust system, safety covers, or other devices
components. Hydraulic oil leaks, excess grease,
removed.
fuel and oil accumulation (including spillage)
should be eliminated immediately, always turn the Do not operate the machine with the cab retaining
engine off before cleaning machine. pins removed. Always install retaining pins and
fasten front guards to cab roof after lowering the
Maintain a clean cab interior, clear away trash or
cab.
debris.
Machine should be washed completely at every
major service.
Inspect the machine daily for signs of damage or
unusual wear, to ROPS, FOPS, OPS structures.
The machine should be inspected daily for signs
of fluid leaks, damage, unusual wear, or faulty
operation. Repair or replace malfunctioning parts
and systems immediately. Keep a first aid kit in an easily accessible location
on the vehicle at all times.
Check window and door guards for damage.
Working with oil
Check protective windows for cracks, a damaged
window has reduced strength to stop flying Direct contact with oil implies a risk of skin
objects. All damaged windows must be replaced complaints (example: eczema). Strict hygiene
with original equipment. should always be observed.
Check windows for scratching, crazing and Some advice which should be observed:
cloudiness that could impair clear visibility all • Oils used in this machine may be hot enough
round the machine. to cause serious burns.
Do not operate the machine with any defective or • Avoid contact with oil, particularly heated oil.
inoperable components. • Oil on the skin should be washed off
immediately with soap and water.
• Wear protective gloves. Hands should
be clean before putting on gloves. Apply
protective cream to the hands to make
washing easier.
• Don't put oily rags in your pockets.
• Oil soiled clothing should be changes as soon
as possible.
• Always keep an extra overall handy, but not in
the machine where it can become dirty.
• Cuts and abrasions must be attended to
immediately. Clean them and apply first-aid.
• Avoid breathing in oil fumes.
• Wash hands and arms frequently (example: at
each meal break or as often as possible).
Safety Hazards - Viton Seals
O-rings and other seals manufactured of Viton
material (fluorine rubber) produce a highly
corrosive acid (Hydrofluoric) when subjected to
temperatures above. 600°F(315°C).
This contamination can have extreme
consequences on human tissue since it is almost
impossible to remove after contact.
1.6
The following procedures are recommended when If State/Provincial, local or job site regulations
inspecting equipment that has been subjected to require even greater safety distances than stated
high temperatures such as fire: above, adhere strictly to these regulations for your
own protection.
• Visually inspect any seals or gaskets which
have suffered from heat; they will appear black If the machine must be transported, make
and sticky. sure that it is adequately secured to the
transporting vehicle. Refer to TRANSPORTING
• If these are found, Do Not Touch!!!
INSTRUCTIONS in SECTION 2.
• Determine the material composition of any
Stopping the engine immediately after it has been
seals or gaskets, If fluro-elastomer seals
working under load can result in overheating
(Viton, fluorel, or tecmoflon) have been used,
and premature wear of the engine components.
the affected area must be decontaminated
Reduce engine speed to LOW IDLE and let run
before undertaking further work. Natural
for approximately 5 minutes to allow gradual
rubber and nitrile materials are not hazardous.
dissipation of heat and also to reduce turbo speed.
• Disposable heavy duty gloves (neoprene) This will also prevent loss of coolant by after boil
must be worn and the affected area and possible hot spot damage to the engine.
decontaminated by washing thoroughly with
Even though the brakes are fully engaged, block
limewater (Calcium Hydroxide solution).
the wheels to prevent movement during transport.
• Any cloths, residue and gloves must be safely
Install articulation lock whenever the machine is to
discarded after use.
be transported.
NOTE:
Burning discarded items is not recommended
except in an approved incineration process where
the dangerous products are treated by alkaline
scrubbing.
Safety Hazards - Operating
Maintain a charged fire extinguisher on the vehicle Be aware when performing service and
at all times and KNOW HOW TO USE IT. maintenance tasks that surfaces and grab handles
in and around the engine and cooling system may
Do not carry passengers either in the cab or become very hot when the engine has been
anywhere else on the machine. The vehicle running. Contact with hot surfaces may cause
seating accommodation is for one operator only. injury.
Do not allow anyone to operate the machine who Comply with instructions in this manual and also
may be unfit, physically or mentally or who may be your company’s regulations for the operation of
under the influence of alcohol or drugs. this machine.
When operating the machine, ensure there is Read, understand and follow all general
adequate clearance on both sides and above safety precautions specified by grapple head
the machine or any of its attachments. Additional manufacturer.
clearance may be necessary where the ground is
uneven. Access to a cell phone or radio to call for
assistance in an emergency is advised. Be aware
Extreme caution should be exercised when that signal strength for cell phones and radios
approaching any area where overhanging changes with terrain and location.
electrical powerlines are present. Serious injury or
death by electrocution can result if the machine or
any of its attachments are not kept a safe distance WARNING
from these lines.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
Do not move any part of the machine or load and certain vehicle components contain
within 10 feet (3m) plus 2 times line insulator or emit chemicals known to the State
length of any electric lines. of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
1.7
Avoid Injury from Backover Accidents

WARNING Before moving machine, be sure all persons are
clear of the area.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead Always be alert for bystanders moving into the
compounds, chemicals known to the State of work area. Use horn to warn bystanders before
California to cause cancer and birth defects or moving the machine.
other reproductive harm.
When using a signal person, keep the person in
Wash hands after handling.
view at all times. Always be sure the signal person
is clear before backing up.
If acid is accidentally splashed into your eyes,
flush immediately with clean water and get medical To avoid backover accidents:
attention. • Always look around before you back up. Be
Do not attempt to charge a frozen battery; it can sure that everyone is clear.
explode. • Keep reverse warning alarm in working
condition. The reverse warning alarm
Disconnect battery before working on electrical
must sound when the machine is moving in
systems. Remove ground terminal first when
reverse.
disconnecting. Connect ground terminal last when
reconnecting. • Use a signal person when backing up if view is
obstructed. Always keep the signal person in
Do not short out battery terminals for any reason. view.
Serious burns or an explosion can result. • Learn the meaning of all flags, signs
and markings on the job site and who is
CAUTION responsible for signalling.
• Keep windows, mirrors and lights in good
Lead-acid batteries contain sulfuric acid condition.
which can severely damage eyes or skin on
• Dust, heavy rain, fog, snow etc. can reduce
contact. Always wear a safety face shield,
visibility. As visibility decreases, reduce speed
rubber gloves and protective clothing to
and use proper lighting.
reduce risk of accidents.
Lead-acid batteries produce flammable and
explosive gasses. Keep arcs, sparks, open
flames and lighted tobacco a safe distance
from the batteries.
1.8
FOR TIER 4F MACHINES ONLY:
OPERATING Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) may irritate eyes or
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS skin. Do not get in eyes. Do not get on skin.
First Aid treatment: DEF Contains Urea. If
swallowed call a Poison Control Centre or doctor
immediately. Do not induce vomiting. If in eyes
rinse with water for 15 minutes. If on skin rinse
D
well with water. If irritation persists seek medical
treatment.
WARNING
Turn the engine off when refuelling - DO NOT
refuel the engine while smoking or near open Use only diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) which
flame or sparks. meets ISO 22241 specifications. NEVER fill
the DEF tank with any other fluid.
Attach a grounding strap to an unpainted metal DEF is injected into the exhaust gas stream
surface on the machine if the refuelling tank or during normal operation of the Selective
nozzle is so equipped. Catalytic Reduction (SCR) aftertreatment
Check that no other personnel have moved into a system.
hazardous area before starting the machine. Use of other fluids may cause component
damage, or a fire risk which could result in
Sound the machine horn before starting the
machine.
The operator's seat is equipped with a lap CAB EXITS
belt. Use this restraint system at all times when
operating the machine. There are three ways to exit the cab in case of an
emergency.
1. Left cab door, one of the two main points of
entry.
2. Right cab door, one of the two main points of
entry.
3. Sliding windows in the cab doors, this is a
third cab exit for use if the cab doors become
blocked.
Start the engine by following the instructions in this It is important that the operator of the machine
manual. Refer to OPERATING MACHINE in be familiar with these emergency exits and how to
SECTION 2. use them.
Never use a liquid staring aid to start an engine. All three exits should be checked to make sure
that they are operational and will function in an
WARNING emergency.
IMPORTANT !
• EXPLOSION HAZARD.
Unlock both doors before operating machine
• DO NOT USE ETHER.
to allow opening from the outside in case of
• ENGINE EQUIPPED WITH
HEATER STARTING AID.
an emergency. Make sure that the doors are
• USE OF ETHER COULD
operational, open the doors twice, once using the
RESULT IN DEATH OR exterior handle and once using the interior latch
SERIOUS INJURY. handle.
36782BENG R0
For additional information, refer to EMERGENCY

Before moving the machine to the worksite, check
EXITS in SECTION 3.
to ensure that all doors, panels, and access covers
are installed properly and secured. Secure loose items in cab.
Prior to commencing work, check all equipment
controls to ensure that the machine responds
correctly.
1.9
Make sure that all safety screens and guards are When parking the machine:
installed and properly secured.
• Park on level ground ONLY and engage
Do not open an escape hatch or the cab doors to parking brake
increase ventilation when operating the machine.
• Do not park on a hillside or incline.
• Before leaving the operator's cab, lower the
grapple and dozer blade onto the ground and
engage the parking brake.
WARNING
• Stop the engine.
• Release pilot system pressure by performing
the following steps:
Keep the cab doors closed when driving or 1. Fully apply brake foot pedal repeatedly until
steering the machine to prevent accidental entry of there is no pedal resistance. This may take a
branches and debris into the cab. minimum of 150 applications.
Keep cab doors closed and use seat belt when 2. Release pressure from the rear pilot
driving or steering the machine to prevent being accumulator as follows:
thrown from the operator's cab. a. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position.
Never operate the winch from the ground. Control b. Using the computer from the main menu
it only from the operator’s seat. navigate to INFORMATION MENU (F3) –
Never use the parking brake to slow down or stop More...(F3) – Accumulator (F1)
the machine except in an emergency. Refer to COMPUTER – INFORMATION
Keep the parking brake properly adjusted at all MODE MENU in SECTION 2 of the
times. OPERATOR'S or SERVICE MANUAL.
Keep service brakes properly adjusted and check c. Check that all personnel are clear of the
for proper operation of the service brake. Refer machine.
to SERVICE BRAKE – CHECKING BRAKE AND
ACCUMULATOR FOR PROPER OPERATION in
SECTION 3.
Always rest the grapple and dozer blade on the
ground when operation is stopped, regardless if
the engine is running or shut off.
Never work alone. Regularly inform other crew
members of your intentions, location and length of
time to perform duties.
Park machine at least 50 feet (15 meters) away
from other equipment and in a cleared area. In
the event of a fire, this distance will minimize the
chance of the fire spreading to other equipment.
Do not leave the operator's cab while the winch
cable is under tension.
d. Press and hold the F1 button (test
Before leaving the operator's cab, lower the functions) and operate the dozer, arch or
grapple and dozer blade to the ground and boom DOWN functions a minimum of 150
engage the parking brake. times to release pressure from the rear
If out of the operator’s cab for an extended period pilot accumulator.
shut the machine off. 3. Pressure may remain in the system after
completing all of the above steps. Use caution
when loosening hydraulic connections.
1.10
• Prior to performing any service work or
maintenance on the machine, stop the engine,
remove the ignition key and store it in a safe
place.
WARNING
Never operate the boom or grapple over the heads

of bystanders.
When reeling in winch cable, make sure all
ground personnel are at a safe distance, at least
1 1/2 times the working length of the cable, in case
of rolling logs or whipping cables.
632E-013 Ground personnel should maintain a safe
distance, at least 1 1/2 times the working length of
• Turn the battery disconnect switch OFF if the the cable, from a winch cable under tension.
vehicle is to be parked for an extended period
of time (Example - overnight) and prior to When operating the winch with ground personnel,
performing any service work or maintenance keep the personnel in view at all times and ensure
on the machine. ground personnel are never allowed to be in line
with the load.
Use only prearranged and approved signalling
practices.
WARNING Obey flagger's signal and signs
Operate the machine only from a seated position
in the operator’s seat.
When the engine is running, DO NOT allow Do not carry passengers either in the cab or
anyone in areas of the machine where they may anywhere else on the machine.
be crushed by moving components.
If vision is limited by dust, smoke, fog or snow,
Maintain a safe operating distance between the stop the machine until visibility is restored.
machine and workers and all other personnel. It is
the duty of the operator to ensure that no person Do not work below or behind a skidder parked on
approach the machine while in use, the risk zone a grade.
is 60 m (200 feet). When working on slopes, travel straight up or
down the slope to prevent roll-over.
NEVER travel across a STEEP slope or side hill:
• If you travel across a MODERATE slope,
NEVER make an uphill turn as this could
cause a tip-over situation.
• Keep load low and close to skidder for best
stability.
• A load of logs will change the handling and
stability of the skidder.
• Always be prepared to dump the load in case
of emergency.
• Never approach an unstable log from the
downhill side.
1.11
• Do not winch in a load at a sharp angle. This
could cause your machine to tip over.
• Do not overload your skidder as this can
create an unstable condition and cause a
roll-over.
CAUTION
Do not open cab doors or window screens
when machine is on a slope. The doors and
screens are heavy and could swing out
with considerable force.
Before moving the machine, lift the grapple and

dozer blade off the ground and keep them high
enough to clear obstacles such as stumps.
Check for correct tire air pressure. If the pressure
is too low it will result in swaying. If the pressure
is too high it will result in bouncing. Refer to TIRE
PRESSURES in SECTION 3.
If the machine is to travel on public roads, use
accessory lights (when installed) and other caution
devices to alert operators of other vehicles of
your presence. Ensure your machine meets all
regulatory requirements.
When transporting the machine, ensure that
enough clearance is available on both sides and
above the machine or any of its attachments to
avoid contact with power or telephone lines, bridge
structures, etc.
Before transporting the machine check to ensure
that all doors, panels and access covers are
installed properly and secured.
Read, understand and follow all general safety
precautions specified by winch manufacturer and
in this manual.
When operating the winch do not work with a
damaged cable. Broken wire or strands, or a
decrease in the diameter of a cable are warning
signs of a damaged cable. Do not anchor a double
or two part line to the winch.
Read, understand and follow all general
safety precautions specified by grapple head
manufacturer.
1.12
This machine may be equipped with an optional
SERVICING variable pitch cooling fan, fan blade pitch is
hydraulically varied to control the flow and
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS direction of air through the cooler package.
Exercise care when working in this area with the
engine running. If the FAN CONTROL SWITCH is
in the AUTOMATIC position, the fan could go
into CLEAN mode at any time when the engine is
running.
Always ensure that the fan guard is in place when
the engine is running.
IMPORTANT
Conduct maintenance inspections at least as
frequently as recommended in section 3 this
manual. 24 VOLT
When servicing or repairing equipment, turn the
engine OFF and turn OFF the battery disconnect
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
switch. Some wiring on the machine is live even
Prior to welding on any part of the machine, it
when the battery disconnect switch is off.
should be cleaned and a fire extinguisher should
When servicing the electrical system, turn be made available at the welding location.
OFF the battery disconnect switch, remove the
Care must be taken in attaching the welding
battery cables from the batteries disconnecting
machine grounding clamp so current does not
the negative (-) cables first. Perform the service
pass through bearings, especially the centre joint
work, then attach the battery cables reconnecting
bearing.
the positive (+) cables first and turn the battery
disconnect switch ON. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
Install a “DO NOT START ENGINE” sign on Disconnect the battery cables from the batteries,
the operator’s cab door and in the engine negative (-) cables first.
compartment when making repairs to the machine. This machine is equipped with sensitive electronic
control equipment, prior to welding:-
DISCONNECT THE
TWO MULTI-PIN
PLUGS FROM THE
ENGINE ECU
Before performing maintenance or repair work on

any equipment, consult the manufacturer’s
instruction manual and follow recommended
procedures.
The radiator and the engine cooling system
should be cleaned and serviced daily to maintain 632E-008 ENGINE ECU DISCONNECT - LEFT SIDE
moderate engine temperatures.
Disconnect the engine ECU (electronic control
unit) by unplugging the two connectors from the
left side of the engine.
1.13
WARNING
620E-007 FUSE AND RELAY PANEL WARNING, HOT FLUIDS AND HOT
MACHINE SURFACES CAN CAUSE
Remove the MD3 module fuse from the fuse and
SERIOUS BURNS!
relay panel
LOCATED IN • Before servicing the machine, allow the

CAB BEHIND
LEFT KICK
engine cooling system, fuel system,
PANEL exhaust system, hydraulic system and
machine surfaces to cool down.
• Use a thermometer to check surface and
system temperatures to ensure it is safe to
CONNECTOR
begin service work.
• DO NOT begin service work until the
XS2-A0 MODULE - CAB surface or system temperature has cooled
620E-043
down to below 100°F (38°C)!
LOCATED UNDER CAB,
RIGHT REAR - REMOVE COVER
TO ACCESS MODULES Never use your bare hands to check for fluid leaks.
XA2-A0 FRONT CHASSIS
CONNECTOR
XA2-A1 FRONT CHASSIS 2
CONNECTOR
615C-007 XA2 MODULES

Disconnect the other IQAN control module
harness connectors. One module is located in the
cab. One module is mounted on the back of the
operator's seat. Two modules are located under
the cab.
When welding is completed reconnect all
connectors, ground and fuse then attach the
battery cables reconnecting the positive (+) cables
first and turn the battery disconnect switch ON.
1.14
WARNING
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under
pressure can penetrate the skin and cause
serious personal injury, blindness, or
death. If any fluid is injected into the skin,
it must be surgically removed within a few
hours by a doctor familiar with treating this
type of injury.
Do not change any pressure or relief setting
unless Tigercat authorized instruction has been
Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible. obtained.
Use the proper tool for the job. Repair or replace
worn or damaged tools including lifting equipment
immediately.
When searching for leaks, wear work gloves and

use a wrench or piece of wood to move hydraulic
hoses. Do not grab hold of hydraulic hoses. Wear
safety goggles for eye protection.
Keep your hands, feet, head, and loose clothing
away from power driven parts. Tie long hair behind
your head. Remove rings and other jewellery to
prevent electrical shorts and entanglement in
moving parts.
Pressure can be maintained in a hydraulic system

long after the power source and pump have been WARNING
shut down. Lower grapple and dozer blade to the
ground and relieve trapped pressure from the
brake accumulator and rear pilot accumulator
Always be aware of machine pinch points that
before performing work on components, or
could cause injury. Never place body parts within
disconnecting any hoses. For the procedure to
the range of motion of the working parts of the
RELIEVE PRESSURE, refer to PARKING THE
machine.
MACHINE in THIS SECTION.
Always wear your safety gloves when handling
cables, chokers or logs.
Explosive release of fluids from pressurized

cooling system can cause serious burns.
Turn the engine off. Only remove fill cap when
cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly
loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure before
removing completely.
1.15
CAUTION
Do not open cab doors or window screens
when machine cab is tilted . The doors and
screens are heavy and will swing out with
considerable force.
SAFETY
CABLE
ARTICULATION LOCK IN
630E-060 STRAIGHT LOCKED POSITION
CAB AT FULL TILT SUPPORTED

620E-033 BY SAFETY CABLE
630E-073 ARTICULATED LOCKED POSITION
SUPPORT
BRACE This is particularly important for easy access
to the pressurized water system in the event of
a fire or other emergency. Refer also to FIRE
PREVENTION in THIS SECTION.
WARNING
DO NOT work below or behind a machine
that is parked on a grade.
TILTED CAB SUPPORTED

BY SUPPORT BRACE
620E-009
WARNING
Before working under cab, machine must be
Failure to follow all of the above
parked on level ground. Cab must be fully tilted
instructions could result in serious injury
with safety cable completely tight or cab support
or death from crushing.
brace must be installed between frame and cab
to prevent injury. Refer to TILTING THE CAB in
SECTION 3 for complete instructions.
The hydraulic cylinder is to raise and lower cab, it
must not be used as a support.
Never stand under an object supported with
hydraulics. Always use safety stands or a locking
device.
Before working in the centre joint area, install the
frame articulation lock between the frames to
prevent accidental articulation and injury. Always If the engine is running inside a building, ensure
replace the lock bar in its storage position after that sufficient ventilation is available to prevent a
use. build-up of toxic exhaust fumes. Run the engine
All handles should be hand tight only at all times. only when it is necessary for testing or
adjustments.
1.16
BOLT ON
ACCESS
PANELS
DOOR
PROP
MAINTENANCE
ACCESS DOORS
MAINTENANCE ACCESS
632E-027 DOOR (RIGHT SIDE SHOWN)
632E-029 ACCESS PANELS LEFT SIDE

BOLT ON
ACCESS
PANELS
Work in a ventilated area. If it is necessary to run

an engine in an enclosed area, use an exhaust
pipe extension to remove toxic exhaust fumes.
If you don't have an exhaust pipe extension, either
work outside, or open the shop doors.
Dispose of fluids properly.
MAINTENANCE Do not pour fluids into the ground, stream, pond.
ACCESS DOORS
Before draining any fluids, know the proper way to
dispose of them.
632E-028 ACCESS PANELS RIGHT SIDE
CAUTION
Always use the door props provided to
safely hold access doors open while in
use.
The engine compartment access panels
are bolted in place. Whenever bolts are
removed panels can fall during the process
of removing them from the machine.
1.17
FLUID INJECTION INJURY
WARNING
Hydraulic and diesel fuel systems on forestry
machines operate at very high pressures, Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure
often 207 bar (3000 psi) and above. If a loose can penetrate the skin and could result in
connection or a defect in a hose should occur, a death or serious injury. If any fluid is injected
fine, high velocity stream of fluid will result. Even under the skin, a medical doctor familiar
for systems pressurized to as little as 7 bar (100 with the treatment of this type of injury must
psi), this fluid stream can penetrate human skin as surgically remove it within a few hours.
if it were a hypodermic needle.
In the event of any suspected fluid injection
injury
• Report the injury to your supervisor
immediately.
• Seek professional medical attention
immediately.
As always the best defence against suffering the
Initially, an accidental fluid injection beneath the effects of fluid injection is to prevent the accident
skin may only produce a slight stinging sensation. from occurring in the first place.
There is a danger that you will tend to ignore this, When searching for possible fluid leaks
thinking that it will get better with time. Most often,
it does not! Within a very short time the wound • Never search for leaks with your bare hands.
may begin to throb painfully, indicating that tissue Always wear thick protective gloves.
damage has already begun. • Be sure to wear safety goggles for eye
protection.
Similarly fluid injected directly into a blood vessel
• Keep all body parts well away from the area
can spread rapidly through your circulatory
being investigated for leaks.
system. The human body has little ability to purge
injected fluid.
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can
penetrate the skin and could result in death or
serious injury. If any fluid is injected under the skin,
a medical doctor familiar with the treatment of this
type of injury must surgically remove it within a few
hours.
•
Use the end of a long piece of wood to move
Time becomes critical as tissue damage hoses or other obstacles.
progresses rapidly. The longer you delay getting • Place the end of a long piece of wood in the
professional medical attention, the more damage suspected path of any fluid stream. Never use
can occur. any part of your body.
Although fluid injection accidents are rare, the • Recognize that the source of the leak and the
resulting injury has on occasion required the fluid streaming from it may be very small and
amputation of a finger, a hand or in some cases not easily visible. You may only be able to see
the entire limb. The longer the delay in getting the fluid that accumulates as a result of the
professional medical aid, the further up the limb fluid stream.
the tissue damage can spread. An injury of this When performing any service work
type can become very serious or even fatal if not
• Stop the engine and relieve all diesel fuel or
dealt with promptly and properly.
hydraulic pressure before disconnecting any
lines or otherwise working on the system.
• Never grab any hydraulic or diesel fuel
connectors or hoses when they are subjected
to pressure.
• Always ensure that hoses are rated for the
pressures to which they will be subjected.
• Never use any hoses that you suspect could
be defective.
1.18
GREASE INJECTION INJURY WHEN
USING PNEUMATIC GREASE GUNS
Pneumatic grease guns can deliver grease at
pressures from 17 - 400 bar (246 - 5801 psi).
It takes less than 7 bar (100 psi) to inject a
substance through human skin.
ALWAYS get professional medical treatment
immediately after any type of injection injury.
Provide the physician with information on the type
of grease, the pressure setting of the gun, and
similar details.
The amount of fluid injected, type of fluid (or
material), pressure at which it was injected, and
the elapsed time between injection and surgery all
influence the chances of successful treatment for
this type of serious injury.
Prior to using a high pressure pneumatic grease
gun perform the following:
• All operators of high pressure pneumatic
grease guns MUST be trained in the hazards
of its operations and the treatment for such
injuries.
• DO NOT OPERATE a high pressure
pneumatic grease gun unless you have been
trained in the proper operation and are aware
of all safety precautions of such a tool.
• Wear protective clothing such as gloves,
safety hat and safety glasses.
• Inspect all parts of the grease gun for wear
and tear and replace all worn or damaged
parts.
• Ensure that protective shrouds are installed
on all grease gun nozzles as safety devices.
• Remove dirt and grease from grease fittings
prior to greasing.
• Replace any defective grease fittings on
equipment with new fittings immediately.
• When badly positioned fittings are identified,
replace them with angled or swivel fittings for
easier access.
1.19
LIGHTNING SAFETY
LIGHTNING In spite of the popular myth that being struck
SAFETY AWARENESS by lightning is an unlikely event, the facts show
that lightning strikes occur frequently. As a result
loggers are at high risk because their work is
outdoors and close to known strike points such as
tall trees and heavy equipment.
Loggers can increase their chances of avoiding
a lightning strike by following a few simple safety
practices.
1. Designate a member of your crew to
WHAT IS A LIGHTNING STRIKE? • Monitor daily weather forecasts

Lightning is a discharge of the electricity produced • Observe local weather conditions
by a thunderstorm. As the thunderstorm develops,
• Alert all other members of the crew when
many small particles of ice within the storm clouds
a possible lightning threat develops.
bump together. These collisions create a positive
charge at the top of a cloud and a negative charge 2. Don’t start or continue any work that cannot
at the bottom. As this continues a second positive be stopped immediately, when a storm moves
charge builds up on the ground beneath the cloud, nearby.
concentrated around high objects such as hills, 3. Anticipate a high-risk situation and take action
trees, buildings, equipment and even people. early by moving to a low-risk location. Do
When the difference between the electrical not hesitate. If there is lightning, you are in
charge in the cloud and on the ground becomes danger.
great enough to overcome the resistance of the 4. Obey the rule - If you see lightning, Flee. If
insulating air between them, an electrical current you hear thunder, Clear.
flows instantly. This is a lightning strike.
5. Do not follow the now obsolete guideline to
The electrical potential in a lightning strike can be take shelter when the time between seeing
as much as 100 million volts. Lightning strikes can lightning and hearing thunder is 30 seconds
occur over very large distances, even as much as or less. This does not provide sufficient time
60 km (37 miles). Lightning travels both in front of to ensure safety. Always follow step 4.
and behind a thunderstorm and so strikes happen
even when rain has not started or has stopped. 6. Remain in your safe location for 30 minutes
Lightning can hit in the same place, many times after the last sight of lightning or the last
and often spreads out over 18 m (60 feet) within sound of thunder.
the soil around the strike point. The safest location during lightning activity is
Thunder always accompanies lightning. When inside a fully enclosed, substantially constructed
lightning occurs, the air through which it travels building, a house, office, school, shopping area,
is instantaneously heated to a temperature more etc. These are the safest because of the electrical
than 28,000°C (50,000°F). The air expands wiring and plumbing that they contain. Should
rapidly due to this heating, then quickly contracts lightning strike, the electrical current will travel
as it cools. It is this contracting shock wave that through the wiring or plumbing into the ground.
we hear as thunder. When such a building is nearby, always seek
shelter there first.
In many areas of the world, lightning strikes are
second only to flooding as the greatest cause of
storm related deaths and injuries. Although only
10% of lightning strike victims are killed, virtually
all from cardiac or respiratory arrest, over 70%
of those that survive suffer severe, life-long
injury and disability. The symptoms of a lightning
strike include memory loss, fatigue, chronic pain,
dizziness, sleeping difficulty and the inability to
complete several tasks at one time.
1.20
WHAT TO DO IF YOU ARE OUTSIDE AND SEE
LIGHTNING OR HEAR THUNDER.
If you can, get inside.
1. Run to the nearest building, motor vehicle
or fully enclosed ROPS equipment cab
immediately. Being anywhere outside is not
safe.
2. If inside a building:
• Don’t watch the lightning storm from open
Unfortunately loggers do not often work close to windows or doorways. Stay in inner rooms.
buildings and therefore other alternatives need to • Stay well away from corded telephones,
be considered. electrical appliances, lighting fixtures,
Sheds, weather shelters, hunting blinds, tents radio microphones, electrical sockets and
and other partially open or small structures are plumbing pipes and fixtures.
not safe against lightning strikes as they lack 3. If inside a motor vehicle or fully enclosed
the electrically grounded components of larger ROPS equipment cab:
buildings. They are intended for sun or rain
protection only. Do not seek shelter from lightning • Under no circumstances whatsoever step
strikes inside these structures. outside of the vehicle or off the equipment
to move to another shelter. Very dangerous
The second safest location during lightning activity electrical pathways to ground may go
is inside a fully enclosed car, van, truck or bus with through you.
a metal roof and metal sides. The electrical energy
of a lightning strike to these vehicles is carried to • Shut down all operation, turn off the
ground by the conducting outer metal surfaces. engine, close all doors and raise all
This is called the skin effect. windows.
Do not seek safety from lightning strikes in • Sit squarely in the seat with your hands in
vehicles with fiberglass or plastic body shells or in your lap and your feet flat on the floor mat.
convertible top vehicles. None of these are safe, • Do not touch any metallic objects
as they do not offer skin effect lightning protection. referenced to the outside of the vehicle. Do
Heavy forestry equipment such as a skidder, not touch any door and window handles,
loader, feller buncher, forwarder, etc. with a fully control levers, foot pedals, steering
enclosed rollover protective structure (ROPS) cab wheels, cab interior walls and any other
take advantage of the skin effect and are therefore inside to outside metal objects.
safe in electrical storms. • Do not touch any radio or telephone
However machines with a rollover canopy only connected to an outside antenna.
are not safe against lightning strikes as they are
open to electrically conductive rainwater and do
not benefit from the skin effect. Operators of this
equipment must abandon their machines and get
to a safer location before lightning strikes.
Note that the rubber tires on motor vehicles and
heavy equipment do not increase safety from
lightning strikes. Lightning has already travelled a
great distance through the air to strike the vehicle.
In comparison a few inches of rubber in a tire
offers absolutely no additional insulation.
1.21
What to do if you feel your skin tingling, your
hair stands on end, light metal objects vibrate
or you hear a crackling sound.
1. Lightning is probably about to strike. You only
have a few seconds to act.
2. Put your feet together. Crouch down like in a
baseball catcher’s position. Hold your head
down. Cover your ears to protect them against
the noise of the thunder.
3. Do not lie flat on the ground. By touching as
little of the ground as possible, the lightning
If you are caught outside and have no where may not move across the ground to you.
else to go.
What to do if a co-worker has been struck by
1. Avoid wide-open areas where you project lightning.
above the surrounding landscape.
1. The victim does not carry any electrical
2. Seek shelter in a low place, such as a ditch, charge. There is no danger to anyone
ravine, valley, canyon or cave. helping this person. You can touch him or her
3. Get away from open water such as ponds or immediately.
streams. 2. Call your local emergency response telephone
4. Do not take shelter under any isolated tall number immediately.
trees or small groups of trees. 3. If the victim has no pulse, their heart has
5. Seek shelter amongst the dense, thick growth stopped or they have stopped breathing, start
of the shortest trees. cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) or mouth
–to-mouth resuscitation immediately. Use a
6. Avoid entering any small enclosures or portable defibrillator if one is available.
shelters.
4. Be careful about staying in the storm to take
7. Do not seek shelter under any motor vehicle care of the victim. You can get hit by lightning
or heavy equipment. too. If you can, move the victim to a building
8. Keep clear of any materials that can conduct as soon as possible.
electricity such as wire fences and gates, To further increase your awareness about lightning
metal pipes, poles, rails and tools. safety, see the following web sites.
9. Stay at least 15m (50 feet) away from metal National Weather Service Lightning Safety
objects such as a fuel tank, a vehicle or http://www.lightningsafety.noaa.gov
machinery without a cab, motorcycle, ATV, etc.
National Lightning Safety Institute
10. Stay at least 5m (16 feet) apart from any other http://www.lightningsafety.com
members of a group so that lightning won’t
travel between you.
11. Do not use the telephone except for
emergencies.
1.22
4. Clean out all accumulated forest debris
FIRE PREVENTION (twigs, pine needles, branches, bark, leaves,

saw dust, small wood chips) and any other
combustible materials from inside the machine
belly pans or lower machine structures as well
as from areas in proximity to the engine, fuel
and hydraulic oil systems no less frequently
than at the completion of each work shift.
5. Inspect the machine regularly for any signs
of diesel fuel or hydraulic system leakage.
Check for worn or eroded fuel or hydraulic
When working in a forest environment, it is lines before starting up any equipment.
impossible to prevent combustible debris from 6. Clean up any grease, diesel fuel, hydraulic
collecting in tight corners of the machine. This and lubricating oil accumulation and spillage
debris, in itself, may cause a fire; however, when immediately.
mixed with fuel, oil or grease in a hot or confined
7. Steam clean the engine, hydraulic pumps,
place, the danger of fire is greatly increased.
transmission, brake, fuel and hydraulic tank
The following fire prevention guidelines should be compartments and all machine belly pans at
used to supplement the operator’s fire prevention least once a month or more frequently when
efforts. In no case should the guidelines be used, working in logging conditions where large
or assumed, as replacements for diligent operator amounts of combustible forest debris are
efforts at preventing fires. present.
The following guidelines will help to keep your
8. Use only nonflammable solutions for
equipment up and running efficiently and keep the
cleaning the machine and components.
risk of fire to a minimum.
1. Maintain a CHARGED fire extinguisher on 9. Inspect the exhaust system daily for any
the machine at all times and KNOW HOW TO signs of leakage. Check for worn, cracked,
USE IT. broken or damaged pipes or muffler. Also
check for missing or damaged bolts or clamps.
2. Remove debris and blow out dust regularly Should any exhaust leaks or defective parts
from the air intake doors, engine radiator and be found, repairs must be made immediately.
charge air cooler, hydraulic oil cooler, diesel Engine exhaust leaks can cause fires. Do not
fuel cooler and air conditioning condenser operate the machine until the exhaust leak is
core to prevent overheating of the engine and repaired.
hydraulics and to maintain efficient operation
of the machine. Refer to CLEANING A/C 10. During daily operation of the machine, the
CONDENSER, OIL COOLER AND RADIATOR occurrence of exhaust leaks are usually
in SECTION 3. accompanied by a change or increase in
engine exhaust noise levels. These audible
3. Blow off all forest debris and fine organic warnings cannot be ignored. Should any
material accumulated near hot engine exhaust leaks occur during operation, the
exhaust components (turbocharger and machine must be shut down immediately
exhaust manifold as well as exhaust pipes and not put back to work until the necessary
and muffler) at the completion of each work repairs have been completed.
shift or more frequently when working in
logging conditions where large amounts 11. Park the machine at least 15 METERS (50
of combustible forest debris are present. feet) away from other equipment at the end of
Visual inspection after blow off to ensure each shift.
thorough cleanliness is vital. Engine exhaust 12. Never leave the machine parked with
systems provide numerous small pockets boom, arch or blade suspended off the
where saw dust, small wood chips and other ground. Should their supporting hydraulic
flammable forest debris can gather. Even hoses burn through during a fire, pressurized
small accumulations close to hot exhaust hydraulic oil may be injected into the fire and
components can ignite and smolder. If the boom, arch or blade will fall rapidly to the
dislodged this smoldering debris can fall ground.
into other areas of the machine and thereby
spread a fire.
1.23
13. Turn the battery disconnect switch to OFF 17. AFTER transporting (trucking) a machine
at shut down to de-energize all electrical from one job site to the next, open all doors
circuits. and access panels and blow off any debris
that may have repositioned itself onto the
14. Remain with the machine for at least 45
engine and exhaust parts due to wind
minutes at the end of operations while the
turbulence caused by the journey.
machine cools.
18. Before starting repair work, such as welding,
the surrounding area should be cleaned and a
fire extinguisher should be close by.
19. Store rags and other combustible materials
in a safe, fireproof location.
20. Do not use the machine on top of or to push
piles of burning timber. A machine fire will
most probably result.
EQUIPMENT FIRES ADVERSELY EFFECT

YOUR ABILITY TO LOG, MAY INCREASE YOUR
INSURANCE PREMIUMS DRAMATICALLY OR
PREVENT YOU FROM OBTAINING INSURANCE
COVERAGE AT ALL.
WHAT TO DO TO PREPARE FOR A MACHINE FIRE

• Prevent the fire from happening in the first
place by ensuring that all machine systems
are frequently inspected and always well
maintained.
• Ensure that any hand held fire extinguishers
are charged and in working order. Fire
extinguishers require routine care. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for inspection
and maintenance shown on the label of
the fire extinguisher and in the extinguisher
manufacturer's manual.
• Ensure that any pressurized water systems
on the machine (if applicable) are charged
and in working order. Refer to PRESSURIZED
WATER SYSTEM MAINTENANCE in
SECTION 3.
• Ensure that you have the proper fire
15. Remove all keys, lock equipment and fuel extinguishers on site. Most fires involving
cap at the end of operations to reduce the risk mobile forestry equipment will be Class A or B.
of vandalism. Dry chemical extinguishers should be rated
16. Be cautious when smoking. An open ABC and pressurized water extinguishers
flame, a lighted cigarette, etc., should not should be rated A.
be permitted around any vehicle, especially Class A fires involve ordinary combustibles
during fuelling operations or when the fuel such as wood, cloth, paper, rubber and many
system is open to the atmosphere or when plastics, Class B fires occur with flammable
servicing batteries. liquids such as diesel fuel, oil and grease and
Class C fires apply to energized electrical
equipment.
1.24
• Ensure that the nozzle of any hand held WHAT TO DO WHEN A MACHINE FIRE
extinguisher and pressurized water system OCCURS
available on the machine and at the work site
fits within the fire extinguisher access holes in • If operating the machine when a fire occurs:
the doors of the machine. 1. Lower all working attachments to the
• Ensure that your fire detection system* is in ground.
working order. Refer to FIRE DETECTION 2. Turn the engine OFF.
SYSTEM in SECTION 2.
3. Activate the fire suppression system**.
• Ensure that your fire suppression system** is
charged and in working order. Refer to FIRE 4. Radio or call for help. Be certain to report a
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM in SECTION 2. fire immediately.
• Ensure that you are familiar with the 5. Exit the machine taking fire extinguisher
recommended procedures for fire contained in and pressurized water system hose (if
the emergency action plan of your company. applicable) with you.
• Ensure that you follow all national, state
6. At all times ensure your own personal
/ provincial and local regulations dealing
safety and the safety of anyone that may
with fire fighting in effect in your specific
be in the area. Approach any fire with
geographic region. Regulations will vary from
extreme caution. All fires can be very
region to region but most will usually require
dangerous and life threatening.
that:
1. Workers assigned to fire fighting duties 7. Only if you can safely do so, turn OFF the
must be physically capable of performing battery disconnect switch.
them safely and effectively. • Before deciding to fight the fire, be certain
2. Workers designated to use fire fighting that:
equipment as part of an emergency action
1. The fire is small and not rapidly spreading.
plan must receive full and proper training
from a qualified instructor. 2. There is always a clear, safe escape route
3. Whenever portable fire extinguishers to your back.
are provided for use in the workplace, 3. You have received training in the use of the
training must be provided to familiarize available fire extinguishing systems and
workers with the general principles of fire are confident that you can operate them
extinguisher use and the hazards involved effectively.
with fire fighting.
4. If in any doubt about whether or not to fight
4. Training must be provided upon initial the fire – DON’T. Instead stand well clear
employment and at least annually of the fire and wait for help to arrive.
thereafter.
• Ensure that after you have received the 5. Be aware that engine coolant , diesel fuel
training as outlined above, that you know how or hydraulic hoses could fail during a fire. If
to use the fire extinguisher, the pressurized this happens, hot coolant, fuel or oil could
water system (if applicable) and the fire possibly be ignited by the fire.
suppression system** on your machine. 6. If possible a dry chemical fire extinguisher

There is not enough time available to read or fire suppression system** should
instructions during a fire emergency. be used first to fight a machine fire.
• Ensure that all information necessary for you Then immediately afterwards use the
to immediately contact all sources of help pressurized water hose supplied with the
(local fire department, etc) in the event of a fire machine (if applicable) or a pressurized
emergency is recorded and readily available at water extinguisher (if available). A fire
all times. suppressed by dry chemical may re-ignite
from the heat retained by any debris or
hot machine components in the area.
The water will cool the area, reducing the
chances of re-ignition.
1.25
• Use the PASS method. This is the most WHAT TO DO AFTER A MACHINE FIRE HAS
effective use of a fire extinguisher. OCCURRED
• Pull the pin at the top of the extinguisher • Before returning the machine to work.
that keeps the handle from being pressed.
1. Ensure that the cause of the fire is
Break the plastic seal as the pin is pulled.
determined and all appropriate repairs are
• Aim the nozzle at the base of the fire. Do completed.
not aim the nozzle at the flames. In order
to put out the fire, you must extinguish 2. Ensure that the fire detection system*
the fuel, not the flames. Hose nozzles are or the fire suppression system** is
often clipped to the extinguisher body. properly serviced and in working order (if
Release the hose before taking aim. applicable).
• Squeeze the handle to release the 3. Ensure that all extinguishers used in
pressurized extinguishing agent. The fighting the fire are replaced or recharged.
handle can be released at any time to stop
the discharge. • Notify your equipment dealer and / or Tigercat
Industries Inc. by completing an incident
• Sweep from side to side at the base of the report, Tigercat form number 5101.
fire until the fire is completely out or the fire
extinguisher is empty *NOTE: Fire detection systems are offered by
Tigercat as an optional installation on some
Tigercat product lines. Please disregard any
references made to fire detection systems if not
installed on your machine.
**NOTE: Dry chemical fire suppression systems

are offered by Tigercat as an optional installation
on some Tigercat product lines. Please disregard
any references made to fire suppression systems
if not installed on your machine.
TYPICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHER

20229A ACCESS HOLE
• Place the nozzle of the fire extinguisher into
the appropriate fire extinguisher access hole
and discharge the extinguisher.
• Only if you can safely do so, open the access
panels to the machine in the area of the fire.
• Failing all attempts to access the machine
compartment, discharge the extinguisher
through the mesh or any available openings
on the machine.
• Ensure that the machine and all components
have cooled down sufficiently after a fire so
that re-ignition does not occur.
• Remain with the machine until help arrives.
1.26
DRY CHEMICAL CLEANUP PROCEDURES 3. In areas exposed to heat during the fire,
the dry chemical powder will melt forming a
Both ABC dry chemical fire extinguishers and
coating that cakes or crusts on all surfaces.
fire suppression systems discharge a chemical
powder to extinguish the fire. The chemical To break down the caked dry chemical, spray
makeup and the small particle size of the powder or wash these areas with a 50/50 mixture of
as well as the force of the discharge all contribute hot water and isopropyl alcohol. Allow this
to the fire fighting capability. These same mixture to stand in place for several minutes.
characteristics also permit the powder to penetrate
The caked dry chemical when exposed to
into and fully cover all components in the vicinity of
moisture is also mildly acidic. Therefore
the discharge.
when the break down procedure has been
The following are recommendations for the completed, follow this immediately with the
cleanup and neutralizing of areas exposed to dry neutralizing procedure as described in step 2.
chemical powder.
Workers performing this work should wear
protective clothing, safety goggles and a fine
particle dust mask to minimize their personal
exposure to the dry chemical powder.
Ensure that all electrical systems have been
completely de-energized prior to any cleanup.
1. In areas of the machine that remained cool
and dry during the fire, the dry chemical will
stay in powder form.
Be certain to clean these areas immediately
to prevent any settled residual powder from
coming into contact with moisture whether
through direct contact or humidity in the air.
Remove the powder residue by blowing off
with air, sweeping, dusting or vacuuming using
a HEPA filter capable of trapping the small dry
chemical particles. Then wipe all surfaces with
a damp cloth.
2. In areas exposed to moisture, the dry
chemical powder will combine with water to
form a paste that is mildly acidic. Note that all
surfaces covered by this dry chemical paste
including electrical contacts are vulnerable to
corrosive attack.
To neutralize the acidic paste on large
surfaces, spray or wash these areas with a
mixture of 3 parts hot water to 1 part baking
soda. Allow this mixture to stand for several
minutes before rinsing with warm water. Wash
the area with a mild soap and water solution.
Rinse thoroughly with water. Blow-dry to
remove all residual water.
Cleaning of electrical contacts should be done
using an electrical contact cleaner that has
no flash or fire point and is non-corrosive and
non-conductive such as CRC Contact Cleaner
2000.
1.27
NO RIDERS
SAFETY LABELS
SAFETY LABELS
CAB LABELS
The following safety labels are installed in the cab
of the Skidder. These labels are located inside
the cab in full view of the operator. All labels must
be periodically cleaned and inspected to ensure
legibility is maintained. Replace any label that
becomes illegible, damaged or removed.
EMERGENCY EXIT HAND TIGHTEN ONLY NO RIDERS INSIDE OR OUTSIDE OF THE

The sliding windows in the cab doors can be used MACHINE . Do not carry passengers either in the
as a third cab exit. The screens on the outside cab or anywhere else on the machine. The vehicle
of these windows can be released by handles seating accommodation is for one operator only.
both on the inside and the outside of the cab. All Persons riding on the outside of the machine are
handles should be hand tight only at all times. subject to hazards such as falling off the machine,
This will prevent entrapment during an emergency crush hazards, thrown object hazards and many
by providing an exit point through the sliding other hazards WHICH COULD RESULT IN
windows if the cab doors are blocked. Refer also DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
to EMERGENCY CAB EXITS in THIS SECTION. If any person attempts to climb onto the machine
during operation, STOP THE MACHINE
IMMEDIATELY. Do Not Operate the machine until
other personnel are a safe distance away from the
machine.
1.28
USE SEAT BELT READ OPERATOR'S MANUAL
USE SEAT BELT. The seat belt supplied with this READ OPERATOR'S MANUAL. Always read the
seat must be used at all times when operating this operator’s manual before operating the machine.
machine. Pay close attention to WARNINGS and HAZARD
identifications.
Study all the safety messages in this manual and
on the labels on the machine carefully.
1.29
OPERATOR'S MANUAL LOCATION REMOVE IGNITION KEY BEFORE SERVICING
THE MACHINE!
This label indicates the storage location of the

operator's manual. This label is located on the
outside of the operator's manual case inside the
cab.
Prior to performing any service work or

maintenance on the machine, stop the engine,
REMOVE THE IGNITION KEY and store it in a
safe place.
1.30
EXTERIOR LABELS
ARTICULATION
The following safety labels are installed on the LOCK
exterior of this machine. These labels are located

on the machine in the area where the specific REAR CHASSIS
safety concern is applicable. Labels must be
periodically cleaned and inspected to ensure
legibility is maintained. Replace any label that RETAINING PINS
becomes illegible, damaged or removed. ARTICULATION LOCK
CRUSH HAZARD 620E-002 STORED POSITION
This label warns of the crush zone in the centre

joint area. This can occur when the machine
steering is used. DO NOT WORK IN THIS AREA
UNTIL THE ARTICULATION LOCK BAR IS
INSTALLED!
Before working in the centre joint area, INSTALL 630E-060 STRAIGHT LOCKED POSITION
THE CHASSIS ARTICULATION LOCK BAR
between the chassis and centre joint to prevent
accidental articulation which could result in death
or serious injury.
Refer to ARTICULATION LOCK in SECTION 3 for
complete instructions.
43304BUNI R0
1.31
CRUSH HAZARD ENTANGLEMENT HAZARD
This label warns of the crush zone by a down force

when the cab is in the partial tilt position. DO NOT
WORK IN THIS AREA UNTIL THE CAB TILT
SUPPORT LOCK IS IN PLACE!
Before working under the cab when the cab is
in the partial tilt position, be sure the CAB TILT
SUPPORT LOCK is in place.
36779BUNI R0
Never stand or work under an object supported

with hydraulics. Always us‑e safety stands or a This label warns of an ENTANGLEMENT
locking device. HAZARD (rotating parts) zone. The label is
located on each side of the engine cooling fan
Refer to TILTING THE CAB in SECTION 3 for which is near the engine serpentine drive belt.
complete instructions. DO NOT PLACE HANDS OR FINGERS IN THIS
AREA. Rotating parts such as pulleys, belts and
drives can cause entanglement of body parts
resulting in serious injury.
KEEP HANDS AND FINGERS CLEAR OF
ROTATING BELT, DRIVE OR PULLEY! Before
performing any service work on these parts or in
this area, shut engine off and wait for rotating
parts to come to a complete stop.
1.32
KEEP CLEAR DO NOT USE WINCH FOR HOISTING
43424BUNI R0
This label warns persons outside the cab to keep

clear of the machine while in use. 43225BUNI R0
Always keep clear of an operating machine. This label warns of a crush zone by a down force if
the winch is used as a hoist.
When approaching an operating machine on
foot, stay at least 60 m (200 feet) away until the DO NOT use winch for hoisting.
operator recognizes your presence. Make sure The winch on this machine is intended only for use
that all equipment has been shut down before as a retrieval device.
advancing to the machine.
Refer to OPERATING MACHINE – OPERATING
Maintain a safe operating distance between the WINCH and SKIDDING – CABLE SKIDDING in
machine and workers and all other personnel. It is SECTION 2 for instructions regarding the safe use
the duty of the operator to ensure that no person and proper operation of the winch.
approach the machine while in use, the risk zone
is 60 m (200 feet).
Before moving machine, be sure all persons are
clear of the area.
Always be alert for bystanders moving into the
work area. Use horn to warn bystanders before
moving the machine.
When using a signal person, keep the person in
view at all times.
1.33
DO NOT LOOSEN CAP UNTIL COOL STORED ENERGY HAZARD
33952AUNI R0
This label warns of a PRESSURE AND FLUID This label warns of a STORED ENERGY
SPRAY HAZARD when the coolant in the radiator HAZARD. These labels are located on the right
is hot. side of the front chassis below the cab and in the
Turn the engine off. Only remove coolant fill cap rear chassis valve compartment.
when cool enough to touch with bare hands. The machine is equipped with a brake
Slowly loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure accumulator and rear pilot accumulator. The
before removing completely. accumulators have stored hydraulic pressure.
Servicing the accumulators or any hydraulic
components before releasing pressure could result
in death or serious injury.
DO NOT SERVICE BRAKE ACCUMULATOR
BEFORE RELEASING PRESSURE by applying
brakes repeatedly with the engine OFF until
there is no pedal resistance. This may take a
minimum of 150 applications. For the procedure
to RELIEVE PRESSURE, refer to PARKING THE
MACHINE in THIS SECTION
DO NOT SERVICE REAR PILOT
ACCUMULATOR BEFORE RELEASING
PRESSURE by using the computer display
Accumulator Test Function. For the procedure
to RELIEVE PRESSURE, refer to PARKING
THE MACHINE in THIS SECTION. Refer also to
COMPUTER – INFORMATION MODE MENU –
ACCUMULATOR INFORMATION in SECTION 2.
1.34
FLUID SPRAY HAZARD EXPLOSION HAZARD
WARNING
• ENGINE EQUIPPED WITH
HEATER STARTING AID.
• USE OF ETHER COULD
RESULT IN DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY.
36782BENG R0
This label warns of a FLUID SPRAY HAZARD. This label warns of an EXPLOSION HAZARD.
This label is located above the pressurized water This label is located on the end of the air cleaner
system fill plug . (air filter housing). The engine is equipped with a
heater starting aid, DO NOT USE ETHER to assist
The machine is equipped with a pressurized water in starting the engine.
system. A water tank is incorporated into the
dozer blade and is pressurized to 60 psi (4 bar). USING ETHER COULD CAUSE AN EXPLOSION
WHICH COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR
Contact with fluid under pressure may cause SERIOUS INJURY.
injury.
DO NOT SERVICE PRESSURIZED WATER
SYSTEM until air pressure is fully released by
depressing the water system spray nozzle.
Tank fill plug has a cross drilled vent hole. Do not
replace with standard plug.
Refer also to PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE in SECTION 3.
1.35
CRUSH HAZARD HAND TIGHT ONLY - ALL HANDLES
This label warns of a CRUSH HAZARD. This label This indicates that all handles should be hand
is located in the rear chassis control valve tight only at all times.
compartment. This label is located on the screen protecting the
Movement of booms and cylinders could result in sliding windows on both cab doors. The sliding
death or serious injury. windows in the cab doors can be used as a third
cab exit. The screens on the outside of these
DO NOT perform work on valves or piping until windows can be released by handles both on the
boom and attachment are lowered to the ground inside and the outside of the cab. Refer also to
and engine is shut off. EMERGENCY CAB EXITS in THIS SECTION.
In a case where operator controls cannot be This label also located on the storage
used to lower suspended machine elements due compartment on the left side of the dozer blade.
to an engine stall or other machine malfunction,
suspended elements can be lowered manually.
Refer to DEPRESSURIZING SUSPENDED
MACHINE ELEMENTS in SECTION 3.
1.36
FIRE PREVENTION! PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM INSIDE -
HAND TIGHTEN ONLY
This label indicates the location of the pressurized

water system and indicates that the compartment
handle should be hand tight only at all times.
READ UNDERSTAND AND FOLLOW THE FIRE This label is located on the outside of the
PREVENTION GUIDELINES IN THIS MANUAL. pressurized water system compartment on the
These guidelines provide all the necessary action right side of the dozer blade.
required to preventing fires on this machine. DO All handles should be hand tight only at all times.
NOT OPERATE THIS MACHINE until you have This is particularly important for easy access
read these instructions and have performed any to the pressurized water system in the event of
necessary maintenance required that will prevent a fire or other emergency. Refer also to FIRE
the potential of a fire from starting on this machine. PREVENTION in THIS SECTION.
It is also important to note that fire prevention
inspections and maintenance MUST BE
PERFORMED FREQUENTLY (several times per
day). A clean combustible free machine as well as
frequent inspections of the exhaust components,
hydraulic hoses and electrical cables and
performing any necessary repairs immediately will
help prevent fires.
Maintain a CHARGED fire extinguisher on the
machine at all times, know where it is and KNOW
HOW TO USE IT!
Refer also to FIRE PREVENTION in THIS
SECTION.
1.37
FIRE EXTINGUISHER ACCESS HOLE
This label indicates the location of each FIRE

EXTINGUISHER ACCESS HOLE. The label is
installed on each fire extinguisher hole on the
engine hood.
Refer also to FIRE PREVENTION in THIS
SECTION.
1.38
CONTROLS & OPERATION................................................................................................................................2

SECTION 2 - CONTROLS & OPERATION
Read and understand the entire manual including Safety section prior to
operating any equipment. Read and understand all manuals for any attachments
or accessories.
ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS............................................................................................................. 2.98

ARTICULATION LOCK........................................................................................................................... 2.120
BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH....................................................................................................... 2.100
CAB CONTROLS..................................................................................................................................... 2.12
BRAKE PEDAL
ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING..................................................................................... 2.12
STATIONARY SEAT & STEERING WHEEL.................................................................................... 2.13
COMPUTER DISPLAY......................................................................................................................... 2.26
CONTROL PANEL
A/C HEATER CONTROLS - AIR CONDITIONER............................................................................. 2.23
A/C HEATER CONTROLS - AIR SOURCE....................................................................................... 2.23
A/C HEATER CONTROLS - FAN CONTROL................................................................................... 2.23
A/C HEATER CONTROLS - TEMPERATURE.................................................................................. 2.23
AUX (OPTIONAL)............................................................................................................................. 2.20
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SELECTOR SWITCH................................................................................... 2.21
FAN CONTROL SWITCH, COOLING............................................................................................... 2.24
HORN, SAFETY ALERT - SWITCH.................................................................................................. 2.21
IGNITION SWITCH........................................................................................................................... 2.20
LIGHTS - SWITCH............................................................................................................................ 2.20
MAXIMUM SPEED CONTROL DIAL
STATIONARY SEAT & STEERING WHEEL................................................................................. 2.20
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH.............................................................................................................. 2.21
WINCH CONTROL LEVER............................................................................................................... 2.23
WINCH SELECT SWITCH................................................................................................................ 2.22
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SELECTOR SWITCH...................................................................................... 2.21
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK(S) ON/OFF SWITCH....................................................................................... 2.18
DIRECTION SELECTION SWITCH
DOZER BLADE CONTROL LEVER..................................................................................................... 2.17
DOZER GRAPPLE CONTROL LEVER................................................................................................ 2.17
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL, RIGHT JOYSTICK TRIGGER............................................................... 2.19
ENGINE SPEED/TRAVEL PEDALS
FOOT PEDALS, FORWARD FACING AND REAR FACING
BRAKE PEDAL.............................................................................................................................. 2.12
TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED PEDAL................................................................................................ 2.12
HORN, SAFETY ALERT - SWITCH...................................................................................................... 2.21
IGNITION SWITCH............................................................................................................................... 2.20
INSTRUMENT PANEL.......................................................................................................................... 2.26
ALARM LIGHT.................................................................................................................................. 2.26
AUXILIARY POWER OUTLET.......................................................................................................... 2.26
COMPUTER DISPLAY...................................................................................................................... 2.26
COMPUTER USB PLUG................................................................................................................... 2.27
ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS CONNECTION.......................................................................................... 2.27
Controls and Operation Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder
LIGHTER...........................................................................................................................................2.26
MASTER ALARM.............................................................................................................................. 2.26
STORAGE COMPARTMENT............................................................................................................ 2.27
LH JOYSTICK (ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING)
DIRECTION SELECTION SWITCH.................................................................................................. 2.14
MAXIMUM SPEED CONTROL......................................................................................................... 2.15
STEERING........................................................................................................................................2.14
TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED TRIGGER............................................................................................... 2.15
MAXIMUM SPEED CONTROL
MESSAGES.................................................................................................................... SEE COMPUTER
RH JOYSTICK
ARCH AND BOOM CONTROLS....................................................................................................... 2.18
BOOM AND ARCH CONTROLS....................................................................................................... 2.18
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK(S) ON/OFF SWITCH................................................................................... 2.18
GRAPPLE CONSTANT PRESSURE SWITCH................................................................................. 2.18
GRAPPLE OPEN/CLOSE................................................................................................................. 2.19
GRAPPLE ROTATE CONTROLS..................................................................................................... 2.18
TRIGGER SWITCH, ENGINE SPEED CONTROL........................................................................... 2.19
ROTATING SEAT KICK LEVER............................................................................................................ 2.28
SEAT - AIR RIDE.................................................................................................................................. 2.29
SEAT - GRAMMER............................................................................................................................... 2.30
SEAT, ROTATING SEAT KICK LEVER................................................................................................. 2.28
STEERING
JOYSTICK......................................................................................................................................... 2.14
STEERING WHEEL.......................................................................................................................... 2.16
TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED PEDALS
TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED TRIGGER
WINCH CONTROL LEVER.................................................................................................................. 2.23
WINCH SELECT SWITCH.................................................................................................................... 2.22
CAB VENTILATION
AIR VENTS...........................................................................................................................................2.96
FILTER, FRESH AIR............................................................................................................................. 2.96
FILTER, RECIRCULATING AIR, A/C UNIT........................................................................................... 2.96
CARE OF THE MACHINE...................................................................................................................... 2.119
CENTRE JOINT..................................................................................................................................... 2.114
COMPUTER.............................................................................................................................................2.33
ADJUSTMENT MENU
EXAMPLE - ADJUSTMENT MENU NAVIGATION............................................................................ 2.45
ADJUSTMENT MENU - ENGINE SETTINGS...................................................................................... 2.40
AUTO RPM.......................................................................................................................................2.40
ENGINE HIGH IDLE ADJUST........................................................................................................... 2.40
WARM UP SPEED............................................................................................................................ 2.40
ADJUSTMENT MENU - FAN SETTINGS (IF EQUIPPED)................................................................... 2.41
CLEAN DURATION........................................................................................................................... 2.41
CLEAN FREQUENCY....................................................................................................................... 2.41
FAN AUTO CLEAN............................................................................................................................ 2.41
ADJUSTMENT MENU - SERVICE SETTINGS.................................................................................... 2.42
CONSTANT PRESSURE TRIGGER................................................................................................. 2.44
DRIVE TRIGGER (TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED TRIGGER)................................................................ 2.44
FRONT TIRE SIZE............................................................................................................................ 2.42
HYDRAULIC OIL GRADE................................................................................................................. 2.42
LOAD SENSE OVERRIDE............................................................................................................... 2.44
2.2
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Controls and Operation
PROGRAM MODE............................................................................................................................ 2.43
STEERING RATE (JOYSTICK STEERING ONLY)........................................................................... 2.43
STEER INVERT (JOYSTICK STEERING ONLY)............................................................................. 2.43
TRAVEL SPEED DIRECTION SYNC................................................................................................ 2.44
TRAVEL SPEED STEP MODE......................................................................................................... 2.44
COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM....................................................................................................... 2.34
COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS............................................................................ 2.34
COMPUTER ELECTRONIC CONTROL & DISPLAY........................................................................... 2.33
COMPUTER MAIN MENU.................................................................................................................... 2.35
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE.................................................................................... 2.37
ENGINE MENU - ENGINE FUNCTIONS.............................................................................................. 2.38
BOOST PRESSURE......................................................................................................................... 2.38
CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE........................................................................................................ 2.37
COOLANT TEMPERATURE............................................................................................................. 2.37
ENGINE HOURS............................................................................................................................... 2.38
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE.......................................................................................................... 2.37
ENGINE VOLTAGE........................................................................................................................... 2.38
ENG % TORQUE.............................................................................................................................. 2.38
FUEL RATE....................................................................................................................................... 2.38
FUEL TEMPERATURE..................................................................................................................... 2.38
OIL PRESSURE................................................................................................................................ 2.38
ENGINE TACHOMETER GAUGE........................................................................................................ 2.38
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE......................................................................................... 2.50
INFORMATION MODE MENU.............................................................................................................. 2.47
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE............................................................................................................ 2.51
DRIVE MOTOR SPEED.................................................................................................................... 2.50
DRIVE PRESSURE FORWARD....................................................................................................... 2.50
DRIVE PRESSURE REVERSE........................................................................................................ 2.50
GRAPPLE CONSTANT PRESSURE................................................................................................ 2.51
HYDRAULIC FILTER PRESSURE.................................................................................................... 2.51
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE................................................................................................... 2.50
LOAD SENSE PRESSURE.............................................................................................................. 2.51
LUTCH PRESSURE.......................................................................................................................... 2.51
MACHINE HOURS............................................................................................................................ 2.50
MAIN PUMP PRESSURE................................................................................................................. 2.51
PARKING BRAKE PRESSURE........................................................................................................ 2.51
PILOT PRESSURE........................................................................................................................... 2.51
SERIAL NUMBER............................................................................................................................. 2.50
TOTAL FUEL INFORMATION........................................................................................................... 2.51
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE................................................................................................... 2.51
TRAVEL SPEED............................................................................................................................... 2.50
TRIP FUEL INFORMATION.............................................................................................................. 2.51
MAIN MENU.........................................................................................................................................2.35
MAIN MENU PAGE............................................................................................................................... 2.52
MAIN MENU PAGE - ADJUST MENU.................................................................................................. 2.53
MAIN MENU PAGE - INFO MENU....................................................................................................... 2.59
LOGS................................................................................................................................................2.60
MODULES......................................................................................................................................... 2.60
MAIN MENU PAGE - MEASURE MENU.............................................................................................. 2.54
MAIN MENU PAGE - PREFERENCES MENU..................................................................................... 2.55
DATE/TIME ADJUSTMENT.............................................................................................................. 2.57
DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................................................. 2.56
LANGUAGE ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................................. 2.59
2.3
MESSAGES..........................................................................................................................................2.61
ALERT MESSAGES (YELLOW)....................................................................................................... 2.79
CRITICAL MESSAGES (RED)......................................................................................................... 2.62
ERROR MESSAGES (RED)............................................................................................................. 2.75
INFORMATION MESSAGES (BLUE)............................................................................................... 2.93
MESSAGES - ALERT
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID < 5%....................................................................................................... 2.87
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID LEVEL <10%.......................................................................................... 2.87
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID LEVEL EMPTY....................................................................................... 2.87
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID QUALITY................................................................................................ 2.88
DRIVE CHARGE FILTER BYPASSED.............................................................................................. 2.81
DRIVE CHARGE SYSTEM PRESSURE LOW................................................................................. 2.82
DRIVE TRIGGER INTERLOCK........................................................................................................ 2.83
ENGINE AIR INTAKE FILTER RESTRICTED................................................................................... 2.80
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH.................................................................................... 2.86
ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES - ALERT.................................................................................. 2.89
ENGINE TORQUE DERATE ACTIVE............................................................................................... 2.88
ENGINE VOLTAGE HIGH................................................................................................................. 2.86
ENGINE VOLTAGE LOW.................................................................................................................. 2.86
FUEL LEVEL LOW............................................................................................................................ 2.80
FUEL - WATER IN FUEL................................................................................................................... 2.86
HARDWARE FAILURE - COUT........................................................................................................ 2.85
HARDWARE FAILURE - DIN............................................................................................................ 2.85
HARDWARE FAILURE - DOUT........................................................................................................ 2.85
HARDWARE FAILURE - VIN............................................................................................................ 2.85
HARDWARE FAULT - MD3............................................................................................................... 2.84
HARDWARE FAULT - XA2................................................................................................................ 2.84
HARDWARE FAULT - XC21............................................................................................................. 2.84
HARDWARE FAULT - XS2................................................................................................................ 2.84
JOYSTICK BUTTON INTERLOCK.................................................................................................. 2.83
JOYSTICK & PEDAL INTERLOCK................................................................................................... 2.83
MACHINE VOLTAGE HIGH.............................................................................................................. 2.82
MACHINE VOLTAGE LOW............................................................................................................... 2.82
MAIN FUEL FILTER CLOGGED....................................................................................................... 2.81
MODULE HIGH SUPPLY VOLTAGE - ALERT.................................................................................. 2.91
MODULE HIGH TEMPERATURE - ALERT....................................................................................... 2.90
MODULE LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE - ALERT................................................................................... 2.92
SERVICE BRAKE PRESSURE LOW............................................................................................... 2.82
TRANSMISSION FILTER BYPASSED.............................................................................................. 2.81
MESSAGES - CRITICAL
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM ENGINE IDLE TOO LONG............................................................. 2.71
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM TECHNICAL FAILURE.................................................................... 2.70
DRIVE MOTOR CLUTCH PRESSURE HIGH................................................................................... 2.65
DRIVE MOTOR CLUTCH PRESSURE LOW................................................................................... 2.63
DRIVE MOTOR CLUTCH SLOW RESPONSE................................................................................. 2.65
DRIVE MOTOR OVERSPEED.......................................................................................................... 2.63
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL LOW..................................................................................................... 2.70
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH.................................................................................... 2.69
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH - ENGINE DERATE.................................................... 2.69
ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES - CRITICAL............................................................................. 2.74
ENGINE LOCKED OUT.................................................................................................................... 2.71
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW........................................................................................................ 2.72
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW - ENGINE DERATE........................................................................ 2.72
2.4
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH................................................................................................ 2.74
ENGINE OVERSPEED..................................................................................................................... 2.73
ENGINE OVERSPEED MAX............................................................................................................ 2.73
ENGINE RESTARTS REMAINING UNTIL ENGINE LOCKOUT....................................................... 2.72
FUNCTIONS ACTIVE........................................................................................................................ 2.66
HARDWARE FAULT - ENGINE......................................................................................................... 2.67
HARDWARE FAULT - MD3............................................................................................................... 2.67
HARDWARE FAULT - XA2................................................................................................................ 2.68
HARDWARE FAULT - XC21............................................................................................................. 2.68
HARDWARE FAULT - XS2................................................................................................................ 2.68
HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER BYPASS................................................................................................... 2.66
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL LOW.......................................................................................................... 2.63
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH......................................................................................... 2.64
INTERLOCK SYSTEM...................................................................................................................... 2.64
LH DRIVE MOTOR SPEED SENSOR FAULT.................................................................................. 2.65
MAIN FUEL FILTER CLOGGED ENGINE DERATE......................................................................... 2.67
RH DRIVE MOTOR SPEED SENSOR FAULT OR CLUTCH SLIP.................................................. 2.65
TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH.................................................................................. 2.64
MESSAGES - ERROR
CURRENT OUTPUT ERROR (COUT)............................................................................................. 2.78
DIGITAL INPUT ERROR (DIN)......................................................................................................... 2.78
DIGITAL OUTPUT ERROR (DOUT)................................................................................................. 2.78
MODULE NO CONTACT ERROR.................................................................................................... 2.76
MODULE VREF ERROR.................................................................................................................. 2.77
VOLTAGE INPUT ERROR (VIN)....................................................................................................... 2.78
MESSAGES - INFORMATION
MACHINE STEERING INVERT DISABLED..................................................................................... 2.95
SETUP MODE - DRIVE MOTOR SETUP......................................................................................... 2.94
SETUP MODE - DRIVE PUMP POR SETUP................................................................................... 2.94
SETUP MODE - DRIVE PUMP REGULATION SETUP.................................................................... 2.94
SETUP MODE - ENGINE HP TEST.................................................................................................. 2.94
SETUP MODE - FUNCTION SETUP................................................................................................ 2.94
SETUP MODE - MAX CURRENT SETUP MODE............................................................................ 2.94
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) LEVEL MESSAGES............................................................................ 2.87
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) QUALITY MESSAGES....................................................................... 2.88
DOORS AND ACCESS PANELS............................................................................................................. 2.98
ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES - ALERT......................................................................................... 2.89
ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES - CRITICAL.................................................................................... 2.74
FIRE EXTINGUISHER, PORTABLE........................................................................................................ 2.97
FIRE PREVENTION
FIRE EXTINGUISHER, PORTABLE..................................................................................................... 2.97
PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM..................................................................................................... 2.101
GRAPPLE, OPERATING........................................................................................................................ 2.114
MACHINE WARM UP OPERATION....................................................................................................... 2.108
MACHINE WARM UP SPEED ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................... 2.109
MOVING INSTRUCTIONS................................................................................. SEE SEPARATE BOOKLET
2.5
OPERATING MACHINE......................................................................................................................... 2.102

CENTRE JOINT.................................................................................................................................. 2.116
MACHINE WARM UP OPERATION................................................................................................... 2.108
MACHINE WARM UP SPEED ADJUSTMENT................................................................................... 2.109
OPERATING GRAPPLE..................................................................................................................... 2.114
OPERATING WINCH.......................................................................................................................... 2.115
PRE-START CHECKS........................................................................................................................ 2.102
RESTARTING AN ENGINE THAT HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL............................................................. 2.112
STARTING ENGINE........................................................................................................................... 2.105
STARTING IN COLD WEATHER........................................................................................................ 2.106
STOPPING ENGINE............................................................................................................................2.111
SYSTEM TEST AND WARM UP........................................................................................................ 2.107
TRAVELLING WITHOUT A LOAD...................................................................................................... 2.112
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH..................................................................................................................... 2.21
PICTOGRAM DESCRIPTIONS.................................................................................................................. 2.7
PRE-START CHECKS........................................................................................................................... 2.102
RADIO, AM/FM CD................................................................................................................................... 2.97
RADIO, CB (IF EQUIPPED)..................................................................................................................... 2.97
RETRIEVAL POINTS............................................................................................................................. 2.121
ROTATING SEAT KICK LEVER............................................................................................................... 2.28
SKIDDING.............................................................................................................................................. 2.114
CABLE SKIDDING.............................................................................................................................. 2.118
EFFECT OF ARCH/BOOM GEOMETRY
ON WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION......................................................................................................... 2.117
GRAPPLE SKIDDING........................................................................................................................ 2.118
SAFETY.............................................................................................................................................. 2.116
SKIDDING TECHNIQUE.................................................................................................................... 2.116
STARTING ENGINE............................................................................................................................... 2.105
STEERING
JOYSTICK STEERING......................................................................................................................... 2.14
STEERING WHEEL.............................................................................................................................. 2.16
STEREO, AM/FM CD............................................................................................................................... 2.97
STOPPING ENGINE...............................................................................................................................2.111
SYSTEM MESSAGES....................................................................................................... SEE COMPUTER
SYSTEM TEST AND WARM UP............................................................................................................ 2.107
TILT CAB..............................................................................................................................SEE SECTION 3
TOWING INSTRUCTIONS - EHS TRANSMISSION.............................................................................. 2.126
TOWING INSTRUCTIONS - SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION.................................. 2.125
TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK................................................................................................................... 2.100
TRANSMISSION OIL FILL LOCATION.................................................................................................. 2.100
TRANSPORTING INSTRUCTIONS....................................................................................................... 2.122
LIFTING POINTS................................................................................................................................ 2.124
TIE DOWN POINTS............................................................................................................................ 2.123
WINCH, OPERATING............................................................................................................................ 2.115
2.6
PICTOGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Diagrams in pictorial form are used to represent machine function operation. Some of the symbols are
signs, characters, figures, or any components related to the operation of the machine. They are a simple
universal language of symbols or pictograms that illustrate a function or component without the use
of words. Pictograms are installed on or in close proximity to the switch or device used to activate or
deactivate the machine function or they may be a sign used on a warning or indicator light of a function
that is operating or advising of an alarm condition.
Examples of these pictograms are the turtle and the rabbit that are often used to describe
speed such as SLOW = or FAST = .
The pictograms used on this machine are as
follows: = Boom DOWN
= Accumulator (Information Icon)

= Boom UP
= Adjustment Menu Icon
OR = Brake
= Air Conditioner ON
= Air Conditioner OFF

=Cigarette Lighter, 24 Volt
= Air Source, Fresh Air

= Clutch Pressure
(EHS Transmission only)
= Air Source, Recirculate

= Control lever, multidirectional
= Alert Message Symbol

= Control lever, dual direction
= Arch IN
= Critical Message Symbol
= Arch OUT
= Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF, AUS32, AdBlue)
= Auxiliary Power Outlet 12 V
= Differential Locks (ON/OFF)
= Battery CONNECT / Voltage
= Differential Lock, Front

= Battery DISCONNECT
2.7
= Engine Hours
= Differential Locks, Front and Rear
= Engine Menu Icon

= Differential Lock, Rear
= Engine Oil Pressure
= Differential Pressure
(between Main Pump and Load
Sense pressures) = Engine Oil Temperature
= Dozer Blade DOWN

= Engine Run
= Dozer Blade UP
= Engine Start
= Dozer Grapple Close

= Engine Stop
= Dozer Grapple Open

= Engine Speed Control
= Drive Motor Speed = Engine Speed/travel
= Drive Pressure Forward = Engine Speed
= Drive Pressure Reverse = Engine Torque %
= Engine Boost Pressure = Engine Wait to start
= Engine Charge Air Temperature = Error Message Symbol
= Engine Coolant Temperature = Foot Pedal Control
= Engine Fan, Variable Pitch, Full On = Fuel Information, Total Usage
= Engine Fan, Variable Pitch, Auto = Fuel
= Fuel Diesel
= Engine Fan, Variable Pitch, Clean
2.8
= Fuel Reset / Trip Fuel Information = Machine Hours
= Grapple CLOSE = Machine Warm Up
= Main Pump Pressure

= Grapple Constant Pressure
= Grapple OPEN = Maximum speed control
= Grapple Rotate Clockwise

= OFF
= Grapple Rotate Counter Clockwise

= ON
= Hand tighten only

P = Parking Brake
= Horn = Pilot Pressure

(Multifunction Manifold)
= Hydraulic Filter Pressure

= Serial Number
= Hydraulic oil level = Speed FAST or HIGH
= Speed SLOW or LOW
= Hydraulic Oil Temperature

= Steer Left
= Imperial/Metric Toggle Symbol

= Steer Left (Seat Forward Facing)
= Information Menu Icon
= Steer Left (Seat Rear Facing)
= Information Message Symbol
= Steer Right
= Lights, Work
= Load Sense Pressure

= Steer Right (Seat Forward Facing)
2.9
= Steer Right (Seat Rear Facing) = Travel REVERSE
= Telematics = Travel REVERSE

(Seat Forward Facing)
= Telematics, Connectivity
= Telematics, Messages sent/ = Travel REVERSE

recorded (Seat Rear Facing)
= Telematics, Latitude
= Travel Speed
= Telematics, Longitude = Ventilation Blower Fan
= Volume, FULL
= Temperature
= Volume, EMPTY
= Transmission Temperature (EHS)
= Voltage / Battery CONNECT
= Travel Direction
= Winch
= Travel Direction = Winch Brake (Dynamic)

= Winch Freespool
= Travel Direction
(Seat Rear Facing)
= Winch IN
= Travel FORWARD
= Travel FORWARD
= Travel FORWARD
(Seat Rear Facing)
2.10
2.11
IMPORTANT !
This manual is applicable to factory installed machine functions and controls. It does not take
into account any changes or modifications made after shipment. Verify all functions before
operating this machine.
CAB CONTROLS
2 1
2 1
FORWARD FACING FOOT PEDALS

632E-025 (SEAT FACING FRONT OF MACHINE)
REAR FACING FOOT PEDALS
620E-014 (SEAT FACING REAR OF MACHINE)
1. TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED PEDAL

(ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING) 2. BRAKE PEDAL
Press the foot pedal to drive in the direction (ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING)
selected on the direction selection switch on Press the foot pedal to apply the hydraulic
the LH joystick. brakes in the front axle. This will also apply
The position of the foot pedal is directly braking to the rear axle since they are
proportional to the travel/engine speed of the mechanically locked together by the drive
machine. shafts and transmission.
NOTE: A backup alarm will sound when NOTE: As a safety precaution before working
travelling in reverse based on the position of on or around the machine; After the engine
the operator's seat. has been turned off, depress this pedal
repeatedly until there is no pedal resistance to
Refer to LH JOYSTICK – DIRECTION relieve any pressure that may be stored in the
SELECTION SWITCH in THIS SECTION. hydraulic system. This may take a minimum of
This function can also be performed with the 150 applications.
travel/engine speed trigger. Refer also to CAB Check service brake for proper operation daily.
CONTROLS – LH JOYSTICK (ROTATING Refer to SERVICE BRAKE – CHECKING
SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING) – TRAVEL/ BRAKE AND ACCUMULATOR FOR PROPER
ENGINE SPEED TRIGGER in THIS OPERATION in SECTION 3.
SECTION.
FORWARD FACING PEDALS AND REAR
FACING PEDALS
(ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING)
The rotating seat cab is equipped with two sets of
pedals one set forward facing and the other set
rear facing.
Note that control of machine travel is automatically
transferred by the computer control system from
the forward facing travel/engine speed pedal to the
2.12
rear facing travel/engine speed pedal based on the
position of the operator's seat. Both brake pedals 3
operate regardless of seat position. 4
For safe operation of all controls the operator's

seat must be locked in either the forward facing
or rear facing position. Refer also to ROTATING
SEAT KICK LEVER in THIS SECTION.
FRONT AND REAR ORIENTATION NOTE:
The dozer blade is considered to be at the front
of the machine. The attachment is considered to
be at the rear of the machine. Therefore in the
forward facing position the operator's seat is facing 620E-013
the dozer blade and in the rear facing position the

operator's seat is facing the attachment.
3. TRAVEL/ ENGINE SPEED PEDALS

(STATIONARY SEAT & STEERING WHEEL)
Press the RIGHT foot pedal to drive
FORWARD.
Press the LEFT foot pedal to drive in
REVERSE.
The position of the foot pedal is directly
proportional to the travel/engine speed of the
machine.
NOTE: A backup horn will sound when
travelling in reverse.
4. BRAKE PEDAL
Depress the foot pedal to apply the hydraulic
brakes in the front axle. This will also apply
braking to the rear axle since they are
mechanically locked together by the drive
shafts and transmission.
NOTE: As a safety precaution before working
on or around the machine; After the engine
has been turned off, depress this pedal
repeatedly until there is no pedal resistance to
relieve any pressure that may be stored in the
hydraulic system. This may take a minimum of
150 applications.
Check service brake for proper operation daily.
Refer to SERVICE BRAKE – CHECKING
BRAKE AND ACCUMULATOR FOR PROPER
OPERATION in SECTION 3.
2.13
5a 5b
5c
FORWARD FACING SEAT
632E-026 LH JOYSTICK
REAR FACING SEAT
5. LH JOYSTICK Operating in the woods requires quick steering
(ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING) changes and this is produced by a rapid movement
Steering of the steering control, which will quickly change the
vehicle's direction.
Move the joystick to the RIGHT* to articulate
the machine to the RIGHT* . For safe operation of all controls the operator's
seat must be locked in either the forward
Move the joystick to the LEFT* to articulate the
facing or rear facing position. Refer also
machine to the LEFT* .
to ROTATING SEAT KICK LEVER in THIS
*NOTE: Steering control is automatically SECTION.
adjusted by the computer control system
based on the position of the operator's 5a. DIRECTION SELECTION SWITCH
seat. Therefore LEFT articulation and
RIGHT articulation as described above are
considered to be left and right as viewed This switch selects the direction of travel for
by the operator either from the forward the travel/engine speed pedal in use (either
facing seat position or the rear facing seat forward facing or rear facing).
position. This is a three position switch.
It should also be noted that the machine Place switch in the forward position to travel in
steering invert function can be disabled. a FORWARD* direction .
Refer to COMPUTER – MESSAGES -
INFORMATION – MACHINE STEERING Place switch in the centre position for neutral.
INVERT DISABLED and COMPUTER Place switch in the rear position to travel in a
– ADJUSTMENT MENU - SERVICE REVERSE* direction .
SETTINGS – STEER INVERT (JOYSTICK
STEERING ONLY) in THIS SECTION. *NOTE: Control of machine travel is
automatically transferred by the computer
This machine is equipped with variable ratio control system from the forward facing travel/
load sensing steering. The speed that the engine speed pedal to the rear facing travel/
vehicle responds to the steering control input engine speed pedal based on the position of
will vary, depending on the speed at which the the operator's seat. Therefore FORWARD and
steering control is moved. REVERSE as described above are considered
When operating on the road, a slow movement to be forward and reverse as viewed by the
of the steering control will not overcorrect and operator either from the forward facing seat
will steer a straight normal course. position or the rear facing seat position.
2.14
Refer also to FOOT PEDALS, FORWARD
FACING AND REAR FACING – TRAVEL/
ENGINE SPEED PEDAL and ROTATING
SEAT KICK LEVER in THIS SECTION.
5b. MAXIMUM SPEED CONTROL
The maximum speed control allows the
operator to set the maximum travel speed of
the machine to maintain a given travel speed
without having to feather the drive pedal.
Push and hold control forward to increase the
maximum travel speed. Control spring returns
to centre when released.
Pull and hold control back to decrease the
maximum travel speed of the machine. Control
returns to centre when released.
to the same setting (factory default) or
This control can be used while the machine is independently. Refer to COMPUTER –
in motion. ADJUSTMENT MENU -SERVICE SETTINGS
Small movements of this control change – TRAVEL SPEED DIRECTION SYNC in THIS
setting slowly. Larger movements of this SECTION.
control change settings faster.
NOTE: Maximum speed control settings can
be adjusted in increments of 1% (factory
default) or in steps (0%,5%,10%,15%,20
%,30%,40%,50%,60%,80%,100%). Refer
to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU
-SERVICE SETTINGS – TRAVEL SPEED
STEP MODE in THIS SECTION.
5c. TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED TRIGGER
The drive trigger (travel/engine speed trigger)
service setting must be set to ON to enable
this control to function. Refer to COMPUTER
– ADJUSTMENT MENU - SERVICE
SETTINGS – Drive Trigger (Travel/Engine
Speed Trigger) in THIS SECTION.
Pull trigger to drive in the direction selected
When adjusting maximum speed control
on the direction selection switch on the LH
computer display will show setting (Turtle 0%
joystick.
to 100% Rabbit).
The position of the trigger is directly
A maximum speed control setting indicator is
proportional to the travel/engine speed of the
also shown on the top right side of the main
machine.
menu of the computer display (Turtle 0% to
100% Rabbit). NOTE: A backup alarm will sound when
travelling in reverse based on the position of
CAUTION the operator's seat.
Refer to LH JOYSTICK – DIRECTION
Setting the maximum speed control to the
SELECTION SWITCH in THIS SECTION.
minimum setting lowers maximum travel
speed only, it will NOT prevent the machine This function can also be performed with the
from travelling when the forward or reverse travel/engine speed pedal. Refer also to CAB
travel controls are used. CONTROLS – TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED
NOTE: Maximum speed control settings PEDAL (ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK
for forward and reverse travel can be adjusted STEERING) in THIS SECTION.
2.15
6. STEERING WHEEL
METERED STEER VALVE
This machine is equipped with Variable Ratio
Load Sensing Steering. The speed that the
vehicle responds to the steering wheel input
will vary, depending on the speed at which the
steering wheel is moved.
When operating on the road, a slow movement 6
of the steering wheel will not overcorrect and
will steer a straight normal course.
Operating in the woods requires quick steering
changes and this is produced by a rapid
movement of the steering wheel, which will
quickly change the vehicle's direction.
620E-030
The lever on the left side of the Steering
Column allows the selection of Telescopic and
Tilt options.
The horn button is located in the centre of the
steering wheel.
QUICK STEER VALVE (OPTIONAL)
This machine is equipped with Variable Ratio
Load Sensing Steering. The speed that the
vehicle responds to the steering wheel input
will vary; depending on the angle the steering
wheel is turned. Turning the steering wheel
±50° results in controlled flow, from zero to full
steering flow.
When operating on the road, turning the
steering wheel only a few degrees in either
direction will result in slower steering, not
overcorrect and will steer a straight normal
course.
changes and this is produced by fully turning
the steering wheel (± 50°), which will fully
lock steering and quickly change the vehicle’s
direction.
The lever on the left side of the Steering
Column allows the selection of Telescopic and
Tilt options.
The horn button is located in the centre of the
steering wheel.
2.16
LOCATED TO THE
RIGHT OF THE 7 8
JOYSTICK ON THE
RIGHT ARM REST
620E-023 DOZER BLADE CONTROL LEVER 610E-001 DOZER CONTROL LEVERS

7. DOZER BLADE CONTROL LEVER 8. DOZER GRAPPLE CONTROL
LEVER (OPTIONAL)
Pull the lever BACK to RAISE the dozer
blade. Pull the lever BACK to OPEN the dozer
Push the lever FORWARD to LOWER the grapple.
dozer blade. Push the lever FORWARD to CLOSE the
The control lever will return to the centre dozer blade.
neutral position when released. The control lever will return to the centre
NOTE: Always travel with the dozer blade in neutral position when released.
the raised position to avoid obstacles. NOTE: Always travel with the dozer blade in
the raised position and grapple closed to avoid
CAUTION obstacles.
Never use the dozer blade to remove tree

stumps or large boulders.
WARNING
When leaving the cab, always lower the
grapple and dozer to the ground, engage the
parking brake and turn the ignition switch
off.
If leaving the Skidder unattended, also
remove the ignition key and switch the
battery disconnect switch to the OFF
position .
2.17
9b
9c
9a
9d
9. RH JOYSTICK
NOTE: Standard dual arch grapple skidder 9e 9
controls are shown. Non-standard machines
or machines modified after shipment may use
this joystick to control some other functions.
Always verify all functions before operating
this machine.
Boom 620E-005 RH JOYSTICK

Move the joystick BACK to RAISE the 9c Differential Locks ON/OFF - One push
boom. button (Top right - RIGHT BUTTON)
Move the joystick FORWARD to LOWER This switch activates differential locks in the
the boom. front, rear or both axles depending on the
position of the differential lock selector switch
Arch
on the control panel. Axle(s) are locked to
Move the joystick to the RIGHT to tilt arch provide torque to both wheels.
OUT .
Press button to activate differential lock(s).
Move the joystick to the LEFT to tilt arch IN
Push button a second time to deactivate.
.
The differential locks can be engaged or
9a Grapple Rotate - Two push buttons
disengaged while the machine is in motion.
(Top left)
The differential lock icon on the main menu of
Push LEFT BUTTON to rotate grapple the computer display will be illuminated when
COUNTER CLOCKWISE . the front, rear or front and rear differential
Push RIGHT BUTTON to rotate grapple locks are engaged ( , or ).
CLOCKWISE . This machine is equipped with a 10 minute
9b Constant Pressure (grapple) - One push AUTO-OFF feature which automatically
button (Top right - LEFT BUTTON) deactivates the differential lock(s) after 10
minutes have passed.
Push this button and release it to maintain a
constant pressure HOLD on the grapple load Refer also to CAB CONTROLS – CONTROL
and help prevent slipping. Constant pressure PANEL – DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SELECTOR
is released when the grapple is opened. SWITCH in THIS SECTION.
IMPORTANT !
The grapple constant pressure icon on
Use differential locks sparingly and for brief
the main menu of the computer display will
periods and only when additional traction is
be illuminated when the grapple constant
needed or serious damage may occur.
pressure switch is activated.
Also refer to GRAPPLE, OPERATING in THIS
SECTION.
2.18
9d Grapple open/close - Two push buttons
(Bottom)
Push LEFT BUTTON to CLOSE grapple .

Push RIGHT BUTTON to OPEN grapple .
9e. Engine Speed Control - Trigger

Pull this trigger to increase engine speed
when performing machine functions which do
not require machine travel. Release trigger to
return to engine idle speed.
Refer also to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
MENU - ENGINE SETTINGS – AUTO RPM in
THIS SECTION.
2.19
1 2 3 4 5 12 13 14 15
6 7 8 9 10 11 16
54827B CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL Turn the dial to the right to increase the
maximum travel speed.
1. IGNITION SWITCH - 3 POSITION
STOP position - All electrical power fed Turn the dial to the left to decrease the
through the ignition switch is turned "OFF" maximum travel speed of the machine.
This control can be used while the machine is
RUN position - Connects the battery to all in motion.
functions. Used for normal machine operation.
START position - This position energizes

the starter motor and will crank over the
engine.
NOTE - Parking Brake must be ENGAGED to
start the engine.
Refer also to STARTING ENGINE in THIS
SECTION.
2. LIGHTS FRONT - SWITCH
This switch turns on working lights.
3. LIGHTS REAR - SWITCH
This switch turns on working lights.
4. AUX (OPTIONAL)
Applicable to optional light packages. A maximum speed control setting indicator is
5. AUX (OPTIONAL) also shown on the top right side of the main
Applicable to optional light packages. menu of the computer display (Turtle 0% to
100% Rabbit).
6. MAXIMUM SPEED CONTROL DIAL
(STATIONARY SEAT & STEERING WHEEL) CAUTION: Turning the maximum speed
control dial completely to the left (minimum
The maximum speed control dial allows the
setting) lowers maximum travel speed only, it
operator to set the maximum travel speed of
will NOT prevent the machine from travelling
the machine to maintain a given travel speed
when the forward or reverse travel pedals are
without having to feather the drive pedals.
used.
2.20
7. PARKING BRAKE SWITCH P
WARNING
This is a three position switch which operates
a driveline brake. This machine is equipped with a controls
Momentarily press the top of this switch (ON) safety interlock system. This system is
to ENGAGE the parking brake. The parking intended to ensure machine functions are
brake icon on the main menu of the computer activated only when the operator is in the
display will be illuminated when the parking cab with the doors shut.
brake is engaged. The switch will spring The interlock system prevents the machine
return to the centre position. from being driven and function controls from
being operated while the parking brake is
Momentarily press the bottom of this switch
ENGAGED.
(OFF) to DISENGAGE the parking brake. The
switch will spring return to the centre position. As part of the interlock system this machine
automatically engages the parking brake
In an emergency the parking brake can be
whenever a cab door is open. This prevents
engaged manually to slow down or stop the
accidental or improper operation of the
machine.
controls from anywhere but the operator's
NOTE: The parking brake must be ENGAGED seat.
to START the engine, and DISENGAGED to
Do not alter or bypass this safety feature.
DRIVE the machine.
SWITCH ACTUATOR
Once the doors are shut and the parking
ON DOOR brake is DISENGAGED the safety of both
the operator and all persons outside the cab
becomes the responsibility of the operator.
Do not allow machine controls to be
activated without an operator in the cab.
The parking brake, door interlock switches,
and IQAN computer system interlock
INTERLOCK SWITCHES features are safety devices and must not be
620E-027 ON CAB DOORS defeated in any way.
Always use this horn prior to starting the
NOTE ALSO: The interlock system prevents engine and to alert other personnel in the area
the machine from being driven and function of your presence.
controls from being operated while the parking
9. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SELECTOR SWITCH
brake is ENGAGED.
As part of the interlock system this machine This is a three position switch, / / .
automatically engages the parking brake Placing this switch in the (FRONT) position
whenever a cab door is open. This prevents selects the front axle differential locks for
accidental or improper operation of the activation via the differential lock switch on the
controls from anywhere but the operator's RH joystick.
seat.
Placing this switch in the (FRONT AND
Refer also to COMPUTER – MESSAGES - REAR) position selects both the front and rear
CRITICAL – INTERLOCK SYSTEM in THIS axle differential locks for activation via the
SECTION. differential lock switch on the RH joystick.
The parking brake must be kept properly Placing this switch in the (REAR) position
adjusted at all times and should be serviced selects the rear axle differential locks for
every 500 hours during normal operating activation via the differential lock switch on the
conditions. Refer to PARKING BRAKE RH joystick.
ADJUSTMENT in SECTION 3.
Refer also to CAB CONTROLS –
8. HORN, SAFETY ALERT - SWITCH DIFFERENTIAL LOCK(S) ON/OFF SWITCH
This is a two position "momentary" switch. in THIS SECTION.
Press and hold this switch to sound the safety
alert horn.
2.21
1 2 3 4 5 12 13 14 15
6 7 8 9 10 11 16
10. WINCH SELECT SWITCH
FOR CARCO WINCH WARNING
This is a three position switch, O / I / . When operating Carco winches the load
MUST be removed from the cable before
Place this switch in the O (OFF) position
placing the winch control in the freespool
to de-activate the winch control lever and
prevent accidental operation of the winch. position to avoid damage to the winch
which could cause a safety hazard.
Place this switch in the I (ON) position to Attempting to engage or disengage the
activate the winch control lever. The winch freespool function with a load on the cable
icon on the main menu of the computer will cause damage to clutch halves, piston,
display will be illuminated when the winch final planetary gearing and/or output shaft.
selector switch is in the I (ON) position. Damage to freespool components can cause
a sudden loss of load control which could
Place this switch in the (FREESPOOL)
result in death or serious injury.
position to disconnect the drive motor from
the drum in the winch and allow the cable
to be freely pulled from the spool by hand.
The freespool function is intended for use
in pulling the cable by hand only and must
not be used when the cable is loaded.
Improper use of the freespool function will
result in damage to the winch.
Free spool must be turned off to activate
a pull with the winch. The winch freespool
icon on the main menu of the
computer display will be illuminated when
the winch selector switch is in the
position.
Refer also to WINCH CONTROL LEVER in
THIS SECTION.
2.22
11. WINCH CONTROL LEVER
FOR CARCO WINCH 14. TEMPERATURE CONTROL
This is a variable, rotary control used to adjust
Place the winch select switch (to the left of the temperature of air in the cab for heating
the lever) in the I (ON) position. Push and or air conditioning. The blue area of the scale
hold the winch control lever FORWARD indicates cooler temperatures the red area
to release the dynamic brake for indicates warmer temperatures. Temperature
dropping a load on the fly or drive away is adjusted by regulating the flow of engine
from a load with slight tension on the coolant into the heater core.
cable. The control lever will return to the
ENGINE
centre neutral position when released.
The neutral or centre position actuates the HOSE TO A/C
HEATER UNIT
winch pinion brake and prevents the drum
SHUT-OFF
from rotating. VALVE
Place the winch select switch (to the left of

the lever) in the I (ON) position. Pull and
hold the winch control lever BACK to wind
in the winch cable . The control lever
will return to the centre neutral position
when released.
Placing the winch select switch (to the 630E-039 HOT WATER SHUT-OFF VALVE
left of the lever) in the (FREESPOOL)
position permits the cable to unwind If the hot water shut-off valve is closed the
freely. The cable can then be pulled from temperature control will have no effect on cab
the drum by the operator by hand. The air temperature for heating or cooling.
freespool function is intended for use in During times when cab heating is not required
pulling the cable by hand only and must the HOT WATER Shut-off valve, on the heater
not be used when the cable is loaded. hose from the engine, may also be closed to
Improper use of the freespool function will prevent hot water from seeping through the
result in damage to the winch. heater unit, thereby reducing the cooling
effect.
Refer also to WINCH SELECT SWITCH in
THIS SECTION. 15. FAN CONTROL
12. AIR CONDITIONER This is a rotary, four position switch (0/1/2/3).
When the switch is in the 0 position the cab air
This is a two position rocker switch used to fan is OFF. When the switch is in the 1, 2 or 3
turn the air conditioner ON or OFF. position the fan is activated at one of three fan
In the position the air condition is ON. speeds.
In the position the air conditioner is OFF.

13. AIR SOURCE
This is a two position rocker switch used to
add fresh air to the cab.
In the position fresh air is brought into the
cab.
In the position air from the cab is
recirculated along with fresh air.
Refer also to CAB VENTILATION in THIS
SECTION.
2.23
1 2 3 4 5 12 13 14 15
6 7 8 9 10 11 16
16. FAN CONTROL - SWITCH flow is reduced, as less cooling is required for
(IF EQUIPPED - VARIABLE PITCH FAN) efficient operation of the cooler package.
This is a three position switch, labeled In addition, when this switch is in the
/ / (FULL ON/ AUTOMATIC/ CLEAN). AUTOMATIC position, the system will
automatically cycle through an auto clean
This switch controls the operation of the cycle.
optional Flexxaire® cooling fan. The auto clean cycle is adjustable through
The Flexxaire® cooling fan blade pitch is the computer control system menu
hydraulically varied to control the flow and (ADJUSTMENT MENU – FAN SETTINGS).
direction of air through the cooler package Refer also to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
MENU - FAN SETTINGS in THIS SECTION.
AUTOMATIC Position - AUTOMATIC is
Note that when the switch is in the
the normal operating position for the fan
AUTOMATIC position and the fan has stopped
control switch. When the switch is in the
due to low charge air, engine coolant and
AUTOMATIC position, the fan will operate
hydraulic oil temperatures, turning ON the A/C
completely in an automatic mode. The
will cause the computer system to immediately
computer control system will automatically
place the fan blades at a pitch to provide 30%
control the fan pitch to minimize system
air flow. This is to ensure that sufficient air
energy losses and improve performance
flow is available for the cab A/C even while the
based on the temperature of the charge air,
machine is still warming up.
engine coolant and hydraulic oil. The
computer system automatically adjusts fan air FULL ON Position - When the switch
flow to the minimum required level to maintain is in the FULL ON position, the computer
optimal operating conditions. control system is overridden and the fan
Automatic control of fan air flow to match will run at FULL air flow (blades pitched to
your operating conditions can lower fuel 100%), for cooling regardless of charge air,
consumption and reduce operating costs. In engine coolant or hydraulic oil temperatures.
high temperature operating conditions the Normally the fan control switch is placed in
fan air flow is increased to improve cooling the AUTOMATIC position for optimal cooling.
ability and efficient operation of the cooler The FULL ON position is intended for use in
package and air conditioning systems. In the event of a temporary failure of the control
low temperature operating conditions fan air system.
2.24
CLEAN Position - Momentarily pressing
the switch to the CLEAN position will manually
start the automatic clean cycle, reversing
the flow of air (there is no need to hold the
switch down). The pitch of the fan blades is
changed and the direction of airflow through
the engine enclosure is reversed. This change
in airflow blows debris from the machines
engine enclosure to eliminate potential
overheating and poor machine performance
caused by overheating. Ensure that there are
no personnel standing directly to the sides of
the machine when performing this operation,
as dust and debris will fly out.
When the CLEAN cycle is complete the
fan automatically returns to normal air flow
direction.
The auto clean cycle is adjustable through
the computer control system menu
(ADJUSTMENT MENU – FAN SETTINGS).
Refer also to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
MENU - FAN SETTINGS in THIS SECTION.
It is also important to manually clean debris
from the machine on a regular basis to
maintain low machine operating temperatures.
Refer to CLEANING A/C CONDENSER AND
COOLER PACKAGE in SECTION 3.
2.25
3 4 5
7 8 6
73068BUNI INSTRUMENT PANEL (ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING)
INSTRUMENT PANEL 4. MASTER ALARM

1. AUXILIARY POWER OUTLET 12 V This alarm will sound to alert the operator
that an alarm condition has been detected
A 12 volt outlet is provided for portable devices
and should be dealt with immediately. All
such as cell phones.
messages can be viewed on the computer
2. LIGHTER 24V display on the instrument panel. Refer to
Cigarette lighter is supplied. the COMPUTER – MESSAGES in THIS
SECTION.
IMPORTANT 5. COMPUTER DISPLAY
24 VOLT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM The computer display is the operator interface
3. ALARM LIGHT with the computer control system.
This light flashes to alert the operator that an Refer to COMPUTER in THIS SECTION for
alarm condition has been detected and should complete operating details.
be dealt with immediately. All messages can
be viewed on the computer display on the
instrument panel.
Refer to the COMPUTER – MESSAGES in
THIS SECTION.
2.26
5 3 4
7 8 6
56584BUNI INSTRUMENT PANEL (STATIONARY SEAT & STEERING WHEEL)

6. STORAGE COMPARTMENT 8. ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS CONNECTION
Plug a remote electronic diagnostic device into
7 8
this connection such as a lap-top computer
with appropriate engine manufacturer's
programming to perform engine performance
analysis and tuning.
NOTE: This operation can only be performed
by a trained service technician.
632E-002 REMOVE COVER TO ACCESS

7. COMPUTER USB PLUG
Plug in a laptop with appropriate IQAN
software for software updates, diagnostics and
some adjustments.
Refer also to COMPUTER in THIS SECTION
and SECTION 6 of the SERVICE MANUAL for
more information.
2.27
ROTATING SEAT KICK LEVER FRONT AND REAR ORIENTATION NOTE:
(ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING) The dozer blade is considered to be at the front
of the machine. The attachment is considered to
be at the rear of the machine. Therefore in the
forward facing position the operator's seat is facing
the dozer blade and in the rear facing position the
operator's seat is facing the attachment.
620E-024 ROTATING SEAT KICK LEVER

This lever releases the seat to rotate between
forward facing position and the rear facing
position.
To rotate from the forward facing position to the
rear facing position kick the left side of the lever
and rotate the seat to the right until the seat locks
in the rear facing position.
To rotate from the rear facing position to the
forward facing position kick the right side of the
lever and rotate the seat to the left until the seat
locks in the forward facing position.
For safe operation of all controls the operator's
seat must be locked in either the forward facing
or rear facing position. A limit switch located in
the seat pedestal sends a signal to the computer
control system indicating the position of the
operator's seat.
transferred by the computer control system from
the forward facing pedal to the rear facing pedal
based on the position of the operator's seat. Both
brake pedals operate regardless of seat position.
Refer also to FOOT PEDALS, FORWARD
FACING AND REAR FACING – TRAVEL/ENGINE
SPEED PEDAL and LH JOYSTICK – DIRECTION
SELECTION SWITCH in THIS SECTION.
Note that steering control is automatically adjusted
by the computer control system based on the
position of the operator's seat. Refer also to LH
JOYSTICK – STEERING in THIS SECTION. It
should also be noted that the machine steering
invert function can be disabled. Refer to
COMPUTER – MESSAGES - INFORMATION –
MACHINE STEERING INVERT DISABLED and
COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU - SERVICE
SETTINGS – STEER INVERT (JOYSTICK
STEERING ONLY) in THIS SECTION.
2.28
OPERATOR’S SEAT - AIR RIDE
SEAT
ADJUSTMENTS ADJUSTMENTS
WARNING
The seat belt supplied with this seat must
be used at all times when operating this
machine. LUMBAR
HORIZONTAL
AIR RIDE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ADJUSTMENT
(NOT SHOWN) BACK ANGLE
The ride adjustment can be made by pulling or ADJUSTMENT
pushing the air ride control valve knob.
To stiffen the air ride
For a stiffer ride push on the air ride adjustment
knob to increase the air pressure in the
suspension air bag.
To soften the air ride
For a softer ride, pull on the air ride adjustment
knob to decrease the air pressure in the
suspension air bag.
2-WAY ADJUSTABLE LUMBAR
To increase lumbar support pressure, turn lumbar RIDE
adjustment control clockwise. To decrease lumbar ADJUSTMENT
KNOB FORE/AFT SLIDE
support pressure, turn lumbar adjustment lever 620E-040 LEVER
counterclockwise
BACKREST - ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
Rotate backrest angle adjustment control to place
backrest at the desired angle.
LUMBAR
SEAT - HORIZONTAL POSITION HORIZONTAL
ADJUSTMENT
Move and hold fore/aft slide lever. Roll seat
forwards or backward to the desired position
relative to the foot pedal controls.
ARMREST ADJUSTMENT
Each armrest has 2 adjustments to place it in the
desired position. Loosen adjustment knobs to
ARMREST
reposition armrest height and fore/aft position. ADJUSTMENT
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES VIEW FROM RIGHT

This seat is equipped with a fixed (bolted) two 620E-042 REAR OF SEAT
position height adjustment. The second position
provides a total height increase of 1". Four
bolts are used to reposition the seat for height
adjustment.
HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
BOLTS (4)
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
2.29
OPERATOR’S SEAT - GRAMMER 3. Pull out on the two lap belt adjusters to allow
the belt to slide through and extend the lap
belt.
WARNING
4. Buckle the lap belt.
The seat belt supplied with this seat must
be used at all times when operating this 5. Pull the seat belt ends on each side of the lap
machine. belt to tighten the lap belt. Lap belt should be
snug to allow proper operation of the seat belt
and the seat air suspension system.
SHOULDER HARNESS 6. EARLIER SHOULDER HARNESS

SEAT BELT ADJUSTERS Pull the seat belt ends on each side of the
shoulder harness to tighten the shoulder
straps.
LATER SHOULDER HARNESS
Fasten the shoulder harness connector.
7. Shoulder straps should be snug to allow
proper operation of the seat belt and the seat
air suspension system.
SEAT ADJUSTMENTS
This seat is equipped with a weight adjustment
LAP BELT
SEAT BELT air suspension system for operator comfort and
ADJUSTERS safety.
SEAT BELT ADJUSTMENT IMPORTANT!
(EARLIER SHOULDER HARNESS)
600E-031
For proper operation of the weight adjustment air
suspension system for operator comfort and safety
the seat must be individually adjusted for each
SHOULDER HARNESS
CONNECTOR new operator before operating the machine.
In addtion weight adjustment should be done at
the beginning of each operator’s shift to ensure
optimal operation of the weight adjustment air
suspension system.
NOTE: Joystick pods and armrests can be rotated
up out of the way for ease of entry and exit from
the cab.
A. WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
LAP BELT
Operator must be sitting in the seat with the
SEAT BELT machine parked on level ground for proper
ADJUSTERS
weight adjustment.
SEAT BELT ADJUSTMENT
600E-035 (LATER SHOULDER HARNESS) Before performing the initial weight
adjustment, place the shock absorber lever in
SEAT BELT ADJUSTMENT position 1 (soft). In addition, for more accurate
This seat is equipped with a manually adjustable weight adjustment release previous settings
four point seat belt harness. by pressing down on the weight adjustment
1. Sit in the seat. lever until all air has been released and the
seat suspension bottoms out.
2. EARLIER SHOULDER HARNESS
Place the shoulder harness over shoulders Pull up briefly on the weight adjustment
and pull out on the shoulder harness belt lever to begin the weight adjustment. The
adjusters to allow the belt to slide through and operator should sit absolutely still during this
extend the harness. process.
LATER SHOULDER HARNESS

Place the shoulder harness over shoulders.
2.30
D C
3 MEDIUM
G H 2
4
1 SOFT
5 HARD
600E-032 SHOCK ABSORBER SETTINGS

then be adjusted as needed for operator
B SHOWN IN
preference and/or operating conditions.
POSITION 1 A L
(SOFT) IMPORTANT!
When setting weight and height adjustments
600E-030
shock absorber lever should first be placed
I
temporarily in position 1 (soft).
C. SEAT ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
Pull the left handle upward and adjust the
E angle of the seat by moving the front edge of
the seat cushion up or down until it is in the
J
K desired position. Release the handle to lock
the seat cushion in position.
D. SEAT DEPTH ADJUSTMENT
Pull the right handle upward and adjust the
SHOWN depth of the seat by moving the seat cushion
F WITH
COVER ON forward/backward until the seat depth is
adjusted to the desired position. Release the
handle to lock the seat cushion in position.
600E-029 E. ARMREST ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
Once weight adjustment is done it is Turn adjusting knob toward the outside of the
recommended that operators adjust all other seat to raise the angle of the armrest. Turn the
seat adjustments before adjusting the height adjusting knob toward the inside of the seat to
of the seat further as any further height lower the angle of the armrest.
adjustment places limits on the effectiveness
of the seat's air suspension system.
SHOWN WITH
F
IMPORTANT! COVER REMOVED
When setting weight adjustment shock

absorber lever should first be placed
temporarily in position 1 (soft).
IMPORTANT!
Weight adjustment should be done at the
beginning of each operator’s shift to ensure 600E-033 ARMREST HEIGHT ADJUSTING NUT
optimal operation of the weight adjustment air
suspension system. F. ARMREST HEIGHT
B. SHOCK ABSORBER (5 SETTINGS) Armrest height can be adjusted if required.
The shock absorber lever setting can be Carefully remove the snap on cover by pulling
varied adjusting the cushioning effect to suit out on both sides to access the adjusting nut.
operating conditions. Loosen the hexagon nut (13mm), adjust the
armrest to the desired height and retighten the
Turn the lever to the desired position and nut. Replace the plastic cover.
release. Five positions are available from
1 (soft) to 5 (hard). Position 3 (medium) is
recommended as an initial setting which can
2.31
I. SEAT HEATER/COOLER
D C
This is a three position switch.
G H
Seat Heater ON - press top of switch.
OFF - Centre position.
Seat Cooler ON - Press the bottom of switch.
J. LUMBAR SUPPORT
The two lumbar support switches individually
adjust the curvature of the upper and lower
B SHOWN IN areas of the backrest for operator comfort.
POSITION 1 A L
(SOFT) Increase curvature by pressing "+" or reduce
600E-030
curvature by pressing "-". Upper or lower
backrest curvature is individually adjusted by
using the upper or lower switches respectively.
I When maximum curvature adjustment is
reached pressing "+" will no longer cause an
adjustment and the switch should be released.
E K. BACKREST ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
Lean forward and pull up the locking lever to
J
K release the backrest catch. Adjust backrest
angle to the desired position. Release the
lever to lock in place.
IMPORTANT!
SHOWN The locking lever must latch when released
F WITH
COVER ON to lock the seat in position. It should not be
possible to move the seat when it is locked.
L HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
600E-029
Once weight adjustment is done it is
G. SEAT FORWARD/BACK POSITION recommended that operators adjust all other
RELATIVE TO JOYSTICK PODS seat adjustments before adjusting the height
of the seat further as any further height
Pull up on locking lever and move seat adjustment places limits on the effectiveness
forward/backward to position the seat of the seat's air suspension system.
comfortably for operation of the joysticks.
Release the locking lever to lock in place. Height adjustment is possible after the initial
weight adjustment process. Pull up on weight/
IMPORTANT! height lever to raise seat height. Push down
The locking lever must latch with an audible on weight/height lever to lower height.
click when released to lock the seat in
position. It should not be possible to move the End stops (top and bottom) limit height
seat when it is locked. adjustment in order to guarantee minimum
spring travel and proper operation of
H. SEAT FORWARD/BACK POSITION the air suspension. If the seat height is
Pull up on lever and move seat (and joystick adjusted manually beyond an end stop it
pods) forward/backward to position the seat will be readjusted to a height with adequate
comfortably for operation of the foot pedals. suspension travel.
Release the lever to lock in place. IMPORTANT!
IMPORTANT! When setting height adjustment shock
The lever must latch with an audible click absorber lever should first be placed
when released to lock the seat in position. It temporarily in position 1 (soft).
should not be possible to move the seat when
it is locked.
2.32
COLOUR
DISPLAY COMPUTER
DISPLAY
MODULE
ARROW
(SCROLL) UP
OK (ENTER)
ARROW
(SCROLL) DOWN
F1 F2 F3 F4 ESC (BACK) MENU
632E-301A
COMPUTER, ELECTRONIC CONTROL AND DISPLAY
COMPUTER ELECTRONIC CONTROL & COMPUTER

ALARM MASTER
COMPUTER
DISPLAY USB PLUG
LIGHT ALARM
The computer electronic control and display (MD3

display module) is the operator interface with
the electronic control system. This is the central
unit in the control system which works as both a
master controller and a display unit. It has a backlit
colour graphic transflective display for reading
system information.
The front of the module consists of a control panel
with a display and nine buttons. The buttons
are arranged on the bottom and right side of the
display.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
• F1 through F4 function buttons.
Programmed buttons that are configured by • Menu button .
program software to bring up a display page, bring Always brings up the Menu page. It is not
up an adjustment group or act as an input. programmable.
• Up and down arrow buttons. • ’Esc’ or BACK button .
Navigation buttons that are used to scroll through
selections on a menu page. The buttons are Returns you to the previous display page. May
configured by program software to bring up a be configured by program software to bring up a
display page, bring up an adjustment group or act display page, bring up an adjustment group or act
as a virtual input. as a virtual input.
• OK button.
Pushing this button equals ’enter’. Saves the value
or confirms the selection you have made.
2.33
XA2-A1 XA2-A0
XS2 XC21 EXPANSION EXPANSION
MD3 EXPANSION EXPANSION MODULE MODULE
COMPUTER MODULE MODULE FRONT FRONT
MODULE CAB SEAT CHASSIS 2 CHASSIS
ENGINE
DIAGNOSTIC
CONNECTOR
C4 C3 C2 C1
ENGINE ELECTRONIC
CONTROL UNIT MODULE
632E-001X COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM LOCATED IN
CAB BEHIND
The computer control system is part of a network LEFT KICK
PANEL
of components (shown above). The system is
made up of the following components:
• MD3 Computer and Display Module
• XS2 Expansion Module (Cab)
• XC21 Expansion Module (Seat)
• XA2-A1 Expansion Module (Front Chassis 2)
• XA2-A0 Expansion Module (Front Chassis)
• Engine Electronic Control Unit Module
(Tigercat/FPT NEF 6.7L) 620E-043 XS2-A0 MODULE - CAB
• Various controls, switches, sensors and valves
LOCATED UNDER CAB,
not shown. RIGHT REAR - REMOVE COVER
TO ACCESS MODULES
The computer and display module is the main
control unit in the system. The computer program
is the operating system for the computer display XA2-A0 FRONT CHASSIS
as well as the control system for the machine

operating parameters.
The engine electronic control unit module provides XA2-A1 FRONT CHASSIS 2
electronic information to the computer and
display module via the J1939 CAN BUS link. This
information is displayed on the computer display.
NOTE: The computer control system is software- 615C-007 XA2 MODULES
based. This software may be updated after the MOUNTED ON BACK OF
machine is in service as a part of on-going product OPERATOR SEAT - REMOVE
COVER TO ACCESS
improvement programs and service newsletters.
The information contained in this manual is
accurate at the time of printing. Improvements
to the machine and/or software are on-going and
may not be covered. In these cases contact your
Tigercat dealer for appropriate information.
632E-016 XC21 MODULE
2.34
1 2A 2B 3 4A 4B 5
16
6
15
14
13
12
7
8 9 10 11
632E-301 MAIN MENU

COMPUTER MAIN MENU
1. ** PARKING BRAKE 11. ALARM INDICATORS - Press F4 to select
- ENGAGED/DISENGAGED
12. HYDRAULIC OIL GRADE INDICATOR
2A. ** REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
13. HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE***
- ENGAGED/DISENGAGED
14. DEF LEVEL INDICATOR*****
2B. ** FRONT DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
- ENGAGED/DISENGAGED 15. FUEL LEVEL GAUGE****
3. *GRAPPLE CONSTANT PRESSURE ON/OFF 16. MAXIMUM SPEED CONTROL SETTING
4A. * WINCH ON/OFF ( ) INDICATOR (%)
4B. * WINCH FREE SPOOL ( ) * When the icon is illuminated, function is ON.
5. * MACHINE WARM UP ON/OFF ** When the icon is illuminated, function is
ENGAGED.
6. ENGINE TACHOMETER GAUGE
*** Note that gauge symbol colour changes
7. ENGINE MENU - Press F1 to select indicate temperature range (blue=low,
8. ADJUSTMENT MENU - Press F2 to select white=normal, red=high)
9. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE **** Note yellow fuel symbol indicates fuel
GAUGE*** level low.
10. INFORMATION MENU - Press F3 to select ***** DEF level indicator applicable to Tier 4f
machines only.
2.35
ENGINE MENU
The engine functions on display are as follows:
Charge Air Temperature - °F or °C

From the main menu press the F1 button to
select the engine display. Engine Coolant Temperature - °F or °C
When selected the engine menu icon is on display Engine Oil Temperature - °F or °C
and the engine functions will also be displayed.
Fuel Temperature - °F or °C
Engine Speed - rpm
Turbocharger Boost Pressure - psi or bar

Engine Oil Pressure - psi or bar
Engine Torque - %
Engine Hours - h
Voltage - V
Fuel Rate - US gph or L/h (instantaneous)
2.36
1. Charge Air Temperature (°F or °C)
This display indicates the charge air cooler
temperature reading.
If temperature rises above the recommended
temperature, alarm will sound, check the
following:
• Plugged air intake access panel screens
• Plugged charge air cooler.
DO NOT continue to operate machine.
Refer also to the COMPUTER – MESSAGES
in THIS SECTION.
ENGINE FUNCTIONS
2. Engine Coolant Temperature (°F or °C)
Press the F1 button to toggle the machine
warm up function ON/OFF. Refer to This display indicates the current engine
MACHINE WARM UP OPERATION and coolant temperature.
MACHINE WARM UP SPEED ADJUSTMENT
in THIS SECTION.
Press the F2 button to toggle between metric following:
and imperial units of measure. • Plugged air intake access panel screens
Press the back button to return to the main • Plugged radiator.
menu. DO NOT continue to operate machine.
NOTE: Coolant temperature can also

be monitored using the engine coolant
temperature gauge shown on the main menu.
Note also that gauge symbol colour changes
indicate temperature range (blue=low,
white=normal, red=high)
in THIS SECTION.
3. Engine Oil Temperature (°F or °C)

This display indicates the current engine oil
temperature.
following:
• Plugged radiator.
DO NOT continue to operate machine.
2.37
8. Eng % Torque (%)
This display indicates the percentage of
maximum engine peak torque currently in use.
in THIS SECTION.
With engine speed at IDLE (no load) and
4. Fuel Temperature - °F or °C hydraulic oil at operating temperature the
This display indicates the fuel temperature. reading should be:
Parking Brake ENGAGED 6-10%
5. Engine Speed (rpm)
Readings with the parking brake
This display indicates engine speed in rpm. DISENGAGED should be 10-14%.
Maintaining Correct Engine RPM If the readings are outside this range
It is important that the engine speeds be investigate the cause.
correct at all times: NOTE: The above readings are at normal
FPT N67 Engine: operating temperatures. During cold start-ups
Low Idle 950 RPM (No Load) it is not unusual for readings to be significantly
High Idle 2200 RPM (No Load)* higher until normal operating temperatures are
reached.
NOTE:
The above values are measured with the 9. Engine Hours - h
hydraulic and engine oil at normal operating
This display indicates the total number of
temperatures and no functions activated.
hours the engine has run.
Engine idle speed defaults to 950 rpm when
10. Engine Voltage (volts)
the engine is started.
This display indicates engine voltage levels.
Normal operating range for the electrical
system is between 20 and 30 volts.
If engine voltage goes outside the normal
range, an alarm will sound. Refer to
COMPUTER – MESSAGES in THIS
SECTION.
NOTE ALSO: Engine speed can also be A reading in excess of 30 volts indicates a
monitored using the engine tachometer gauge possible faulty voltage regulator.
shown on the main menu. A reading less than 20 volts indicates a
* Refer also to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT possible faulty battery or alternator.
MENU - ENGINE SETTINGS – ENGINE
HIGH IDLE ADJUST and AUTO RPM in THIS
IMPORTANT
SECTION. 24 VOLT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
6. Boost Pressure (psi or bar)
11. Fuel Rate -US gph or
This display indicates air intake manifold boost L/h(instantaneous)
pressure in psi.
This display indicates the current rate of fuel
7. Oil Pressure (psi or bar) consumption in gallons per hour.
This display indicates engine oil pressure.
If oil pressure falls too low, an alarm will
sound.
Refer to the COMPUTER – MESSAGES in
THIS SECTION.
2.38
ADJUSTMENT MENU
The adjustment selections are as follows:

• Engine Settings - Shown first by default.
From the main menu press F2 button to select • Fan Settings - Press F2 to select
the ADJUSTMENT MENU.
• Service Settings - Press F3 to select
When selected the adjustment menu icon is
on display and all the adjustment selections Press the back button to return to the main
will also be displayed. menu.
2.39
The adjustable engine settings are:
Engine High Idle Adjust
Range 1800 to 2200* rpm
This parameter allows the operator to adjust
engine high idle speed limit, this limit will be in
effect whenever the grapple constant pressure
function is NOT activated. This function is
intended to allow the automatic reduction of
the engine high idle speed limit when travelling
without a load.
Auto RPM
Max rpm*
Off
2000 rpm
ENGINE SETTINGS When the Auto RPM function is set to the
Press the F1 button to select the Engine Settings default setting of Max rpm the engine speed
Menu from the ADJUSTMENT MENU. will automatically increase proportionally
with operation of all joystick functions to a
The engine settings menu will appear. maximum of 2200 rpm. Note that if the engine
Press F1 (Adjust) to adjust engine settings. high idle adjust setting is lower than the Auto
RPM setting engine speed will be limited to
Press the back button to return the Engine the lower speed setting.
Settings Menu display.
The Auto RPM function can also be set to
Press the back button again to return to the 2000 rpm.
main menu.
When the Auto RPM function is OFF engine
rpm must be increased by the operator using
the travel/engine speed pedals or the engine
speed control trigger on the right joystick.
Warm Up Speed
Range 950 to 1500 rpm (1200* rpm)
Refer also to MACHINE WARM UP OPERATION
and MACHINE WARM UP SPEED ADJUSTMENT
in THIS SECTION.
* NOTE: Reset default settings are marked.
Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU –
EXAMPLE – ADJUSTMENT MENU NAVIGATION
for an example of adjustment menu navigation.
2.40
The adjustable fan settings are:
Fan Auto Clean
On* or Off
Clean Frequency
Range 1 to 420 minutes (*30 minutes)
Clean Duration
Range 5 to 20 seconds (*15 seconds)
FAN SETTINGS (IF EQUIPPED)

Press F2 button to select Fan Settings Menu from
the ADJUSTMENT MENU. Note that this menu
is applicable only for machines equipped with the
optional variable pitch fan.
The fan settings menu will appear.
Press F2 (Adjust) to adjust fan settings
Press the back button to return the Fan
Press the back button again to return to the
main menu.
2.41
The adjustable service settings are:
Hydraulic Oil Grade
ISO 22*
Petro CAN MV 22
ISO 32
Petro CAN MV 36
ISO 46
Esso Univis Ultra 46
Petro CAN MV 60
ISO 68
This information is used by the machine
program to adapt hydraulic oil temperature
messages for the operating range of each
Hydraulic Oil Grade.
SERVICE SETTINGS
Press F3 button to select the Service Settings
Menu from the ADJUSTMENT MENU.

The service settings menu will appear.
Hydraulic oil grade information is shown
Press F3 (Adjust) to adjust service settings
on the main menu below the hydraulic oil
Press the back button to return the Service temperature gauge.
Refer also to APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS
Press the back button again to return to the in SECTION 3 for hydraulic oil operating range
main menu. information.
Refer also to COMPUTER – MESSAGES
- CRITICAL – HYDRAULIC OIL
TEMPERATURE HIGH in THIS SECTION
for more information about the hydraulic oil
temperature message.
Refer to COMPUTER – INFORMATION
MODE MENU – HYDRAULIC OIL
TEMPERATURE in THIS SECTION for
hydraulic oil temperature information display.
Front Tire Size
Not Configured
30.5L
35.5L
DH73
This information is used by the machine
program to accurately calculate and display
machine travel speed.
2.42
Program Mode Steer Invert (Joystick steering only)
Normal* On* or Off
Engine HP Test Mode
When ON the joystick steering control is
Drive Motor Setup Mode
automatically adjusted by the computer control
Drive Pump POR Setup Mode
system based on the position of the operator's
Drive Pump Regulation Setup
seat. Therefore LEFT articulation and RIGHT
Function Setup Mode
articulation are considered to be left and right
Max Current Setup Mode
as viewed by the operator either from the
Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU – forward facing seat position or the rear facing
EXAMPLE – ADJUSTMENT MENU NAVIGATION seat position.
When OFF the joystick steering invert function
IMPORTANT ! is disabled. Steer joystick direction does not
Machine must be in the Normal Program Mode to change when operator is facing rearward.
operate normally. Therefore LEFT articulation and RIGHT
articulation are considered to be left and right
Other program modes are used for service/setup
as viewed by the operator from the forward
procedures only.
facing seat position regardless of the position
When setup program modes are chosen an of the operator's seat. The machine steering
information message is shown on the electronic invert disabled information message will
display until the message is acknowledged. be shown each time the machine is started
In each program mode some controls are to inform the operator that the steer invert
deactivated for safety during setup procedures. function has been disabled.
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the
information message.
Steering Rate
(Joystick steering only)
0
25
50*
75
100
This setting adjusts the performance of the
joystick steering function. A lower setting will
result in a slower response. A higher setting
will result in a quicker response.
Refer also to LH JOYSTICK – STEERING,

ROTATING SEAT KICK LEVER and
COMPUTER – MESSAGES - INFORMATION
– MACHINE STEERING INVERT DISABLED
in THIS SECTION.
2.43
Constant Pressure Trigger Drive Trigger (Travel/Engine Speed Trigger)
(Joystick steering only)
Range 2700 to 3300 psi (3000* psi)
Off* or On
This setting adjusts the grapple constant
pressure trigger setting. When OFF the travel/engine speed trigger
function on the left joystick is disabled.
During normal operation when the grapple
constant pressure switch is activated on a load When ON the travel/engine speed trigger
sense equipped skidder the pressure supplied function on the left joystick is enabled.
to the grapple constant pressure function will
Refer also to CAB CONTROLS – TRAVEL/
fall gradually due to normal leakage or more
ENGINE SPEED TRIGGER in THIS SECTION
suddenly due to load shift. Pressure will fall
for more information about travel/engine
until it reaches the grapple constant pressure
speed trigger function.
trigger setting which triggers the supply of
more pressure to reset the grapple constant Load Sense Override
pressure function to full pressure. Off* or On
Travel Speed Direction Sync When OFF the main pump output is controlled
On* or Off by a load sense signal from the control valves.
This default setting should be used in normal
When ON the maximum speed control setting
operating conditions to benefit from load
is identical for both forward and reverse travel.
sense functionality.
When OFF the maximum control speed
When ON the main pump output is controlled
settings can be set independently for forward
by the POR setting. This setting is intended
and reverse travel.
for use by service technicians for setup
For more information about maximum speed procedures and trouble shooting. In some
control refer to CAB CONTROLS – MAXIMUM cases this setting may also be used to
SPEED CONTROL – ROTATING SEAT & improve performance in extreme cold weather
JOYSTICK STEERING in THIS SECTION. conditions.
Travel Speed Step Mode * NOTE: Reset default settings are marked.
Off* or On
When OFF the maximum speed control setting
is adjusted increments of 1%.
When ON the the maximum speed control
setting is adjusted in steps (0%,5%,10%,15%,
20%,30%,40%,50%,60%,80%,100%).
For more information about maximum speed
control refer to CAB CONTROLS – MAXIMUM
SPEED CONTROL – ROTATING SEAT &
JOYSTICK STEERING in THIS SECTION.
2.44
EXAMPLE – ADJUSTMENT MENU:
Press the arrow up or arrow down buttons to scroll

From the main menu press F2 button to select the to the setting to be adjusted.
ADJUSTMENT MENU. Press the F2 button to reset to default setting.
Press F2 (Yes) or F3 (No) to confirm.
The engine settings menu will appear by default.

Press F1 (Adjust) to adjust engine settings
2.45
OR OR
Press the OK button to go to the adjustment To reset to default setting press the F2 button.
display. Press F2 (Yes) or F3 (No) to confirm.
Press the arrow up or arrow down buttons to make

the adjustment.
Press the OK button to confirm the setting.
Press the back button to return to the

adjustment menu.
main menu.
2.46
INFORMATION MODE MENU
The information functions on display are as

follows:
PRESS THE F3 BUTTON TO Drive Pressure Forward - psi or bar

ACCESS THE INFORMATION MENU.
Drive Pressure Reverse - psi or bar
When selected the information menu icon is on
display and the information functions will also be Travel Speed - mph or km/h
displayed.
Drive Motor Speed - rpm
Serial Number
Machine Hours - h
Hydraulic Oil Temp -°F or °C

Transmission Temperature -°F or °C
Total fuel information
Trip fuel information
Press the F1 button to reset the trip average

fuel rate and trip fuel used functions.
Press the F2 button to toggle between imperial

and metric units of measure for all information
displays.
More... Press F3 to select
Press the back button to return to the main
2.47
Press the F1 button access accumulator
screen.
Press the F2 button access telematics screen
(if equipped).
Press the F3 button to return to the first

information menu display.
OR
Press the back button to return to the previous
screen.
Press again to return to the information menu.
Press again to return to the main menu.
When More... is selected the next screen appears

and the information functions on display are as
follows:
Main Pump Pressure - psi or bar
Load Sense Pressure - psi or bar
Differential Pressure - psi or bar
(Differential between Main Pump and Load
Sense pressures)
Pilot Pressure - psi or bar
(Multifunction Manifold)
Grapple Constant Pressure - psi or bar
Hydraulic Filter Pressure - psi or bar
Service Brake Pressure - psi or bar
P Parking Brake Pressure - psi or bar
Clutch Pressure - psi or bar

2.48
ACCUMULATOR INFORMATION TELEMATICS INFORMATION

When accumulator (F1) is selected the When telematics (F2) is selected the
accumulator screen appears. telematics information screen appears and the
This screen is used to test the functionality of information on display is as follows:
the pilot accumulator. Refer to REAR PILOT Connectivity - dB-Hz
ACCUMULATOR – CHECKING FOR PROPER
PROPER OPERATION in SECTION 3. Messages sent/recorded counter
This screen can be used to safely lower the dozer, Latitude
arch and boom when the engine is OFF. Refer to
DEPRESSURIZING SUSPENDED ELEMENTS in Longitude
SECTION 3 for more information. Press the back button to return to the previous
This screen is also used in the procedure to screen.
relieve pressure from the rear pilot accumulator.
Refer to PARKING THE MACHINE in SECTION 1.
In addition it may be used by service technicians
for service procedures.
Press the back button to return to the previous

screen.
2.49
• Plugged oil cooler
• Malfunction in a hydraulic system
• High loads on the hydraulic system
• Malfunction of the cooling fan
• Low hydraulic oil level
• Correct Hydraulic Oil Grade Selection
If hydraulic oil temperature rises above the
recommended operating range DO NOT
continue to operate the machine.
INFORMATION FUNCTIONS NOTE ALSO: Hydraulic oil temperature can

also be monitored using the hydraulic oil
1. Drive Pressure Forward - psi or bar temperature gauge shown on the main menu.
Note also that gauge symbol colour changes
This display indicates forward drive pressure. indicate temperature range (blue=low,
2. Drive Pressure Reverse - psi or bar white=normal, red=high)
This display indicates reverse drive pressure. The alarm must not be used to monitor the
hydraulic oil. The operator must use the
3. Travel Speed - mph or km/h hydraulic oil temperature gauge on the main
This display indicates machine travel speed. menu of the computer display, together with
the operating range chart in SECTION 3 to
Note that front tire size information is used by prevent damage to the hydraulic system.
the machine program to accurately calculate
and display machine travel speed. Refer Hydraulic oil grade information is shown
to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU - on the main menu below the hydraulic oil
SERVICE SETTINGS – FRONT TIRE SIZE in temperature gauge.
THIS SECTION to check or update front tire Operating outside the recommended operating
size settings. range will shorten hydraulic component life.
Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU
4. Drive Motor Speed - rpm
- SERVICE SETTINGS – HYDRAULIC OIL
This display indicates the drive motor speed in GRADE in THIS SECTION for hydraulic oil
rpm. grade selection settings information.
5 Serial Number Refer also to APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS
in SECTION 3 for hydraulic oil operating range
This display indicates machine serial information.
number.
Refer also to COMPUTER – MESSAGES
6. Machine Hours - h - CRITICAL – HYDRAULIC OIL
This display indicates the total number of
for more information about the hydraulic oil
hours the machine has run.
temperature message.
7. Hydraulic Oil Temperature (°F or °C)
8. Transmission Temperature -°F or °C
This display indicates the current hydraulic oil (EHS transmission only)
temperature registered in the main hydraulic
tank.
If the temperature rises above the
recommended operating range for the type of
hydraulic oil in use, alarm will sound, check
the following:
2.50
This display indicates the hydrostatic circuit
temperature as read by the temperature
sensor located on the drive pump.
9. Total fuel information

This display indicates the total fuel used
during the life of the machine.
• Total fuel used US gal or L,
• Total hours h
• Total fuel rate US gph or L/h.
10. Trip fuel information

This display indicates the average fuel
consumption rate for the machine since last
reset.
• Trip fuel used US gal or L, 14. Pilot Pressure - psi or bar
• Trip hours h This display indicates pilot pressure measured
• Trip fuel rate US gph or L/h. at the pressure sensor in port GP1 on the
FUEL GAUGE pump control/auto brake manifold.
The fuel level gauge is shown on the main menu. 15. Grapple Constant Pressure - psi or bar
Note that a yellow fuel symbol indicates fuel level This display indicates the grapple constant
low. pressure measured at the pressure sensor
mounted on the rear chassis (left side).
16. Hydraulic Filter Pressure
- psi or bar
This display indicates hydraulic filter pressure
measured at the pressure sensor mounted on
the return filter inlet manifold.
11. Main Pump Pressure - psi or bar
17. Service Brake Pressure - psi or bar
This display indicates the main pump pressure
measured at the pressure sensor in port GP This display indicates service brake pressure
on the pump control/auto brake manifold. measured at the pressure transducer in port
ACC on the main pump manifold block.
12. Load Sense Pressure - psi or bar
18. P Parking Brake Pressure - psi or bar
This display indicates load sense pressure
measured at the pressure sensor in the inlet This display indicates parking brake pressure
section of the front chassis control valve. measured at the pressure sensor in port GD
on the multifunction manifold.
13. Differential Pressure - psi or bar
This display indicates the calculated 19. Clutch Pressure - psi or bar
differential between Main Pump and Load (EHS Transmission only)
Sense pressures. This display indicates clutch pressure
measured at the pressure sensor in port G on
the EHS transmission clutch manifold..
2.51
MAIN MENU PAGE
From any menu page.
Press the menu button to go to the main menu

page.
The main menu page displays the following
selections:
• Adjust - Press F1 to select
• Measure - Press F2 to select
• Preferences - Press F3 to select
• Info - Press F4 to select
Press the back button to return to the page
which was displayed when the main menu
page was selected.
OR
Press the menu button again to return to the
page which was displayed when the main
menu page was selected.
2.52
ADJUST MENU ENGINE ADJUST GROUP*
From the main menu page press the F1 button FAN ADJUST GROUP* (IF EQUIPPED)
(Adjust) to access the adjust menu.
SERVICE ADJUST GROUP*

The following menu items can be selected:
• Engine Adjust Group*
• Fan Adjust Group* (if equipped)
• Service Adjust Group*
Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to select the
menu item. Press OK to confirm the selection.
*NOTE: Marked menu items can also be accessed
from the main menu. Refer to COMPUTER –
ADJUSTMENT MENU in THIS SECTION for more
information.
NOTE ALSO: Service technicians may have
access to more options through this menu. Refer
to SECTION 6 of the SERVICE MANUAL for more
information.
Press the back button (or F1) to return to the

main menu page.
2.53
MEASURE MENU
The following menu items can be selected.

From the main menu page press the F2 button • Inputs
(Measure) to access the measure menu.
• Outputs
• J1939 Parameter Inputs
• Drive/HP Test
• Function Valve
• Variable Pitch Fan
• Differential Locks
• Module Diagnostics
• Clutch Engage
• Hydrostatic Set-up
• Drive Trigger
• Engage/Release Time
• Travel Speed
• Telematics (if equipped)
This menu is used by Tigercat service technicians.
Refer to SECTION 6 of the SERVICE MANUAL for
more information.

main menu page.
2.54
PREFERENCES MENU
From the main menu page press the F3 button

(Preferences) to access the preferences menu.
The following menu items can be selected for

adjustment.
• Display - Press F1 to select
• Date/Time - Press F2 to select
• Language - Press F3 to select
menu page.
2.55
DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT
From the preferences menu press the F1 button to
access display adjustment.
Screen Saver Adjustment

Press F3 to access the screen saver adjustment.
The following menu items can be selected: Use the Arrow Up and Arrow Down buttons to
scroll through the choices. Three choices are
• Main Menu Page - Press F1 to select available:
• Backlight - Press F2 to select • SCREEN SAVER OFF
• Screen Saver - Press F3 to select
• DIMMED - Timeout - Dimmed light
preferences menu. • BLACK - Timeout
Backlight Adjustment After making a selection press the OK button to

confirm selection.
Press F2 to access the backlight adjustment.
Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down buttons to adjust
the display backlight. The range is 10 to 100. The
default setting is 100.
When the desired setting is selected press the OK
button to confirm the setting. A good rule to follow
is the lower the number the longer the life of the
display unit.
2.56
DATE/TIME ADJUSTMENT Date Adjustment
From the preferences menu press the F2 button to Press F1 to access the date adjustment.
access date/time adjustment.
Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to scroll through

The following menu items can be selected: the YEAR list to select the year.
• Date - Press F1 to select Press the OK button to confirm year selected.
• Time - Press F2 to select
preferences menu.
When the year has been confirmed the display will

highlight the MONTH.
month.
Press the OK button to confirm month selected.
2.57
Time Adjustment
Press F1 to access the time adjustment.
When the month has been confirmed the display

will highlight the DAY.
Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to select the day. Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to select the
Press the OK button to confirm day selected. HOUR.
Press the OK button to confirm selection.
The display will return to the Date/Time menu.

Press the back button to return to the When the hour has been confirmed the display will
preferences menu. show the MINUTES highlighted.
minute.
Press OK button to confirm the selection.
The display will return to the DATE/TIME menu
screen.
preferences menu.
2.58
LANGUAGE ADJUSTMENT INFO MENU
From the preferences menu press the F2 button to From the main menu page press the F4 button
access language adjustment screen. (Info) and the access the info menu.
The languages available for selection will be
shown.
Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to move to the
preferred language.
Press OK to confirm the selection.
The display will return to the LANGUAGE menu
screen.
preferences menu.
The machine ID information will be displayed on

the screen.
• Modules - Press F1 to select
• Logs - Press F3 to select
menu page.
2.59
MODULES LOGS
From the Info menu press F1 to select the Press F3 from the info menu page to select logs.
modules menu.
This menu lists the logs available in the machine
This menu provides information on the following program and the number of records within each
machine modules: log.
• Display (MD3 Module) The records are a list of all the fault occurrences in
• Cab Module (XS2 Module) each log. Records cannot be cleared by operators.
• Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2-A1 Module) Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to select the
• Front Chassis Module (XA2 -A0 Module) menu item. Press OK to confirm the selection.
• Engine Press the back button (or F1) to return to the
• Telematics (if equipped) main menu page.
• Seat Module (XC21 Module)
Shown above the diplay module has been

selected. Specific information for the display
module is displayed on the screen.
main menu page.
2.60
MESSAGES
ALARM MASTER
LIGHT ALARM COMPUTER
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The computer displays messages, activates the

master alarm and alarm light whenever a system
fault occurs. Note that the computer control
system will automatically perform a bulb test at
engine start-up to ensure that master alarm and
alarm light are functioning. Refer to STARTING
ENGINE in THIS SECTION.
There are different types of Messages and Alarms,
they appear on the screen as a block message.
The types of messages are:
• CRITICAL MESSAGE - Colour RED
• ERROR MESSAGE - Colour RED
• ALERT MESSAGE - Colour YELLOW
• INFORMATION MESSAGE - Colour BLUE
Messages can be hidden or acknowledged by
pressing the F2 button (Hide or OK).
All messages that have been hidden or
acknowledged are stored in the computer.
In some instances it will be necessary to
immediately stop the machine, turn the engine
OFF and repair the problem causing the message.
Active fault messages that have been hidden can
be reviewed by pressing the F4 button. Recalled
messages will be displayed in order starting with
the highest priority first.
2.61
CRITICAL MESSAGES (RED)
Critical messages advise the operator that a
critical machine fault is about to occur or a system
fault has occurred.
Critical messages have the highest level of priority
and are used to alert operator that immediate
action must be taken to prevent damage to
machine or to ensure operator safety.
When a critical message is displayed, the
master alarm and alarm light will sound and
A list of CRITICAL MESSAGES is as follows:
flash continuously. The message remains on the
screen until the operator hides it. Hydraulic Oil Level Low
The message will give brief details of the fault and Drive Motor Clutch Pressure Low
advise what action is necessary. Drive Motor Overspeed
In some instances the machine requires Transmission Oil Temperature High
immediate action to correct the problem which Interlock System
requires the operator to STOP machine operation, Hydraulic Oil Temperature High
TURN THE ENGINE OFF and service the LH Drive Motor Speed Sensor Fault
machine to correct the problem.
RH Drive Motor Speed Sensor Fault or Clutch Slip
However, if the machine cannot be stopped Drive Motor Clutch Slow Response
immediately for safety reasons, the operator can
Drive Motor Clutch Pressure High
hide the message. In this instance the machine
should only be operated long enough to move the Functions Active
machine to a safe location then STOP machine Hydraulic Oil Filter Bypass
operation and TURN THE ENGINE OFF before Main Fuel Filter Clogged Engine Derate
serious machine damage can occur! Hardware Fault - MD3
Messages can be hidden by pressing the F2 Hardware Fault - Engine
button (Hide). Hardware Fault - XS2
Hardware Fault - XC21
Critical messages flash the critical symbol
above the F4 button when active messages are Hardware Fault - XA2
hidden. The symbol will continue to flash until the Engine Coolant Temperature High
problem is resolved and the fault becomes Engine Coolant Temperature High - Engine Derate
inactive. Engine Coolant Level low
Active messages that have been hidden can be Aftertreatment System Technical Failure*
reviewed by pressing the F4 button. Aftertreatment System Engine Idle Too Long*
Engine Locked Out*
Engine Restarts Remaining Until Engine Lockout*
Engine Oil Pressure Low
Engine Oil Pressure Low - Engine Derate
Engine Overspeed
Engine Overspeed Max
Engine Oil Temperature High
Engine Fault Code Messages - Critical
*NOTE: The aftertreatment system and its related
components are applicable to Tier 4f machines
only.
2.62
CRITICAL MESSAGES
Drive Motor
Hydraulic Oil Overspeed. Reduce travel speed.
Level Low.
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL LOW

This message will be displayed, alarm light
will flash and alarm will sound when the main LH Drive Motor
hydraulic tank oil level is low.
Overspeed. Reduce travel speed.
Stop the engine immediately when this alarm is
activated. Operating machine with a low hydraulic
oil level can cause hydraulic pumps to fail.
When this alarm is activated stop the engine and
look for signs of broken hoses or other leaks.
Repair leaks and refill the main hydraulic tank to
FULL mark on the sight gauge with grapple head
fully open, grapple head and dozer blade on the
ground. Restart engine and inspect for leaks.
RH Drive Motor
Overspeed. Reduce travel speed.
Drive Motor Clutch

Pressure Low.
DRIVE MOTOR OVERSPEED

This message will be displayed, alarm light will
flash and alarm will sound when the drive motor is
overspeeding.
DRIVE MOTOR CLUTCH PRESSURE LOW Reduce speed immediately when this alarm is
(IF EQUIPPED WITH EHS TRANSMISSION) activated to prevent damage to the machine.
This message will be displayed, alarm light will Operating drive motors at high speeds will damage
flash and alarm will sound when the drive motor the drive motors.
clutch pressure is low. Note that machines equipped with an EHS
Stop the machine immediately when this alarm transmission have separate messages for left and
is activated and check the EHS transmission for right drive motors.
proper operation.
2.63
Transmission Oil Hydraulic Oil

Temperature High
Temperature High.
TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH

(IF EQUIPPED WITH EHS TRANSMISSION)
This message will be displayed, alarm light will will flash and alarm will sound when the oil
flash and alarm will sound when the transmission temperature exceeds the recommended operating
oil temperature is high. range for the type of hydraulic oil in use.
Stop the machine immediately when this alarm If the temperature rises above the recommended
is activated and check the EHS transmission for operating range for the type of hydraulic oil in use
proper operation. check the following:
• Plugged oil cooler
• Malfunction in a hydraulic system
• High loads on the hydraulic system
• Malfunction of the cooling fan
• Low hydraulic oil level
• Correct Hydraulic Oil Grade Selection
If hydraulic oil temperature rises above the
recommended operating range DO NOT continue
Interlock System
to operate the machine.
Door open or park brake on! Machine drive
This alarm must not be used to monitor the
disabled.
hydraulic oil. The operator must use the hydraulic
oil temperature gauge on the main menu, together
with the operating range chart in SECTION 3 to
prevent damage to the hydraulic system.
Hydraulic oil grade information is shown on the
INTERLOCK SYSTEM main menu below the hydraulic oil temperature
This message will be displayed, alarm light will gauge.
flash and alarm will sound to a alert the operator Operating outside the recommended operating
that the Interlock System has disabled the range will shorten hydraulic component life.
machine drive.
Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU -
The interlock system prevents the machine from SERVICE SETTINGS – HYDRAULIC OIL GRADE
being driven and function controls from being in THIS SECTION for hydraulic oil grade selection
operated while the parking brake is ENGAGED. settings information.
The parking brake is operated using the parking Refer also to APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS
brake switch or lever. This message indicates that in SECTION 3 for hydraulic oil operating range
the parking brake was engaged by the parking information.
brake control or opening a cab door while the
machine was in motion. Refer to COMPUTER – INFORMATION MODE
MENU – HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE in
THIS SECTION for hydraulic oil temperature
information display.
2.64
LH Drive Motor Drive Motor Clutch

Speed sensor fault Slow response.
LH DRIVE MOTOR SPEED SENSOR FAULT DRIVE MOTOR CLUTCH SLOW RESPONSE
(IF EQUIPPED WITH EHS TRANSMISSION) (IF EQUIPPED WITH EHS TRANSMISSION)
This message will be displayed, alarm light will This message will be displayed, alarm light will
flash and alarm will sound when a speed sensor flash and alarm will sound when there is a delay in
fault is detected in the left drive motor. clutch response.
Stop the machine immediately when this alarm is Stop the machine immediately when this alarm
activated and check the speed sensor for proper is activated and check the EHS transmission for
operation. proper operation. Air may be present in the circuit
causing slow clutch response, check to ensure
Check for proper sensor functionality, wiring,
suction line is tight.
connectors and calibration. Refer to DRIVE
MOTOR SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION in
SECTION 8 of the SERVICE MANUAL.
RH Drive Motor Drive Motor Clutch

Speed sensor fault or clutch slip. Pressure High.
DRIVE MOTOR CLUTCH PRESSURE HIGH

RH DRIVE MOTOR SPEED SENSOR FAULT OR
CLUTCH SLIP
(IF EQUIPPED WITH EHS TRANSMISSION) This message will be displayed, alarm light will
flash and alarm will sound when the drive motor
clutch pressure is high.
flash and alarm will sound when a speed sensor
fault is detected in the right drive motor or the Stop the machine immediately when this alarm
clutch is slipping. is activated and check the EHS transmission for
proper operation.
Stop the machine immediately when this alarm is
activated. Check for proper sensor functionality,
wiring, connectors and calibration first. Refer to
DRIVE MOTOR SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
in SECTION 8 of the SERVICE MANUAL. Check
EHS transmission for clutch slip and proper
operation only if speed sensor is found to be ok.
2.65
Functions Active Hydraulic Oil

Dozer, arch & boom can be lowered rapidly. Filter Bypass
Ensure all personnel are clear of machine before
lowering.
FUNCTIONS ACTIVE HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER BYPASS

This message will be displayed, alarm light will This message is displayed, alarm light flashes
flash and alarm will sound when the engine is and alarm sounds to inform the operator that the
stalled during operation. This message is intended hydraulic oil is bypassing the return filters.
to alert the operator to immediately ensure all
When this happens the filter requires immediate
personnel are clear of the machine and when it
service.
is safe to do so lower the dozer, arch and boom
to the ground. This should be done promptly If alarm sounds during cold start-ups, the engine
while rear accumulator pressure is available and speed should be reduced and the warm up
function controls are still operational. procedure continued. Note that the bypass
message will only be displayed when hydraulic oil
In the event that this is not possible refer to
temperature is above 80°F (27°C) and the filter is
DEPRESSURIZING SUSPENDED ELEMENTS
in bypass mode.
in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for more
information about safely lowering suspended
elements in the event of an engine stall or other
machine malfunction.
2.66
Main Fuel Filter Hardware Fault - MD3

Clogged - Engine Derate Active fault has been hidden. Turn key off and
on to recall active hidden hardware faults.
MAIN FUEL FILTER CLOGGED HARDWARE FAULT - MD3

ENGINE DERATE
This message will be displayed, alarm light will flash and alarm will sound when a critical active
flash and alarm will sound when an engine derate hardware fault related to the MD3 Display Module
is triggered due to a clogged main fuel filter. This has been hidden.
message may be accompanied by Engine Fault
To recall the original active fault(s) the operator
Code Messages.
must turn the key off and on.
When a main fuel filter clog is detected a message
A VREF error is an example of the type of
is displayed to alert the operator.
hardware fault which will be the original active fault
This message results in the following derate which triggers this message.
sequence:
• When a fuel filter clog continues for more than
5 minutes this message will be shown and
the engine will immediately begin to derate Hardware Fault - Engine
at 50 rpm/s to a set creep speed allowing the Active fault has been hidden. Turn key off and
operator to safely stop the machine (creep on to recall active hidden hardware faults.
speed setting is programmed to suit each
machine type/model).
Change engine filter as soon as possible to
correct. Refer to ENGINE OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL for engine fuel HARDWARE FAULT - ENGINE
filter replacement instructions. If the problem
continues contact dealer for service. This message will be displayed, alarm light will
flash and alarm will sound when a critical active
• When a fuel filter clog condition is no longer hardware fault related to the Engine has been
detected for more than 5 seconds this hidden.
message will be turned off and the engine
will automatically ramp up engine speed at To recall the original active fault(s) the operator
50 rpm/s to full operating speed. must turn the key off and on.
NOTE: An Engine Torque Derate Active message No contact error is an example of the type of
will also be triggered as the engine begins to hardware fault which may be the original active
derate. Refer to COMPUTER – MESSAGES - fault which triggers this message.
CRITICAL – ENGINE TORQUE DERATE ACTIVE
in THIS SECTION.
2.67
Hardware Fault - XS2 Hardware Fault - XA2

Active fault has been hidden. Turn key off and Active fault has been hidden. Turn key off and
on to recall active hidden hardware faults. on to recall active hidden hardware faults.
HARDWARE FAULT - XS2 HARDWARE FAULT - XA2

This message will be displayed, alarm light will This message will be displayed, alarm light will
flash and alarm will sound when a critical active flash and alarm will sound when a critical active
hardware fault related to the XS2 Cab Module has hardware fault related to the XA2 Front Chassis
been hidden. Module has been hidden.
To recall the original active fault(s) the operator To recall the original active fault(s) the operator
must turn the key off and on. must turn the key off and on.
A VREF and no contact errors are examples of the A VREF and no contact errors are examples of the
type of hardware fault which may be the original type of hardware fault which may be the original
active fault which triggers this message. active fault which triggers this message.

Active fault has been hidden. Turn key off and
on to recall active hidden hardware faults.
HARDWARE FAULT - XC21

flash and alarm will sound when a critical active
hardware fault related to the XC21 Module has
been hidden.
To recall the original active fault(s) the operator
must turn the key off and on.
A VREF and no contact errors are examples of the
type of hardware fault which may be the original
active fault which triggers this message.
2.68
Engine Coolant Engine Coolant

Temperature high. Temperature High - Engine Derate
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH

ENGINE DERATE
SPN: 63011 1 of 1 will flash and alarm will sound when an engine
derate is triggered due to high engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature high.
temperature. This message may be accompanied
by Engine Fault Code Messages related to coolant
temperature.
This message results in the following derate
sequence:
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH • When coolant temperature rises to 225°F

(107°C) for more than 5 seconds the critical
symbol will flash.
will flash and alarm will sound when engine
temperature exceeds recommended engine • When coolant temperature rises to 230°F
temperature. (110°C) for more than 5 seconds this message
will be shown and the engine will immediately
When this alarm is activated check for:
begin to derate at 50 rpm/s to a set creep
• Plugged air intake access panel screens speed allowing the operator to safely stop the
machine (creep speed setting is programmed
to suit each machine type/model). DO NOT
DO NOT continue to operate machine. continue to operate machine.
Refer to CLEANING A/C CONDENSER AND Safely stop the machine, idle the engine
COOLER PACKAGE in SECTION 3. and turn the A/C off. If the engine coolant
temperature reading does not return to normal
operating levels turn the engine OFF and
perform further cooling system checks. Refer
also to MESSAGES - CRITICAL – ENGINE
for recommended corrective action. If engine
coolant temperature does not return to normal
operating levels contact dealer for service.
• When coolant temperatures fall below
223°F (106°C) for more than 5 seconds this
will automatically ramp up engine speed at
50 rpm/s to full operating speed.
NOTE: An Engine Torque Derate Active message
will also be triggered as the engine begins to
derate. Refer to COMPUTER – MESSAGES -
CRITICAL – ENGINE TORQUE DERATE ACTIVE
in THIS SECTION.
2.69
Engine Coolant Aftertreatment System

Level Low. Technical failure severe. Engine lockout may
occur after full torque derate and 3 engine
restarts.
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL LOW AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM

This message will be displayed, alarm light will TECHNICAL FAILURE
flash and alarm will sound when the coolant level NOTE: The aftertreatment system and its related
drops below a safe operating level. The sensor is components are applicable to Tier 4f machines
located in the surge tank. only.
If this light comes on when the engine is running, This message will be displayed, alarm light will
stop the engine immediately and correct the fault. flash and alarm will sound when an aftertreatment
With engine running, top up radiator using correct techical fault is detected. Action to correct the
solution of coolant antifreeze. problem should be taken immediately to avoid
affecting engine performance and damage to
Refer to SERVICE AND LUBRICATION POINTS the diesel oxidation catalyst /selective catalytic
CHART in SECTION 3. reduction (DOC/SCR) aftertreatment system
components.
WARNING This message results in the following derate
sequence if no action is taken to correct the
problem:
• Beginning immediately after an
aftertreatment system technical message
there will be a ramp down of Torque by 25%
DO NOT remove the radiator cap when over 25 minutes.
the engine is hot, release of pressurized • After 1 hour at reduced torque there will be
coolant can cause serious burns. a ramp down of Engine Speed by 60% and
Turn then engine OFF. Only remove engine Torque by 65% over 40 minutes.
radiator fill cap when cool enough to touch • After 50 minutes at derated engine speed and
with bare hands. torque the engine is derated to idle within 30
Slowly loosen cap to first stop to relieve minutes.
pressure before removing completely. • Some less severe technical faults can be fixed
at any time, even after then engine has been
fully derated to idle speed.
• More severe technical faults will result in
an engine lockout when the engine has
derated to idle and there have been 3 restarts
(redetects). Once locked out the engine will
only operate at idle. Action to correct the
original cause(s) of the lockout must be taken
before the engine can be reset. Contact dealer
to reset engine lockout for normal operation.
CRITICAL – ENGINE LOCKED OUT and
ENGINE RESTARTS REMAINING UNTIL
ENGINE LOCKOUT in THIS SECTION.
Identify the cause of the technical failure and take
action to correct the problem.
Refer also to AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM in
SECTION 3 for more information.
2.70
Aftertreatment System Engine

Engine idle too long. Shutdown engine to Engine locked out. Engine derate to 0% Torque
prevent damage to emission control system. and 850 rpm. Contact Dealer
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM ENGINE LOCKED OUT

ENGINE IDLE TOO LONG NOTE: The aftertreatment system and its related
NOTE: The aftertreatment system and its related components are applicable to Tier 4f machines
components are applicable to Tier 4f machines only.
only. This message will be displayed, alarm light will
This message will be displayed, alarm light will flash and alarm will sound when an engine is
flash and alarm will sound when this engine locked out by the computer system to prevent
has idled for more than 9 consecutive hours. further damage to the engine and aftertreatment
Shutdown engine to prevent damage to the system.
emission control system. Note that an engine is locked out after several
IMPORTANT ! other critical aftertreatment system messages
Engine should not idle longer than 9 consecutive regarding the cause of the problem and additional
hours. Damage to the emission control system will messages regarding the number of restarts until
result. When this machine idles for an extended engine lockout.
period excess hydrocarbon buildup is created in Once locked out the engine will only operate at
the DOC/SCR aftertreatment system. Burn off of idle. Action to correct the original cause(s) of the
excess hydrocarbon at full load immediately after lockout must be taken before the engine can be
a long idle period will generate excess heat which reset. Contact dealer to reset engine lockout for
will cause damage to emission control system normal operation.
components.
Refer to Engine Manuals for code information.
Refer also to COMPUTER – MESSAGES - CRITI-
CAL – ENGINE RESTARTS REMAINING UNTIL
ENGINE LOCKOUT in THIS SECTION.
2.71
Engine Engine Oil Pressure

3 restarts remaining until engine lockout. Oil Pressure Low - Engine Derate
ENGINE RESTARTS REMAINING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW

UNTIL ENGINE LOCKOUT ENGINE DERATE
NOTE: The aftertreatment system and its related This message will be displayed, alarm light will
components are applicable to Tier 4f machines flash and alarm will sound when an engine derate
only. is triggered due to low engine oil pressure. This
message may be accompanied by Engine Fault
Code Messages related to engine oil pressure.
flash and alarm will sound to inform the operator of
the number of restarts available before the engine This message results in the following derate
is locked out. sequence:
Note that an engine is locked out after several • When engine oil pressure readings fall below
other critical aftertreatment system messages 17 psi (1.2 bar) for more than 5 seconds this
regarding the cause of the problem and this message will be shown and the engine will
message regarding the number of restarts until immediately begin to derate at 50 rpm/s to
engine lockout. a set creep speed allowing the operator to
safely stop the machine (creep speed setting
Refer also to COMPUTER – MESSAGES -
is programmed to suit each machine type/
CRITICAL – ENGINE LOCKED OUT in THIS
model). DO NOT continue to operate machine.
SECTION.
Safely stop the machine and turn the engine
OFF. Refer also to MESSAGES - CRITICAL
– ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW in THIS
SECTION for recommended corrective action.
If the problem continues contact dealer for
SPN: 9939 1 of 1 service.
Engine Oil Pressure Low. • When engine oil pressure readings rise above
20 psi (1.4 bar) for more than 5 seconds this
will automatically ramp up engine speed at
50 rpm/s to full operating speed.
NOTE: An Engine Torque Derate Active message
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW will also be triggered as the engine begins to
derate. Refer to COMPUTER – MESSAGES -
This message will be displayed, alarm light CRITICAL – ENGINE TORQUE DERATE ACTIVE
will flash and alarm will sound when engine oil in THIS SECTION.
pressure falls below 10psi (0.7 bar).
Stop the engine when this alarm is activated.
Check engine oil levels.
Refer to STARTING ENGINE in THIS SECTION
for more information.
2.72
Engine Overspeed Engine Overspeed Max

Apply service brakes to reduce travel 3750 rpm. Reduce speed when skidding.
speed.
ENGINE OVERSPEED ENGINE OVERSPEED MAX

This message will be displayed, alarm light will This message will be displayed, alarm light
flash and alarm will sound when engine speed will flash and alarm will sound after an engine
exceeds the recommended engine overspeed overspeed message has been triggered to indicate
limit. to the operator the maximum engine speed level
which triggered the engine overspeed message.
Apply service brakes to reduce travel speed and
avoid engine overspeed. This message is intended to remind operators
to reduce speed when skidding to suit operating
It is important to keep engine speed within the
conditions and avoid engine overspeed.
recommended operating range to avoid costly
damage to the engine itself and to other machine It is important to keep engine speed within the
components affected by engine overspeed. recommended operating range to avoid costly
Operating at engine speeds outside the damage to the engine itself and to other machine
recommended operating range will result in costly components affected by engine overspeed.
damage and reduce the expected life of the engine Operating at engine speeds outside the
and other machine components affected by engine recommended operating range will result in costly
overspeed. damage and reduce the expected life of the engine
and other machine components affected by engine
Whenever this message is displayed a second
overspeed.
message follows once engine speed has been
reduced to a level within normal limits. The second Refer also to COMPUTER – MESSAGES -
message indicates to the operator the maximum CRITICAL – ENGINE OVERSPEED in THIS
engine speed level which triggered the engine SECTION.
overspeed message. Refer also to COMPUTER –
MESSAGES - CRITICAL – ENGINE OVERSPEED
MAX in THIS SECTION.
2.73
SPN: 7123 1 of 1 SPN: 4645 1 of 1

Engine oil temperature high. Contact dealer.
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES - CRITICAL

This message will be displayed, alarm light Critical engine fault message(s) will be displayed,
will flash and alarm will sound when engine oil alarm light will flash and alarm will sound when a
temperature exceeds recommended engine critical engine fault message is received from the
temperature. engine electronic control module.
Check the cooler package and fan for proper They provide the SPN code (suspect parameter
operation and run a clean cycle if the machine number) as well as a message describing the fault
is equipped with a variable pitch fan. It is also (when available).
important to manually clean debris from the
Critical engine fault codes are higher priority
machine on a regular basis to maintain low
messages than alert level engine fault code
machine operating temperatures. Refer to
messages. Critical messages can be hidden but
CLEANING A/C CONDENSER AND COOLER
immediate action must be taken, STOP machine
PACKAGE in SECTION 3.
operation and service engine immediately to
Refer to Engine manuals for more information. resolve the cause of the fault.
An example of a critical engine fault message is
shown above.
Note that some less common engine fault codes
will appear without a message describing the fault.
Make a note of the SPN code and contact service
Refer to engine manual for specific information
regarding the engine and aftertreatment system.
NOTE: Contact your Tigercat dealer to obtain
an Engine Fault Codes chart. An up to date
copy should be kept in the Manual’s Box (in
the cab). The chart is updated regularly by the
engine manufacturer, so it is important to check
periodically with the Tigercat dealer to ensure that
you have a current copy of the Engine Fault Codes
chart.
2.74
ERROR MESSAGES (RED)
Error messages advise the operator that a critical
machine fault is about to occur or a system fault
has occurred.
Error messages are computer system generated
and are generally triggered by computer system
error and fault related conditions.
Error messages have the second highest level
of priority and are used to alert operator that
immediate action must be taken to prevent
damage to machine or to ensure operator safety. A list of some types of ERROR MESSAGES is as
follows:
Error messages are activated whenever a fault
such as an electrical connection is broken/ Module No Contact Error
disconnected. Most error messages are due to Module VREF Error
computer system hardware or connection faults.
Voltage Input Error (VIN)
When an error message is displayed, the master
Digital Input Error (DIN)
alarm and alarm light will sound and flash
continuously. The message remains on the screen Digital Output Error (DOUT)
until the operator hides it.
Current Output Error (COUT)
The message will give brief details of the fault and
* Note that not all error messages are shown.
advise what action is necessary.
In some instances the machine requires
immediate action to correct the problem which
requires the operator to STOP machine operation,
TURN THE ENGINE OFF and service the
machine to correct the problem.
However, if the machine cannot be stopped
immediately for safety reasons, the operator can
hide the message. In this instance the machine
should only be operated long enough to move the
machine to a safe location then STOP machine
operation and TURN THE ENGINE OFF before
serious machine damage can occur!
Messages are acknowledged by pressing the F2
button (OK). To recall active messages turn key off
and on. On screen messages will indicate to the
operator that an active hardware fault has been
hidden.
Error messages flash the critical symbol or the

above the F4 button when active messages
are hidden depending on the type of error
message. The symbol will continue to flash until
the problem is resolved and the fault becomes
inactive.
Active messages that have been hidden can be
reviewed by pressing the F4 button.
2.75
ERROR MESSAGES XS2-A0
MODULE NO CONTACT ERROR
The module no contact error message will be Cab Module
displayed to indicate a loss of communication with No contact
or power to a module. The module is identified on
the display screen.
When a module loses contact all machine
functions controlled by that module cease and
all messages associated with that module are
triggered. If the problem is with the CAN wires all
modules beyond the problem module will also be XC21-A2
affected.
Note that if the display module has a loss of power Seat Module
or other malfunction the screen may go blank and
all machine functions controlled by the computer No contact
system will be affected..
Once acknowledged this message will be
replaced with a hardware fault message for the
corresponding module when active faults are
recalled to the screen. Refer to COMPUTER –
MESSAGES - CRITICAL – HARDWARE FAULT in XA2-A0
THIS SECTION.
Front Chassis Module

No contact
XA2-A1
Front Chassis Module 2

No contact
J1939-B0
Tigercat/ FPT NEF 6.7L

No contact
2.76
MODULE VREF ERROR
MD3
The module VREF message will be displayed to
indicate a problem related to the 5V reference
signal coming from the module.
Display
VREF error
The module is identified on the display screen.
This message indicates a problem with a sensor,
connecting wires or the 5V reference signal itself.
recalled to the screen. Refer to COMPUTER – XC21-A2
MESSAGES - CRITICAL – HARDWARE FAULT in
THIS SECTION. Seat Module
VREF error
XS2-A0
Cab Module
VREF error
XA2-A0

VREF error
XA2-A1

VREF error
2.77
CURRENT OUTPUT ERROR (COUT)
Cab Module
Pin C1:25 Current output error messages will be displayed
Travel Direction Select VIN to indicate a problem with a current output signal
from a computer system module.
High error
The module and pin number are identified on the
display screen.
The heading identifies the signal destination and
the text indicates the type of error.
The display is similar to the voltage input error
VOLTAGE INPUT ERROR (VIN) message shown above.
Voltage input error messages will be displayed to Once acknowledged these message will be
indicate a problem with a voltage input signal to a replaced with a hardware failure message for
computer system module. the corresponding module when active faults
The module and pin number are identified on the MESSAGES - ALERT – HARDWARE FAILURE in
display screen. THIS SECTION.
The heading identifies the signal source and the
text indicates the type of error.
An example of a voltage input error message is
shown above.
DIGITAL INPUT ERROR (DIN)
Digital input error messages will be displayed to
indicate a problem with a digital input signal to a
computer system module.
display screen.
The heading identifies the signal source and the
text indicates the type of error.
message shown above.
DIGITAL OUTPUT ERROR (DOUT)
Digital output error messages will be displayed to
indicate a problem with a digital output signal from
a computer system module.
display screen.
The heading identifies the signal destination and
the text indicates the type of error.
message shown above.
2.78
ALERT MESSAGES (YELLOW)
Alert messages advise the operator that machine
operation will be compromised.
Alert messages have the third level of priority and
are used to indicate to the operator that action is
required to prevent future damage to the machine.
All alert message will give brief details of the fault
and advise what action is necessary.
Action should be taken to service the machine to
correct the problem at the earliest opportunity to There are two types of alert messages:
prevent future damage to the machine.
Alert programmed messages generally triggered
Alert messages flash the alert symbol above by machine function related conditions.
the F4 button when active messages are hidden. When an alert message is displayed, the master
alarm and light will sound and flash three times to
alert the operator of the message. The message
remains on the screen until the operator hides it.
Messages can be hidden by pressing the F2
button (Hide).
Active messages that have been hidden can be Alert computer system generated messages are
reviewed by pressing the F4 button. The symbol generally triggered by computer system error and
will continue to flash until the problem is resolved fault related conditions.
and the fault becomes inactive.
When a system generated alert message is
Note that if both a critical level fault and an alert displayed he master alarm and light will sound
level fault are present the critical symbol will take and flash three times to alert the operator of the
priority until the critical fault becomes inactive. message.
The message remains on the screen until the
operator hides it.
Note that active hardware fault alert messages are
acknowledged by pressing the F2 button (OK).
To recall these messages turn key off and on. On
screen messages will indicate to the operator that
an active hardware fault has been hidden.
2.79
A list of ALERT MESSAGES is as follows: ALERT MESSAGES
Fuel Level low.
Engine Air Intake Filter Restricted
Drive Charge Filter Bypassed Fuel
Transmission Filter Bypassed Level low.
Main Fuel Filter Clogged
Machine Voltage Low.
Machine Voltage High
Service Brake Pressure Low
FUEL LEVEL LOW
Drive Charge System Pressure Low
This message will be displayed when the fuel level
Drive Trigger Interlock falls below 5% of full.
Joystick & Pedal Interlock Note that the fuel gauge symbol changes from its
Joystick Button Interlock normal white to yellow when fuel level is low.
Hardware Fault - MD3 Refer to FUEL TANK in SECTION 3 for tank

capacities.
Hardware Fault - XS2
Hardware Fault - XA2
Hardware Failure - VIN
Hardware Failure - DIN
Hardware Failure -DOUT
Hardware Failure -COUT
Engine Air Intake Filter
Engine Voltage Low
Restricted. Service Machine to correct.
Engine Voltage High
Fuel Water In Fuel
Engine Coolant Temperature High
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level <10%*
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level <5%* ENGINE AIR INTAKE FILTER RESTRICTED
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level Empty* This message will be displayed when a signal is
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Quality* received from the restriction indicator switch on the
engine air cleaner.
Engine Torque Derate Active
When this happens the engine air cleaner requires
Engine Fault Code Messages - Alert immediate service.
Some types of computer system generated Refer to AIR CLEANER MAINTENANCE in
alert messages are listed below: SECTION 3.
Module High Temperature - Alert
Module High Supply Voltage - Alert
Module Low Supply Voltage - Alert
only.
NOTE: Not all system generated alert messages
are shown.
2.80
Drive Charge Filter Main Fuel Filter

Bypassed. Service machine to correct. Clogged. Replace filter to prevent engine
derate.
DRIVE CHARGE FILTER BYPASSED MAIN FUEL FILTER CLOGGED

This message will be displayed when an oil This message will be displayed when a main fuel
flow restriction in excess of 50 psi (3.5 bar) is filter clog is detected.
encountered at the hydrostatic oil charge filter.
Replace engine fuel filter to prevent engine
This pressure build up also opens the filter bypass
derate. Refer to ENGINE OPERATION AND
valve in the filter head allowing oil to bypass the
MAINTENANCE MANUAL for engine fuel filter
filter element.
replacement instructions
When a fuel filter clog continues for more than 5
service.
minutes a critical message will be shown and the
If alarm sounds during cold start-ups, the engine engine will immediately begin to derate. Refer to
speed should be reduced and the warm up COMPUTER – MESSAGES - CRITICAL – MAIN
procedure continued. Note that the bypass FUEL FILTER CLOGGED- ENGINE DERATE in
message will only be displayed when hydraulic oil THIS SECTION.
temperature is above 85°F (29°C) and the filter is
in bypass mode.
Transmission Filter
Bypassed. Service machine to correct.
TRANSMISSION FILTER BYPASSED

This message will be displayed when an oil
flow restriction in excess of 50 psi (3.5 bar)
is encountered at the transmission filter. This
pressure build up also opens the filter bypass
valve in the filter head allowing oil to bypass the
filter element.
service.
If alarm sounds during cold start-ups, the engine
speed should be reduced and the warm up
procedure continued. Note that the bypass
message will only be displayed when transmission
oil temperature is above 40°F (4°C) and the filter is
in bypass mode.
2.81
Machine Voltage Service Brake

Low. Service machine to correct. Pressure Low. Service machine to correct.
MACHINE VOLTAGE LOW SERVICE BRAKE PRESSURE LOW

This message will be displayed when machine This message will be displayed when service
voltage readings of less than 20 volts are brake pressure falls below 800 psi (55 bar).
detected.
When this message is activated check first for
Machine voltage readings indicate voltage levels leaks in the brake circuit. If no leaks are found
in the electrical system. check for proper operation of the brake pedal
valve, accumulator, check valve and brake
When this alarm is activated investigate the cause
pressure sensor.
immediately.
For more information about the service brake
circuit refer to SECTION 9 of THE SERVICE
MANUAL.
Machine Voltage Drive Charge System

High. Service machine to correct. Pressure Low. Service machine to correct.
MACHINE VOLTAGE HIGH DRIVE CHARGE SYSTEM PRESSURE LOW

This message will be displayed when machine This message will be displayed when drive charge
voltage readings of greater than 30 volts are pressure falls below 250 psi (17 bar). The charge
detected. pressure is monitored at the forward and reverse
pressure sensors on the drive pump.
Machine voltage readings indicate voltage levels
in the electrical system. When this message is activated check the charge
filter for proper operation then, if necessary, check
the charge pressure using a gauge.
immediately.
Refer to DRIVE PUMP PRESSURE CHECKS in
SECTION 8 of THE SERVICE MANUAL.
Refer also to COMPUTER – MESSAGES -
ALERT – DRIVE CHARGE FILTER BYPASSED
message in THIS SECTION.
2.82
Drive Trigger Interlock Joystick & Pedal Interlock

Release drive trigger and press OK Release active joystick or pedal
OK
DRIVE TRIGGER INTERLOCK JOYSTICK & PEDAL INTERLOCK

This message will be shown when the drive This message will be shown when joystick or
trigger is activated before the parking brake is pedal function control is activated before the
disengaged. Function operation is prevented until parking brake is disengaged. Function operation is
the control is released and the operator presses prevented until the control is released.
OK (F2) on the computer display.
This interlock prevents unintended operation of
This interlock prevents unintended operation of the machine functions.
travel/engine speed trigger.
Refer to CAB CONTROLS – TRAVEL/ENGINE
SPEED TRIGGER (ROTATING SEAT &
JOYSTICK STEERING) in THIS SECTION.
Joystick Button Interlock

Release depressed joystick button.
JOYSTICK BUTTON INTERLOCK

This message will be shown when a joystick
button function control is activated before the
parking brake is disengaged. Function operation is
prevented until the control is released.
This interlock prevents unintended operation of
machine functions.
2.83
Hardware Fault - MD3 Hardware Fault - XC21

HARDWARE FAULT - MD3 HARDWARE FAULT - XC21

This message will be displayed when an alert level This message will be displayed when an alert level
active hardware fault related to the MD3 Display active hardware fault related to the XC21 Module
Module has been hidden. has been hidden.
High temperature, low supply voltage and high High temperature, low supply voltage and high
supply voltage module alert messages are supply voltage module alert messages are
examples of the type of hardware fault which examples of the type of hardware fault which
will be the original active faults which trigger this will be the original active faults which trigger this
message. message.
Hardware Fault - XS2 Hardware Fault - XA2

HARDWARE FAULT - XS2 HARDWARE FAULT - XA2

This message will be displayed when an alert This message will be displayed when an alert level
level active hardware fault related to the XS2 Cab active hardware fault related to the XA2 Front
Module has been hidden. Chassis Module has been hidden.
High temperature, low supply voltage and high High temperature, low supply voltage and high
supply voltage module alert messages are supply voltage module alert messages are
examples of the type of hardware fault which examples of the type of hardware fault which
will be the original active faults which trigger this will be the original active faults which trigger this
message. message.
2.84
Hardware Failure - VIN Hardware Failure - DOUT

HARDWARE FAILURE - VIN HARDWARE FAILURE - DOUT

This message will be displayed when a voltage This message will be displayed when a digital
input error message has been hidden. output error message has been hidden.
Hardware Failure - DIN Hardware Failure - COUT

HARDWARE FAILURE - DIN HARDWARE FAILURE - COUT

This message will be displayed when a digital This message will be displayed when a current
input error message has been hidden. output error message has been hidden.
2.85
SPN: 8801 1 of 1 SPN: 62755 1 of 1

Engine voltage low. Engine coolant temperature high.
ENGINE VOLTAGE LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH

This message will be displayed when engine This message will be displayed, alarm light
voltage readings of less than 20 volts are will flash and alarm will sound when engine
detected. temperature exceeds recommended engine
When this alarm is activated investigate the cause temperature.
immediately. Investigate cause as soon as possible.
When this alarm is activated check for:
Refer to COMPUTER – MESSAGES - CRITICAL
– ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH.
SPN: 4449 1 of 1 SPN: 17429 1 of 1

Engine voltage high. Water in Fuel.
ENGINE VOLTAGE HIGH

FUEL - WATER IN FUEL
This message will be displayed when engine
This message will be displayed when water is
voltage readings of greater than 30 volts are
detected in the fuel by the engine computer
detected.
system.
Refer to engine manufacturer's manual for specific
immediately.
information regarding the engine.
2.86
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID LEVEL MESSAGES Fill DEF tank and restart engine to clear the
message.
NOTE: The aftertreatment system and its related
only.
There are three levels of diesel exhaust fluid level SPN: 64191 1 of 1
messages generated by the Engine ECU.
DEF tank empty.
SPN: 61839 1 of 1
DEF Level below 10%.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID LEVEL EMPTY
flash and alarm will sound when diesel exhaust
fluid level empty is detected. Action to correct
DEF levels should be taken immediately to avoid
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID LEVEL <10% affecting engine performance and damage to
This message will be displayed, alarm light the diesel oxidation catalyst /selective catalytic
will flash and alarm will sound when a diesel reduction (DOC/SCR) aftertreatment system
exhaust fluid level below 10% is detected. components.
Action to correct DEF levels should be taken • Beginning immediately after a DEF level
immediately to avoid affecting engine performance empty message, the engine is derated to idle
and damage to the diesel oxidation catalyst / within 30 minutes.
selective catalytic reduction (DOC/SCR)
aftertreatment system components. Fill DEF tank and restart engine to clear the
message.
Fill DEF tank and restart engine to clear the
message. Note that an Engine Torque Derate Active
message will also be triggered as the engine
Refer to DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID TANK in begins to derate. Refer to COMPUTER –
SECTION 3. MESSAGES - CRITICAL – ENGINE TORQUE
DERATE ACTIVE in THIS SECTION.
SPN: 62095 1 of 1
DEF Level below 5%.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID LEVEL <5%

flash and alarm will sound when a diesel exhaust
fluid level below 5% is detected. Action to correct
DEF levels should be taken immediately to avoid
affecting engine performance and damage to
the diesel oxidation catalyst /selective catalytic
reduction (DOC/SCR) aftertreatment system
components.
• Beginning immediately after a DEF level <5%
message, there will be a ramp down of Engine
Speed by 60% and Torque by 65% over 40
minutes.
2.87
WARNING
SPN: 19402 1 of 2 Use only diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) which
DEF quality low. meets ISO 22241 specifications. NEVER fill
DEF is injected into the exhaust gas stream
during normal operation of the Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) aftertreatment
system.
Use of other fluids may cause component
SPN: 19658 2 of 2
DEF quality low.
SPN: 64911 1 of 1
Engine torque derate active.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID QUALITY

only.
ENGINE TORQUE DERATE ACTIVE
flash and alarm will sound when a diesel fluid NOTE: The aftertreatment system and its related
quality problem is detected. Action to correct the components are applicable to Tier 4f machines
problem should be taken immediately to avoid only.
affecting engine performance and damage to This message will be displayed, alarm light will
aftertreatment system components. flash and alarm will sound when the Engine ECU
This message results in the following derate and has derated the engine. The code for a Torque
engine lockout sequence if no action is taken to Derate due to too high NOx emissions is shown
correct the problem: above as an example.
• Beginning 1 hour after a DEF quality message Refer to Engine Manuals for code information to
there will be a ramp down of Engine Speed by identify the cause(s) of engine derating and more
60% and Torque by 65% over 40 minutes. information regarding failure cause and repair.
• After 2 hours at derated engine speed and
torque the engine is derated to idle within 30
minutes.
To correct the DEF quality problem clean the
area around the DEF tank then drain and refill
the tank with clean DEF which meets ISO 22241
specifications.
Note that an Engine Torque Derate Active
message will also be triggered as the engine
begins to derate. Refer to COMPUTER –
MESSAGES - CRITICAL – ENGINE TORQUE
DERATE ACTIVE in THIS SECTION.
Refer to DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID TANK in
SECTION 3.
Refer also to AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM in
SECTION 3 for more information regarding the
use of DEF and its function in the DOC/SCR
aftertreatment system. 2.88
SPN: ###### 1 of 1
Contact dealer.
ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES - ALERT

Alert engine fault message(s) will be displayed,
alarm light will flash and alarm will sound when an
alert engine fault message is received from the
engine electronic control module.
They provide the SPN code (suspect parameter
number) as well as a message describing the fault
(when available).
Alert engine fault codes are lower priority
messages than critical level engine fault code
messages. Alert messages can be hidden but
action (service engine) is required to resolve the
cause of the fault.
An example of an alert engine fault message is
shown above.
Note that some less common engine fault codes
will appear without a message describing the fault.
Make a note of the SPN code and contact service
Refer to engine manual for specific information
regarding the engine and aftertreatment system.
NOTE: Contact your Tigercat dealer to obtain
an Engine Fault Codes chart. An up to date
copy should be kept in the Manual’s Box (in
the cab). The chart is updated regularly by the
engine manufacturer, so it is important to check
periodically with the Tigercat dealer to ensure that
you have a current copy of the Engine Fault Codes
chart.
2.89
MODULE HIGH TEMPERATURE - ALERT
XC21-A2
Module high temperature alert message will be
displayed to indicate that the computer control
system has detected high temperature readings in Seat Module
a system module. High temperature
The temperature reading value is also displayed.
Once acknowledged this message will be Value: 75° C
XS2-A0
MESSAGES - ALERT – HARDWARE FAULT in
THIS SECTION.
Cab Module
High temperature
Value: 75° C
XA2-A0

High temperature
Value: 75° C
XA2-A1

High temperature
Value: 75° C
2.90
MODULE HIGH SUPPLY VOLTAGE - ALERT
MD3
Module high supply voltage alert message will be
system has detected high supply voltage readings
Display
in a system module. High supply voltage
The voltage reading value is also displayed.
Once acknowledged this message will be Value: 34 V
recalled to the screen. Refer to COMPUTER – XC21-A2
THIS SECTION. Seat Module
High supply voltage
Value: 34 V
XS2-A0
Cab Module
High supply voltage
Value: 34 V
XA2-A0

High supply voltage
Value: 75° C
XA2-A1

High supply voltage
Value: 34 V
2.91
MODULE LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE - ALERT
MD3
Module low supply voltage alert message will be
system has detected low supply voltage readings
Display
in a system module. Low supply voltage
THIS SECTION. XC21-A2
Seat Module
Low supply voltage
XS2-A0
Cab Module
Low supply voltage
XA2-A0

Low supply voltage
XA2-A1

Low supply voltage
2.92
INFORMATION MESSAGES (BLUE)
Information messages give the operator
information regarding an event or problem
condition while the event or problem exists.
Information messages have lowest priority and are
used to give the operator information that is useful
to the operator, but requires no action to prevent
immediate or future damage to the machine
When an information message is displayed on
the screen the message will either automatically
A list of the INFORMATION MESSAGES is as
disappear when the condition no longer
follows:
exists or stay on the screen until the operator
acknowledges the message. Setup Mode - Engine HP Test
Information messages can be acknowledged Setup Mode - Drive Motor Setup
by pressing the F2 button (OK). Acknowledged
Setup Mode - Drive Pump POR Setup
information messages are removed from the
screen. Setup Mode - Drive Pump Regulation Setup
Setup Mode - Function Setup
Setup Mode - Max Current Setup
Machine Steering Invert Disabled
Information messages do not have an indicator

after they have been acknowledged.
Most information messages that have been
acknowledged cannot be reviewed.
Recurrence of an event or problem condition
related to an information message may cause the
message to be shown again.
Restarting the machine may also cause the
message to be shown again.
2.93
INFORMATION MESSAGES IMPORTANT !
Machine must be in the Normal Program Mode to
SETUP MODE
operate normally.
One of these messages will be displayed until the
message is acknowledged when the machine is
procedures only.
placed in a service program mode:
When setup program modes are chosen an
• Engine HP Test Mode
information message is shown on the electronic
• Drive Motor Setup Mode display until the message is acknowledged.
• Drive Pump POR Setup Mode
In each program mode some controls are
• Drive Pump Regulation Setup deactivated for safety during setup procedures.
• Function Setup Mode Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the
• Max Current Setup Mode information message.
Setup Program Modes are intended for setup and
testing and should only be used by qualified Tigercat
service technicians or on specific instructions from a
Setup Mode
service technician.
Engine HP Test Mode for service use only.
NOTE ALSO:
Return to Normal Mode to operate machine.
• In Engine HP Test, Drive Motor Setup, Drive
Pump POR Setup, Drive Pump Regulation
and Max Current Setup Modes the arch and
boom are deactivated. Attempting to use these
controls will reactivate the information message.
• In Function Setup Mode the drive pedals and
steering are deactivated. Attempting to use
these controls will reactivate the information
message. Setup Mode
For more information on the setup mode settings Drive Motor Setup Mode for service use only.
refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU - Return to Normal Mode to operate machine.
SERVICE SETTINGS – PROGRAM MODE in
THIS SECTION.
Setup Mode
Drive Pump POR Setup Mode for service
use only. Return to Normal Mode to operate
machine.
2.94
Setup Mode Machine Steering

Drive Pump Regulation Setup for service use Steering invert disabled. Steer joystick direction
only. Return to Normal Mode to operate does not change when operator is facing
machine. rearward.
MACHINE STEERING INVERT DISABLED

This message will be displayed each time the
machine is started when the joystick steering
invert function is disabled.
Setup Mode
When the joystick steering invert function is
Function Setup Mode for service use only. disabled. Steer joystick direction does not change
Return to Normal Mode to operate machine. when operator is facing rearward. Therefore LEFT
articulation and RIGHT articulation are considered
to be left and right as viewed by the operator from
the forward facing seat position regardless of the
position of the operator's seat.
For more information regarding the steer
invert function setting refer to COMPUTER –
ADJUSTMENT MENU - SERVICE SETTINGS –
Setup Mode STEER INVERT (JOYSTICK STEERING ONLY) in
THIS SECTION.
Max Current Setup Mode for service use only.
Return to Normal Mode to operate machine. Refer also to LH JOYSTICK – STEERING,
ROTATING SEAT KICK LEVER and COMPUTER
– MESSAGES - INFORMATION – MACHINE
STEERING INVERT DISABLED in THIS
SECTION.
2.95
CAB VENTILATION
1. AIR VENTS 1
The Air Conditioner/Heater package has 8 air

outlets in the cab.
• 2 in the top half of the left door post.
• 2 in the top half of the right door post.
• 2 on the rear dash, below the window.
• 1 behind seat on the lower right.
• 1 behind seat on the lower left.
NOTE: To increase flow to a given vent, other 620E-026 RIGHT DOOR POST VENTS - 2
vents must be closed in order to redirect the
air.
2. FILTER, RECIRCULATING AIR - A/C UNIT
Air in the cab is drawn into the A/C-HEATER
unit via this filter and recirculated. The filter is
located at the base of the A/C unit. It should 1
be cleaned or replaced on a regular basis.
This is done by removing two thumb screws in
the filter box cover.
620E-021 REAR DASH VENTS - 2
3. FILTER - FRESH AIR
When the air source switch is in the ON 2
1
position , outside air is drawn into the cab air
conditioning unit through this filter and mixed
with interior air from the cab. To reduce dust
in the cab area, use the FRESH AIR option
with the A/C on. This pressurizes the cab,
forcing dust out and reducing dust coming
in. The FRESH AIR filter is accessible from
outside of the cab, at the back between the
lights. The filter should be inspected on a
regular basis and cleaned/replaced when VENTS BEHIND SEAT - 2
620E-020
severely plugged or wet. This is done by
removing 6 bolts (3/8”) and removing the air 3
inlet cover. Next remove two nuts (1/4”) and
remove the filter box cover. This will allow
access to the filter.
WARNING - These filters may require cleaning
or replacement more frequently under extreme
operating conditions.
620E-019 FRESH AIR FILTER
2.96
LOCATED IN
OPERATOR'S CAB
CHARGE
GAUGE
620E-006 FIRE EXTINGUISHER, PORTABLE

620E-018
AM/FM STEREO CD FIRE EXTINGUISHER, PORTABLE

With two front mounted speakers. Consult the A portable fire extinguisher is located in the
manufacturer's instruction manual for additional operator's cab. The extinguisher should be
information. checked daily to ensure that it is charged. The
pointer on the charge gauge should point to the
green region. If the indicator falls out of this
green area, the extinguisher should be serviced
immediately. Refer also to FIRE PREVENTION in
SECTION 1.
620E-028
RADIO - CB (IF EQUIPPED)

Consult the manufacturer's instruction manual for
additional information.
2.97
CHASSIS
BOLT ON
ACCESS
PANELS
MAINTENANCE
ACCESS DOORS
BOLTS
632E-029 ACCESS PANELS LEFT SIDE

BOLT ON
ACCESS
PANELS
632E-034 FRONT DOOR
DOORS AND ACCESS PANELS

TO OPEN:
1. Park the machine on level ground.
2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest
firmly on the ground.
MAINTENANCE
3. Engage the parking brake. ACCESS DOORS
4. Turn OFF the engine.

5. Remove the ignition key.
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
632E-028 ACCESS PANELS RIGHT SIDE
7. Block wheels.
8. Install the articulation lock bar. CAUTION
9. Remove the two bolts from the left side of the
door and swing open. Park on level ground to prevent
unexpected door closing.
10. When the maintenance is complete, close the
door and reinstall bolts.
If the ground is not level, ensure that the door
swings towards the downhill side to prevent it from
swinging closed on the operator/mechanic.
IMPORTANT !
DO NOT operate dozer with door open.
2.98
ACCESS PANELS
This machine is equipped with bolt on access
panels to provide service access.
DOOR
PROP
MAINTENANCE ACCESS
632E-027 DOOR (RIGHT SIDE SHOWN)
Some panels are equipped with a maintenance
access door to provide quick access for routine
daily maintenance. Maintenance access doors are
equipped with a door prop to hold them open while
in use as shown above.
Always ensure that all access panels are secured
in place and all access doors are closed and
secured before operating the machine.
CAUTION
Always use the door props provided to
safely hold access doors open while in
use.
The engine compartment access panels
are bolted in place. Whenever bolts are
removed panels can fall during the process
of removing them from the machine.
2.99
BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH BELOW RIGHT
CAB DOOR
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION OIL FILL
DIPSTICK LOCATION
BATTERY
DISCONNECT
SWITCH
TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK
632E-012 AND FILL LOCATION
BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH
632E-008 LEFT SIDE ENGINE COMPARTMENT TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK
Located in the engine compartment on the left side The transmission dipstick is located below the right
of the machine, this switch is wired to the positive cab door.
side of the battery. TRANSMISSION OIL FILL LOCATION
When in the OFF position it completely The transmission oil fill is located below the right
disconnects all the machine's electrical circuits cab door.
from the battery and isolates the engine electronic
control unit (ECU) power fuses.
Note that this machine is equipped with an
After Run Disconnect Relay which delays by 90
seconds the power disconnect to engine related
fuses and relays.
only.
On Tier 4f machines only, whenever the engine is
stopped all DEF solution is pumped back to tank
before the engine power system is turned off. This
process takes approximately 90 seconds. Refer to
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM in SECTION 3 for
more information.
2.100
PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM
WATER DOZER BLADE
WATER TANK CONTROL
VALVE
HOSE STORAGE
SHUT-OFF VALVE COMPARTMENT
IN CLOSED
POSITION
620E-004 PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM

A water tank is incorporated into the dozer blade
and is pressurized to 60 psi (4 bar). A valve
controls the flow of water from the tank to a hose
located in the hose storage compartment on the
dozer blade.
The control valve incorporates an air charge valve,
a pressure gauge and a relief valve on the outlet
side of the valve. A ball valve is installed on the
outlet side of the valve and is used to shut off
the water supply to the hose. This shut-off valve
should be in the CLOSED position when the
system is not in use.
The pressure gauge on the valve should read
60 psi (4 bar) check system pressure daily.
Refer to PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE in SECTION 3.
All handles should be hand tight only at all times.
This is particularly important for easy access to the
pressurized water system in the event of a fire or
other emergency.
Refer also to FIRE PREVENTION in SECTION 1.
2.101
OPERATING MACHINE
Before operating this machine, ensure that the
proper lubrication and maintenance schedule has
been performed as outlined in SECTION 3.
For the Diesel Engine supplied with this machine,
refer to the engine manufacturer's operating
manual.
Any personnel who are to operate this machine 632E-030 STANDARD FUEL TANK
must be fully trained in safety and operating
procedures by a competent person. 3. Check fuel gauge and DEF level indicator (if
applicable). Refer to FUEL TANK and DIESEL
Read and understand the entire manual before EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) TANK in SECTION 3
operating the machine. for standard tank capacity information.
PRE-START CHECKS: NOTE: DEF level indicator and its related
components are applicable to TIER 4f
machines only.
4. When computer checks are complete place

1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN ignition switch in the OFF position.
position (engine NOT running) to provide 5. Remove the ignition key.
power to the computer system. Check for any
alarms noted on the computer display and
investigate the cause. Refer to COMPUTER
in THIS SECTION.
ICON ILLUMINATED
(RED) WHEN PARKING
BRAKE IS ENGAGED
SIGHT
GAUGE
MAIN HYDRAULIC OIL

2. Check parking brake for proper operation and 632E-004 SIGHT GAUGE
engage parking brake.
6. Check hydraulic tank oil level with grapple
head fully open, grapple head and dozer blade
on the ground. In this position the oil level
should reach the full mark. Note that the oil
level will drop 2 to 3 in (2 to 7.5 cm) when all
cylinders are extended.
2.102
HAND
DIPSTICK PRIMER
LEFT SIDE
OF ENGINE
FUEL FILTER/
WATER
SEPARATOR
632E-008 ENGINE OIL LEVEL

7. Check the engine oil level. The level of the
oil must be between the ADD and the FULL
LOCATED ON
marks on the dipstick. RIGHT SIDE
BELOW RIGHT
CAB DOOR
632E-005 FUEL WATER SEPARATOR
9. Drain water from fuel line water separator.
Refer to FILTERS, FUEL/WATER
SEPARATOR in SECTION 3.
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION OIL FILL
DIPSTICK LOCATION
TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK
632E-012 AND FILL LOCATION
8. Check transmission oil level. The level of the

oil must be between the ADD and the FULL
marks on the dipstick.
2.103
ENGINE AIR
PRECLEANER
FILL CAP
33952AUNI R0
620E-025 ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

10. Check the engine coolant level. Fill if required. 630E-308 ENGINE AIR PRECLEANER
12. Check air intake precleaner for foreign
material build-up in air intake area or
discharge louver area.
A/C
COMPRESSOR 13. Check air cleaner unloader valve (if equipped)
BELT
AIR
CLEANER
SERPENTINE
BELT
AIR CLEANER
UNLOADER
VALVE
632E-014 ENGINE AIR CLEANER

632E-011 CHECK CONDITION OF ENGINE BELTS
14. Check engine air cleaner restriction indicator.
11. Check tension and condition of all engine
belts. Refer to SERPENTINE BELT
INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT in SECTION
3.
2.104
WATER DOZER BLADE
AIR
CLEANER WATER TANK CONTROL
VALVE
FILTER FILTER
RESTRICTION RESTRICTION
INDICATOR SWITCH
HOSE STORAGE
SHUT-OFF VALVE COMPARTMENT
IN CLOSED
POSITION
620E-004 PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM
632E-009 ENGINE AIR CLEANER 16. Check pressurized water system. The
pressure gauge should read 60 psi. This
15. Clean radiator, oil cooler, CAC (charge air system should be tested once every month.
cooler) and A/C condenser. Remove debris Refer to PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM
from front door and screened access panels MAINTENANCE in SECTION 3.
on both sides of the machine.
17. Perform SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE as
shown in SECTION 3.
18. Inspect machine for leaks , damaged or
loose components and any other abnormal
conditions.
19. Check tire pressures.
20. Check wheel bolts for tightness.
21. Be sure that all covers, guards and doors are
securely fastened.
22. Unlock all cab doors.
IMPORTANT !
Unlock both doors before operating machine
to allow opening from the outside in case of
an emergency. Make sure that the doors are
operational, open the doors twice, once using
the exterior handle and once using the interior
latch handle.
CLEAN RADIATOR, OIL COOLER,

632E-015 CAC AND A/C CONDENSER
2.105
STARTING ENGINE IMPORTANT !
After engine has started, keep engine speed
1. Ensure that PRE-START CHECKS have
low until engine oil pressure registers on
been performed and that the area is clear of
computer display. If engine oil pressure does
personnel prior to starting the engine.
not register within 10 seconds, stop engine
2. Parking brake ENGAGED. and investigate cause.
NOTE: The engine will not turn over unless NOTE: If the engine does not start after
the parking brake is ENGAGED. three attempts, check the fuel supply system.
3. Turn ignition key to RUN position and observe Absence of blue or white exhaust smoke
computer display. during cranking indicates no fuel is being
delivered.
CAUTION
Do not start engine by shorting across
starter terminals. Start engine only from
operator's seat.
If engine stalls while operating the machine,

turn the ignition key to the OFF position and
REPEAT STEPS (1) THROUGH (6).
8. Before applying any load to the engine
proceed with SYSTEM TEST AND WARM UP.
IMPORTANT !
Allow a cold engine to warm up at LOW IDLE
for at least five minutes before applying any
4. Wait for WAIT TO START message on load. Check all gauges often during the warm
computer display to turn off. up period.
5. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine NOTE: For cold weather conditions refer to
start-up. MACHINE WARM UP OPERATION on the
6. Turn ignition key switch to the START position following pages.
to crank the engine. When engine is started
place key switch in RUN position and observe IMPORTANT !
computer display.
Engine should not idle longer than 9 consecutive
Note that the computer control system will hours. Damage to the emission control system will
automatically perform a bulb test when the result. When this machine idles for an extended
keyswitch is released to the RUN position. period excess hydrocarbon buildup is created in
The alarm light will flash and the master alarm the DOC/SCR aftertreatment system. Burn off of
will sound briefly to test for proper operation. excess hydrocarbon at full load immediately after
7. Engine idle speed setting will automatically a long idle period will generate excess heat which
default to LOW IDLE. Keep engine speed low will cause damage to emission control system
until engine oil pressure registers on computer components.
display ( ENGINE MENU - ENGINE
FUNCTIONS). Low engine oil pressure will
only.
trigger an alarm.
CRITICAL – ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW
in THIS SECTION.
2.106
STARTING IN COLD WEATHER
Cold temperatures may require the use of the
engine block heater and the engine oil pan heater.
NOTICE
The engine is equipped with an intake air heater
with a grid element.
WARNING: Using starting fluid (or ether start aids)
on an engine equipped with a grid heater element
can cause an explosion. NEVER USE STARTING
FLUIDS on an engine equipped with a grid heater
element.
WARNING
• DO NOT IDLE THIS ENGINE
FOR MORE THAN 9 HOURS.
• ENGINE EQUIPPED WITH • DAMAGE TO EMISSION
HEATER STARTING AID. CONTROL SYSTEM WILL
• USE OF ETHER COULD RESULT.
RESULT IN DEATH OR 63281BENG R0
SERIOUS INJURY.
36782BENG R0
The grid element preheats engine intake air during IMPORTANT !

cold starts. The wait to start message is shown on Engine should not idle longer than 9 consecutive
the computer display for the duration of the hours. Damage to the emission control system will
preheating phase of engine startup. To minimize result. When this machine idles for an extended
cranking time during cold weather startups, period excess hydrocarbon buildup is created in
ALWAYS wait for the wait to start message on the the DOC/SCR aftertreatment system. Burn off of
computer display to turn off before cranking the excess hydrocarbon at full load immediately after
engine. Before applying any load to the engine a long idle period will generate excess heat which
proceed with SYSTEM TEST AND WARM UP. will cause damage to emission control system
components.
IMPORTANT !
To prevent damage to starter, do not engage NOTE: The aftertreatment system and its related
starter motor for more than 15 to 20 seconds. components are applicable to Tier 4f machines
Wait 2 minutes between each attempt to start only.
the engine. If engine fails to start, refer to engine
manufacturers operator's manual.
NOTE: This engine is equipped with a STARTER
LOCKOUT feature that prevents the starter motor
from being engaged before the engine ECU is
online, before the WAIT TO START message on
the computer display is OFF and when the engine
is already running.
IMPORTANT !
Cold startups can result in pump failure, refer to
"APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS" in SECTION 3
for recommended oil viscosities and temperature
ranges.
NOTE: For cold weather conditions refer to
MACHINE WARM UP OPERATION on the
following pages.
2.107
MACHINE WARM UP OPERATION
The MACHINE WARM UP function is provided to
increase engine idle speed to assist in warming
the engine and cab temperature in cold weather
conditions.
NOTE: To set the MACHINE WARM UP function
ON the engine must be running and the parking
brake must be ENGAGED. Disengaging the
parking brake will turn the MACHINE WARM UP
function OFF.
TO TURN MACHINE WARM UP FUNCTION OFF:

When engine and cab have warmed to the
desired temperature, the machine warm up
function can be turned off by pressing the
F1 ( ) button again (at the engine display
screen) or by disengaging the parking brake.
TO TURN MACHINE WARM UP FUNCTION ON:
From the main menu press the F1 button to

select the engine display.
warm up function ON/OFF. The machine
warm up icon at the top of the screen is
illuminate when the machine warm up function
is ON.
Refer to MACHINE WARM UP SPEED
ADJUSTMENT in THIS SECTION to adjust
machine warm up speed setting if required.
2.108
MACHINE WARM UP
SPEED ADJUSTMENT
Press the arrow up or arrow down buttons to scroll

to the setting to be adjusted.
From the main menu press F2 button to select the Press the F2 button to reset to default setting.
ADJUSTMENT MENU. Press F2 (Yes) or F3 (No) to confirm.
The engine settings menu will appear by default.

Press F1 (Adjust) to adjust engine settings
2.109
OR OR
Press the OK button to go to the adjustment
display.
To reset to default setting press the F2 button.

Press F2 (Yes) or F3 (No) to confirm.
Press the arrow up or arrow down buttons to make
the adjustment.

adjustment menu.
Press the OK button to confirm the setting. Press the back button again to return to the
main menu.adjustment menu.
main menu.
2.110
SYSTEM TEST AND WARM UP (l) Engage the parking brake.
Before commencing skidding operations, follow (m) Decrease engine idle speed to LOW IDLE.
steps (a) through (n) to accomplish the following:
• Warm up the hydraulic system. CAUTION
• Test all systems for proper operation.
• Inspect for hydraulic oil leaks.
Ensure that the machine was parked on level
ground at last shutdown:
Never use your bare hand to check for fluid
(a) Start engine. leaks.
(b) Ensure that computer displays are indicating Fluid leaks under pressure may not be
normal operating conditions. visible. When searching for leaks, wear
work gloves and use a wrench or piece of
(c) Check that all personnel are clear of the wood to move hydraulic hoses. Do not
machine. Disengage the parking brake. grab hold of hydraulic hoses. Wear safety
(d) Slowly raise and lower the arch, check for goggles for eye protection.
proper operation.
(n) Leave the cab and visually check hose
With the grapple and dozer raised slightly off connections and cylinders for leaks. Check
the ground: under the machine for oil leaks.
(e) Operate the grapple arms and check for
proper operation.
(f) Rotate grapple in each direction for several
revolutions and check that it is operating
correctly.
(g) Raise and lower dozer blade
(h) Steer the machine to the left and right.
(i) When cold weather conditions exist, continue
the process of warming up the hydraulic
system by repeating steps (e) through (h)
several times. As the hydraulic system warms
up, engine speed can be increased gradually
to the HIGH IDLE.
(j) Observe all operations. If any operations
are not functioning as they should, take the
necessary steps to correct the problem.
After completion of the warm up and system
testing, lower the dozer blade and grapple to
the ground.
(k) Check service brake for proper operation.
Refer to SERVICE BRAKE – CHECKING
BRAKE AND ACCUMULATOR FOR PROPER
OPERATION in SECTION 3.
2.111
STOPPING ENGINE: RESTARTING AN ENGINE
THAT HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL
CAUTION If the engine runs out of fuel, the fuel line is self
priming.
Stopping the engine immediately after it
has been working under load can result 1. Refill fuel tank completely.
in overheating and premature wear of the 2. Turn ignition key to RUN position and observe
engine components. Follow the stopping computer display.
procedure outlined below to allow the
3. Wait for WAIT TO START message on
engine to cool.
computer display to turn off.
1. Park the machine on level ground. 4. Turn ignition switch to the START position to
crank engine.
firmly on the ground. If it fails to start after 20 seconds, stop and
wait for 2 minutes before trying again.
3. R
educe engine speed to LOW IDLE and let
run for approximately three to five minutes to 5. When engine starts, release ignition key to
allow gradual dissipation of heat and also to RUN position and observe the computer
reduce turbo speed. This will also prevent loss display.
of coolant by after boil and possible hot spot IMPORTANT !
damage to the engine. To prevent damage to starter, do not engage
4. Do not race engine before shut-off. starter motor for more than 15 to 20 seconds.
Wait 2 minutes between each attempt to start
5. Parking brake ENGAGED. the engine.
6. S
top engine by turning ignition switch to the If engine fails to start, refer to engine
OFF position. manufacturers operator's manual.
8. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. WARNING
Note that this machine is equipped with an Before leaving the machine, park it in a
After Run Disconnect Relay which delays by 90 safe position on level ground. Lower the
seconds the power disconnect to engine related grapple and dozer blade to the ground and
fuses and relays. engage parking brake.
NOTE: The aftertreatment system and its related Never work behind, in front of, or below a
components are applicable to Tier 4f machines skidder that has been parked on a grade.
only. Take additional precautions by placing the
wheels against a rock, tree or other secure
On Tier 4f machines only, whenever the engine is object.
stopped all DEF solution is pumped back to tank
before the engine power system is turned off. This
process takes approximately 90 seconds. Refer to WARNING
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM in SECTION 3 for
more information. When leaving the cab, always lower the
dozer blade to the ground, engage the
parking brake and turn the ignition switch
OFF.
If leaving the Skidder unattended, also
remove the ignition key and switch the
battery disconnect switch to OFF .
2.112
TRAVELLING WITHOUT A LOAD: Refer to STEERING in THIS SECTION for
more detailed steering control information.
Raise the grapple and place the dozer blade in
the UP position. (5) Use differential locks sparingly and ONLY
when additional traction is required.
(1) Disengage parking brake. NOTE: Machine
Never continuously drive the machine with
will not move if the parking brake is not fully
the differential locks on. Serious damage to
off.
the axles can result from using the differential
(2) Check the position of the maximum speed locks when they are not needed for additional
control to ensure that it is set to the desired traction.
position.
Note: This machine is equipped with a 10
Using the maximum speed control the minute AUTO-OFF feature which automatically
operator is able to set the maximum travel deactivates the differential locks after 10
speed of the machine. This allows the minutes have passed.
operator to maintain any desired travel speed
NOTE: The high idle adjust function is available.
with full drive pedal operation. Machine travel
This function is intended to allow the automatic
speed reduction can still be achieved by not
reduction of the engine high idle speed limit
fully depressing the foot pedal.
when travelling without a load. Refer also to
This control can be used while the machine is COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU - ENGINE
in motion. SETTINGS – ENGINE HIGH IDLE ADJUST in
THIS SECTION.
Caution: Setting the maximum speed control
to the minimum setting lowers maximum travel
speed only, it will NOT prevent the machine
from travelling when the forward or reverse
travel controls are used.
(3) ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING
Use the direction selection switch on the
LH joystick to choose forward or reverse
and press the travel foot pedal to move the
machine in that direction.
STATIONARY SEAT & STEERING WHEEL
Operate the drive travel pedals to move
the machine forward or reverse.
(4) Be aware of the type of steering control (and
steer valve option - if applicable) the machine
is equipped with. Steering control operation
varies with the type of controls in use.
Generally, this machine is equipped with Load
Sensing Steering. The speed that the vehicle
responds to steering control input will vary,
depending on the speed that the steering
control is moved.
When operating on the road, a slow movement
of the steering control will not overcorrect and
will steer a straight normal course.
changes and this is produced by a rapid
movement of the steering control, which will
quickly change the vehicles direction.
2.113
OPERATING GRAPPLE: CENTRE JOINT:
DAILY INSPECTION/SERVICE It is very important that the machine not be
operated if there is any looseness in the centre
Check the Operator’s Manual for your Grapple
joint bearings.
Lubricate all grease fittings
Refer to MAINTENANCE OF THE CENTRE
Check all hydraulic fittings JOINT in SECTION 3 for visual checking
Check hoses for wear. Replace as required. procedures.
Check for excessive wear at pin points. For further information regarding adjustment and
maintenance of the centre joint refer to CENTRE
Inspect for trash accumulation and clean out. JOINT in SECTION 11 of the SERVICE MANUAL.
Check for excessive head swing and tighten the
snubber to prevent damage to grapple or arch.
620E-015 TYPICAL TIGERCAT GRAPPLE
OPERATION
Grapple operations should always be performed
while seated in the operator’s seat.
The controls will return to neutral automatically
when released.
The Constant Pressure button on the joystick will
provide a constant closing pressure to the tongs to
take up the slack as the logs are lifted and settle
together. This pressure is released when the
grapple is opened.
Refer to RH JOYSTICK in THIS SECTION for
specific information on grapple operating controls.
2.114
OPERATING WINCH:
WARNING
Place the skidder in a safe, stable location, in line
with the load. When operating Carco winches the load
Lower the grapple and dozer blade to the ground MUST be removed from the cable before
to anchor the machine. placing the winch control in the freespool
position to avoid damage to the winch
FOR CARCO WINCH
which could cause a safety hazard.
Place the winch select switch in the (freespool) Attempting to engage or disengage the
position. The winch freespool icon on the main freespool function with a load on the cable
menu of the computer display will be illuminated. will cause damage to clutch halves, piston,
This will allow the cable to unwind freely from final planetary gearing and/or output shaft.
the drum and also disconnects the drive motor Damage to freespool components can
from the drum in the winch and allow the cable cause a sudden loss of load control which
to be freely pulled from the spool by hand. The could result in death or serious injury.
freespool function is intended for use in pulling the
cable by hand only and must not be used when
the cable is loaded. Improper use of the freespool
function will result in damage to the winch.
Make sure the cable is running freely through the
fairlead rollers.
Avoid winching at an angle to the skidder.
Pull the cable from the drum and attach to object.
Safety gloves should be worn.
To retrieve the cable:
Close cab door and disengage parking brake.
Place the winch select switch (to the left of the
lever) in the I (ON) position. Pull and hold the
lever BACK to wind in the winch cable. For safety
reasons this lever returns to the neutral (centre)
position when released.
Avoid pulling the hook over the drum and through
the throat of the winch.
To use the driveaway function:
Place the winch select switch (to the left of the
lever) in the I (ON) position. Push and hold the
winch control lever FORWARD to release the
dynamic brake for dropping a load on the fly
or drive away from a load with slight tension on
the cable. The control lever will return to the centre
neutral position when released.
Refer also to CAB CONTROLS – WINCH SELECT
SWITCH and CAB CONTROLS – WINCH
CONTROL LEVER in THIS SECTION.
2.115
SKIDDING SKIDDING TECHNIQUE
For more safety related information see also WARNING
the Equipment Manufacturers Institute (EMI)
Log Skidder Safety Manual for Operators and • Only operate in areas where Skidder will be in
Mechanics supplied with this machine. a stable condition
SAFETY: • Avoid felling and bucking areas. Sound your
horn when entering.
1. Know all Federal, State/Provincial and local
rules which apply to your machine and job • Never travel across a STEEP slope or side
site. hill.
2. NEVER operate this machine while under the • Never make an uphill turn on a slope
influence of drugs or alcohol.
• Never approach an unstable log from the
3. Know the limitations of your Skidder and downhill side.
Yourself as an operator.
• Do not work below machines that are parked
4. Check the work area for HAZARDS, both at on a hill.
ground level and overhead.
• Wear heavy gloves when handing the cables.
5. Always wear and use your seat belt and other
• Use the PARKING BRAKE where appropriate.
Personal Protective Equipment, such as: hard
hat, safety shoes, safety glasses and heavy • Operate the winch ONLY FROM THE
gloves. OPERATOR’S SEAT, never from outside the
cab.
6. Rain, snow, ice, loose gravel, soft ground, etc.
will change the operating capabilities of your • Do not winch at a sharp angle. This could
machine. cause your machine to tip over.
7. Keep all work surfaces and engine • Overloading can make a machine unstable
compartment clean and free of oil, grease, and create a roll-over condition.
snow, ice and debris. Give special care to • Keep load low and close to skidder for best
hand-holds, steps, pedals and floors. stability.
8. Be constantly aware of the location of fellow • A load of logs will change the handling and
workers. Especially those on foot. stability of the skidder.
9. Your Skidder is a one person machine. No • Always be prepared to dump the load in case
riders inside or outside. of emergency.
10. Be aware of what is happening around you.
Maintain a safe operating distance between
your machine and other equipment and
workers.
11. Know the hand signals that are being used on
your job site.
12. Keep skid roads, secondary trails and landing
areas clear of debris and in good condition.
2.116
CORRECT
KEEP LOAD LOW AND CLOSE
TO SKIDDER FOR BEST
STABILITY.
BETTER WEIGHT
DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN
FRONT AND REAR OF
MACHINE.
INCORRECT
DECREASED STABILITY DUE
TO LOAD POSITION.
POORER WEIGHT
DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN
FRONT AND REAR OF
MACHINE
EFFECT OF LOAD POSITION ON STABILITY AND WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION
2.117
GRAPPLE SKIDDING CABLE SKIDDING:
1. The timber may be pre-bunched or left for 1. Locate the skidder so that the winch cable will
single pick-up. Depending on sizes you may lay in a fairly straight line.
have to single skid or bunch before skidding.
2. Lower the dozer and grapple to the ground to
2. Logs should be picked up 3 ft. (1 meter) from anchor the machine.
the butt end.
Grapple may have to be raised, depending on
3. If you have to add more logs or bunch, place winching angle and land terrain.
the butt end of the new logs crosswise on
3. Chokers should be attached close to the butt
top of the load in an “X” pattern. Place the
end of the log.
Grapple over the logs where they cross and
pick up the complete load. 4. If skidding multiple logs, attach furthest log
away, to end of main cable, with closer logs
4. The articulation feature in the Skidder
ahead of it.
increases the reach to the left and right and
increases the range of pick-up for the grapple. 5. Winch in a straight line to prevent tip over
problems. Note that cab doors must be closed
5. When pushing or backing up with a load, you
and parking brake disengaged to operate the
must have the logs lined up with the Skidder
winch in function.
and backup in a straight line, since you are
using the butt pan to push the logs. 6. Draw the logs in as close as possible to the
butt pan and as high as stability will permit.
6. The articulation feature allows decking the
logs from both sides of the pile. 7. Raise the grapple to a safe height and raise
the dozer to its full height.
7. Timber can be piled using the grapple or the
dozer blade, depending on conditions. 8. If you encounter soft ground or steep hills it
may be necessary to drop the load “on the
8. The Dual Arch Skidder has the added ability to
move” and allow the winch to “free spool”
reach below ground level. This feature can be
without stopping the skidder. Once on solid
used to get the machine unstuck.
ground or on top of the hill, stop the skidder,
Do not drop the load as it helps to support lower the dozer and winch the load back into
the weight of the machine. Pull the load up the butt pan.
close to the butt pan and lower the grapple
9. Adjust your speed to the terrain, ground
downwards to solid ground. This process will
conditions and the load your skidding.
push the back end of the Skidder upward and
forward. Continue to repeat this process until
the Skidder is on solid ground.
WARNING
Backup carefully. If a log strikes an object,
it could be pushed forward through the
grapple and into the operator's cab.
When running empty, always keep grapple
tongs closed to prevent striking the tires
or the machine.
2.118
CARE OF THE MACHINE
1. Ensure that all fluid levels are always at
the proper level. Use the preventative
maintenance schedule in SECTION 3 .
2. Follow proper procedure for cleaning windows
described in this section.
3. Apply grease to all lubrication points at
required intervals.
4. Do not apply load to a cold engine.
5. Close and secure all doors and access covers.
6. Do not allow branches, twigs, leaves or pine
needles to build up around radiator intake
doors or anywhere else on the machine.
Clean frequently but at least once daily.
7. Be sure that the grapple and dozer blade
are resting on the ground before servicing or
parking the machine.
IMPORTANT !
When cleaning the machine with pressurized
water it is important to avoid getting water
directly or indirectly into the exhaust tube. Water
in the exhaust tube will damage sensors and
SCR system components and affect the proper
operation of the aftertreatment system and the
engine.
2.119
ARTICULATION LOCK ~ ARTICULATION LOCK ~
STRAIGHT LOCKED POSITION ARTICULATED LOCKED POSITION
1. Park the machine on level ground and steer 1. P
ark the machine on level ground and steer
machine into a straight ahead position. machine into a fully articulated position to the
right.
2. L
ower the grapple and dozer blade to rest
firmly on the ground. 2. L
3. Engage the parking brake.
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
ARTICULATION
LOCK
ARTICULATION
LOCK
REAR CHASSIS
REAR CHASSIS
RETAINING PINS
RETAINING PINS
ARTICULATION LOCK
620E-002 STORED POSITION ARTICULATION LOCK
620E-002 STORED POSITION
7. Remove both retaining pins from the
articulation lock. Relocate articulation lock 7. Remove both retaining pins from the
between front and rear chassis. Line up holes articulation lock. Relocate articulation lock
at each end of articulation lock with holes in between front and rear chassis. Line up holes
chassis’ and secure in place with both on the articulation lock with holes in chassis’
retaining pins. as shown and secure in place with both
retaining pins.
8. A
fter work is completed, relocate articulation
lock into storage position on rear chassis and 8. After work is completed, relocate articulation
hold in place with retaining pins. lock into storage position on rear chassis and
hold in place with retaining pins.
2.120
RETRIEVAL POINTS These points are designed to accept a lifting
chain shackle. Warning: Use shackles and
Retrieval of the machine may be required, in the
chains that are appropriately sized for the load
event that a machine becomes immobile due to
to be retrieved.
terrain conditions that do not permit it to escape
under its own power. 3. REAR RETRIEVAL POINTS
Refer also to TOWING INSTRUCTIONS in THIS If the machine becomes immobile with its rear
SECTION, in the event that the engine or drive oriented towards the aiding machine, there
system are not functioning well enough to allow are retrieval points located at the rear chassis
the machine to move in tandem with the aiding on each end of the rear axle. These points
machine. are labeled 'I' and 'J' on the machine lifting/tie-
down label.
1. There are retrieval points located on both
the front and rear of the machine to aid in its These points must be used together in a
retrieval. retrieval situation.
2. FRONT RETRIEVAL POINTS These points are designed to accept a lifting
chain/hook in either a basket or choker hitch
If the machine becomes immobile with its front
configuration. Warning: Use chains that are
oriented towards the aiding machine, there are
appropriately sized for the load to be retrieved.
two retrieval points located at the front of the
These points must be used together in a
front chassis in front of the heat exchanger.
retrieval situation.
These points are labeled 'G' and 'H' on the
machine lifting/tie-down label. 4. Once the immobile machine has been
connected to the aiding machine, both
These points must be used together in a
machines can move in tandem to free the
retrieval situation.
immobile machine.
E B AF
A
J
B
H C
D
G
I E
E C DF F
I,J G,H G
E B,C A,D F J
43398BUNI R0
E B1 B2 AF
A
B
J
H C
D
I G
E
E C1 C2 DF F
G
I,J G,H
J
E B1,C1 B2,C2 A,D F
43510BUNI R0
2.121
TRANSPORTING INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
The skidder may be transported with the wheels
on or off. As a fire prevention measure, AFTER
With wheels on:- transporting (trucking) a machine from
one job sight to the next, open all doors
• DO NOT remove air from tires, this will result and access panels and blow off any debris
in damage to the tires! that could have re-positioned itself onto
With wheels off:- the engine and exhaust parts due to wind
turbulance caused by the journey. Refer
• If the wheels are removed the machine must
also to FIRE PREVENTION in SECTION 1.
be blocked so that the centre joint is one
inch or more above the truck bed.
• Chains must be attached to the grapple to
With the wheels on or off:- prevent movement.
• The dozer blade must be down on the truck • Additional chains may be installed on the two
bed. tow lugs (front of unit) and on the bottom cab
• The grapple must be closed and lowered to access steps.
the truck bed. IMPORTANT !
When transporting the machine, chains must be
used to prevent forward, reverse and side to side
movement of the machine.
Do not secure the machine to the truck
ANYWHERE near the centre joint area as this can
ARTICULATION LOCK IN seriously damage the centre joint.
Use only transport regulation chains for this
• The articulation lock bar must be installed so
purpose, example; 5/16" grade 7 with a tensile
that the machine is oriented in the straight
strength of 43500 kg (96,000lb)/chain. Using
locked position.
inferior or damaged chains could cause the load to
• The machine must be cross chained (side to shift.
side) at both the front and rear axle area.
E B AF
A
J
B
H C
D
G
I E
E C DF F
I,J G,H G
E B,C A,D F J
43398BUNI R0
2.122
TIE DOWN POINTS The chain should be wrapped around each

1. When a skidder is to be transported on a flat end of the axle housing, without overlapping,
bed the articulation lock bar must be installed and chained at 45° angle in the forward,
so that the machine is oriented in the straight reverse and side to side directions.
locked position. 5. The grapple is to be stored in a position with
2. Chains must be used to prevent forward, grapple tongs closed and supported by the
reverse and side to side movement of the flat bed platform. The grapple tie-down points
machine. Tie-down locations are provided on are labelled 'E' on the machine lifting/tie-down
the machine for this purpose. All tie-down label.
points must be used to ensure no movement A strap or chain is to be tightened across
of the machine, or it’s associated parts, occur the top of the grapple box to prevent grapple
during transport. movement.
3. The front axle of the machine must be cross 6. The dozer blade is to be stored in a position
chained from side to side. The front axle with its blade tip supported by the flat bed
tie-down points are labeled 'A' and 'D' on the platform. The dozer blade tie-down points are
machine lifting/tie-down label. labelled 'F' on the machine lifting/tie-down
The chain should be wrapped around each label.
end of the axle housing, without overlapping, A strap or chain is to be tightened across
and chained at a 45° angle in the forward, the top of the dozer blade arms to prevent
reverse and side to side directions. movement.
4. In the case of a 4 wheeled machine, the rear
axle of the machine must be cross chained
from side to side of the flat bed. The rear axle
tie-down points are labeled 'B' and 'C' on the
machine lifting/tie-down label.
E B1 B2 AF
A
B
J
H C
D
I G
E
E C1 C2 DF F
G
I,J G,H
J
E B1,C1 B2,C2 A,D F
43510BUNI R0
2.123
LIFTING POINTS 3. Additionally there are lifting points located at
the rear chassis on each end of the rear axle.
Lifting of the machine should be done for
These points are labeled 'I' and 'J' on the
transportation purposes only.
machine lifting/tie-down label.
WARNING These points are designed to accept a lifting

chain/hook in either a basket or choker hitch
Use shackles and chains that are configuration.
appropriately sized for the load to be lifted. 4. All lifting points must be used during a lifting
operation.
1. The articulation lock bar must be installed so
5. Position the hoist above the centre of gravity to
that the machine is oriented in the straight
ensure machine stability & levelling.
locked position.
2. There are two lifting points located at the
front of the front chassis in front of the heat
exchanger. These points are labeled 'G' and
'H' on the machine lifting/tie-down label.
These points are designed to accept a lifting
chain shackle.
E B AF
A
J
B
H C
D
G
I E
E C DF F
I,J G,H G
E B,C A,D F J
43398BUNI R0
E B1 B2 AF
A
B
J
H C
D
I G
E
E C1 C2 DF F
G
I,J G,H
J
E B1,C1 B2,C2 A,D F
43510BUNI R0
2.124
TOWING INSTRUCTIONS
(IF EQUIPPED WITH SINGLE SPEED CAUTION
MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION)
Before towing, the transmission must
A malfunction of the machines equipment may always be placed in NEUTRAL.
make towing necessary. Never tow a machine in gear. If the
Towing is only recommended over short distances. machine is subjected to hard pulling
It is always better to make repairs at the point while in gear, the extremely high forces
where the machine is parked whenever possible. created will cause significant damage to
the components of the hydrostatic drive
1. To facilitate towing, the transmission must be
system and the transmission.
placed in NEUTRAL, this will disconnect the
wheels from the hydraulic motors. Never tow the machine at over 2 mph.
This will cause significant damage to the
The transmission disconnect lever is accessed transmission.
from the right side, below the cab. A short bar
Never press the forward or reverse pedals
is placed through the hole in the lever and
while the transmission is in neutral. This
pulled upwards to put the transmission into
will cause significant damage to the
neutral.
transmission.
Note if equipped with an EHS transmission
please refer to TOWING INSTRUCTIONS - STEERING STEERING
EHS TRANSMISSION in THIS SECTION. CYLINDERS CYLINDERS
DISCONNECT
LEVER
NORMAL HOSE HOSES ON ONE CYLINDER CROSS

SM47 CONNECTIONS CONNECTED FOR TOWING
4. To allow the machine to steer while towing

and prevent damage to the steering
cylinders, cross hydraulic hoses on one of
the steering cylinders. This will allow trapped
oil to flow freely between the two steering
cylinders, providing ease of turning with some
TRANSMISSION DISCONNECT LEVER dampening effect.
620E-016 SHOWN IN NEUTRAL 5. The machine will be towed from the front,
making use of the towing lugs at front of
2. Remove parking brake supply hose from the
machine behind the dozer blade.
manifold and connect to a remote power
source. Pressurize circuit to 600 psi to Ensure a vehicle of equal power and size is
disengage parking brake. used for towing.
3. Raise the grapple and dozer blade off the When going downhill, be sure to use a hold-
ground and turn off the engine. back vehicle as the machine is now without
any effective braking.
6. When towing is completed, reconnect parking
brake supply hose and steering cylinder hoses
in their proper locations.
2.125
TOWING INSTRUCTIONS
A malfunction of the machines equipment may
make towing necessary.
Towing is only recommended over short distances.
It is always better to make repairs at the point
where the machine is parked whenever possible.
Prior to towing, be sure that the machine is either
on level ground, or is secured by the tow vehicle to
prevent the machine from rolling unexpectedly.
IMPORTANT ! 615C-025 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Before towing, the transmission must always be
disconnected from the drive wheels.
Never tow a machine in gear. If the machine
is subjected to hard pulling while in gear, the
extremely high forces created will cause significant
damage to the components of the hydrostatic drive
system and the transmission
Never tow the machine at over 2 mph.
1. To facilitate towing, the drive shafts must be
disconnected from the transmission.
2. Disconnect the front drive shaft at the front
axle.
632E-032 MID DRIVE SHAFT
3. Remove the mid drive shaft.
4. Raise the grapple and dozer blade off the
ground and turn off the engine.
5. To allow the machine to steer while towing
and prevent damage to the steering
cylinders, cross hydraulic hoses on one of
the steering cylinders. This will allow trapped
oil to flow freely between the two steering
cylinders, providing ease of turning with some
dampening effect.
6. The machine will be towed from the front,
making use of the towing lugs at front of
machine behind the dozer blade.
Ensure a vehicle of equal power and size is 632E-033 MID DRIVE SHAFT
used for towing.
STEERING STEERING
When going downhill, be sure to use a hold- CYLINDERS CYLINDERS
back vehicle as the machine is now without
any effective braking.
7. When towing is completed, reinstall the mid
drive shaft, reconnect the front driveshaft and
reconnect the steering cylinder hoses in their
proper locations.
NORMAL HOSE HOSES ON ONE CYLINDER CROSS

SM47 CONNECTIONS CONNECTED FOR TOWING
2.126
LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE......................................................................................................................3

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM................................................................................................................ 3.44

AIR CLEANER MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 3.41
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM, CHECKING........................................................................................... 3.28
APPROVED ANTI-SEIZE PASTES FOR EXHAUST / AFTERTREATMENT LINE
(TIGERCAT BY FPT TIER 4F ENGINES)................................................................................................ 3.59
APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS.............................................................................................................. 3.17
ARTICULATION LOCK............................................................................................................................. 3.79
AXLE
AXLE LEVEL CHECK, FILL AND DRAIN LOCATIONS....................................................................... 3.62
LIMITED SLIP ADDITIVES......................................................................................................... 3.62, 3.64
REAR (BOGIE) AXLE (635G)
DRAINING AND REFILLING BOGIE AXLE...................................................................................... 3.64
SLEW BEARING LUBRICATION - BOGIE AXLES........................................................................... 3.66
CAB SAFETY CABLE.............................................................................................................................. 3.71
CAB SUPPORT BRACE.......................................................................................................................... 3.71
CARE OF POLYCARBONATE WINDOWS.............................................................................................. 3.82
CAUTIONS...........................................................................................................................................3.84
CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS................................................................................................................ 3.84
CONCEALING HAIRLINE SCRATCHES.............................................................................................. 3.85
FIRE PRECAUTIONS........................................................................................................................... 3.85
GRAFFITI REMOVAL........................................................................................................................... 3.85
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................... 3.82
RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS........................................................................................................... 3.83
RESISTANCE TO WATER.................................................................................................................... 3.83
CENTRE JOINT
LUBRICATION...................................................................................................................................... 3.69
MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................................... 3.69
CLEANING A/C CONDENSER AND COOLER PACKAGE...................................................................... 3.86
COMMERCIAL WOOD – WEIGHTS........................................................................................................ 3.93
COOLER PACKAGE COMPONENTS..................................................................................................... 3.30
DENOX 2.2 SYSTEM............................................................................................................................... 3.44
DEPRESSURIZING SUSPENDED MACHINE ELEMENTS.................................................................... 3.78
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) HANDLING......................................................................................... 3.60
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) TANK................................................................................................... 3.47
DIESEL OXIDATION CATALYST/SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTION
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM (DENOX 2.2 SYSTEM)......................................................................... 3.44
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT............................................................................................................... 3.31
DRAINING HYDRAULIC TANK................................................................................................................ 3.22
DRAINING THE DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID TANK.................................................................................. 3.48
DRAINING THE FUEL TANK................................................................................................................... 3.40
DRAINING TRANSMISSION OIL............................................................................................................. 3.61
Lubrication and Maintenance Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder
EMERGENCY EXITS, CHECK MONTHLY................................................................................................ 3.9

FILLING HYDRAULIC TANK.................................................................................................................... 3.23
FILTERS
CHARGE PRESSURE FILTER............................................................................................................. 3.26
DEF DOSING MODULE FILTER
CHANGING DEF FILTER, DEF FLUSHING TEST AND UDST (UREA DOSING SYSTEM TEST).. 3.52
FUEL FILL STRAINER.......................................................................................................................... 3.39
FUEL FILTERS..................................................................................................................................... 3.34
CHANGING FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR............................................................................ 3.37
DRAINING FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR............................................................................. 3.36
HYDRAULIC OIL DOUBLE FILTERS................................................................................................... 3.24
SERVICING GUIDELINES FOR OIL FILTERS..................................................................................... 3.24
TRANSMISSION FILTER..................................................................................................................... 3.27
FIRE PREVENTION................................................................................................................................. 3.10
FUEL, REFUELLING PROCEDURE........................................................................................................ 3.40
FUEL TANK..............................................................................................................................................3.38
FUSE AND RELAY PANELS
CAB......................................................................................................................................................3.32
ELECTRICAL BOX............................................................................................................................... 3.33
GENERAL MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................................... 3.9
GRAPPLE SNUBBER MAINTENANCE................................................................................................... 3.74
HOUR METER – MAINTENANCE............................................................................................................. 3.4
HYDRAULIC FILL PUMP......................................................................................................................... 3.23
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK............................................................................................................................ 3.22
HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER.............................................................................................................. 3.22
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE POINTS
6320101 TO 6320300........................................................................................................................... 3.18
6353001 TO 6353200........................................................................................................................... 3.20
NEW MACHINE MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 3.4
FIRST 125 HOUR INSPECTION AND SERVICE REPORT................................................................... 3.4
INITIAL PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION.................................................................................................. 3.4
OIL ANALYSIS PROGRAM....................................................................................................................... 3.5
OIL LOST FROM LEAKAGE...................................................................................................................... 3.9
OIL SAMPLE COLLECTION PROCEDURES............................................................................................ 3.6
PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM MAINTENANCE............................................................................... 3.72
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE............................................................................................. 3.4
REAR PILOT ACCUMULATOR
CHECKING FOR PROPER OPERATION............................................................................................ 3.68
REFUELLING PROCEDURE................................................................................................................... 3.40
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
8 HOURS.............................................................................................................................................. 3.11
48 HOURS............................................................................................................................................3.12
125 HOURS.......................................................................................................................................... 3.12
250 HOURS.......................................................................................................................................... 3.13
500 HOURS.......................................................................................................................................... 3.13
1000 HOURS........................................................................................................................................3.14
1500 HOURS........................................................................................................................................3.15
2000 HOURS........................................................................................................................................3.15
2 YEARS...............................................................................................................................................3.15
SEASONAL...........................................................................................................................................3.16
3.2
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Lubrication and Maintenance
SERPENTINE BELT INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT.............................................................................. 3.29
SERVICE AND LUBRICATION POINTS
6320101 TO 6320300........................................................................................................................... 3.18
6353001 TO 6353200........................................................................................................................... 3.20
SERVICE BRAKE
CHECKING BRAKE AND ACCUMULATOR FOR PROPER OPERATION.......................................... 3.67
STARTUP PROCEDURE AFTER MAJOR MAINTENANCE.................................................................... 3.80
TILTING THE CAB................................................................................................................................... 3.70
TIRE PRESSURES.................................................................................................................................. 3.94
TORQUE CHART..................................................................................................................................... 3.88
TORQUE CHART, GENERAL.................................................................................................................. 3.89
TORQUE, FLUID CONNECTIONS.......................................................................................................... 3.90
WEIGHTS OF COMMERCIAL WOOD..................................................................................................... 3.93
WHEELS, INSTALLING.............................................................................................................................. 3.4
WINCH MAINTENANCE - CARCO.......................................................................................................... 3.76
WOOD, WEIGHTS OF COMMERCIAL WOOD....................................................................................... 3.93
3.3
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
FOR 632E/635G Skidder
NEW MACHINE MAINTENANCE
*INITIAL PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION:-
PERFORM THE INITIAL PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION
USING Tigercat FORM NUMBER 5339;
"PDI AND 125 HOUR INSPECTION REPORT"
*FIRST 125 HOUR INSPECTION AND SERVICE REPORT:-

WITH THE OWNER'S MECHANIC PRESENT,
PERFORM AN INSPECTION AND SERVICE
ACCORDING TO THE Tigercat FORM NUMBER 5339;
"PDI AND 125 HOUR INSPECTION REPORT"
THIS MUST BE COMPLETED WITHIN THE FIRST 125 HOUR TIME FRAME.
*IMPORTANT: TO QUALIFY FOR CONTINUED WARRANTY,

THIS REPORT MUST BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED TO
Tigercat Industries Inc. WARRANTY DEPARTMENT.
TIGHTENING POINTS FOR:- IMPORTANT!

THE FIRST 125 HOUR INSPECTION WHEELS:
REPORT: When installing wheels, ensure that all paint has
All hydraulic connections been removed from the mating surfaces of both
Hose clamps the wheel disc and the flange of the axle to ensure
Centre joint pin securing bolts metal to metal contact.
Transmission securing bolts For more complete instructions also refer to
Engine mounting bolts section 8 of the service manual.
Axle mounting bolts
Wheel retaining bolts HOUR METER – MAINTENANCE:
Cab securing bolts Check the hour meter on a regular basis to
Pin retainers determine your scheduled maintenance times.
Any other loose nut, bolt or fitting The intervals and times on the scheduled
maintenance chart in this manual are for normal
NOTE: Use of filters other than genuine Tigercat operating conditions.
replacement filters is not recommended. If your machine is being operated in difficult
or severe conditions, you should service your
machine at shorter intervals.
Refer to engine OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL for additional required
maintenance.
3.4
TIGERCAT OIL ANALYSIS PROGRAM

Effective for all 2007 model year 600'E' series skidders sold in North America, oil sampling and analysis
must be performed during the warranty period as per the schedule below.
Warranty coverage of powertrain components, specifically hydrostatic pumps and motors, auxiliary
pumps, axles, transfer case and driveshafts is contingent on performance of regular oil sampling at the
owner’s expense during the warranty period.
632E/635G Model
Location First Sample Follow-up Samples
Hydraulic Oil 125 Hours Every 1000 Hours or 6 Months
Transmission 125 Hours Every Oil Change (500 Hours or 3 Months)
Axles – Front & Rear 125 Hours Every Oil Change (1000 Hours or 6 Months)
FIRST SAMPLE
There will be no charge for the first oil samples required to be taken during the 125-Hour Inspection
Service that will be scheduled and performed by your Tigercat dealer. Refer to NEW MACHINE
MAINTENANCE in THIS SECTION.
FOLLOW-UP SAMPLES
All follow-up samples must be taken as indicated in the chart above and will be the responsibility of the
machine owner.
Copies of all oil analysis results must be forwarded to the Tigercat Warranty Department for
continued warranty coverage. If samples are taken using the Tigercat Oil Analysis Program, a copy of
all results will automatically be sent to Tigercat.
Tigercat Oil Analysis Kits are available from your Tigercat dealer parts department. If required,
arrangements can also be made with your Tigercat dealer to supply and perform all of the required follow-
up oil samples.
Refer also to OIL SAMPLE COLLECTION PROCEDURES in THIS SECTION for sample valve and drain
plug locations.
TIGERCAT OIL ANALYSIS KITS
Each kit includes a Pre-paid Sample Bottle and Sample Information Form. Pre-printed mailing labels are
also included to ensure all samples are quickly returned directly to the lab for immediate analysis and
results within 24 hours of receipt.
The same type of sample bottle can be used for all types of oil testing including:
Hydraulic Circuits, Final Drives, Axles, Gearboxes, Engines, etc.
To ensure accurate and meaningful results are obtained, each kit also includes detailed instructions on
how properly collect, prepare and ship the oil samples.
Contact your Tigercat Dealer Parts Department to order Kits.
3.5

OIL SAMPLE COLLECTION PROCEDURES HYDRAULIC
SAMPLE VALVE
Fill out the Sample Information Form (SIF)
completely and accurately. When taking multiple
oil samples, fill out all of the required SIF forms
in their entirety, prior to taking any oil samples.
Then, immediately package each completed SIF
form together with the matching oil sample in the
black outer shipping container as each individual
sample is taken. This will reduce the possibility of
mixing up or incorrectly identifying the SIF forms
and oil samples. Incorrectly identified samples
could result in a false warning alarm.
The accuracy of the lab analysis results is very MAIN HYDRAULIC OIL
632E-008
dependent on the quality of the oil sample
taken. Collection of clean oil samples that are Hydraulic Oil Samples:
representative of the main body of oil are essential
• Hydraulic oil samples should be taken from the
if meaningful lab results are to be obtained.
circulating oil flow at operating temperature,
Erroneous readings may result if proper collection,
with no functions actuated, using sample
handling, packaging and shipping practices are not
valves that are permanently located on the
followed prior to the sample being tested by the
machine whenever possible.
lab. To be able to accurately compare and trend
the lab results over time, all follow-up samples • To obtain a representative oil sample, sample
should be consistently taken from the same valves must be purged before the actual oil
location using the same techniques as all previous sample is taken. Drain a minimum of 3 or 4
samples. ounces of oil into a separate container and
discard this oil using approved recycling
• Ensure that all sample valves and drain plugs
methods.
are clean and free of debris.
• Replace the dust cover on the sample valve
• Remove the sample bottle cap only when
immediately after taking the oil sample and
ready to take the sample. Keep the cap
sealing the sample bottle.
clean – do not put it in your pocket or let it get
contaminated in any way.
• Do not allow any airborne dirt, etc. to enter the
sample bottle.
• Avoid contamination of the sample – replace
the sample bottle cap immediately after filling
the bottle to approximately ¾ full.
All samples taken should be immediately
forwarded to the lab for processing.
Contact your Tigercat dealer to purchase
additional or replacement hydraulic sample valves
or drain plugs.
In cases where oil samples must be pumped or
otherwise drawn out of a reservoir or housing, a
hand operated oil suction pump is also available
from your Tigercat dealer.
3.6

Transmission and Axle Oil Samples:
• These samples can be taken during the oil
change process.
• To obtain a representative oil sample, ensure
the oil is warm and has not settled very long
(within 30 minutes of shutdown).
• Place the required drain container under
the machine to capture the used oil to be
discarded using approved recycling methods.
• Remove the drain plug and allow
approximately 50% of the oil to drain, then
place the sample bottle in the stream of SAMPLE LOCATION /
TRANSMISSION DRAIN
draining oil to obtain a representative sample.
630C-100 TRANSMISSION OIL
BRAKE BRAKE AXLE LEVEL

AXLE LEVEL INSPECTION INSPECTION PORT CHECK AND FILL
CHECK AND FILL PORT
(FAR SIDE) (FAR SIDE)
AXLE DRAIN
4634D02 SEVERE DUTY AXLE DRAIN AND FILL LOCATIONS (632E/635G FRONT AXLE)
632E
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL LEVEL PLANETARY
LEVEL CHECK CHECK AND FILL/ LEVEL CHECK
AND FILL BRAKE INSPECTION AND FILL
PORT
PLANETARY PLANETARY
DRAIN DIFFERENTIAL DRAIN DRAIN
69514B01 B20 SEVERE DUTY AXLE DRAIN AND FILL LOCATIONS (632E REAR AXLE)
3.7
635G DIFFERENTIAL
FILL/LEVEL PLUG
(1 PLACE)
BOGIE HOUSING
DRAIN PLUG
(4 PLACES )
DIFFERENTIAL BOGIE HOUSINGS

DRAIN PLUG (1 PLACE) FILL/LEVEL PLUG
BOTTOM OF DIFFERENTIAL (2 PLACES)
NOT VISIBLE IN THIS
ILLUSTRATION
71542B01 BOGIE AXLE FILL, DRAIN AND LEVEL PLUGS (SEVERE DUTY AXLE SHOWN)
3.8
GENERAL
Clean away all branches, bark and chips.

CAUTION Clean up all traces of oil to avoid fires
All handles, steps and platforms must be Inspect the EXHAUST SYSTEM DAILY for
kept free of grease, oil, fuel, mud, snow any signs of LEAKAGE. Check for worn,
and ice. cracked, broken, or damaged pipes or muffler.
Also check for missing or damaged bolts or
clamps. Should any exhaust leaks or defective
Clean around fill caps before checking or parts be found, repairs must be made
adding fluids immediately. Engine exhaust leaks can cause
Release hydraulic pressures and clean around fires, DO NOT OPERATE the machine until
hydraulic fittings before breaking connection. the exhaust leak is repaired.
Plug or cap immediately During daily operation of the machine, the
Clean up spills as soon as possible occurrence of exhaust leaks are usually
accompanied by a change or increase in
Always use clean oil and containers engine exhaust noise levels. These audible
Drain dirty oil while still warm warnings cannot be ignored. Should any
exhaust leaks occur during operation, the
Do not exceed recommended fluid levels machine must be shut down immediately
Service all hydraulic filters after the failure of a and not put back to work until the necessary
pump, motor, cylinder or valve. Failures of this repairs have been completed.
nature could contaminate the entire hydraulic Always have a fire extinguisher at hand
system
For safety; when leaving the cab or leaving
Top up diesel fuel AT END OF Each shift to machine unattended or during service, always
reduce contamination by condensation lower grapple and dozer blade to the ground
Clean up oil spills on walking surfaces and top For safety, always block or support grapple
of engine enclosure immediately and dozer blade when working under them.
Before welding on machine be sure to
disconnect all electrical connections and follow
all servicing safety precautions as outlined in CHECK EMERGENCY EXITS
WELDING, PRIOR TO in SECTION 1 of THIS MONTHLY:
MANUAL. Alternate exit routes are provided: the sliding
When welding secure ground connection windows in the cab doors. These are only to be
as close to working position as possible to used if the cab doors cannot be opened.
prevent arcing across machined surfaces or It is therefore essential that these emergency exits
through bearings be checked at least once per month to ensure they
are fully operational.
*OIL LOST FROM LEAKAGE

LOST OIL (LITRES) LOST OIL (US GALLONS)
LEAKAGE RATE PER DAY PER MONTH PER YEAR PER DAY PER MONTH PER YEAR
ONE DROP IN TEN SECONDS 0.424 12.72 152.0 0.112 3.36 40.0
ONE DROP IN FIVE SECONDS 0.852 25.6 306.6 0.225 6.75 81.0
ONE DROP PER SECOND 4.26 127.76 1533.1 1.125 33.75 405.0
THREE DROPS PER SECOND 14.2 425.86 5110.31 3.75 112.5 1350.0
DROPS BREAK INTO STREAM 90.83 2725.5 32706.0 24.0 720.0 8640.0
3.9
GENERAL
FIRE PREVENTION
Maintaining your machine properly will greatly
extend its life and reduce your operating costs.
Fire can result in a machine loss which can be
financially devastating.
1. Pine needles and bark when allowed to
accumulate, form a fuel source that when
ignited is extremely difficult to extinguish. A
thorough program of regular cleaning and
washing will reduce the possibility of a fire
starting. In the event a fire does start, the
regular cleaning program will improve the
chances of successfully extinguishing a fire.
2. Pay close attention to wiring and plumbing
routings during maintenance, ensure that
ALL wiring harnesses or hydraulic hoses are
properly restrained and clamped to prevent
damage from chaffing.
3. Read the fire suppression system manual
and have the system serviced regularly by
qualified personnel.
4. In case of fire lower the boom system to
the ground and turn off the engine before
discharging the fire suppression system.
Also refer to the SAFETY section of this manual
for additional information on how to prevent fires
from starting on the machine.
3.10
FREQUENTLY: Clean:
• Potentially damaging limbs or sticks from
• Check engine cooling air intake screens for
machine
possible restriction.
• A/C condenser, oil cooler, radiator refer to
EVERY 8 HOURS (EVERY SHIFT): PACKAGE in THIS SECTION.
• Perform "frequently" maintenance check, Check:
and in addition: • Service brake for proper operation. Refer to
• Check engine coolant level SERVICE BRAKE – CHECKING BRAKE AND
• Check engine oil level ACCUMULATOR FOR PROPER OPERATION
in THIS SECTION.
• Drain fuel filter/water separator
• Rear pilot accumulator for proper operation.
• Check air intake precleaner, clean as required Refer to REAR PILOT ACCUMUULATOR –
• Check air cleaner unloader valve CHECKING FOR PROPER OPERATION in
• Check air intake filter restriction indicator. THIS SECTION.
• All engine air intake system components
Replace primary filter if indicator is in red
(including charge air cooler) rubber elbows,
zone.
connector hoses, tubes and clamps for
Replace secondary (safety) filter every third damage, hardening, wear, cracks, leaks, loose
primary filter change to guarantee maximum clamps or loose hanger bracket hardware and
performance and reliability. repair immediately.
• Check hydraulic oil level with grapple head • Charge Air Cooler for damage, wear, cracks,
fully open, grapple head and dozer blade on or leaks and repair immediately.
the ground. • For leakage around hydraulic components and
• Check winch sump oil level flexible hoses. See "Oil lost from leakage"
• Check transmission oil level with dipstick chart.
• Lubricate front axle pivot, 2-fittings, purge • For loose nuts, bolts and fittings
• Lubricate mid drive shaft 1-fitting, purge • Condition and tension of fan belts.
Note: Lubrication of mid drive shaft slip joint • Exhaust system for leaks.
should be done with machine fully articulated • Water pressure (60 psi [4 bar]) for pressurized
and locked. Refer also to ARTICULATION water system.
LOCK – ARTICULATED LOCKED POSITION If the water system has been operated,
in THIS SECTION. refer to PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM
• On 632E machines lubricate rear drive shaft MAINTENANCE in THIS SECTION for refilling
bearing 1-fitting, purge and charging instructions.
• On 635G machines lubricate rear drive shaft • Conduct an overall visual inspection.
bearings, 2-fittings, purge Refer to engine OPERATION AND
• Lubricate centre joint bearings, 2-fittings, MAINTENANCE MANUAL for additional required
purge maintenance.
• Lubricate steering cylinder ends, 4-fittings,
purge
• Lubricate arch cylinders and pivots, 12-fittings,
purge
• Lubricate dozer blade cylinders and pivots,
6-fittings, purge
• Lubricate grapple snubbers, 2-fittings, purge
• Lubricate grapple, 8-fittings, purge
• Lubricate grapple yoke, 8-fittings, purge
3.11
EVERY 48 HOURS EVERY 125 HOURS:
• Check the centre joint for looseness. Refer • Perform "frequently" maintenance
to CENTRE JOINT MAINTENANCE in THIS
SECTION for instructions. If a problem • Perform 8 hour maintenance
is found corrective action should be taken And in addition:
immediately. Refer also to CENTRE JOINT • Lubricate grapple rotator shaft, 2-fittings,
in SECTION 11 of the SERVICE MANUAL 5-shots
for more detailed checking and adjustment • Carry out A/C system inspection; Refer to AIR
procedures. CONDITIONING SYSTEM, CHECKING in
THIS SECTION
Check:
• Check oil level in front and rear axles. Refer
to AXLE – AXLE LEVEL CHECK, FILL AND
DRAIN LOCATIONS and AXLE – REAR
(BOGIE) AXLE (IF APPLICABLE) in THIS
SECTION.
• Fluid level in batteries unless maintenance
free
• Engine rpm.
• All hydraulic pressures
• Hydraulic pump and motor securing bolts
• Check fuel fill strainer (fuel tank filler screen)
• Torque tightening points as per new machine
maintenance
• Proper operation of pressurized water system.
Visually check for damage to:-
• Arch and pivot linkage
• Front and rear frame
• Centre joint area
• Attachment
Make repairs immediately
Visually inspect for:-
• Frayed electrical wiring and hydraulic hose
• Wear in any other components
maintenance.
* Use of filters other than genuine Tigercat replacement filters is not recommended.
3.12
EVERY 250 HOURS: EVERY 500 HOURS:
• Perform "frequently" maintenance • Perform "frequently" maintenance
• Perform 8 hour maintenance • Perform 8 hour maintenance
And in addition: • Perform 250 hour maintenance
• Replace engine oil and filter.* And in addition :
• Replace engine fuel filter and fuel filter/water • Replace hydraulic oil double element filters
separator* (4 elements) *
• Replace DEF dosing module filter.* 3 white, high performance element.
NOTE: The aftertreatment system and its 1 blue, water absorbing element.
related components are applicable to Tier 4f • Replace charge pressure filter *
machines only. • Replace transmission filter *
• Lubricate grapple pinion gear spline, 1-fitting, • Replace oil in transmission. Sample
5-shots, (Note: remove pipeplug to access) transmission oil for testing. NOTE: Warranty
• Clean and thoroughly inspect all surfaces of coverage of powertrain components is
the arch and boom for cracks. All cracks must contingent on performance of regular oil
be properly repaired in their early stages. sampling at the owner’s expense during the
Note that in most cases cracks will continue to warranty period. Refer to OIL ANALYSIS
grow in size and often lead to major structural PROGRAM in THIS SECTION for details.
damage. Failure to regularly inspect for • Lubricate front drive shaft 1-fitting, purge
cracks and immediately repair the boom
• Lubricate door hinges, 8-fittings, purge
system will void the structural warranty.
Contact your Tigercat dealer for specific Refer to engine OPERATION AND
procedures required to correctly repair any MAINTENANCE MANUAL for additional required
cracks found. maintenance.
maintenance.
* Use of filters other than genuine Tigercat replacement filters is not recommended.
3.13
EVERY 1000 HOURS: Refer to OIL ANALYSIS PROGRAM in THIS
SECTION for details.
• Perform "frequently" maintenance
• Drain and refill pressurized water system.
• Perform 8 hour maintenance Refer to PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM
• Perform 125 hour maintenance MAINTENANCE in THIS SECTION.
• Perform 250 hour maintenance • Lubricate front axle pinion grease seal.
• Perform 500 hour maintenance • Lubricate rear axle pinion grease seal.
And in addition: Refer to engine OPERATION AND
• Replace air cleaner unloader valve MAINTENANCE MANUAL for additional required
maintenance.
• Check centre joint preload with a dial indicator.
Refer to CENTRE JOINT – CHECKING
CENTRE JOINT PRELOAD in SECTION
11 of the SERVICE MANUAL. If a problem
is found corrective action should be taken
immediately, refer to CENTRE JOINT
PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT in SECTION 11 of
the SERVICE MANUAL.
• Replace oil in winch sump.
• For 632E machines drain and refill front and
rear axles. Refer to LUBRICATION AND
SERVICE CHART in THIS SECTION for
recommended gear oils. Refer also to AXLE
– AXLE LEVEL CHECK, FILL AND DRAIN
LOCATIONS in THIS SECTION. Sample
front and rear axle oil for testing. NOTE:
Warranty coverage of powertrain components
is contingent on performance of regular oil
sampling at the owner’s expense during the
warranty period. Refer to OIL ANALYSIS
PROGRAM in THIS SECTION for details.
• For 635G machines drain and refill front
axle and bogie axle differential, housings
and planetary drives. Refer to AXLE –
AXLE LEVEL CHECK, FILL AND DRAIN
LOCATIONS and AXLE – REAR (BOGIE)
AXLE (IF APPLICABLE) in THIS SECTION.
Refer also to LUBRICATION AND SERVICE
CHART in THIS SECTION for recommended
gear oils. Sample bogie axle oil for testing.
NOTE: Warranty coverage of powertrain
components is contingent on performance of
regular oil sampling at the owner’s expense
during the warranty period. Refer to OIL
ANALYSIS PROGRAM in THIS SECTION for
details.
• Sample hydraulic oil from the main hydraulic
tank for testing. NOTE: Warranty coverage
of powertrain components is contingent on
performance of regular oil sampling at the
owner’s expense during the warranty period.
3.14
EVERY 1500 HOURS: 2000 HOURS:
• Perform "frequently" maintenance • Perform "frequently" maintenance
And in addition: • Perform 1000 hour maintenance
• Replace crank case ventilation filter *. Refer And in addition:
to Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual • Replace all air intake rubber components such
for replacement instructions. as elbows and connectors.
Refer to engine OPERATION AND High temperatures in this area can cause the
MAINTENANCE MANUAL for additional required rubber to harden.
maintenance.
NOTE: High-temperature silicone connectors
do not need to be replaced unless they are
damaged.
Refer to AIR CLEANER MAINTENANCE in
THIS SECTION
• Replace hydraulic tank breather
• Check all air intake tubing, rubber couplings
and band clamps for signs of wear and
leakage
maintenance.
2 YEARS:
• Replace engine coolant.
maintenance.
3.15
SEASONAL: • Drain and refill pressurized water system.
• Drain and refill hydraulic oil tank with
recommended hydraulic oil. Refer to
APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS in THIS • Perform service brake wear plate inspection.
SECTION. Refer to SECTION 8 in the SERVICE
MANUAL.
Fill tank with grapple head fully open, grapple
head and dozer blade on the ground until
hydraulic oil level reaches the sight gauge full
mark. Note that the oil level will drop 2 to 3 in
(5 to 7.5 cm) when all cylinders are extended.
Check to ensure that the hydraulic oil type
selected in the computer program matches the
oil type being used. Adjust oil type if needed.
This will allow the program to optimize the
cooling and s functions to best suite the oil
being used.
Hydraulic oil grade information is shown
on the main menu below the hydraulic
oil temperature gauge. Operating outside
the recommended operating range will
shorten hydraulic component life. Refer
to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU -
SERVICE SETTINGS – HYDRAULIC OIL
GRADE in SECTION 2 for hydraulic oil grade
selection settings information.
• For 632E machines drain and refill front and
rear axles. Refer to LUBRICATION AND
SERVICE CHART in THIS SECTION for
recommended gear oils. Refer also to AXLE
– AXLE LEVEL CHECK, FILL AND DRAIN
LOCATIONS in THIS SECTION. Sample
front and rear axle oil for testing. NOTE:
Warranty coverage of powertrain components
is contingent on performance of regular oil
sampling at the owner’s expense during the
warranty period. Refer to OIL ANALYSIS
• For 635G machines drain and refill front
axle and bogie axle differential, housings
and planetary drives. Refer to AXLE –
LOCATIONS and AXLE – REAR (BOGIE)
AXLE (IF APPLICABLE) in THIS SECTION.
Refer also to LUBRICATION AND SERVICE
CHART in THIS SECTION for recommended
gear oils. Sample bogie axle oil for testing.
regular oil sampling at the owner’s expense
during the warranty period. Refer to OIL
ANALYSIS PROGRAM in THIS SECTION for
details.
3.16
APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS
Use only one of the following oils to fill or replenish the MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
3.17
MACHINES 6320101 TO 6320300
REAR DRIVE SHAFT BEARING AXLE PINION MID DRIVE SHAFT

21 1 FTG/8 19 1 FTG/1000 1 FTG/8 21 13 3 4 10 2
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

1 FTG/500 21
18
GRAPPLE YOKE
6
8 FTG/8 26
14 4A 5 12 1 16
GRAPPLE SNUBBERS STEER CYLINDERS
2 FTG/8 26 GRAPPLE PINION GEAR 4 FTG/8 23 AXLE-PIVOT, FRONT
1 FTG/250 26 2 FTG/8 20
GRAPPLE ROTATOR 5 SHOTS DOOR HINGES
2 FTG/125 26 NOTE: REMOVE PIPEPLUG ARCH 8 FTG/500
TO ACCESS
5 SHOTS 12 FTG/8 24
27 11 15 13 12 4A 7
10
5
17 14
CENTER JOINT
2 FTG/8 22
GRAPPLE DOZER
AXLE PINION
26 8 FTG/8 18 19 1 FTG/1000 18 6 FTG/8 25
LEGEND
** STEER MACHINE FULLY BEFORE GREASING MID DRIVE SHAFT SLIP YOKE.
*** MAY USE UP TO BUT NOT MORE THAN 1 LITER OF LUBRIZOL 6178, ..... HOURS
DSL-178, OR EQUA-TORQUE 2411 OR 2414 (BRAKE NOISE REDUCTION). CHK ..... CHECK
2 FTG/125 LUBRICATION POINT WITH A DESIGNATED NUMBER OF FITTINGS (2FTG) REP ..... REPLACE
AND HOURS BETWEEN SERVICING (125 ). JOINT TO BE PURGED. DRN ..... DRAIN
 USE LITHIUM BASED GREASE CONTAINING MOLYBDENUM DISULFIDE. D/R ..... DRAIN AND REFILL
LUB ..... LUBRICATE
USE OF FILTERS OTHER THAN GENUINE Tigercat REPLACEMENT FILTERS IS NOT
®
RECOMMENDED.
3.18
Tigercat Model 632E

REFER TO Tigercat OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
SERVICE EVERY CAPACITY
POINT NO.
SERVICE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1000 
1500 
2000 
LITERS
125 
250 
500 
USG
QTY
8
SEE ENGINE MANUFACTURER'S OPERATION AND
CHANGE COOLANT
1 COOLING SYSTEM CHK 34.4 9.1 MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR REQUIRED ANTIFREEZE
EVERY 2 YEARS
SOLUTION AND MIXTURE.
CHK REP
2 ENGINE OIL/FILTER • •
• •
REP • SEE ENGINE MANUFACTURER'S OPERATION
3 CRANK CASE VENTILATION FILTER 1 AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR PROCEDURES
•
AND CAPACITIES.
REP
4 FUEL FILTER 1
•
4A FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR DRN REP 1 REFER TO SECTION 3 OF THE MANUAL FOR
5 DEF DOSING MODULE FILTER - T4F ONLY REP 1 DETAILS.
6 FUEL TANK FILLER SCREEN CHK 1

7 AIR INTAKE PRECLEANER/INLET HOOD CHK 1 CLEAN AS REQUIRED.
AIR INTAKE PRIMARY ELEMENT CHK 1 CHECK FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR.
8 REFER TO 8 HOUR SCHEDULED MAINTENCE
AIR INTAKE SAFETY ELEMENT CHK 1 FOR DETAILS.
9 AIR CLEANER UNLOADER VALVE CHK REP 1 REFER TO SECTION 3 OF THE MANUAL.
CHECK FOR LOOSE CLAMPS AND DAMAGED
10 AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS CHK REP 1 RUBBER COMPONENTS. REPLACE RUBBER
COMPONENTS.
DRAIN AND REFILL AS REQUIRED BY
11 HYDRAULIC TANK CHK 100 26.4 1 SEASONAL OIL CHANGE.
(SEE HYDRAULIC OIL CHART)
HYDRAULIC FILTER, FULL FLOW, INCLUDES: NOTE: MUST USE:
REP
12 1 BLUE WATER ABSORBING ELEMENT 4 1 BLUE FILTER ELEMENT.
†
3 WHITE HIGH PERFORMANCE FILTER 3 WHITE FILTER ELEMENT.
CHECK FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR ON
REP
13 CHARGE PRESSURE FILTER 1 FILTER WITH ENGINE RUNNING AT FULL AND
†
WITH OIL FLOW.
REP
14 EHS TRANSMISSION FILTER (OPTIONAL) 1
†
15 HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER REP 1
16 PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM CHK TEST D/R 50 13.2 SEASONAL DRAIN AND REFILL.
TRANSMISSION 6 1.6 FILL WITH MIL-L-2105C OR API-GL-5 LUBRICANT
17 CHK D/R 1
TRANSMISSION, EHS (OPTIONAL) 10 2.6 GRADE 75W-90.
FILL WITH MIL-L-2105C OR API-GL-5
AXLES, SEVERE DUTY : FRONT 36 9.5 1 LUBRICANT GRADE/WEATHER TEMPERATURE:
D/R
18 REAR PLANETARY CHK 18 4.8 2 BELOW -10°F(-23°C) USE 75W-90
***
REAR DIFFERNETIAL 27 7.1 1 UP TO 100°F(38°C) USE 80W-90
ABOVE 100°F(38°C) USE 85W-140
ONE FITTING PER AXLE
19 PINION GREASE SEAL - FRONT AND REAR AXLE LUB PURGE 2
LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
20 AXLE-PIVOT (FRONT ONLY) LUB PURGE 2 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT LUB 1
LUB
21 MID DRIVE SHAFT PURGE 1 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
**
REAR DRIVE SHAFT BEARING LUB 1
CENTER JOINT LUB PURGE 2 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
22 CHK REFER TO SECTION 3 OF THE MANUAL FOR
CENTER JOINT BEARING PRELOAD CHK
48  DETAILS.
23 STEERING CYLINDERS LUB PURGE 4 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
24 DOUBLE ARCH CYLINDER & PIVOTS LUB PURGE 12 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
25 DOZER BLADE CYLINDER & PIVOTS LUB PURGE 6 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
26 GRAPPLE, Tigercat SEE LUBRICATION POINTS DIAGRAM
REFER TO WINCH MAINTENANCE IN
27 WINCH: CARCO CHK D/R 12 3 SECTION 3 OF MANUAL. SEE ALSO
WINCH MANUFACTURER'S MANUAL.
LUBECHART 74732BENG R3.PDF 1/17

only.
3.19
MACHINES 6353001 TO 6353200
AXLE PINION REAR DRIVE SHAFTS

22 24 13 4A 12 3 4 10 2
20 1 FTG/1000 2 FTG/8
MID DRIVE SHAFT

1 FTG/8 24
BOGIE AXLE
SLEWING RINGS
18 4 FTG/1000
GRAPPLE YOKE
8 FTG/8 29
GRAPPLE SNUBBERS
2 FTG /8 29 STEER CYLINDERS AXLE-PIVOT, FRONT 14 5 1 16
GRAPPLE PINION GEAR 26 2 FTG/8 23
4 FTG/8
GRAPPLE ROTATOR
1 FTG/250 29
ARCH DOOR HINGES
29 5 SHOTS
2 FTG/125 NOTE: REMOVE PIPEPLUG 12 FTG/8 27 8 FTG/500
5 SHOTS TO ACCESS
6 30
11 15 13 12 4A 7
10
17 14
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
24 1 FTG/500 DOZER
GRAPPLE CENTER JOINT
29 8 FTG/8 19 25 2 FTG/8 AXLE PINION
21 5 6 FTG/8 28
22 1 FTG/1000
LEGEND
** STEER MACHINE FULLY BEFORE GREASING MID DRIVE SHAFT SLIP YOKE.
HOURS
*** MAY USE UP TO BUT NOT MORE THAN 1 LITER OF LUBRIZOL 6178, DSL-178, OR EQUA-TORQUE 2411 OR 2414
CHK CHECK
(BRAKE NOISE REDUCTION).
REP REPLACE
2 FTG/125 LUBRICATION POINT WITH A DESIGNATED NUMBER OF FITTINGS (2FTG) AND HOURS BETWEEN DRN DRAIN
SERVICING (125 ). JOINT TO BE PURGED. D/R DRAIN AND REFILL
♦ USE LITHIUM BASED GREASE CONTAINING MOLYBDENUM DISULFIDE. LUB LUBRICATE
† USE OF FILTERS OTHER THAN GENUINE TIGERCAT REPLACEMENT FILTERS IS NOT RECOMMENDED.
3.20
Tigercat Model 635G

REFER TO Tigercat OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
SERVICE EVERY CAPACITY
POINT NO.
SERVICE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1000 
1500 
2000 
LITERS
125 
250 
500 
USG
QTY
8
SEE ENGINE MANUFACTURER'S OPERATION AND
CHANGE COOLANT
1 COOLING SYSTEM CHK 34.4 9.1 MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR REQUIRED ANTIFREEZE
EVERY 2 YEARS
SOLUTION AND MIXTURE.
CHK REP
2 ENGINE OIL/FILTER • •
• •
REP • SEE ENGINE MANUFACTURER'S OPERATION
3 CRANKCASE VENTILATION FILTER 1 AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR PROCEDURES
•
AND CAPACITIES.
REP
4 FUEL FILTER, ENGINE 1
•
4A FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR DRN REP 1 REFER TO SECTION 3 OF THE MANUAL FOR
5 DEF DOSING MODULE FILTER - T4F ONLY REP 1 DETAILS.
6 FUEL FILL STRAINER CHK 1

7 AIR INTAKE PRECLEANER/INLET HOOD CHK 1 CLEAN AS REQUIRED.
AIR INTAKE PRIMARY ELEMENT CHK 1 CHECK FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR.
8 REFER TO 8 HOUR SCHEDULED MAINTENCE
AIR INTAKE SAFETY ELEMENT CHK 1 FOR DETAILS.
9 AIR CLEANER UNLOADER VALVE CHK REP 1 REFER TO SECTION 3 OF THE MANUAL.
CHECK FOR LOOSE CLAMPS AND DAMAGED
10 AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS CHK REP 1 RUBBER COMPONENTS. REPLACE RUBBER
COMPONENTS.
DRAIN AND REFILL AS REQUIRED BY
11 HYDRAULIC TANK CHK 100 26.4 1 SEASONAL OIL CHANGE.
(SEE HYDRAULIC OIL CHART)
HYDRAULIC FILTER, FULL FLOW, INCLUDES: NOTE: MUST USE:
REP
12 1 BLUE WATER ABSORBING ELEMENT 4 1 BLUE FILTER ELEMENT.
†
3 WHITE HIGH PERFORMANCE FILTER 3 WHITE FILTER ELEMENT.
CHECK FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR ON
REP
13 CHARGE PRESSURE FILTER 1 FILTER WITH ENGINE RUNNING AT FULL AND
†
WITH OIL FLOW.
REP
14 TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER 1
†
15 HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER REP 1
16 PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM CHK TEST D/R 50 13.2 SEASONAL DRAIN AND REFILL.
TRANSMISSION 6 1.6 FILL WITH MIL-L-2105C OR API-GL-5 LUBRICANT
17 CHK D/R 1
TRANSMISSION, EHS (OPTIONAL) 10 2.6 GRADE 75W-90.
18 BOGIE AXLE - SLEWING RINGS LUB PURGE 4 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
D/R
19 BOGIE AXLE - DIFFERENTIAL CHK 18 4.8 1 FILL WITH MIL-L-2105C OR API-GL-5
***
LUBRICANT GRADE/WEATHER TEMPERATURE:
20 BOGIE AXLE - HOUSINGS CHK D/R 90 23.8 2 BELOW -10°F(-23°C) USE 75W-90
UP TO 100°F(38°C) USE 80W-90
D/R ABOVE 100°F(38°C) USE 85W-140
21 AXLE, SEVERE DUTY, FRONT CHK 36 9.5 1
***
22 PINION GREASE SEAL LUB PURGE 2 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
23 AXLE-PIVOT (FRONT ONLY) LUB PURGE 2 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT LUB 1
LUB
24 MID DRIVE SHAFT PURGE 1 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
**
REAR DRIVE SHAFTS, BEARINGS LUB 2
CENTER JOINT LUB PURGE 2 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
25 CHK REFER TO SECTION 3 OF THE MANUAL FOR
CENTER JOINT BEARING PRELOAD CHK
48  DETAILS.
26 STEERING CYLINDERS LUB PURGE 4 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
27 DOUBLE ARCH CYLINDER & PIVOTS LUB PURGE 12 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
28 DOZER BLADE CYLINDER & PIVOTS LUB PURGE 6 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
29 GRAPPLE, Tigercat SEE LUBRICATION POINTS DIAGRAM
REFER TO WINCH MAINTENANCE IN
30 WINCH: CARCO CHK D/R 12 3 SECTION 3 OF MANUAL. SEE ALSO
WINCH MANUFACTURER'S MANUAL.
LUBECHART 78428BENG R1.PDF 2/17

only.
3.21
MAIN HYDRAULIC OIL TANK HYDRAULIC
TANK
Located at the rear of the engine compartment.
Refer to SERVICE AND LUBRICATION POINTS
chart in THIS SECTION for hydraulic tank
capacity.
BLUE
A sight gauge accessible through the right rear ELEMENT
BREATHER
access panel, indicates the HIGH and LOW level
of the main hydraulic oil tank.
SIGHT
GAUGE
Always keep the hydraulic oil level between the
HIGH and LOW calibrations. A low hydraulic oil DOUBLE
LEVEL
level can result in severe damage to pumps. SWITCH ELEMENT
FILTERS
Check hydraulic oil level and fill tank with grapple
head fully open, grapple head and dozer blade
on the ground. Fill tank until hydraulic oil level CHARGE
PRESSURE
reaches the sight gauge full mark. Note that the FILTER
oil level will drop 2 to 3 in (5 to 7.5 cm) when all
cylinders are extended.
TRANSMISSION
A hydraulic oil level switch is connected to the FILTER
computer control system. The hydraulic oil level
switch is incorporated into the base of the sight
gauge. This switch triggers the hydraulic oil level
low message.
HYDRAULIC TANK, FILTERS
Refer also to COMPUTER – MESSAGES - 632E-003 AND SIGHT GAUGE
CRITICAL – HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL LOW in
DRAINING HYDRAULIC TANK
SECTION 2.
CAUTION 2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest
Perform the hydraulic tank drain when the
hydraulic oil temperature is below 100°F 3. Engage the parking brake.
(38°C), but warm enough to be viscous. 4. Turn OFF the engine.
7. Block wheels.
8. Install the articulation lock bar.
SIGHT 9. The hydraulic tank is equipped with a hose
GAUGE that routes from the bottom of the tank to the
bottom of the front chassis belly pan.
10. The hose is plugged at the end and can be
accessed by removing the belly pan door.
11. The drain hose for the hydraulic tank can
be lowered from the belly of the chassis and
positioned in a drip pan.
12. Remove the plug in the hose end to drain
tank.
13. Once fluid has been drained, replace the drain
plug in the drain hose.
MAIN HYDRAULIC OIL

632E-004 SIGHT GAUGE
3.22
HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER LOCATED ON THE
RIGHT SIDE AT THE
The hydraulic tank breather is located beside the FRONT OF THE ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
double element filters. This breather should be
replaced every 2000 hours. FILL PUMP
HYDRAULIC FILL PUMP
The electric hydraulic fill pump, located under the
engine, is used to add oil to the hydraulic oil tank.
The pump switch is located on the right side at the
PUMP
front of the engine compartment. SWITCH
QUICK CONNECT
FILLING HYDRAULIC TANK TO SUCTION HOSE
Refer to APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS in 632E-035 HYDRAULIC FILL PUMP

THIS SECTION. Refer to SERVICE AND
LUBRICATION POINTS chart in THIS SECTION
for hydraulic tank capacity.
2. Lower dozer blade and grapple (with head
fully open) onto the ground.
6. Block wheels.
8. Open right front engine compartment access 620E-054 HYDRAULIC FILL PUMP
door.
9. Get the hydraulic oil fill suction hose from
HYDRAULIC OIL
its storage location. Clean the suction hose, FILL SUCTION HOSE
STORAGE LOCATION
connect to hydraulic fill pump and remove cap.
Insert end of suction tube into supply drum.
10. Operate pump using the pump switch, located
on the right side at the front of the engine
compartment. The oil is pumped directly into
the hydraulic tank via the double element filter.
11. Observe the level gauges on the rear of the
tank to determine when to release the switch.
12. Fill tank with grapple head fully open, grapple
head and dozer blade on the ground. Fill tank
until hydraulic oil level reaches the sight gauge
HYDRAULIC OIL FILL SUCTION
FULL mark. Note that the oil level will drop HOSE STORAGE LOCATION
2 to 3 in (5 to 7.5 cm) when all cylinders are 620E-050 BELOW LEFT CAB DOOR
extended.
IMPORTANT !
13. Replace cap on suction tube, wipe dry,
Contaminated hydraulic fluid can lead to
disconnect and store. Close all access doors.
premature failure of hydraulic components
and costly repairs. Filters must be replaced
at the recommended time intervals. Refer to
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE in THIS SECTION.
Use of hydraulic filters other than the Tigercat
brand could lead to severe wear and rapid failure
of hydraulic system components.
3.23
HYDRAULIC OIL DOUBLE ELEMENT FILTERS
HYDRAULIC
HYDRAULIC FILTER
TANK
SERVICING GUIDELINES
NEVER PRE-FILL
HYDRAULIC FILTERS
BLUE
ELEMENT
Tigercat does not recommend the pre-filling
BREATHER of spin-on filters due to the risk of damage
to the hydraulic system caused by unfiltered
SIGHT
GAUGE
oil. Unfiltered oil used to pre-fill filters
enters directly into the hydraulic circuit.
LEVEL DOUBLE Contaminants in unfiltered oil can cause
ELEMENT
SWITCH
FILTERS significant and costly damage to hydraulic
valves, pumps and motors. The cleanliness
of hydraulic oil cannot be guaranteed unless
CHARGE it is always prefiltered before use.
PRESSURE
FILTER
WARNING
TRANSMISSION
FILTER

632E-003 AND SIGHT GAUGE
WARNING, HOT FLUIDS AND HOT
The hydraulic oil cooling circuit contains two MACHINE SURFACES CAN CAUSE
double filter heads, each with a built in 25 psi (1.7 SERIOUS BURNS!
bar) bypass valve. In the event of a clogged filter
element or thicker oil on cold starts, this bypass • Before servicing the machine, allow the
filter will open and redirect oil around the filter engine cooling system, fuel system,
element. It is recommended that all machines use exhaust system, hydraulic system and
two different filter elements: machine surfaces to cool down.
3 white, Tigercat high performance, full flow
• Use a thermometer to check surface and
hydraulic oil filter element
system temperatures to ensure it is safe
1 blue, Tigercat water absorbing, full flow hydraulic to begin service work.
oil filter element.
• DO NOT begin service work until the
Refer to SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE and surface or system temperature has cooled
SERVICE AND LUBRICATION AND SERVICE down to below 100°F (38°C)!
POINTS in THIS SECTION.
IMPORTANT !
Contaminated hydraulic fluid can lead to
and costly repairs. Filters must be replaced
at the recommended time intervals. Refer to
Use of hydraulic filters other than the Tigercat
3.24
Changing the filters: FILTER
HEAD
firmly on the ground. GASKET

FILTER
4. Turn OFF the engine. ELEMENT
FILTR_SEALS 2
5. Remove the ignition key. O-RING GASKET INSTALLATION
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch  O-Ring Gasket
7. Block wheels Remove used gasket and clean gasket seat in
8. Install the articulation lock bar. head.
9. Wipe clean the area around the filter and Apply clean oil to new gasket surfaces.
head. Install new gasket on inside lip of filter.
Screw on new filter until gasket makes
10. Place rags below to catch the spillage of oil.
contact.
11. Wearing face protection (in case of an oil Tighten filter until top edge makes metal to
squirt), unscrew the old filter. Dispose of old metal contact with filter head.
filter and any oil properly. (approximately 1 1/2 additional turns after
12. The new Tigercat filter is supplied with two gasket contact)
gaskets enclosed, examine the filter head 13. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.
closely to determine which gasket should be
used and follow the instructions to ensure 14. Check that all personnel are clear of the
proper installation. machine before starting the engine.
FILTER
15. Insert the ignition key and turn to the RUN
HEAD position.
16. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine
GASKET start-up.
17. Start the engine.
FILTER
ELEMENT 18. Check for leaks.
FILTR_SEALS 2
SQUARE SECTION GASKET INSTALLATION
 Square Section Gasket

Remove used gasket and clean groove in
head.
Apply clean oil to new gasket surfaces.
Install new gasket into groove in filter head.
Screw on new filter until gasket makes
contact.
Tighten filter an additional 3/4 turn.
3.25
CHARGE PRESSURE FILTER
The charge circuit contains a single element, full HYDRAULIC FILTER
flow Tigercat hydraulic filter with a 50 psi (3.5
bar) third port bypass valve. When a restriction is
SERVICING GUIDELINES
encountered, the bypass valve diverts oil back to NEVER PRE-FILL
tank via the third port to prevent unfiltered oil from
entering the charge circuit. HYDRAULIC FILTERS
Changing a pressure filter: Tigercat does not recommend the pre-filling
of spin-on filters due to the risk of damage
to the hydraulic system caused by unfiltered
2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest oil. Unfiltered oil used to pre-fill filters
firmly on the ground. enters directly into the hydraulic circuit.
3. Engage the parking brake. Contaminants in unfiltered oil can cause
significant and costly damage to hydraulic
4. Turn OFF the engine. valves, pumps and motors. The cleanliness
5. Remove the ignition key. of hydraulic oil cannot be guaranteed unless
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch it is always prefiltered before use.
7. Block wheels IMPORTANT !

8. Install the articulation lock bar. Contaminated hydraulic fluid can lead to
9. Wipe clean the area around the filter and head. and costly repairs. Filters must be replaced
10. Place rags below to catch the spillage of oil. at the recommended time intervals. Refer to
11. Wearing face protection (in case of an oil
squirt), unscrew the old filter. Use of hydraulic filters other than the Tigercat
12. Drain filter and dispose of any oil properly.
13. Check the seating area for the gasket on the
filter head and wipe it clean. HYDRAULIC
TANK
14. This filter has an o-ring gasket. Replace o-ring
as required and apply hydraulic oil to the
gasket surface.
15. Screw on the new filter until the gasket makes BLUE
contact with the seat in the filter head. ELEMENT
BREATHER
16. Hand tighten filter an additional 1/2 turn only.
SIGHT
17. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch. GAUGE
18. Check that all personnel are clear of the DOUBLE

LEVEL
machine before starting the engine. SWITCH ELEMENT
FILTERS
position.
20. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine CHARGE
PRESSURE
start-up. FILTER

22. Check for leaks. TRANSMISSION
FILTER

632E-003 AND SIGHT GAUGE
3.26
TRANSMISSION FILTER HYDRAULIC
TANK
The transmission circuit is equipped with a
full flow pressure filter with a 50 psi (3.5 bar)
third port bypass valve. When a restriction
is encountered the bypass valve diverts oil
back to the transmission circuit reservoir in the BLUE
transmission to prevent unfiltered oil from entering BREATHER
ELEMENT
the transmission circuit.

Refer to SERVICE AND LUBRICATION POINTS SIGHT
GAUGE
for transmission oil specifications.
Changing a transmission filter: LEVEL DOUBLE
ELEMENT
SWITCH
1. Park the machine on level ground. FILTERS

firmly on the ground. CHARGE
PRESSURE
3. Engage the parking brake. FILTER

5. Remove the ignition key. TRANSMISSION
FILTER
7. Block wheels
9. Wipe clean the area around the filter and HYDRAULIC TANK, FILTERS
head. 632E-003 AND SIGHT GAUGE
10. Place rags below to catch the spillage of oil.
11. Wearing face protection (in case of an oil
squirt), unscrew the old filter.
12. Drain filter and dispose of any oil properly.
13. Check the seating area for the gasket on the
filter head and wipe it clean.
14. This filter has an o-ring gasket. Replace
o-ring as required and apply transmission oil
to the gasket surface.
15. Screw on the new filter until the gasket makes
contact with the seat in the filter head.
16. Hand tighten filter an additional 1/2 turn only.
17. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.
18. Check that all personnel are clear of the
machine before starting the engine.
position.
start-up.
22. Check for leaks.
3.27
CHECKING THE AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM CAUTION
Any service work must be performed by Use compressed air for cleaning only when
authorized A/C technicians. The system should the machine is cold to avoid the risk of fire
be charged with R134a refrigerant only. PAG caused by debris contacting hot surfaces.
(polyalkeylene glycol) oil should be present in the If using compressed air for cleaning, use
system and must be used on o-rings and fittings at 30psi or less.
during assembly. Always use personal protective equipment
A/C SYSTEM TOTAL CAPACITIES to guard against flying debris.
R134a PAG OIL

REFRIGERANT (polyalkylene glycol) CAUTION
1.76 kg (3 lbs 14 oz) 0.25 kg (9.0 oz) Avoid the risk of fire caused by debris
accumulating on surfaces that may
The compressor and charge valves are accessed become hot during machine operation.
from the left side engine compartment. The Always use care when cleaning to ensure
receiver drier is mounted in the compartment that debris removed from one area of the
behind the right cab door, on the outside of the machine does not accumulate on other
cab. areas of the machine.
IMPORTANT !
c. Check for dirt and debris; on the evaporator
It is recommended that during cold weather when
coil located inside the A/C-heater unit and also
the A/C system is not in use, that it be run for
the inside of the A/C-heater unit. Clean as
a period of 5 minutes every 2 weeks. This will
required.
circulate oil to all components of the A/C system.
Perform following inspection along with 125
HOURS inspection outlined in SCHEDULED
a. Check re-circulating and fresh air filters in
operator's cab. Refer to SECTION 2.
COMPRESSOR
DRIVE BELT
CHECK A/C
CONDENSER
CORE
620E-003
d. With engine turned OFF, check and adjust

compressor drive belt tension.
NOTE: Belt tension specifications are 55±2 kgf
(121 ± 5 lbf).
e. Check all A/C hoses for kinks.*
f. Run air conditioning system for 3 - 5 minutes.
632E-015 CHECK A/C CONDENSER CORE g. Check air temperature exiting vents in cab.
b. Check the condenser core for dirt and debris. h. Listen to compressor and blower motor for
Clean as required. Refer to CLEANING A/C abnormal noises.*
CONDENSER AND COOLER PACKAGE in i. Check to see that compressor clutch will
SECTION 3. engage.*
3.28
SIGHT GLASS INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT OF
INDICATES
CONDITION OF SERPENTINE BELT
CHARGE
MOISTURE INDICATOR
BLUE - OK.
PINK - REPLACE DRIER,
RECHARGE SYSTEM
BINARY SWITCH, SERPENTINE BELT

SYSTEM
PROTECTION
A/C RECEIVER/DRIER
620E-003
All belts should be inspected periodically for signs

of incision, cracks, excessive wear in grooves and
signs of end or surface grinding.
Drive belt tensioning is controlled by the automatic
A/C RECEIVER/DRIER tensioner, therefore checking belt tension is not
620E-012
required.
j. Inspect sight glass on receiver drier with A/C
ON. A constant stream of bubbles indicates
MAINTENANCE MANUAL for inspection/
system requires charging.*
replacement information.
Check colour in moisture indicator; BLUE is
OK. PINK indicates desiccant material in drier
is saturated with moisture. In this situation
replace receiver/drier, evacuate system and
recharge system with both refrigerant and
PAG oil.*
* Indicates that these repairs must only be
carried out by a certified A/C technician.
For additional SERVICE information refer to the
Tigercat A/C SERVICE MANUAL part number
18795A, available from Tigercat parts department.
3.29
COOLER PACKAGE COMPONENTS
CHARGE AIR HYDRAULIC

A/C COOLER (CAC) OIL COOLER
CONDENSER
RADIATOR
EHS
TRANSMISSION
COOLER
(IF EQUIPPED)
A/C CONDENSER AND

632E-015 COOLER PACKAGE
SURGE TANK
632E-007 ENGINE FAN
3.30
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT
RADIATOR
CAUTION FILL CAP
DO NOT remove the radiator fill cap from

a hot engine. Wait until coolant temp is
below 122°F (50°C) before removing cap.
Only remove radiator fill cap when cool
enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly 33952AUNI R0
loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure

before removing completely.
620E-025 RADIATOR FILL CAP
5. Remove the ignition key. COOLER (CAC) OIL COOLER
A/C
CONDENSER
7. Block wheels RADIATOR

9. The radiator is equipped with a hose to drain
the contents of the radiator system fluid into a EHS
storage container. TRANSMISSION
COOLER
(IF EQUIPPED)
10. Remove the front nose belly pan in the front
chassis.
11. Remove the radiator pressure cap.
12. The radiator is located on the right side of the
heat exchanger.
A/C CONDENSER AND

632E-015 COOLER PACKAGE
SHUT-OFF
VALVE
14. Slowly open the shut-off valve to drain the
radiator fluid.
DRAIN HOSE
15. Once fluid has been drained, close the shut-off
valve and replace the gear clamp and bolt on
the drain hose.
LOWER RADIATOR TUBE

632E-010 SPUD AND SHUT-OFF VALVE
The lower radiator tube is equipped with a

spud and shut-off valve. The drain hose is
attached to the shut-off valve.
13. Place the free end of the drain hose in a
storage container and remove the gear clamp
and bolt from the end of the hose.
3.31
CAB FUSE AND RELAY PANEL
The fuse panel is located in the left rear of the
cab behind the seat. The fuses and relays are
protected beneath a panel which can be opened
by removing two screws.
IMPORTANT
24 VOLT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
620E-007 FUSE AND RELAY PANEL
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
14 20A 28 2A
13 20A 27 10A
16 9
12 20A 26 2A
11 20A 25 3A
10 24 5A
9 15A 23 3A 15 10
8 20A 22 5A
7 10A 21
6 5A 20 3A 14 11
5 19 10A
4 5A 18 20A
3 30A 17 20A
2 10A 16 20A 13 12
1 15 3A
FUSES RELAYS
1 - SPARE 1 - PARK BRAKE OFF
2 - CIGARETTE LIGHTER 2 - PARK BRAKE ON
3 - HVAC SYSTEM 3 - START SOLENOID
4 - KEY POWER 4 - UNLOADING VALVE OFF
5 - SPARE 5 - WORK LIGHTS AUXILIARY 2
6 - HORN 6 - WORK LIGHTS AUXILIARY 1
7 - AIR SEAT 7 - WORK LIGHTS FRONT
8 - ACCESSORY POWER 8 - WORK LIGHTS REAR
9 - 12V CONVERTER 9 - A/C COMPRESSOR/FRESH AIR BLOWER
10 - SPARE 10 - HVAC FAN
11 - WORK LIGHTS FRONT 11 - SPARE
12 - WORK LIGHTS REAR 12 - SPARE DIODE HOLDER
13 - WORK LIGHTS AUXILIARY 1 13 - SPARE
14 - WORK LIGHTS AUXILIARY 2 14 - SPARE
15 - HVAC SWITCHES 15 - SEAT POWER
16 - XA2-A1 MODULE 16 - ACCESSORY POWER
17 - XS2 MODULE
18 - XA2-A0 MODULE
19 - AC COMPRESSOR/FRESH AIR BLOWER
20 - MD3 MODULE
21 - SPARE
22 - KEY ON SIGNAL
23 - SENSORS
24 - SWITCHES
25 - INTERIOR LIGHT
26 - TELEMATICS SW
27 - START/PARK BRAKE
28 - XC21 MODULE
74745BENG R1
CAB FUSE AND RELAY PANEL

3.32
FUSES AND RELAYS
(ELECTRICAL BOX)
ELECTRICAL BOX
630E-298 (LEFT SIDE FRONT CHASSIS)
only.
*
*
*
ELECTRICAL BOX FUSES AND RELAYS

3.33
FUEL FILTERS
IMPORTANT !
Failure to service and replace filters at the proper
intervals specified in the manufacturer's manuals,
could cause damage to the machine and result in
the product warranty becoming NULL and VOID.
Check Tigercat parts catalog for replacement
filters.
ENGINE FUEL FILTER AND FUEL FILTER/
WATER SEPARATOR
LOCATED ON
This machine is equipped with two fuel filters. The LEFT SIDE
engine fuel filter and the fuel filter/water separator.
The fuel filter/water separator is a combination 620E-096 ENGINE FUEL FILTER
unit, with a replaceable fuel filter and a removable CHANGING THE ENGINE FUEL FILTER:
water sediment bowl on the bottom of the unit.
The water sediment bowl is only replaced if it Refer to ENGINE OPERATION AND
becomes damaged or non-functional. MAINTENANCE MANUAL for engine fuel filter
replacement instructions.
IMPORTANT !
Filters that are an integral part of the engine
(fuel and lubricating oil) should be serviced and WARNING
replaced according to the engine OPERATION
To lower the risk of causing accidental
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
fires, DO NOT leave fuel or oil soaked rags
The engine fuel injection system requires laying around.
extremely clean fuel. To accomplish this, the
engines typically use filters with a finer micron
rating. WARNING
These engines use filters with a very fine micron Drain fuel filter into a container and
rating. If the fuel supply is dirty, the fuel filter must dispose of all fluids properly.
be replaced more frequently than recommended in
the owner’s manual. Operating the machine with
a clogged fuel filter will result in low engine power
and severe fuel injection system damage.
It is also recommended that the fuel/water
separator bowl be drained daily.
When installing a new fuel filter, DO NOT pre-fill
with diesel fuel, or engine fuel pump damage will
result. This type of failure is not warrantable by
the engine manufacturer.
To prolong the operating life of the fuel filter, make
sure that the fuel supply storage tank is clean and
free of water and that the fuel is pre-filtered prior to
adding it to the machine.
3.34
HAND
PRIMER
WARNING
The fuel pump high-pressure fuel lines and
fuel rail contain very high pressure fuel.
Never loosen any fittings while the engine
FUEL FILTER/
WATER is running. Personal injury and property
SEPARATOR
damage can result.
IMPORTANT!
LOCATED ON
RIGHT SIDE
S≤15 mg/kg
632E-005 FUEL WATER SEPARATOR
ULTRA LOW SULFUR
FUEL ONLY
36686AUNI R0
Use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD)

fuel in Tigercat FPT engines equipped
with Tier 4f aftertreatment systems. Using
fuel with sulfur levels greater than 15 ppm
(S≤15 mg/kg) maximum will permanently
damage the engine and aftertreatment
system within a short period of time.
3.35
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER/WATER
HAND
SEPARATOR: PRIMER
Water is heavier than diesel fuel and will settle

to the bottom of the bowl and appear a different
colour.
It is recommended that the fuel/water separator FUEL FILTER/
bowl be checked daily and drained if water is WATER
SEPARATOR
present.
LOCATED ON
5. Remove the ignition key. RIGHT SIDE
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch 632E-005 FUEL WATER SEPARATOR
7. Block wheels.
O-RING SEPARATOR FUEL FILTER
8. Install the articulation lock bar. BOWL VENT
PLUG
9. Place a suitable container under the drain
valve at the base of the fuel/water separator
10. Loosen the metal vent plug on the filter head.
11. Turn the drain valve open on the separator
bowl.
NOTE: A drain hose can be attached to the
HAND PRIMER PUMP FILTER
drain valve if required. Use hand primer pump HEAD
DRAIN
to start flow if required. KNOB HARNESS, HEATER
WITH (ELEMENT NOT SHOWN)
12. Water will flow into the container. When fuel HOSE
BARB SENSOR,
WATER IN FUEL
begins to flow out of the drain, close the drain
valve. Drain the minimum amount of fuel
822D-025 FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR COMPONENTS
possible.
13. Close the vent plug.
position.
start-up.
19. Raise the RPM for one minute to purge the air
from the system.
3.36
CHANGING THE FUEL FILTER/WATER 23. Prime the filter by operating the hand primer
SEPARATOR: pump until fuel spills out the metal vent plug.
Refer to SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE and 24. Close the vent plug.
SERVICE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULE in this
section for filter replacement intervals.
position.
4. Turn OFF the engine. start-up.
5. Remove the ignition key. 29. Start the engine and check for leaks.
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch 30. Clean up any spilled fuel before returning
machine to operation.
7. Block wheels.
9. Wipe clean the area around the fuel filter and
filter head.
10. Disconnect the fuel heater and 'water in fuel'
sensor from the respective wiring harnesses.
11. Place a drain pan under the separator bowl.
12. Loosen the metal vent plug on the filter head.
13. Turn the drain valve open on the separator
bowl to allow the fuel to drain completely from
the separator bowl into a suitable container.
NOTE: A drain hose can be attached to the
drain valve if required. Use hand primer pump
to start flow if required.
14. Close the drain valve.
15. Use a strap wrench to remove the water
separator bowl from the filter head. An optional
wrench (Tigercat Part Number: BH814) is also
available from your dealer.
16. Remove and discard the O-ring from the top of
the separator bowl.
17. Clean the separator bowl.
18. Remove the filter cartridge from the filter head
(pressure fit) and discard properly.
19. Place the new filter into position on the filter
head.
20. Lubricate the new O-ring with clean engine oil
and install at the top of the separator bowl.
21. Install (screw) separator bowl onto the filter
head, hand tight, then turn an additional 3/4
turn only.
22. Reconnect the fuel heater and 'water in fuel'
sensor to their respective wiring harness.
3.37
FUEL TANK
632E-030 STANDARD FUEL TANK

Located in the rear chassis, the fuel reservoir
consists of two tanks interconnected. There is one
filling location (right tank). The fill tube also
contains a fuel fill strainer.
620D-212 HIGH CAPACITY FUEL TANK
The fuel fill strainer located under the fill cap
should be removed and cleaned every 125 Hours
(reach in and lift it out). Replace the screen if it is IMPORTANT!
damaged.
A sending unit is installed and connected to the

computer display on the instrument panel.
The standard fuel tank has a capacity of
81 US gal (305 L).
S≤15 mg/kg
There is also a high capacity fuel tank available for ULTRA LOW SULFUR
machines without winches. It is a single 114 US FUEL ONLY
36686AUNI R0
gal (430 L) replacement tank.
Use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel
in Tigercat FPT engines equipped with Tier
4f aftertreatment systems. Using fuel with
sulfur levels greater than 15 ppm (S≤15 mg/
kg) maximum will permanently damage the
engine and aftertreatment system within a
short period of time.
3.38
FUEL FILL STRAINER
This is a stainless steel fuel fill strainer, screwed
on to the inlet pipe of the engine fuel feed line
inside at the bottom of the fuel tank. REAR
COVER
Changing or cleaning the strainer: LEFT TANK
NOTE:
This should only be required if excessive
quantities of foreign material has built up
inside the tank.
RIGHT TANK
2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest STANDARD FUEL TANKS
620E-062
FUEL TANK
3. Engage the parking brake. FILL CAP

5. Remove the ignition key. REAR
COVER
7. Block wheels.
9. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to DRAINING THE
620E-062 HIGH CAPACITY FUEL TANK
FUEL TANK in THIS SECTION.
10. Remove the round fuel tank cover plate and
“O” ring from the access hole.
D
11. Before removing the strainer, clean any debris
from the bottom of the tank and wipe it clean.
12. Remove the fuel fill strainer using the hex on
the end of strainer. Carefully clean the strainer
(it may be damaged by rough handling).
13. Check for a buildup of foreign materials
where the strainer threads on to the pipe and
elbow.
14. Reinstall the strainer using the hex on end.
15. Reinstall fuel tank cover plate with “O” ring.
16. Refuel and check for leaks.
position.
start-up.
22. Check for leaks again.
3.39
DRAINING THE FUEL TANK REFUELLING PROCEDURE
1. Park the machine on level ground. 1. Park the machine on level ground.
2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest 2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest
firmly on the ground. firmly on the ground.
3. Engage the parking brake. 3. Engage the parking brake.
4. The fuel system is equipped with either 4. Turn OFF the engine and allow machine to
two standard saddle tanks or a single high cool.
capacity tank. 5. Remove the ignition key.
7. Block wheels.

5. Use the fuel gauge on the computer display or
the dipstick to estimate the container capacity 9. Do not refuel while smoking or near an open
required to properly drain the fuel. Refer flame or sparks.
to FUEL TANK in THIS SECTION for tank 10. Clear obstructions from steps and handles
capacities. needed to access fuel tank.
6. Turn OFF the engine. 11. Open cover on top of fuel tank (if equipped)
7. Remove the ignition key. and clear any debris from around the fill cap.
8. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch 12. Remove fuel fill cap slowly to allow pressure to
escape from tank.
9. Block wheels.
13. Inspect fuel fill cap gasket.
14. Inspect fuel fill strainer located under the fill
11. Remove the fuel tank fill cap. cap for debris or damage.
12. Remove the drain plugs and drain the fuel into 15. Attach a grounding strap to an unpainted
a suitable container. metal surface on the machine if the refuelling
13. Note that both the left and right sides of the tank or nozzle is so equipped.
high capacity tank need to be drained to fully 16. Fill the fuel tank until the fuel level reaches the
empty this tank. strainer or the full mark on the sight gauge if
14. Once the fluid has been drained replace the equipped.
drain plugs and fill cap. 17. Do not leave nozzle unattended or spillage
may occur.
18. Remove nozzle and ground strap (if
applicable).
D 19. Install fuel fill cap hand tight before closing fuel
fill cap cover.
position.
start-up.
3.40
AIR CLEANER MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT !
For peak engine performance and maximum fuel
AIR PRECLEANER
economy, please ensure that the air precleaner is
regularly checked and cleaned as required. All
intake air tubes and clamps should be thoroughly
ENGINE AIR
inspected on a regular basis and any damaged
PRECLEANER or missing components should be replaced
immediately.
3 3
630E-308 ENGINE AIR PRECLEANER 2
The engine air precleaner cleans engine air before

1
it reaches the air cleaner filter elements. It
removes contaminants such as dust, powder, 5
insects, rain and snow. The air precleaner should
be checked every 8 hours to make sure that
foreign materials have not plugged the intake area
or the discharge louver area. Clean as required. CENTRI® PRECLEANER OPERATION
630C-19
IMPORTANT !
The air precleaner must be check every 8 hours OPERATION:
and cleaned as required. 1. Air enters the precleaner.
If the inlet/precleaner is plugged causing a 2. Specially designed vanes move dirty air
restriction to airflow, reduced engine performance toward the impeller.
and increased fuel consumption may result. 3. The spinning impeller spins the air creating
If a plugged inlet/precleaner is left too long centrifugal force to separate contaminants
excessive air intake restriction may damage the from the clean air.
rubber air intake tube. A damaged air intake tube 4. Contaminants are blown out the discharge
will lead to ingestion of dirt into the engine which louver.
may result in engine failure. 5. Clean air enters the intake to the air cleaner.
Note that the air filter restriction indicator may not
function properly if the air intake tube is damaged.
Engine failures due to improper maintenance are
not covered by Tigercat or Engine Manufacturer’s
Warranty and any such claim will be denied.
3.41
AIR CLEANER UNLOADER VALVE
AIR This rubber valve on the tube of the air cleaner
CLEANER housing should be checked at the beginning
of every shift. (8 hours) If this valve is missing,
damaged or has become hard, it will cause the air
cleaner to become ineffective. The valve should
suck closed at 1/3 throttle.
This valve should be replaced every 1000 hours.
Remove the unloader valve from the tube of the
air cleaner housing. Check and clean the valve.
AIR CLEANER
UNLOADER
A good valve should be soft and flexible. If it is
VALVE plugged, be sure to check the filter elements as
they may need replacing as well. Reattach the
valve to the tube.
632E-014 ENGINE AIR CLEANER When operating in high dust conditions, the
unloader valve should be checked and squeezed
AIR CLEANER
every 2 hours to release dust buildup.
The air cleaner on this machine uses two filter
elements, a primary element and a safety element AIR
CLEANER
accessible from the right side of the engine
compartment.
To ensure maximum engine protection, it is
important that the elements be serviced correctly
and at proper servicing intervals.
FILTER FILTER
A filter restriction indicator is mounted to the output RESTRICTION RESTRICTION
INDICATOR SWITCH
side of the filter, this should show green when the
engine is running under load. Service is required
if the indicator shows red. This machine is also
equipped with a switch used to send a signal to
the computer control system in the event of a filter
restriction.
632E-009 ENGINE AIR CLEANER
FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR

Engine Air Intake Filter A filter restriction indicator is connected to the
outlet side of the air filter. Replace the primary air
Restricted. Service Machine to correct. filter when the indicator shows RED. This indicator
provides a continuous reading whether the engine
is running or is shut down. After replacing the filter,
reset the indicator by pressing the reset button.
NOTE: Replace the safety element every third
primary filter change.
When a signal is received from the restriction
indicator switch on the engine air cleaner a
message will be displayed. Refer to COMPUTER
– MESSAGES - ALERT – ENGINE AIR INTAKE
FILTER RESTRICTED in SECTION 2.
3.42
INTAKE TUBING AND JOINTS
OUTLET
Check all air intake system components, rubber TUBE
elbows, connector hoses, tubes and clamps for PRIMARY

damage, hardening, wear, cracks, leaks, loose ELEMENT
clamps or loose hanger bracket hardware at
the beginning of every shift. (8 hours). Repair or
replace defective parts immediately.
Replace all air intake rubber components such as
elbows and connectors every 2000 hours - High
temperatures in this area can cause the rubber to
harden. SAFETY
ELEMENT
Note: High-temperature silicone connectors do not
need to be replaced unless they are damaged.
In addition to the LUBRICATION AND
AIRCLEANER AIR FILTER ELEMENTS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE, the following
instructions should also be noted.
IMPORTANT STEPS TO FOLLOW WHEN
The most common and damaging servicing CHANGING FILTER ELEMENTS
problems are:
1. Release the cover latch gently to reduce the
OVER SERVICING amount of dust dislodged.
Filter elements increase in dust cleaning efficiency 2. Avoid dislodging dust from filter element(s) by
as dust builds up on the media. Looks can be gently pulling the element off the outlet tube.
deceiving. A filter that looks dirty is actually more
efficient than one that is clean. A filter with dust 3. Always clean the sealing surface of the outlet
build up on the media reaches nearly 100% dust tube before inserting a new filter element.
cleaning efficiency. Only when a filter is so clogged 4. Always clean the inside of the outlet tube and
with dirt that air restriction goes beyond engine filter housing.
manufacturer's guidelines, should a filter be
5. Check your old filter, It can help you detect
replaced.
foreign material on the sealing surface that is
NOTE: This does not apply to oil filters. causing leakage.
IMPROPER SERVICING NOTE: Filter elements should never be
Engine exposure to dust during servicing is the cleaned and reused. Cleaning causes dust to
largest single reason for engine damage due to bypass the filter and be deposited on the inner
dust. surface of the filter media. The dust is then
drawn directly into the engine.
Abrasive dust can easily enter the intake
system once the air cleaner cover and 6. Inspect the new filter for damage.
protective filter element is removed for 7. Insert the new filter properly. Apply pressure to
replacement. The safety element does reduce the outer rim of the filter not the flexible centre.
this risk but it should also be replaced at every
8. Inspect connections and ducts for air tight fit.
third primary element change.
Ensure that all clamps, bolts and connections
are tight. Check rubber elbows for splits or
wear points and replace as needed. Leaks
in these locations send dust directly to the
engine.
3.43
The DOC/SCR aftertreatment system consists of
THE AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM AND ITS the following components:
RELATED COMPONENTS ARE APPLICABLE
TO TIER 4F ENGINES ONLY. 1. Inlet Humidity Sensor
2. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
DIESEL OXIDATION CATALYST / 3. Heater Valve and Heated DEF Supply Lines
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTION 4. DENOX 2.2 control system (incorporated into
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM the engine control unit )
(DENOX 2.2 SYSTEM - TIER 4 FINAL) 5. Supply module
The engine on this machine is equipped with a 6. Exhaust Flap
combination Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) 7. Inlet NOX Sensor
and high efficiency Selective Catalytic Reduction 8. DOC Inlet Temperature Sensor
(SCR) aftertreatment system to limit the nitrogen
9. Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)
oxide exhaust gas values (NOX) to meet Tier 4f
emission standard requirements with low fuel 10. Dosing Module (DEF Injector)
consumption. This process is electronically 11. Mixer Tube
controlled by the DENOX 2.2 system. 12. Inlet Temperature Sensor
The diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) uses oxidation 13. Catalytic Converter with Clean Up Catalyst
at high temperatures to convert carbon monoxide (CUC) incorporated
(CO), hydrocarbons (HC) and the soluble organic 14. Outlet Temperature Sensor
fraction (SOF) of diesel particulates into inert 15. NH3 Sensor
compounds, carbon dioxide (CO2) and water 16. Outlet NOX Sensor
vapour (H2O). In addition the DOC converts
16
nitrogen oxide (NO) into nitrogen dioxide (NO2).
Increased NO2 levels enhance the performance of
the SCR catalyst at low temperatures and increase
the effectiveness of the DOC/SCR aftertreatment 7
system as a whole.
The high efficiency SCR process is based on
a series of chemical reactions which involve
the reaction of ammonia with the oxygen in the 9
exhaust gas to reduce nitrogen oxides (NOX) 15
in the exhaust gas by transforming it into inert
compounds: free nitrogen (N2) and water vapour 632E-020 DOC/SCR ATS COMPONENTS
(H2O). In addition the high efficiency catalytic
converter includes a clean up catalyst (CUC)
which reduces any excess ammonia (NH3) which
may result from the SCR process.
14
16
7
630E-268 DEF TANK
632E-019 DOC/SCR ATS COMPONENTS
3.44
14
1
16
5 3
632E-021 DOC/SCR AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM COMPONENTS
13
10 15
9 11
12
632E-022 DOC/SCR AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM COMPONENTS

IMPORTANT !
When cleaning the machine with pressurized
water it is important to avoid getting water
directly or indirectly into the exhaust tube. Water
in the exhaust tube will damage sensors and
SCR system components and affect the proper
operation of the aftertreatment system and the
engine.
3.45
HC - HYDROCARBONS
NOX - NITROGEN OXIDES
HUMIDITY DEF DOSING CO - CARBON MONOXIDE
SENSOR MODULE FILTER NH3 - AMMONIA
N2 - FREE NITROGEN
AIR FILTER H2O - WATER
CO2 - CARBON DIOXIDE
SUPPLY
MODULE
EXHAUST FLAP
HC
NOX
ECU
NOx CO
SENSOR DEF
QUALITY
SENSOR
ENGINE
DEF
LEVEL
DOC SENSOR
NOx NH3 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR SENSOR SENSORS DEF TANK
HEATER VALVE
MIXER (CIRCULATING
TUBE ENGINE
COOLANT)
CUC SCR
H 2O N2 CO2 NH3 DOSING
MODULE
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
630E-276
DOC/SCR AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM
solution instantly and, by hydrolysis, converts it
THE AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM AND ITS into ammonia (2NH3) and carbon dioxide (CO2).
TO TIER 4F ENGINES ONLY. Evaporation of the solution lowers exhaust gas
temperature, bringing it closer to the optimum
The DOC/SCR aftertreatment system is temperature required by the process.
electronically managed by the DENOX 2.2 system The exhaust fumes and ammonia at the proper
incorporated into the engine control unit (ECU). reaction temperature, are introduced into the
The ECU calculates and adjusts the flow rate catalytic converter, where the second phase of the
of the DEF solution into the system based on process takes place: by reacting with the oxygen
current engine speed, torque delivered, exhaust in the exhaust gases the ammonia is converted
temperature, amount of nitrogen oxides and into free nitrogen (N2) and water vapour (H2O).
ammonia present.
Finally the high efficiency catalytic converter
The exhaust passes through the diesel DOC which incorporates a clean up catalyst (CUC) which
uses oxidation at high temperatures to convert reduces any excess ammonia (NH3) which may
carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC) result from the SCR process.
and the soluble organic fraction (SOF) of diesel
particulates into inert compounds, carbon dioxide IMPORTANT !
(CO2) and water vapour (H2O). It also converts Engine should not idle longer than 9 consecutive
nitrogen oxide (NO) into nitrogen dioxide (NO2) hours. Damage to the emission control system will
which enhances the performance of the SCR result. When this machine idles for an extended
catalyst. period excess hydrocarbon buildup is created in
the DOC/SCR aftertreatment system. Burn off of
The supply module pump picks up the DEF excess hydrocarbon at full load immediately after
solution from the tank and sends it under pressure a long idle period will generate excess heat which
to the dosing module (DEF injector) to be injected will cause damage to emission control system
into the exhaust at the outlet of the DOC and pass components.
through the mixer tube upstream of the catalytic
converter.
The first phase of the SCR process takes place
in the first part of the catalytic converter: high
temperature exhaust gas evaporates the DEF
3.46
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) TANK
HEATER
UNIT DEF TANK
COOLANT
HEATER COIL
LEVEL SENSOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
DEF
QUALITY STRAINER
SENSOR
630E-262 DEF TANK
620E-082 HEATER UNIT
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is an aqueous urea
solution with 32.5% high purity urea and 67.5%
deionized water.
DEF is used by the DOC/SCR aftertreatment
system to lower the concentration of nitrogen
oxides from the diesel engine exhaust.
NOTE: DEF may also be referred to as AUS32
or AdBlue. All DEF must be American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified DEF or meet ISO 22241 630E-262 DEF QUALITY SENSOR
specifications.
The DEF tank is located in the compartment below
the right cab door. A DEF level indicator is shown on the main menu
The DEF fill cap can be accessed through an of the computer display.
access cover at the top of the compartment for When a problem with DEF levels or quality is
filling. The DEF tank fill point is equipped with a detected, information messages are shown on the
filter to prevent contaminants from entering the compue.
tank.
The strainer may be the cause and can be visually
It is important to avoid contamination of the inspected for debris. Clean or replace, as required.
DEF when filling the tank as this may cause
costly damage to o the aftertreatment system NOTE: Extremely low DEF levels or quality
components and affect the proper operation of the problems,, may result in derating of engine
aftertreatment system and the engine. performance to meet exhaust emission
requirements. Action to correct DEF levels or
DEF tank capacity is 43 L (11.4 US gal). DO quality problems should be taken immediately
NOT overfill tank. This tank is equipped with an to avoid affecting engine performance and
expansion capacity of 7% required to allow for the damage to the DOC/SCR aftertreatment system
expansion of DEF in cold temperature conditions. components. Refer also to COMPUTER –
DEF freezes at -11°C (12°F).
MESSAGES in SECTION 2.
The DEF tank includes a fill inlet with cap, a heater
The DEF tank and DEF supply lines are heated
unit, and a DEF quality sensor.
when temperatures are low, the system will thaw
The heater unit incorporates a heater coil, heating DEF within 30 minutes of engine start for proper
system inlet/outlet connections, DEF inlet/ operation of the diesel oxidation catalyst /selective
outlet connections, a breather, a level sensor, a catalytic reduction (DOC/SCR) aftertreatment
temperature sensor and a strainer. system.
NOTE: Whenever the engine is stopped all
DEF is pumped back to tank before the engine
power system is turned off. This process
takes approximately 90 seconds. Refer to
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM in THIS SECTION.
3.47
DRAINING THE DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID TANK
THE AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM AND ITS
RELATED COMPONENTS ARE APPLICABLE NOTE: DEF and its related components are
TO TIER 4F ENGINES ONLY. applicable to Tier 4f machines only.
Draining the DEF tank is recommended in the
case of DEF quality concerns and/or known
contamination. The DEF tank must be completely
drained and all contaminants must be removed
before refilling.
QUALITY
WARNING SENSOR
Use only diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) which

meets ISO 22241 specifications. NEVER fill
DEF is injected into the exhaust gas
stream during normal operation of the 610E-011 DEF TANK DRAIN ACCESS
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
TO DRAIN THE TANK:
aftertreatment system.
Use of other fluids may cause component 1. Park the machine on level ground.
damage, or a fire risk which could result in 2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest
death or serious injury. firmly on the ground.
IMPORTANT!
DEF should be stored between -11°C (12°F) and
30°C (86°F) and out of direct sunlight to maximize 5. Remove the ignition key.
shelf life and to avoid DEF quality problems 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
caused by improper storage.
7. Block wheels.
Refer to DIESEL OXIDATION CATALYST/
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTION 8. Install the articulation lock bar.
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM in this section for 9. Use the DEF level indicator on the
more information regarding the use of DEF and its computer display to estimate the container
function in the DOC/SCR aftertreatment system. capacity required to properly drain the DEF
Refer to DRAINING DEF TANK in THIS SECTION. solution. Total tank capacity is 43 L
(11.4 US gal).
DEF TANK
10. Remove the DEF tank drain access cover.
(BLUE FILL CAP)
11. Remove the DEF fill cap. The DEF quality
sensor location can be used as a drain
(remove the sensor carefully to avoid
damage).
41581AUNI R0
12. Drain the DEF solution into a suitable

container.
630E-269
13. Once the fluid has been drained, clean
the inside of the tank with DEF or distilled/
demineralized water only if required.
Thoroughly drain the tank after cleaning
14. Replace the quality sensor and DEF fill cap.
15. If any DEF has spilled, rinse well with water.
NOTE: To avoid contamination and ensure clean
fluid, do not re-use DEF. Re-fill tank with new DEF
only.
630E-268 DEF TANK
3.48
IMPORTANT! Heating is switched OFF when:
It is important to avoid contamination of DEF
• DEF tank temperature >16°C (61°F)
when performing maintenance on the system as
this may cause costly damage to SCR system • Supply module temperature >10°C (50°F)
components and affect the proper operation of the • Ambient air temperature >-4°C (25°F)
aftertreatment system and the engine. Heating is switched ON when:
HEATER VALVE / HEATED DEF SUPPLY LINES • DEF tank temperature <15°C (59°F)
• Supply module temperature: +8°C (46°F)
CONNECTOR
• Ambient air temperature: -5°C (23°F)
When conditions require heating the system will
thaw DEF within 30 minutes of engine start for
proper operation of the aftertreatment system.
Note also that whenever the engine is stopped all
COOLANT DEF is pumped back to tank before the engine
OUTLET power system is turned off. This process takes
approximately 90 seconds.
COOLANT
COOLANT BYPASS
INLET
630E-265 HEATER VALVE

The heater valve is located on a bracket on the
right side of the engine compartment.
RIGHT SIDE
OF ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
620E-272 HEATER VALVE

The heater valve controls the flow of engine
coolant through the DEF tank heater coil and
the supply module when heating of the DEF is
required. The heater valve also controls the
constant flow of engine coolant to the dosing
module for cooling purposes. This machine is
equipped with electrically heated DEF supply lines.
DEF freezes at -11°C (12°F).
Temperature sensors signals control the operation
of both the electrically heated DEF supply lines
and the heater valve which, depending on the
temperature, opens or closes the flow of hot
engine coolant to the heater coil and supply
module.
3.49
EXHAUST FLAP
TO TIER 4F ENGINES ONLY.
EXHAUST FLAP
DENOX 2.2 DOSING SYSTEM
630E-279
An exhaust flap is located at the exhaust outlet

from the engine. The exhaust flap is used to
regulate temperature of the exhaust entering the
diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) to optimum levels
for proper operation of the aftertreatment system.
630E-259 ENGINE ECU
DENOX 2.2 control system is incorporated into the
engine control unit (ECU).
The DOC/SCR aftertreatment system is
electronically managed by the DENOX 2.2 control
system. The ECU calculates and adjusts the
flow rate of the DEF solution into the system
based on current engine speed, torque delivered,
exhaust temperature, amount of nitrogen oxides
and ammonia present and the humidity levels in
incoming air.
3.50
DIESEL OXIDATION CATALYST (DOC) SUPPLY MODULE
DIESEL OXIDATION CATALYST (DOC)

630E-280
630E-267 SUPPLY MODULE
The diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) uses oxidation
at high temperatures to convert carbon monoxide The supply module pump picks up the DEF
(CO), hydrocarbons (HC) and the soluble organic solution from the tank and sends it under pressure
fraction (SOF) of diesel particulates into inert to the dosing module, mounted on the mixer tube
compounds, carbon dioxide (CO2) and water incorporated into the diesel oxidation catalyst. DEF
vapour (H2O). is injected into the exhaust at the outlet of the
diesel oxidation catalyst and upstream of the
In addition the DOC converts nitrogen oxide (NO)
catalytic converter.
into nitrogen dioxide (NO2). Increased NO2 levels
enhance the performance of the SCR catalyst at
low temperatures and increase the effectiveness
of the DOC/SCR aftertreatment system as a
whole.
The DOC is located upstream of the catalytic
converter (SCR & CUC) and at its outlet
incorporates the mixer tube and the mounting for
the dosing module.
3.51
REMOVE DEF DOSING MODULE FILTER
RELATED COMPONENTS ARE APPLICABLE 1. Park the machine on level ground.
TO TIER 4F ENGINES ONLY. 2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest
DEF DOSING MODULE FILTER
3. Make sure the engine is at operating
NOTE: DEF and its related components are temperature.
applicable to Tier 4f machines only.
The DEF dosing module filter should be replaced
as part of scheduled maintenance every 250 5. Turn OFF the engine.
hours. 6. Remove the ignition key.
If DEF and/or aftertreatment fault codes have 7. Block wheels.
occurred then Tigercat recommends performing a
DEF flushing test and Urea Dosing System Test 8. Install the articulation lock bar.
(UDST) at every DEF dosing module filter change 9. Wipe clean the area around the DEF supply
to ensure proper operation of the DEF supply module and filter including the supply
module. module ports with particular attention to the
If no DEF and/or aftertreatment fault codes have inlet port and filter cap to avoid introducing
occurred then only the DEF dosing module filter contamination into the filter housing while
replacement is required. performing this procedure.
CHANGING DEF DOSING MODULE FILTER, 10. Place container below to catch the spills.
DEF FLUSHING TEST AND UDST (UREA
DOSING SYSTEM TEST)
TOOLS REQUIRED
• 27 mm (1 1/16 in) wrench
• Container to catch DEF and flushing water
• Clean distilled/demineralized water
• 1 litre (0.25 US gal) plastic water bottle with
hose attached*
• Laptop computer with Tigercat by FPT E.A.SY. 630E-281
software to run UDST test*

11. Turn the filter cover counterclockwise to
• PT-Box* remove from the supply module. Use a 27 mm
IMPORTANT! (1 1/16 in) wrench.
Do not contaminate the DEF when performing
maintenance on the system as this may cause
costly damage to SCR system components and
affect the proper operation of the aftertreatment
system and the engine.
*Items required if performing a DEF flushing test
and UDST.
630E-282
12. Remove the equalizing element and note the

colour of the filter inside (black or grey).
3.52
630E-285
13. Find the filter removal tool provided with the

replacement parts select the correct edge
BLACK (B) for black filters or GREY (G) for
grey filters.
630E-287
16. Clean surfaces with distilled/demineralized

water only to avoid DEF contamination.
Check the area around the filter for cracks. If
cracks are found the supply module must be
replaced.
17. Thoroughly clean the filter cover to avoid
introducing contamination.
DEF FLUSHING TEST
A
630E-284
14. Insert the tool edge completely until a click is

felt or heard.
630E-333
A Inlet Port
630E-286
15. Pull out the filter, using a tool in the slot on the 18. Disconnect the DEF hose from the inlet port
filter removal tool if required. of DEF supply module.
3.53

19. Fill the plastic bottle with distilled/

demineralized water.
630E-331
24. Distilled water will be drawn from the bottle

and flushed through the DEF supply module.
Suction may begin to collapse the bottle and
water flow out the bottom of the module will
increase.
630E-332
A Inlet Port
20. Connect the water bottle hose to the inlet port
of the DEF supply module.
630E-328
25. The results of the UDST will show a flat line

for DEF pressure (red line) because the pump
cannot build pressure without the filter in
place.
26. Repeat the UDST test a second time to
ensure the DEF supply module is thoroughly
flushed and working correctly.
27. When the UDST flushing procedure has been
performed twice successfully remove the
630E-334
bottle and hose.
21. Raise the water bottle above the DEF supply
module. 28. Reinstall the DEF module inlet hose.
22. A small amount of water will flow through the

DEF supply module and out the bottom where
the filter has been removed.
23. With the aid of an assistant run a UDST test
from the laptop computer. Refer to PT Box
Manual for UDST test information.
3.54
REPLACE FILTER 35. Start the engine.
36. Check for leaks.
IMPORTANT!
Do not contaminate the DEF when performing
maintenance on the system as this may cause
costly damage to SCR system components and
affect the proper operation of the aftertreatment
system and the engine.
WARNING
630E-288
29. Install the new filter. Lubricate the o-rings Use only diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) which
on the filter with clean DEF solution for easy meets ISO 22241 specifications. NEVER fill
installation. the DEF tank with any other fluid.
DEF is injected into the exhaust gas
stream during normal operation of the
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
aftertreatment system.
Use of other fluids may cause component
UDST (UREA DOSING SYSTEM TEST)

38. With the aid of an assistant run a UDST test
from the laptop computer. Refer to PT Box
Manual for UDST test information.
630E-289
30. Install the new equalizing element.

NOTE: The equalizing element must be
replaced with each filter change.
630E-327
39. If the DEF supply module is functioning

correctly the test should show a characteristic
curve as shown above, DEF pressure (red
630E-290 line).
31. Reinstall the clean filter cover, tighten to
20 Nm (15 lbf-ft). Use a 27 mm (1 1/16 in)
wrench.
position.
start-up.
3.55
DOSING MODULE (DEF INJECTOR)
40. A confirmation screen will indicate System is

OK if the DEF supply module is functioning
correctly.
41. Repeat the UDST test a second time to
confirm results.
630E-274 DOSING MODULE

The dosing module is mounted on the DOC outlet
upstream of the catalytic converter. The dosing
module injects DEF into the exhaust pipe. Note
that this module must be mounted at the correct
630E-330 specified angle to function properly.
42. If the UDST test passes twice the DEF supply The dosing module is cooled by a constant
module is OK. flow of engine coolant supplied by the heater
valve to maintain optimum temperature for the
aftertreatment process.
MIXER TUBE
630E-329
43. If the UDST test fails twice note the error

mode(s) and contact customer service.
630E-275 MIXER TUBE
The mixer tube is incorporated into the outlet of

the DOC upstream from the catalytic converter.
The insulated high-turbulence mixer tube is
used to mix the DEF solution and exhaust gases
together before they enter the catalytic converter.
3.56
CATALYTIC CONVERTER HUMIDITY SENSOR
620E-089 HUMIDITY SENSOR

The humidity sensor is located on the air intake
just past the air cleaner. This sensor monitors the
temperature and humidity of intake air sending
signals to the DENOX 2.2 control system. This
information is used to calculate the amount of DEF
to be injected into the system.
632E-024 CATALYTIC CONVERTER

The catalytic converter is located on the left side of
the engine compartment. Chemical reactions
inside the catalytic converter reduce nitrogen
oxides (NOX) in the exhaust gas.
The catalytic converter is equipped with sound-
proofing material and replaces the exhaust
silencer. It incorporates both the selective catalytic
reduction (SCR) and the cleanup catalyst (CUC)
components of the aftertreatment system.
The first phase of the SCR process takes part
in the first part of the catalytic converter: high
temperature exhaust gas evaporates the DEF
solution instantly and, by hydrolysis, converts it
into ammonia (2NH3) and carbon dioxide (CO2).
Evaporation of the solution lowers exhaust gas
temperature, bringing it closer to the optimum
temperature required by the process.
The exhaust fumes and ammonia at the proper
reaction temperature, are introduced into the
catalytic converter, where the second phase of the
process takes place: by reacting with the oxygen
in the exhaust gasses the ammonia is converted
into free nitrogen (N2) and water vapour (H2O).
Finally the high efficiency catalytic converter
incorporates a clean up catalyst (CUC) which
reduces any excess ammonia (NH3) which may
result from the SCR process.
3.57
NH3 SENSOR
RELATED COMPONENTS ARE APPLICABLE ELECTRONIC
CONTROL
TO TIER 4F ENGINES ONLY. UNIT
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
TAG
SENSOR
630E-264
NH3 SENSOR
The NH3 sensor is mounted at the outlet of the
catalytic converter. The NH3 sensors detect and
send information about the NH3 levels in the
exhaust. This information is used to calculate the
amount of DEF to be injected into the system and
to monitor DOC/SCR aftertreatment system
operation.
620E-087 TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to APPROVED ANTISEIZE PASTES
Temperature sensors are mounted at the inlet of FOR EXHAUST / AFTERTREATMENT LINE
the diesel oxidation catalyst, the inlet of the (TIGERCAT BY FPT Tier 4F ENGINES) in THIS
catalytic converter and the outlet of the catalytic SECTION.
converter. These 3 sensors send exhaust
temperature signals to the DENOX 2.2 control
system. The control system uses this information
to calculate the amount of DEF to be injected into
the system.
NOTE: All three temperature sensors are identical,
however location should be noted for analysis
purposes when replacing a temperature sensor.
3.58
NOX SENSOR APPROVED ANTI-SEIZE PASTES FOR
EXHAUST / AFTERTREATMENT LINE
ELECTRONIC (TIGERCAT BY FPT Tier 4F ENGINES)
CONTROL
UNIT
NOX sensors-Weicon High Tech Anti-Seize only
NH3 sensor-Loctite X203 Dry Film Moly Anti-Seize
IMPORTANT!
When checking or replacing any sensor or plugs
in the exhaust or the aftertreatment system it
is important to use only approved anti-seize as
CERAMIC SENSOR specified by Tigercat.
Use of non-approved compounds can affect the
620E-088
NOX SENSOR operation of the NOX and NH3 sensors and cause
a malfunction of the aftertreatment system. This
The inlet NOX sensor is mounted upstream of the may result in poisoning of the SCR catalyst and
diesel oxidation catalyst. The outlet NOX sensor is require replacement of expensive aftertreatment
mounted at the outlet of the catalytic converter. system parts.
The NOX sensors detect and send information
about the dosing of DEF solution and the
efficiency of the catalytic converter to the DENOX
2.2 control system. This information is used to
calculate the amount of DEF to be injected into the
system and to monitor DOC/SCR aftertreatment
system operation.
Each NOX sensor consists of ceramic sensor
and an electronic control unit linked by a cable.
The sensor detects the concentration of nitrogen
oxides in the exhaust.
The sensor, cable and control unit are considered
to be one part for service/replacement purposes.
Note that cable length cannot be changed as this
will affect the proper operation of the sensor.
IMPORTANT!
When checking or replacing any sensor or plugs
in the exhaust or the aftertreatment system it
is important to use only approved anti-seize
as specified by Tigercat. Use of non-approved
compounds can affect the operation of the
NOX sensor and a malfunction of the DOC/
SCR aftertreatment system. This may result in
poisoning of the catalytic converter and require
replacement of expensive aftertreatment system
parts.
Refer to APPROVED ANTISEIZE PASTES
FOR EXHAUST / AFTERTREATMENT LINE
(TIGERCAT BY FPT Tier 4F ENGINES) in THIS
SECTION.
3.59
AVOID DEF QUALITY PROBLEMS WITH PROP-
THE AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM AND ITS ER HANDLING PRACTICES
RELATED COMPONENTS ARE APPLICABLE Most DEF quality problems can be avoided
TO TIER 4F ENGINES ONLY. entirely with a little care and proper handling of
DEF.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)
HANDLING FILLING THE DEF TANK
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is an aqueous urea • Always clean the area around the fill cap and
solution with 32.5% high purity urea and 67.5% avoid introducing contaminants into the DEF
deionized water. Note that DEF may also be tank when filling.
referred to as AUS32 or AdBlue and should meet • Always use only diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
ISO 22241 specifications. Use only DEF meeting which meets ISO 22241 specifications.
this standard. Use of any other fluid will contaminate the
It is important to avoid contamination of DEF as aftertreatment system and may pose a safety
this may cause costly damage to SCR system hazard.
components and affect the proper operation of the USE OF PROPER STORAGE CONTAINERS
SCR system and the engine.
• To prevent contaminants from affecting DEF
When a problem with DEF quality is detected quality it should be handled only in storage,
information messages will be shown on the transport and filling containers intended
computer display. Note that DEF quality problems exclusively for that purpose.
may result in derating of engine performance to
meet emission standard requirements. Action • Polyethylene or stainless steel containers
to correct DEF quality problems should be are recommended. Refer also to DEF
taken immediately to avoid affecting engine manufacturer's recommendations.
performance and damage to SCR aftertreatment • DEF is corrosive to metals other than stainless
system components. Refer also to COMPUTER – steel. Transport in metal containers other than
MESSAGES in SECTION 2. stainless steel will result in contamination.
For safety information refer to DIESEL EXHAUST PROPER STORAGE CONDITIONS TO
FLUID (DEF) in SECTION 1 of THIS MANUAL. MAXIMIZE SHELF LIFE
• DEF should be stored between -11°C (12°F)
WARNING and 30°C (86°F) and out of direct sunlight to
maximize shelf life and to avoid DEF quality
Use only diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) which
problems caused by improper storage.
meets ISO 22241 specifications. NEVER fill
the DEF tank with any other fluid. • DEF quality problems can often be avoided
DEF is injected into the exhaust gas with proper storage and handling practices to
stream during normal operation of the maximize shelf life.
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) • DEF storage areas should always be out of
aftertreatment system. direct sunlight and away from heat sources to
Use of other fluids may cause component avoid reducing shelf life.
death or serious injury. • DEF shelf life is limited. It should be
consumed on a first in first out basis, within
manufacturer's recommended shelf life limits.
DEF beyond manufacturer's recommended
shelf life limits may not meet ISO 22241
specifications.
3.60
DRAINING TRANSMISSION OIL
7. Block wheels.
9. The transmission is equipped with a plug to
drain the contents of the transmission into a
storage container.
10. Remove the belly pan in the front chassis
closest to the articulation joint.
11. Remove the drain plug on the hydraulic motor
side of the transmission (pic).
12. Once fluid has been drained, replace the drain
plug in the transmission housing once draining
has completed.
TRANSMISSION DRAIN
630C-100 TRANSMISSION OIL
3.61
LOCATIONS CAUTION
Refer to LUBRICATION AND SERVICE CHART
and SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE in THIS
SECTION for service intervals and recommended
gear oils.
Fluid spray hazard. Contact with fluid
under pressure may cause injury.
regular oil sampling at the owner’s expense during
the warranty period. Refer to OIL ANALYSIS Pressure may build up inside axle due
PROGRAM in THIS SECTION for details. to temperature changes. Use caution
when removing drain and fill plugs, slowly
Refer also to AXLE – REAR (BOGIE) AXLE for loosen plug to relieve pressure before
635G machines. removing completely.
LIMITED SLIP ADDITIVES
Front and rear axles are equipped with brakes. It PINION
is permissible to use a limited slip additive in the SEAL
GREASE
axles (B20 rear axle differential section only) to FITTING
reduce brake chatter noise. Do not exceed the
maximum recommended amount of additive as
this may cause a loss of differential lock slipping
torque and brake holding torque. Refer to
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE CHART for additive 632E-001 FRONT AXLE
recommendation details.
BRAKE BRAKE AXLE LEVEL
AXLE LEVEL INSPECTION INSPECTION PORT CHECK AND FILL
CHECK AND FILL PORT
(FAR SIDE) (FAR SIDE)
PINION SEAL AXLE DRAIN

GREASE FITTING
67922B02 B17 SEVERE DUTY AXLE DRAIN AND FILL LOCATIONS (632E/635G FRONT AXLE)
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL LEVEL PLANETARY
LEVEL CHECK CHECK AND FILL/ LEVEL CHECK
AND FILL BRAKE INSPECTION AND FILL
PORT
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL DRAIN PLANETARY

DRAIN DRAIN
69514B01 B20 SEVERE DUTY AXLE DRAIN AND FILL LOCATIONS (632E REAR AXLE)
3.62
DRAINING AND REFILLING 12. Refer to SERVICE AND LUBRICATION
B20 SEVERE DUTY REAR AXLE POINTS CHART in THIS SECTION for
differential and housing oil capacities and
• Park the machine on level ground.
recommended gear oils.
• Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest
13. Replace the DIFFERENTIAL FILL/LEVEL
PLUG.
• Engage the parking brake.
14. Replace the PLANETARY FILL/LEVEL
• Turn OFF the engine. PLUGS.
• Remove the ignition key. 15. Check all drain, fill and level plugs for leaks.
• Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch 16. Run axle for at least 10 minutes to remove
trapped air in confined spaces.
• Install the articulation lock bar.
17. Recheck oil levels and top up as necessary.
• The axle must be level in order to drain and
refill it properly.
• The oil must be warm before draining and
refilling.
• Clean around all fill, level and drain plugs
before removing them.
DIFFERENTIAL (1 FILLING POINT)
AND PLANETARIES (2 FILLING POINTS)
1. Note that the axle must be level to drain and
refill it properly.
2. Before draining the oil from the axle it
should sit for at least 30 minutes so that
contaminants in the oil can settle.
3. Remove the DIFFERENTIAL FILL/LEVEL
PLUG.
4. Remove the PLANETARY FILL/LEVEL
PLUGS (2 per axle).
5. Remove the DIFFERENTIAL DRAIN PLUG
and drain the oil into a suitable container for
disposal.
6. Remove the PLANETARY DRAIN PLUGS
(2 per axle) and drain the oil into a suitable
container for disposal.
7. Clean any filings from the three drain plugs.
8. Replace the DIFFERENTIAL DRAIN PLUG.
9. Replace the PLANETARY DRAIN PLUGS (2
per axle)
10. Refill the differential with new oil until the level
reaches the bottom of the DIFFERENTIAL
FILL/LEVEL PLUG.
11. Refill the planetaries with new oil until the level
reaches the bottom of the PLANETARY FILL/
LEVEL PLUGS.
3.63
REAR (BOGIE) AXLE DRAINING AND REFILLING
(635G) BOGIE AXLE
The bogie axle has 3 separate oil reservoirs • Park the machine on level ground.
(differential, left and right bogie housings and
• Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest
planetaries). Each reservoir must be filled
separately to get the proper level of lubrication in
the bogie axle. • Engage the parking brake.
Refer to SERVICE AND LUBRICATION POINTS • Turn OFF the engine.
CHART in THIS SECTION for differential oil • Remove the ignition key.
capacity and recommended gear oils.
• Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
components is contingent on performance of • Install the articulation lock bar.
regular oil sampling at the owner’s expense during • The bogie axle must be level in order to drain
the warranty period. Refer to OIL ANALYSIS and refill it properly.
• The oil must be warm before draining and
LIMITED SLIP ADDITIVES refilling.
Rear bogie axles are equipped with brakes. It • Clean around all fill, level and drain plugs
is permissible to use a limited slip additive in before removing them.
rear bogie axle (differential section only) to
reduce brake chatter noise. Do not exceed the
maximum recommended amount of additive as
this may cause a loss of differential lock slipping
torque and brake holding torque. Refer to
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE CHART for additive
recommendation details.
DIFFERENTIAL
FILL/LEVEL PLUG
(1 PLACE)
BOGIE HOUSING
DRAIN PLUG
(4 PLACES )
DIFFERENTIAL BOGIE HOUSINGS

DRAIN PLUG (1 PLACE) FILL/LEVEL PLUG
BOTTOM OF DIFFERENTIAL (2 PLACES)
NOT VISIBLE IN THIS
ILLUSTRATION
71542B01 BOGIE AXLE FILL, DRAIN AND LEVEL PLUGS (SEVERE DUTY AXLE SHOWN)
3.64
DIFFERENTIAL (1 FILLING POINT)
AND BOGIE HOUSINGS (2 FILLING POINTS)
1. Note that the bogie housings must be level to
drain and refill them properly.
2. Before draining the oil from the bogie
housings, the axle should sit for at least 30
minutes so that contaminants in the oil can
settle in the oil pan.
3. Remove the DIFFERENTIAL FILL/LEVEL
PLUG.
4. Remove the BOGIE HOUSINGS FILL/LEVEL
PLUGS (1 per housing).
5. Remove the DIFFERENTIAL DRAIN PLUG
and drain the oil into a suitable container for
disposal.
6. Remove the BOGIE HOUSING DRAIN
PLUGS (2 per housing) and drain the oil into a
suitable container for disposal.
7. Clean any filings from the five drain plugs.
8. Replace the DIFFERENTIAL DRAIN PLUG.
9. Replace the BOGIE HOUSING DRAIN
PLUGS (2 per housing)
10. Refill the differential with new oil until the level
reaches the bottom of the DIFFERENTIAL
FILL/LEVEL PLUG.
11. Refill the bogie housings with new oil until
the level reaches the bottom of the BOGIE
HOUSING FILL/LEVEL PLUGS.
12. Refer to SERVICE AND LUBRICATION
POINTS CHART in THIS SECTION for
differential and housing oil capacities and
recommended gear oils.
13. Replace the DIFFERENTIAL FILL/LEVEL
PLUG.
14. Replace the BOGIE HOUSINGS FILL/LEVEL
PLUGS.
15. Check all drain, fill and level plugs for leaks.
16. Run axle for at least 10 minutes to remove
trapped air in confined spaces.
17. Recheck oil levels and top up as necessary.
3.65
SLEW BEARING LUBRICATION -
BOGIE AXLES (6353001 TO 6353200)
The slew bearing requires regular lubrication.
Refer to SERVICE AND LUBRICATION POINTS
~MACHINES 6353001 TO 6353200 and
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE in THIS SECTION
for maintenance interval and lubrication point
information.
3.66
SERVICE BRAKE 14. Engage the parking brake.
CHECKING BRAKE AND ACCUMULATOR FOR 15. Fully apply the brake pedal 5 times. The
PROPER OPERATION accumulator pressure should remain above
The main pump supplies oil directly to the brake 800 psi (no message on the computer
accumulator, via a check valve inside the main display).
pump block to charge the accumulator to specified As the pressure drops in the accumulator the
pressure. The accumulator is installed to ensure brake pedal will become spongy.
that the brake control remains responsive at all
times by maintaining an optimum pilot pressure of Once the pressure falls below 800 psi the
3000psi to the brake pilot valve. This oil from the Service Brake Pressure Low warning will
accumulator side of the check valve is sent to the appear on the screen.
brake foot control valve.
The accumulator when functioning properly
will hold sufficient pressure for up to 5 brake Service Brake
applications after the engine stalls or is turned off,
beyond this the pressure drops substantially. Pressure Low. Service machine to correct.
circuit refer to SECTION 9 of THE SERVICE
MANUAL.
PROCEDURE:
1. Park the machine on level ground. 16. If the Service Brake Pressure Low warning
appears on the screen before the brake has
been pumped 5 times from a full charge
investigate the cause.
Check first for leaks in the brake circuit. If no
4. Turn OFF the engine. leaks are found check for proper operation
of the brake pedal valve, accumulator, check
valve and brake pressure sensor.
6. Block wheels.
7. Install the articulation lock bar. circuit refer to SECTION 9 of THE SERVICE
8. Release the pressure stored in the brake MANUAL.
accumulator by fully applying the brake
foot pedal repeatedly until there is no pedal
resistance. This may take a minimum of 150
applications.
position.
start-up.
NOTE: The engine will not turn over unless the
parking brake is ENGAGED.
13. Disengage parking brake to fully charge the
accumulator. Run engine for 10 seconds, then
shut engine off.
NOTE: When the parking brake is
DISENGAGED full pressure is available from
the main pump to the brake accumulator.
3.67
REAR PILOT ACCUMULATOR 11. Remove the ignition key.
CHECKING FOR PROPER OPERATION 12. It should be possible dozer, arch and boom to
The rear pilot accumulator is intended to supply the ground.
pressure to safely lower all elements to the ground 13. If it is not possible investigate the cause.
in the event of an engine stall or other machine
malfunction. Check accumulator for proper operation.
The accumulator when functioning properly will For more information about the rear pilot
allow the operator to lower the dozer, arch and accumulator refer to SECTION 12 of THE
boom to the ground with the engine off. SERVICE MANUAL.
PROCEDURE:
machine.
3. Raise the dozer, arch and boom fully.
6. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position.
7. Using the computer from the main menu

navigate to INFORMATION MENU (F3) –
More...(F3) – Accumulator (F1)
MODE MENU in SECTION 2 of the
OPERATOR'S or SERVICE MANUAL.
machine element to be lowered.
9. Press and hold the F1 button (test functions)
and operate the control to lower suspended
element until it is on the ground.
10. Repeat step 8 to 10 for all raised implements.
3.68
CENTRE JOINT
MAINTENANCE OF CENTRE JOINT
Maintenance in this area is usually limited to:
a) Regular lubrication of the two centre joint
grease fittings to purge the pivot bearings of
debris and water. Refer to SERVICE AND
LUBRICATION POINTS in THIS SECTION
for lubrication intervals. Use only high
quality, lithium based EP2 grease containing
molybdenum disulphide.
b) Visually checking the centre joint pivot for
looseness every 48 hours. With an observer
on the ground, keeping well clear of the centre
joint area, perform the following test to check
for looseness of centre joint.
1. Have operator lift the dozer blade off the
ground and then rapidly raise and lower
blade several times to "bounce" machine.
2. As machine bounces, check for motion
between the front and rear chassis frame
lugs. Also check for a "clunking" sound at
the centre joint area.
3. Movement between front and rear chassis
lugs or clunking of the pivot indicates a
loose joint and preload must be checked.
Refer SECTION 11 of the SERVICE
MANUAL for more information.
REAR
CHASSIS
FRONT
CHASSIS
CHECK FOR
MOVEMENT IN
THIS JOINT AREA
620E-066 CENTRE JOINT PRE-LOAD CHECK
3.69
TILTING THE CAB 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
7. Block wheels.
WARNING 8. Install the articulation lock bar.
Before tilting the cab, ensure that the 9. Remove the sweep mounting bolts at the cab.
machine is parked on level ground. Lower (2 bolts)
the dozer blade and grapple on to the
10. Remove the right side Cab Locking Pins
ground. Engage the parking brake and turn
(2 pins). This is done by first removing the
the ignition switch off.
locking bolts. (2 bolts)
11. Open the maintenance door on the right front
NOTE: The cab tilt circuit is closed and does not access panel to access the cab tilt hand pump.
normally require scheduled maintenance other
LOCATED ON THE
than lubrication of cylinders and pivot points. RIGHT SIDE AT THE
Tigercat recommends the use of DEXTRON III FRONT OF THE ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
TYPE transmission fluid in this circuit (total circuit
capacity 1 L [0.25 US gal]). The fill port is located PUMP HANDLE
on the pump.
CAB
SWEEP
BOLTS
PUMP
PUMP LEVER
SHOWN IN
"RAISE" POSITION
620E-065 PUMP CONTROL LEVER

620E-072 IN RAISE CAB POSITION
12. Turn the lever on the pump manifold to RAISE
(pointing to the front of the machine).
13. Insert handle into pump and pump in a steady
manner to raise the cab to the tilt position.
The pump handle is stored in brackets inside
the cab.
CAUTION
Keep hands away from
the locking pin area.
620E-070
As the cab passes "top
dead centre" it will
slowly move on its own
to the full extent of the
safety cable. DO NOT
620E-017 PUMP BEYOND LIMIT
PUMP HANDLE OF SAFETY CABLE.
620E-067 CAB LOCKING PINS STORAGE
RAISING THE CAB 14. Insert CAB SUPPORT BRACE for partial tilt.
Secure brace at each end with the cab locking
1. Park the machine on level ground. pins. Full tilt is limited to the length of the
2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest safety cable and is beyond centre of gravity.
firmly on the ground. The cab will stay at this limit provided Skidder
is on level ground.
3.70
LOWERING THE CAB
WARNING 1. Clear the area under the cab of obstructions
and secure all lines and wires.
Before working under cab; 2. If the Cab Support Brace was used, you may
Machine must be parked on level ground. have to take the weight off of it by slightly
Cab must be fully tilted with safety cable raising the cab before removing it.
completely tight, or cab support brace LOCATED ON THE
must be installed. RIGHT SIDE AT THE
FRONT OF THE ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
PUMP HANDLE
PUMP LEVER
SHOWN IN
"LOWER" POSITION
PUMP
PUMP CONTROL LEVER

620E-072 IN LOWER CAB POSITION
3. Turn the lever on the pump manifold to
CAB SAFETY LOWER (pointing to the rear of the machine)
CABLE (3361B)
CAUTION
Keep hands away from the locking pin area
as the cab is being lowered.
CAB AT FULL TILT SUPPORTED 4. Pump the handle in a steady motion to lower
620E-033 BY SAFETY CABLE
the cab.
5. Watch closely for pinching of hydraulic lines
CAB
LOCKING and wires.
PIN
SAFETY CABLE 6. When fully lowered, insert Cab Locking Pins
CAB SUPPORT
BRACE (3291B).
and tighten locking bolts (2 pins) (2 bolts)
MUST USE CAB
& CHASSIS LUGS 7. Turn the lever on the pump manifold to point
SHOWN toward the front of the machine and store the
CAB pump handle inside the cab.
LOCKING
PIN 8. Close the maintenance door securely.
9. Replace the Cab Sweep Bolts. (2 bolts)
PARTIAL TILT WITH
620E-064 CAB SUPPORT BRACE WARNING
If cab support brace is damaged or lost,
it must be replaced immediately with
Tigercat brace PART NO. 3291B. DO
NOT attempt to work under a raised cab
supported only by the hydraulic cylinder or
a substitute device.
CAB
SUPPORT
BRACE
WARNING
If cab safety cable is damaged or lost,
CAB SUPPORT BRACE STORED it must be replaced immediately with
IN COMPARTMENT BELOW
620E-086 RIGHT CAB DOOR Tigercat PART NO. 3361B. DO NOT
attempt to work under a raised cab
supported only by the hydraulic cylinder or
a substitute device.
3.71
PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM SYSTEM TEST
MAINTENANCE This system should be tested once every month
WATER DOZER BLADE
by turning the shut-off valve ON and expelling
WATER TANK CONTROL water from the hose end nozzle. A very forceful
VALVE
discharge of water should be obtained. If the water
does not come out with force (with pressure gauge
reading 60 psi [4 bar]) the system needs to be
PURGED. Refer to PURGING PRESSURIZED
WATER SYSTEM in THIS SECTION.
After testing, the tank must be refilled and
pressurized to 60 psi (4 bar). Refer to the following
HOSE STORAGE
FILL AND CHARGE procedure. This FILL AND
SHUT-OFF VALVE
IN CLOSED
COMPARTMENT CHARGE procedure should be carried out yearly.
POSITION
620E-004 PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM FILL & CHARGE PRESSURIZED

WATER SYSTEM
A water tank is incorporated into the dozer blade
and is pressurized to 60 psi (4 bar). A valve DOZER BLADE
controls the flow of water from the tank to a hose
located in the hose storage compartment on the FILL PLUG WATER TANK
dozer blade.
The control valve incorporates an air charge valve,
a pressure gauge and a relief valve on the outlet
side of the valve. A ball valve is installed on the
outlet side of the valve and is used to shut off
the water supply to the hose. This shut-off valve
should be in the CLOSED position when the 620E-010 PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM
system is not in use.
The pressure gauge on the valve should read 2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest
60 psi (4 bar) check system pressure daily. The firmly on the ground.
pressurized water system should be drained and
refilled every 1000 hours as per the maintenance 3. Engage the parking brake.
schedule. 4. Turn OFF the engine.
PRESSURE
GAUGE 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
OUTLET
7. Block wheels.
CONNECTION
9. Open water shut-off valve and completely
discharge all water and compressed air from
the tank via the hose end nozzle.
AIR CHARGE
VALVE
WATER SHUT-OFF VALVE

(SHOWN CLOSED)
620E-003 WATER CONTROL VALVE

Refer also to FIRE PREVENTION in SECTION 1.
10. Slowly unscrew fill plug two full turns. Any

remaining air in the tank will be heard
expelling from the special fill plug. Do not
remove fill plug until all air has been expelled.
3.72
11. Close water shut-off valve. 5. Remove the ignition key.
12. Fill tank with clean water. 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
13. W
hen temperatures below 32°F (0°C) are 7. Block wheels.
anticipated, use a 60/40 solution of Nontoxic
R. V. Antifreeze or other suitable antifreeze.
Antifreeze solution must meet GM 6038M 9. Open water shut-off valve and completely
specifications. discharge all water and compressed air from
the tank via the hose end nozzle.
14. N
OTE: Most Nontoxic R.V. Anti freeze
solutions contain corrosion and algae
inhibitors, it is therefore suggested that this
solution be added to the water on a continual
basis regardless of temperature conditions.
15. Install fill plug in tank.
16. N
OTE: This is a special plug designed to
withstand pressurization of the water tank.
Do not substitute.
17. Pressurize the system to 60 psi (4 bar) as
10. Slowly unscrew fill plug two full turns. Any
indicated on pressure gauge by connecting
remaining air in the tank will be heard
an air hose to air charge valve beside the
expelling from the special fill plug. Do not
pressure gauge.
remove fill plug until all air has been expelled.
18. Open the water shut-off valve.
11. Close the water shut-off valve and add
19. Discharge about 1/2 US gal (2 L) of fluid into 2 US gal (8 L) of CLEAN water to the tank.
an empty antifreeze jug or other suitable
12. Install the fill plug
container.
NOTE: This is a special plug designed to
20. T
here will be significant foaming as the fluid
withstand pressurization of the water tank.
is discharged into the jug. Continue until
Do not substitute.
a very forceful flow is obtained and any
contamination that may have been in the tank 13. Pressurize the system to 60 psi (4 bar) as
is flushed from the system. indicated on pressure gauge by connecting
21. Check fluid in the jug for contamination. If fluid
pressure gauge.
is dirty dispose of it properly.
14. Open the shut-off valve and completely
22. Close the water shut-off valve.
discharge all the water in the tank via the hose
23. Release pressure and fluid from the hose. end nozzle.
24. Pressurize the system to 60 psi (4 bar) as 15. Discharge all the water into an empty
indicated on pressure gauge by connecting antifreeze jug or other suitable container.
There will be significant foaming as the fluid
pressure gauge.
is discharged into the jug. Continue until
25. Return the hose to the hose compartment. a very forceful flow is obtained and any
contamination that may have been in the tank
PURGING PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM is flushed from the system.
Purging should be carried out whenever the flow of 16. If a forceful discharge was not achieved,
water does not forcefully discharge from the end repeat the purging procedure. If a second
of the hose with the pressure gauge reading 60 psi purging does not work, remove lines and
(4 bar). check for an obstruction.
1. Park the machine on level ground. 17. After the purging operation, fill and charge
2. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest the system as described in FILL & CHARGE
firmly on the ground. PRESSURIZED WATER SYSTEM in THIS
SECTION.
3.73
GRAPPLE SNUBBER MAINTENANCE
SNUBBER HOUSING
USED ON TIGERCAT GRAPPLES
In this model the snubbers are part of the link.
Two separate snubbers provide snubbing action
in two directions. There is a grease fitting on
each snubber housing for daily lubrication. Be
sure to lubricate all the grapple snubbers on your
machine.
Proper lubrication prevents excessive clutch wear.
IMPORTANT !
All service points on snubbers must be greased
every shift (8 hours) to ensure a long service life.
ADJUSTING SNUBBER TENSION
Each snubber should be adjusted such that:
• It is capable of stopping the grapple within one 615C-022 SNUBBER HOUSING
full swing. PROCEDURE
Snubbers that are too loose can allow Tension is adjusted by removing shims from the
the grapple to swing violently and cause snubber. Remove only the minimum number of
damage to the grapple and/or other machine shims required to achieve correct adjustment.
components.
• It is capable of holding the grapple at
approximately a 5° angle.
Snubbers that are overtightened can reduce
the effect of lubricating grease and cause
premature clutch wear. 4. Turn OFF the engine.
7. Block wheels.
9. Remove one shim at a time to increase
snubber friction. One split shim at a time
can be removed from each snubber without
completely removing the end caps.
Remove 3 bolts on the left side then loosen 3
bolts on the right side of the snubber enough
to separate the end cap from the housing to
remove the first half of the shim.
Loosely reinstall the 3 bolts on the left side of
the snubber then remove the 3 bolts on the
right side keeping the end cap separated from
the housing enough to remove the other half
of the shim.
Reinstall bolts and tighten in a crisscross
pattern.
10. Fill snubber with grease until grease comes
out the exhaust port.
3.74
SNUBBER
HOUSING
GREASE
FILL PORT SPLINED
SHAFT
GREASE
EXHAUST
PORT
FRICTION ALIGN TAB

PLATE ON SHIMS
WITH TAB ON
END CAP
REACTION
PLATE
BELLEVILLE
WASHERS
SHIMS
O-RING
END CAP
630D-011 SNUBBER HOUSING

3.75
WINCH MAINTENANCE - CARCO WINCH SPECIFICATIONS
CARCO STANDARD (GEAR MOTOR)
WINCH OPERATION
Maximum rated line pull
The winch is controlled through the winch select
bare drum ............................40000 lbs (18180 kg)
switch and the winch control lever. The winch
full drum................................21700 lbs (9840 kg)
select switch is used to activate/deactivate the
winch control lever and to activate the winch Maximum cable size.............1 in (25.4 mm)
freespool function. The winch control lever when Drum Size and Capacities
activate is used to wind in the winch.
Barrel Diameter.................... 9.0 in (228 mm)
The Carco winch functions differently than other
winches operators may be familiar with. The Barrel Width.......................... 8.31 in (211 mm)
following are notes for Carco winch operators to Cable Capacity
remember: 3/4 in (19.1 mm) ..................275 ft (83.8 m)
• Do not use freespool (mechanical jaw clutch) 7/8 in (22.2 mm) ..................202 ft (61.6 m)
to drop a suspended load or if there is tension 1 in (25mm)..........................169 ft (51 m)
on the cable
• Use drive away (dynamic brake clutch) to Winch Ratio..........................118.65:1
lower a load, drive away from a load, to Dry Weight ...........................1430 lbs (649 kg)
release tension in a cable.
Maximum pressure
• After using freespool or drive away allow the to motor................................3300 psi (228 bar)
clutches to fully re-engage before winching
in. This is especially important when the oil is Maximum flow to motor........46 USgpm(176 L/min)
cold. WINCH SPECIFICATIONS
• Use freespool only when pulling cable off the CARCO HIGH SPEED (PISTON MOTOR)
winch by hand Maximum rated line pull
• Both drive away and freespool clutches are bare drum ............................40000 lbs (18180 kg)
spring applied hydraulic release full drum................................20000 lbs (9070 kg)
• Read the operator's manual for complete Maximum cable size.............1 in (25.4 mm)
winch operating instructions. Drum Size and Capacities
Refer to CAB CONTROLS – WINCH CONTROL Barrel Diameter.................... 9.0 in (228 mm)
LEVER , CAB CONTROLS – WINCH SELECT
Barrel Width.......................... 8.31 in (211 mm)
SWITCH in SECTION 2.
Cable Capacity
Refer also to OPERATING MACHINE –
3/4 in (19.1 mm) ..................275 ft (83.8 m)
OPERATING WINCH and SKIDDING – CABLE
7/8 in (22.2 mm) ..................202 ft (61.6 m)
SKIDDING in SECTION 2.
1 in (25mm)..........................169 ft (51 m)
Refer to SECTION 13 of the SERVICE MANUAL
and the winch manufacturer's service manual for Winch Ratio..........................66.98:1
additional service information.
Dry Weight ...........................1475 lbs (669 kg)
Maximum pressure
to motor................................4500 psi (310 bar)
Maximum flow to motor........46 USgpm(176 L/min)
3.76
LUBRICATION
Refer to the manufacturer's maintenance and
OIL LEVEL
service manual for information on your winch. SIGHT GAUGE
WINCH
DYNAMIC
The sump holds approximately 3 US gal (12 L). BRAKE
FREESPOOL
CLUTCH WINCH
The oil supplied is DEXTRON III TYPE FREESPOOL
TANK
transmission fluid. Use this or the equivalent.
Oil should be changed every 1000 hrs, depending
on use.
The oil level should be checked every day (if the DRAIN PLUG
winch is being used) before starting the machine.

The oil level should be up to the centre of oil level
sight gauge on the left side of the winch. Check oil
when the oil is cool and has been allowed to settle 620E-093 WINCH LUBRICATION
after use. The oil fill plug is on the top of the winch. SPRING JAM NUT
HOUSING
WARNING
Failure to use the recommended type and
viscosity of planetary gear oil for operating
conditions, particularly in cold weather
conditions, may contribute to intermittent
brake clutch slippage which could result in
Failure to properly warm up the winch,
particularly in cold weather conditions,
may result in temporary brake clutch
slippage which could result in death or
serious injury.
ADJUST THE WINCH
620E-095 FREESPOOL TENSION
WINCH MAINTENANCE
Maintenance of the winch is limited to the
hydraulic system maintenance of the skidder itself.
Periodically check the winch, control valve, and
connecting hoses for damage or hydraulic oil
leakage. If any problems are found, they should be
corrected before operating the winch.
ADJUST THE WINCH FREE-SPOOL TENSION
If the winch cable requires too little effort to pull it
from the cable drum, the tension can be adjusted
as follows:
• Loosen the jam nut.
• Tighten the spring housing to increase the
tension and/or loosen it to decrease it.
• Tighten the jam nut.
Refer to the manufacturer's maintenance and
service manual for information on your winch.
3.77
DEPRESSURIZING SUSPENDED
MACHINE ELEMENTS
When operator controls cannot be used to lower
suspended machine elements due to an engine
stall or other machine malfunction, suspended
elements can be lowered safely using this
procedure. This should be done promptly while
rear accumulator pressure is available.
When suspended the dozer, arch and boom will
tend to extend the hydraulic cylinders supporting
them due to gravity.
2. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position.
3. Using the computer from the main menu

navigate to INFORMATION MENU (F3) –
More...(F3) – Accumulator (F1)
MODE MENU in SECTION 2 of the
OPERATOR'S or SERVICE MANUAL.
machine element to be lowered.
5. Press and hold the F1 button (test functions)
and operate the control to lower suspended
element until it is on the ground.
6. Repeat step 4 to 6 for all raised implements.
3.78
ARTICULATION LOCK ~ ARTICULATION LOCK ~
STRAIGHT LOCKED POSITION ARTICULATED LOCKED POSITION
1. Park the machine on level ground and steer 1. P
ark the machine on level ground and steer
machine into a straight ahead position. machine into a fully articulated position to the
right.
2. L
firmly on the ground. 2. L
ARTICULATION
LOCK
ARTICULATION
LOCK
REAR CHASSIS
REAR CHASSIS
RETAINING PINS
RETAINING PINS
ARTICULATION LOCK
620E-002 STORED POSITION ARTICULATION LOCK
620E-002 STORED POSITION
7. R
emove both retaining pins from the
7. Remove both retaining pins from the
articulation lock. Relocate articulation lock
articulation lock. Relocate articulation lock
between front and rear chassis. Line up holes
between front and rear chassis. Line up holes
at each end of articulation lock with holes
on the articulation lock with holes in chassis’
in chassis’ and secure in place with both
as shown and secure in place with both
retaining pins.
retaining pins.
8. A
fter work is completed, relocate articulation
8. After work is completed, relocate articulation
lock into storage position on rear chassis and
lock into storage position on rear chassis and
3.79
STARTUP PROCEDURE AFTER MAJOR • Prepare the fill pump on the machine to add
MACHINE MAINTENANCE hydraulic oil. Clean the fill line pipe, remove
This procedure should be followed: cap on end of pipe and insert pipe into oil
supply drum.
• after major service or a rebuild.
• Loosen the plug on the top of the left drive
• whenever the machine has been drained of
motor.
hydraulic oil.
• Operate the fill pump.
• when any major component has been
removed, repaired or replaced. • Watch for oil leaking from the plug previously
loosened and tighten plug when oil leaks out.
PRE-STARTUP AND FILLING
• Continue pumping slowly and watch the
1. Ensure all filters are in place. Refer to
oil sight gauge on the reservoir. Continue
FILTERS in THIS SECTION.
pumping slowly until the hydraulic tank is full.
2. Check oil levels in the engine, transmission,
MACHINE STARTUP
main hydraulic tank, winch (if equipped), axles
and cab tilt system. Before beginning this procedure, perform the
PRE-STARTUP AND FILLING steps.
3. Check coolant level in the radiator.
4. Do a final inspection of all fittings and clamps CAUTION
to make sure they are tight and will not leak.
5. Install the articulation lock bar and engage the Machine operator must ONLY take
parking brake. directions from the person doing the set-
up.
6. Turn differential lock switch to OFF.
7. Do not start engine. Purge air from hydraulic 1. Ensure the articulation lock bar is installed.
system by adding oil as follows:
• Pre-fill the cases of the hydrostatic drive DISCONNECT THE
pump, main pump and any other components TOP PLUG FROM
THE ENGINE ECU
that have been drained of oil with clean,
filtered hydraulic oil.
CASE DRAIN
MAKE-UP LINE
TEE
CONNECTOR
632E-008 ENGINE ECU DISCONNECT - LEFT SIDE

RIGHT DRIVE MOTOR 2. Disconnect the top plug from engine ECU
632E-023 DISCONNECT CASE DRAIN LINE
(prevents engine starting).
• Disconnect the case drain make-up line from
the tee connection on the right drive motor and
pre-fill the right drive motor with clean, filtered
hydraulic oil.
• Watch for oil leaking from tee connection and
reconnect case drain line when oil leaks out.
3.80
3. Crank engine for 10 seconds, wait for 10 NOTE: If the machine was on wheels, the steer
seconds. Repeat 6 times to pump oil into and drive functions were not properly purged or
pumps. flushed. Remove the articulation lock bar and
at LOW IDLE, slowly operate the steer function
4. Check hydraulic oil levels in the main hydraulic
right and left a few times. With the parking brake
tank and add hydraulic oil as required.
disengaged and at LOW IDLE, slowly operate the
5. Reconnect 4 pin engine power connector or drive function forward and reverse a few times.
injectors on engine as applicable.
NOTE: If possible, allow the machine to stand for
6. Start engine. 4 to 6 hours before setting any of the operating
7. Check for leaks. pressures. This will allow any air bubbles in the oil
to escape and is a good time to check for leaks.
8. Bleed brakes (front axle) if required.
DRIVE
PUMP
CONNECTORS
620E-134
DISCONNECT TWO CONNECTORS ON DRIVE
PUMP PRIOR TO PERFORMING PROCEDURE
Prior to bleeding brakes disconnect the two
connectors on the drive pump. This is a
safety precaution to prevent the machine
from travelling while brake bleeding is being
performed.
With engine at IDLE, parking brake engaged,
hold foot brake down, bleed brakes in front
axle (both sides). Refer also to FRONT
AXLES – SERVICE BRAKES – BRAKE
BLEEDING in SECTION 8 of the SERVICE
MANUAL.
Reconnect two connectors on drive pump.
9. Set throttle to IDLE and run each function for 2
minutes to purge air from circuit.
10. Set throttle to FULL and run each function
again for 2 minutes to flush circuit.
11. Top up the radiator with clean coolant.
12. With cylinders fully retracted, top up the main
hydraulic oil tank with clean hydraulic oil.
3.81
CARE OF POLYCARBONATE WINDOWS IN CAB INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Most windows used in the cab are made from a Daily inspection and maintenance is essential
polycarbonate resin thermoplastic. This material is to confirm that the window’s ability to protect the
a replacement for glass when improved strength, operator has not been compromised.
durability and safety is required.
• Inspect all windows daily and immediately
Polycarbonate material is expected to resist after any impacts.
heavy impact from large branches and falling tree
• Check for any damage to the window material
tops and to absorb high levels of energy when
or steel structure in the area of the window
contacted by high velocity thrown objects such
mounting.
as wood chips, disc saw blade teeth or broken
harvester head saw chain. • The edges of the polycarbonate window must
be evenly and fully supported on a flat surface
The extreme operating environment seen
around the entire window opening at all times.
in logging applications heightens the need
Bent or dented skylight structures must be
to regularly inspect and properly maintain
replaced immediately. Bent or dented cab
polycarbonate cab windows.
structures must be evaluated immediately for
Polycarbonate windows are an essential piece possible repair or replacement.
of operator protective equipment and should be
• The edges of the polycarbonate window must
maintained as such. It is important to note that
be free from cracks, chips, notches or scarring
cracks, chips, notches or scarring anywhere on
and must not be pinched or stressed. These
the viewing surface or edges of the window will
defects will decrease ability to resist heavy
decrease ability to resist heavy impacts and
impacts. Windows with these defects must be
therefore compromise effectiveness as operator
replaced immediately.
safety protective equipment. Windows with these
defects must be replaced immediately. • Cracks, chips, notches or scarring anywhere
on the viewing surface of the window will
Refer to the next section for detailed information
decrease ability to resist heavy impacts.
regarding inspection and maintenance of
Windows with these defects must be replaced
polycarbonate windows.
immediately.
• Bent, dented or missing window retaining
parts must be replaced immediately.
IMPORTANT !
When cleaning the machine with pressurized • Rubber materials used in mounting the
water it is important to avoid getting water window must be maintained in good condition.
directly or indirectly into the exhaust tube. Water • Identification of the polycarbonate originally
in the exhaust tube will damage sensors and used by Tigercat is hot stamped in a corner of
SCR system components and affect the proper the window to identify its composition. Do not
operation of the aftertreatment system and the use any replacement window without proof of
engine. its material composition. Do not substitute with
any other materials.
• Skylights, cab structures, windows and
window retaining parts must not be modified
or replaced with components that are not
approved by Tigercat.
3.82
RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS RESISTANCE TO WATER
The resistance of polycarbonate material to Polycarbonate material has good resistance to
chemical exposure varies widely. Fortunately, water up to approximately 65°C (150°F). Above
polycarbonate materials have good resistance to this temperature the effect of water is time-
diesel fuel, grease, hydraulic oil, kerosene and temperature related. This means that the higher
engine oil. the water temperature, the shorter the time before
the polycarbonate is adversely affected.
Other chemicals however can seriously weaken
the polycarbonate. Exposing polycarbonate to repeated steam
cleanings or high temperature pressure washing
DO NOT permit any of the following chemicals to
may result in crazing, a phenomenon that causes
come into contact with polycarbonate windows:
clouding of the surface. Crazing can ultimately
• acetone result in a loss of physical strength and may
• air conditioning refrigerant precede a fracture.
• ammonia
• anti-freeze
• benzene
• brake fluid
• carbon tetrachloride
• cutting oils
• gasoline
• lacquer thinner
• toluene
• turpentine
• xylene
3.83
CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS CAUTIONS
The viewing surfaces of polycarbonate cab • DO NOT use abusive cleaning procedures
windows are specially treated with a hard coating either by hand or pressure washing on
to provide enhanced resistance to abrasion and polycarbonate windows.
ultra-violet (UV) radiation.
• DO NOT use brushes, razor blades,
The following instructions are provided to prolong scrapers, squeegees or other sharp tools on
the life of this protective hard coating. polycarbonate windows.
1. Rinse the window thoroughly with lukewarm • DO NOT clean polycarbonate windows when
water the daytime temperature is high or in direct
sunlight.
2. Using a soft cloth, cellulose sponge or
chamois, gently wash the window with a mild • DO NOT use abrasive or highly alkaline
solution of soap or detergent in lukewarm cleaners on polycarbonate windows.
water. Do not scrub or use brushes or
• DO NOT use glass cleaners in either
squeegees.
aerosol or non-aerosol containers to clean
Brand name soaps and detergents polycarbonate windows.
recommended for cleaning polycarbonate are:
• Failure to follow these cleaning instructions
• Fantastik will shorten the service life of polycarbonate
• Formula 409 and may cause visual hazing, loss of light
• Hexcel F.O. 554 transmission and delamination of the
• Joy polycarbonate hard surface coating.
• Lysol
• Mr. Clean
• Neleco-Placer
• Pine-Sol
• Top Job
3. Rinse the window thoroughly with lukewarm
water.
4. Dry the window with a moist soft cloth,
cellulose sponge or chamois to prevent water
spotting.
5. To remove grease or oil, first rub lightly with
a good grade of VM&P Naphtha or isopropyl
alcohol followed by the same rinse, wash,
rinse and dry procedure described in steps 1
to 4.
Refer also to RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS
for a list of chemicals which should not
be permitted to come into contact with
3.84
CONCEALING HAIRLINE SCRATCHES
The appearance of scratches and minor abrasions
on the surfaces of polycarbonate windows can be
minimized by using a mild automotive polish such
as: WINDOW
SCREEN
HANDKNOB
• Johnson’s Paste Wax
• Novus Plastic Polish #1 and #2
• Mirror Glaze Plastic Polish
Be certain to clean the polycarbonate window
as outlined prior to application of an automotive
polish. Refer to CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS.
620E-031 SIDE WINDOW SCREEN
GRAFFITI REMOVAL
SIDE WINDOW SCREENS
• For removal of paints, marking pen inks,
etc., the use of Butyl Cellosolve is generally The side window screens can be removed to
effective. The use of masking tape, adhesive clean the windows. Screens are provided for the
tape or lint removal tools works well for lifting personal protection of the operator and must be
off old weathered paints. reinstalled immediately after cleaning the windows.
• To remove labels, stickers, etc., the use of A handknob is provided on both the inside and
kerosene, VM&P Naphtha, or petroleum spirits the outside. By unscrewing either (not both) of
is generally effective. When the solvent will these knobs, the screen will be free to swing out
not penetrate sticker material, apply heat (hair on the hinges. Be aware that the screen will swing
dryer) to soften the adhesive and promote outwards with considerable force, if the door is
removal. open.
Refer also to RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS All handles should be hand tight only at all times.
for a list of chemicals which should not
be permitted to come into contact with
FIRE PRECAUTIONS
Polycarbonate window material will ignite when
exposed to an ignition source in excess of 427°C
(800°F). When working around polycarbonate
windows, observe similar fire precautions to those
in place for wood.
3.85
PACKAGE
The side by side A/C condenser, radiator,
charge air cooler (CAC) and hydraulic oil cooler
is mounted at the front of the machine. For
machines equipped with EHS transmissions an A/C COOLER (CAC) OIL COOLER
EHS transmission cooler is mounted in front of the CONDENSER
hydraulic oil cooler.
RADIATOR
The engine fan draws air from the engine
compartment, through the A/C condenser and
cooler package and blows it out through the front
door screen. The screened access panels on EHS
each side of the engine compartment act as debris TRANSMISSION
COOLER
screens to prevent debris from being drawn into (IF EQUIPPED)
the engine compartment.
The A/C condenser and cooler package should
be checked every 8 hours (every shift) for
accumulation of twigs, leaves, pine needles and
dust.
This cooler package must be checked daily for
debris and may have to be thoroughly cleaned on
a weekly or monthly basis, depending on operating CLEAN A/C CONDENSER AND
conditions. Compressed air or water may be used 632E-015 COOLER PACKAGE
for cleaning. Use compressed air for cleaning only
when the machine is cold to avoid the risk of fire
caused by debris contacting hot surfaces.
Avoid the risk of fire caused by debris
accumulating on surfaces that may become hot
during machine operation. Always use care when
cleaning to ensure that debris removed from one
area of the machine does not accumulate on other
areas of the machine. For more information on
fire prevention refer to FIRE PREVENTION in
SECTION 1 of THIS MANUAL.
If an oil leak has occurred in this area it should
be thoroughly power-washed with a mild soap to
ensure that all of the oil is removed.
CAUTION
Use compressed air for cleaning only when
the machine is cold to avoid the risk of fire
CLEAN SCREENED ACCESS
caused by debris contacting hot surfaces. PANELS BOTH SIDES
632E-028
If using compressed air for cleaning, use
at 30psi or less.
CAUTION
Always use personal protective equipment
to guard against flying debris. Avoid the risk of fire caused by debris
accumulating on surfaces that may
become hot during machine operation.
Always use care when cleaning to ensure
that debris removed from one area of the
machine does not accumulate on other
areas of the machine.
3.86
USING THE FAN CLEAN FUNCTION TO
REMOVE DEBRIS DURING OPERATION
(IF EQUIPPED-VARIABLE PITCH FAN OPTION)
The Flexxaire® cooling fan has a CLEAN function
for use in cleaning debris from the machines
engine enclosure. The pitch of the fan blades is
changed and the direction of airflow through the
engine enclosure is reversed. This change in
airflow blows debris from the machine's engine
enclosure to eliminate potential overheating
and poor machine performance caused by
overheating. Ensure that there are no personnel
standing directly to the sides of the machine when
performing this operation, as dust and debris will
fly out.
When the fan control switch is in the AUTOMATIC
position, the system will automatically cycle
through an auto clean cycle. The frequency
and duration of the auto clean cycle is adjustable
through the computer control system menu.
Refer to FAN CONTROL SWITCH in THIS
SECTION for more information.
USING THE FAN CONTROL SWITCH IN
THE EVENT OF AN ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE AND/OR HYDRAULIC OIL
TEMPERATURE ALARM.
In the event of an engine temperature and/or
hydraulic oil temperature alarm:
1. Stop the machine.
2. Place the fan control switch in the FULL ON
position until cooling is achieved.
3. If necessary use the CLEAN function to
reverse fan flow and clean debris from the
machine's engine enclosure
4. In severe operating conditions manual
cleaning of debris may be required.
5. If the problem persists check engine
coolant and/or hydraulic oil levels. Refer
to OPERATING MACHINE – PRESTART
CHECKS in THIS SECTION.
6. Return the fan control switch to the
AUTOMATIC position and check for proper
operation of the fan. In the event of a problem
with the automatic control system the fan
control switch should be placed in the FULL
ON position while the machine is operating
until the fan control can be properly repaired.
3.87
TORQUE CHART
LOCATION DIAMETER TORQUE (LUBRICATED)
lbf-ft Nm
Cylinders
Piston nut, steer cylinder (68044B) M50 2100 2847
Piston nut, arch cylinder (68042B) M50 2100 2847
Piston nut, boom cylinder (68043B) M50 2100 2847
Piston nut, dual function cylinder (68059B) M50 2100 2847
Bolts, arch/boom cylinders M16 173 235
Piston nut, dozer cylinder (68046B) M50 2100 2847
Keeper plate bolts 3/4" UNC 282 382
Keeper plate bolts 5/8" UNC 159 215
Cab pin keeper plate bolts 3/4" UNC 282 393
Center joint bearing

Bearing retaining bolts 1/2" UNC 80 108
Pin retaining bolts 3/4" UNC 282 382
Engine mounting
To Chassis 7/8" UNC 364 493
To Engine M12 73 99
Pump Mounting
Drive pump to flywheel adapter plate 3/4" UNC 282 382
Flywheel adapter plate to flywheel housing M10 40 54
Torsional drive coupler to flywheel 3/8" UNC 37 50
Main pump to drive pump 5/8" UNC 159 215
Coolant pump to main pump M12 73 99
Drive shafts
Yoke retaining nut, rear shaft 1 1/4" x 18 UNEF 500 677
Pillow block retaining bolts 3/4" UNC 295 400
Rear drive shaft
universal joint bolts 1/2" UNF 90 122
Rear axle input
Middle drive shaft
Mid-rear drive shaft 635G
Front drive shaft
Front axle input
universal joint bolts M12 70 95
Axle mounting bolts

Front Axle 3/4" UNC 226 306
Rear Axle 632E M30 1350 1830
Rear (Bogie) Axle 635G M30 1350 1850
Wheel bolts 7/8" UNF 501 679
Transmission
Housing to Mounting Bracket 5/8"UNC 159 215
Mounting Bracket to Frame 7/8" UNC 364 493
Torque values pertaining to the engine and attachment are provided in the appropriate manuals.
632E635GTORQUECHARTR1.XLS 02/17
3.88
GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS The torque values listed below are for general use
only. DO NOT use these values if a different torque
value or tightening procedure is shown for a specific
IMPERIAL
application.
GRADE 8 BOLTS GRADE 5 BOLTS
IMPERIAL BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

GRADE 8 BOLTS GRADE 5 BOLTS
COARSE DRY LUBRICATED COARSE DRY LUBRICATED
THREAD lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm THREAD lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm
1/4" - 20 11 - 12 15 - 16 8 - 10 11 - 13 1/4" - 20 7- 8 10 - 11 8 - 10 11 - 13
5/16" - 18 26 - 30 35 - 40 20 - 28 27 - 38 5/16" - 18 14 - 18 19 - 24 10 - 15 13 - 20
3/8" - 16 44 -48 60 - 65 33 - 36 45 - 49 3/8" - 16 31 - 34 42 - 46 23 - 25 31 - 34
7/16" - 14 70 - 77 95 - 104 52 - 57 71 - 77 7/16" - 14 49 - 54 66 - 73 37 - 41 50 - 55
1/2" - 13 106 - 117 144 - 158 80 - 88 109 - 119 1/2" - 13 75 - 83 102 - 112 57 - 63 77 - 85
9/16" - 12 153 - 168 208 - 228 115 - 127 156 - 172 9/16" - 12 109 - 120 148 - 162 82 - 90 111 - 122
5/8" - 11 212 - 233 288 - 316 159 - 175 216 - 237 5/8" - 11 150 - 165 204 - 223 113 - 124 152 - 168
3/4" - 10 376 - 414 510 - 561 282 - 310 393 - 420 3/4" - 10 266 - 293 360 - 397 200 - 220 271 - 298
7/8" - 9 606 - 667 822 - 904 455 - 501 617 - 679 7/8" - 9 394 - 433 535 - 586 296 - 326 402 - 441
1" - 8 909 - 1000 1233 - 1355 682 - 750 925 - 1016 1" - 8 591 - 649 802 - 879 443 - 489 601 - 663
1 1/8" - 7 1288 - 1417 1746 - 1921 966 - 1062 1310 - 1441 1 1/8" - 7 794 - 873 1077 - 1183 596 - 656 808 - 889
1 1/4" - 7 1817 - 1999 2464 - 2710 1360 - 1496 1844 - 2027 1 1/4" - 7 1120 - 1232 1519 - 1670 840 - 924 1139 - 1252
FINE DRY LUBRICATED FINE DRY LUBRICATED
THREAD lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm THREAD lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm
1/4" - 28 13 - 14 18 - 19 10 - 13 14 - 17 1/4" - 28 9 - 10 12 - 13 9 - 10 12 - 13
5/16" - 24 23 - 28 31 - 38 18 - 25 25 - 33 5/16" - 24 17 - 22 23 - 29 16 - 20 21 - 27
3/8" - 24 49 - 54 67 - 73 37 - 41 50 - 55 3/8" - 24 35 - 39 48 - 53 26 - 29 35 - 39
7/16" - 20 78 - 86 106 - 116 58 - 64 79 - 86 7/16" - 20 55 - 61 75 - 83 41 - 45 56 - 61
1/2" - 20 120 - 132 163 - 179 90 - 99 122 - 134 1/2" - 20 85 - 94 116 - 127 64 - 70 87 - 95
9/16" - 18 171 - 188 232 - 255 128 - 141 174 - 191 9/16" - 18 121 - 133 164 - 180 91 - 100 124 - 135
5/8" - 18 240 - 264 326 - 358 180 - 198 244 - 268 5/8" - 18 170 - 187 231 - 253 128 - 141 174 - 191
3/4" - 16 420 - 462 570 - 626 315 - 347 427 - 470 3/4" - 16 297 - 327 403 - 443 223 - 245 303 - 332
7/8" - 14 668 - 735 906 - 996 501 - 550 679 - 745 7/8" - 14 434 - 477 589 - 646 326 - 359 442 - 486
1" - 14 995 - 1096 1359 - 1486 746 - 821 1012 - 1113 1" - 12 646 - 711 876 - 965 484 - 534 657 - 724
1 1/8" - 12 1445 - 1590 1960 - 2155 1083 - 1191 1469 - 1613 1 1/8" - 12 891 - 980 1208 - 1328 668 - 735 906 - 996
1 1/4" - 12 2012 - 2213 2728 - 2997 1509 - 1660 2046 - 2250 1 1/4" - 12 1240 - 1364 1682 - 1849 931 - 1024 1262 - 1387
METRIC 8.8 10.9 12.9
8.8 10.9 12.9 12.9
12.9
8.8 10.9 12.9
10 10 12
10
10
12
10 10 12
METRIC BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

CLASS 8.8 CLASS 10.9 CLASS 12.9
SIZE PITCH LUBRICATED DRY LUBRICATED DRY LUBRICATED DRY
mm Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft
M6 1 8-9 6-7 11 - 12 8-9 11 - 12 8-9 15 - 17 11 - 12 13 - 14 10 - 11 18 - 19 13 - 14
M8 1.25 20 - 22 15 - 16 26 - 29 19 - 21 27 - 30 20 - 22 36 - 40 27 - 30 32 - 35 24 - 26 43 - 47 31 - 35
M10 1.5 39 - 43 29 - 32 52 - 57 38 - 42 54 - 60 40 - 44 72 - 79 53 - 59 63 - 70 47 - 51 84 - 93 62 - 68
M12 1.75 68 - 75 50 - 55 91 - 100 67 - 74 94 - 104 70 - 77 126 - 138 93 - 102 110 - 121 81 - 90 147 - 162 109 - 119
M14 2 109 - 120 80 - 89 145 - 160 107 - 118 151 - 166 111 - 122 201 - 221 148 - 163 176 - 194 130 - 143 235 - 259 173 - 191
M16 2 169 - 186 125 - 137 226 - 248 166 - 183 234 - 257 173 - 190 312 - 343 230 - 253 274 - 301 202 - 222 365 - 401 269 - 296
M18 2.5 234 - 257 172 - 190 312 - 343 230 - 253 324 - 356 239 - 262 431 - 474 318 - 350 378 - 416 279 - 307 504 - 554 372 - 409
M20 2.5 330 - 364 244 - 268 441 - 485 325 - 357 457 - 503 337 - 371 610 - 670 450 - 495 534 - 588 394 - 433 712 - 784 525 - 578
M22 2.5 451 - 496 332 - 366 601 - 661 443 - 487 623 - 686 460 - 506 831 - 914 613 - 674 728 - 801 537 - 591 971 - 1068 716 - 788
M24 3 571 - 628 421 - 463 761 - 838 562 - 618 790 - 869 583 - 641 1053 - 1159 777 - 855 923 - 1016 681 - 749 1231 - 1354 908 - 999
M27 3 837 - 921 618 - 679 1116 - 1228 823 - 906 1158 - 1274 854 - 940 1544 - 1699 1139 - 1253 1354 - 1489 998 - 1098 1805 - 1985 1331 - 1464
M30 3.5 1135 - 1249 837 - 921 1514 - 1665 1116 - 1228 1570 - 1727 1158 - 1274 2094 - 2303 1544 - 1699 1835 - 2019 1354 - 1489 2447 - 2692 1805 - 1985
M33 3.5 1545 - 1699 1139 - 1253 2060 - 2266 1519 - 1671 2137 - 2351 1576 - 1734 2849 - 3134 2102 - 2312 2498 - 2747 1842 - 2026 3330 - 3663 2456 - 2702
M36 4 1985 - 2183 1464 - 1610 2646 - 2911 1952 - 2147 2745 - 3020 2025 - 2227 3661 - 4027 2700 - 2970 3208 - 3529 2366 - 2603 4278 - 4706 3155 - 3471
3.89
Parker Assembly Torque

The 4-Bolt Split Flange consists of four main The four-bolt port is simply a circular opening (flow
components: passage) surrounded by four tapped holes in a certain
• A body (flange head) pattern for acceptance of the flange clamping bolts. The
• An O-ring flat surface of the port compresses the O-ring contained
• One “captive” or two “split” flange clamps in the groove in the flange head when the clamp bolts
• Four bolts and washer are torqued. In some instances, the groove is in the
port and not in the flange head. The bolts, through the
clamp halves, clamp down the flange head on to the flat
surface of the port compressing and trapping the O-ring
WASHERS in the groove and leaving no gap for it to extrude under
pressure. The hydraulic pressure is thus sealed by the
BOLTS compressed O-ring as long as the bolts are tightened
FLANGE
enough to maintain solid metal to metal contact between
CLAMP the flange head at the outside diameter of the O-ring and
the top of the port.
Flange Port Assembly
FLANGE
HEAD The steps to properly assemble the flange port clamping
bolts are:
O-RING
1. Make sure sealing surfaces are free of burrs, nicks,
TAPPED scratches or any foreign particles.
HOLES
2. Lubricate the O-ring.
3. Position flange and clamp halves.
4. Place lock washers on bolts and insert through
clamp halves.
5. Hand tighten bolts.
FLANGE.JPG 6. Torque bolts in diagonal sequence (see Fig. T9)
in small increments to the appropriate torque level
Fig. T8 - 4 Bolt Split Flange Components listed in Table T6 or Table T7 on this page.
FLANGE2.JPG
Fig. T9 - Flange Bolt Tightening Sequence
Dash Flange Inch Bolt Torque Metric Bolt Torque Dash Flange Inch Bolt Torque Metric Bolt Torque
Size Size (J518) lbf-ft (ISO 6162) Nm Size Size (J518) lbf-ft (ISO 6162) N-m
8 1/2 5/16-18 17 +/- 2 M8 25 8 1/2 5/16-18 17 +/- 2 M8 25
12 3/4 3/8-16 25 +/- 3.5 M10 49 12 3/4 3/8-16 30 +/- 4.5 M10 49
16 1 3/8-16 31 +/- 4.5 M10 49 16 1 7/16-14 46 +/- 4.5 M12 85
20 1-1/4 7/16-14 41 +/- 5 M12 85 20 1 1/4 1/2-13 69 +/- 6 M14 135
24 1-1/2 1/2-13 52 +/- 6 M12 85 24 1 1/2 5/8-11 125 +/- 8 M16 210
32 2 1/2-13 60 +/- 6 M12 135 32 2 3/4-10 208 +/- 20 M20 425
40 2-1/2 1/2-13 85 +/- 9 M12 95
48 3 5/8-11 144 +/- 15 M16 220 * Does not meet ISO 6162 specification.
56 3-1/2 5/8-11 125 +/- 8 M16 220 Table T7 - Code 62 Flange Recommended Bolt Torque
64 4 5/8-11 125 +/- 8 M16 220
80 5 5/8-11 125 +/- 8 M16 220
* Does not meet ISO 6162 specification.

Table T6 - Code 61 Flange Recommended Bolt Torque
3.90
Parker Assembly Torque

JIC 37 Degree Flare NPTF
Tube Connection Swivel or Hose Tube Connection Swivel or Hose
SAE Dash Size Thread Size FFWR Connection FFWR SAE Dash Size Thread Size TFFT Connection TFFT
-2 5/16-24 NA NA -2 1/8-27 2-3 2-3
-3 3/8-24 NA NA -3 NA NA NA
-4 7/16-20 2 2 -4 1/4-18 2-3 2-3
-5 1/2-20 2 2 -5 NA NA NA
-6 9/16-18 1 1/2 1 1/4 -6 3/8-18 2-3 2-3
-8 3/4-16 1 1/2 1 -8 1/2-14 2-3 2-3
-10 7/8-14 1 1/2 1 -10 7/8-14 NA NA
-12 1 1/16-12 1 1/4 1 -12 3/4-14 2-3 2-3
-14 1 3/16-12 1 1 -14 NA NA NA
-16 1 5/16-12 1 1 -16 1-11 1/2 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-20 1 5/8-12 1 1 -20 1 1/4-11 1/2 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-24 1 7/8-12 1 1 -24 1 1/2-11 1/2 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-32 2 1/2-12 1 1 -32 2-11 1/2 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-40 3-12 1 1 -40 NA NA NA
F.F.W.R : Flats From Wrench Resistance T.F.F.T. : Turns from finger tight
All values are for Steel, Stainless Steel and Brass All pipe values are for Steel, Stainless Steel and Brass
O'ring Face Seal / Seal-Lok BSPT

Tube Connection Swivel or Hose Tube Connection Swivel or Hose
SAE Dash Size Thread Size FFWR Connection FFWR SAE Dash Size Thread Size TFFT Connection TFFT
-2 NA NA NA -2 1/8-28 2-3 2-3
-3 NA NA NA -3 NA NA NA
-4 9/16-18 1/4 TO 1/2 1/2 TO 3/4 -4 1/4-19 2-3 2-3
-6 11/16-16 1/4 TO 1/2 1/2 TO 3/4 -6 3/8-19 2-3 2-3
-8 13/16-16 1/4 TO 1/2 1/2 TO 3/4 -8 1/2-14 2-3 2-3
-10 1-14 1/4 TO 1/2 1/2 TO 3/4 -10 NA NA NA
-12 1 3/16-12 1/4 TO 1/2 1/3 TO 1/2 -12 3/4-14 2-3 2-3
-16 1 7/16-12 1/4 TO 1/2 1/3 TO 1/2 -16 1-11 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-20 1 11/16-12 1/4 TO 1/2 1/3 TO 1/2 -20 1 1/4-11 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-24 2-12 1/4 TO 1/2 1/3 TO 1/2 -24 1 1/2-11 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-32 NA NA NA -32 2-11 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
F.F.W.R : Flats From Wrench Resistance T.F.F.T. : Turns from finger tight
All values are for Steel, Stainless Steel and Brass All pipe values are for Steel, Stainless Steel and Brass
SAE J1926 Straight Thread Port Assembly Torques
ASSEMBLY TORQUE = 10 % -0
NON-ADJUSTABLE ADJUSTABLE PLUGS
SAE
THREAD TRIPLE-LOK TRIPLE-LOK HOLLOW HEX HEX HEAD
DASH
SIZE SEAL-LOK FERULOK PIPE SEAL-LOK FERULOK PIPE
SIZE HP5ON-S P5ON-S
FITTINGS FITTINGS
lbf-ft lbf-ft lbf-ft lbf-ft lbf-ft lbf-ft
(lbf-in) Nm (lbf-in) Nm (lbf-in) Nm (lbf-in) Nm (lbf-in) Nm (lbf-in) Nm
2 5/16-24 (310) 20 (85) 10 (310) 20 (60) 7 (30) 3.5 (85) 10
3 3/8-24 (310) 20 (155) 18 (310) 20 (100) 11 (55) 6 (155) 18
4 7/16-20 (310) 20 (260) 29 (310) 20 (180) 20 (120) 13.5 (260) 29
5 1/2-20 (360) 40 (280) 32 (360) 40 (250) 28 (170) 19 (280) 32
6 9/16-18 (420) 46 (350) 40 (420) 46 (350) 40 (410) 46 (350) 40
8 3/4-16 60 80 (620) 70 60 80 (620) 70 60 80 (620) 70
10 7/8-14 100 135 85 115 100 135 85 115 100 135 85 115
12 1 1/16-12 135 185 135 183 135 185 135 183 135 185 135 183
14 1 3/16-12 175 235 175 237 175 235 175 237 175 235 175 237
16 1 5/16-12 200 270 200 271 200 270 200 271 200 270 200 271
20 1 5/8-12 250 340 250 339 250 340 250 339 250 340 250 339
24 1 7/8-12 305 415 305 414 305 415 305 414 305 415 305 414
32 2 1/2-12 375 510 375 509 375 510 375 509 375 510 375 509
3.91
EATON Aeroquip Assembly Torque
Eaton recommends that a Torque wrench be used to assure
Recommended proper fitting assembly of these connections.
Parallel
The values listed are for steel connections. Contact Teaton for
Connection torque values for other materials.
Assembly torque
Straight Thread O-Ring Boss Low Pressure with Straight Thread O-Ring Boss High Pressure with
37º (SAEJ514) ORS (J1453)
Jam Nut or Jam Nut or Jam Nut or Jam Nut or
Thread Straight Straight Thread Straight Straight
Dash Size Fitting Torque Fitting Torque Dash Size Fitting Torque Fitting Torque
Size (inches) lb.-ft. Newton Meters Size (inches) lb.-ft. Newton Meters
-03 3/8-24 8-9 12-13 -03 3/8-24 8-10 11-16
-04 7/16-20 13-15 18-20 -04 7/16-20 14-16 20-22
-05 1/2-20 14-15 19-21 -05 1/2-20 18-20 24-27
-06 9/16-18 23-24 32-33 -06 9/16-18 24-26 33-35
-08 3/4-16 40-43 55-57 -08 3/4-16 50-60 68-78
-10 7/8-14 43-48 59-64 -10 7/8-14 72-80 98-110
-12 1 1/16-12 68-75 93-101 -12 1 1/16-12 125-135 170-183
-14 1 3/16-12 83-90 113-122 -14 1 3/16-12 160-180 215-245
-16 1 5/16-12 112-123 152-166 -16 1 5/16-12 200-220 270-300
-20 1 5/8-12 146-161 198-218 -20 1 5/8-12 210-280 285-380
-24 1 7/8-12 154-170 209-230 -24 1 7/8-12 270-360 370-490
-32 2 1/2-12 218-240 296-325
ORS SAE 37º (JIC)

Swivel Swivel Swivel Swivel
Thread Nut Nut Thread Nut Nut
Dash Size Torque Torque Dash Size Torque Torque
Size (inches) lb.-ft. Newton Meters Size (inches) lb.-ft. Newton Meters
-04 9/16-18 10-12 14-16 -04 7/16-20 11-12 15-16
-06 11/16-20 18-20 24-27 -05 1/2-20 15-16 20-22
-08 13/16-16 32-35 43-47 -06 9/16-18 18-20 24-28
-10 1-14 46-50 62-68 -08 3/4-16 38-42 52-58
-12 1 3/16-12 65-70 88-95 -10 7/8-14 57-62 77-85
-16 1 7/16-12 92-100 125-136 -12 1 1/16-12 79-87 108-119
-20 1 11/16-12 125-140 170-190 -16 1 5/16-12 108-113 148-154
-24 2-12 150-165 204-224 -20 1 5/8-12 127-133 173-182
-24 1 7/8-12 158-167 216-227
-32 2 1/2-12 245-258 334-352
Metric BSPP
Thread Size Straight Adapter or Locknut Torque Nominal
mm lb.-ft. Newton Meters Thread Size Straight Adapter or Locknut Torque
M10x1 13-15 18-20 inches** lb.-ft. Newton Meters
M12x1.5 15-19 20-25 G1/8-28 13-15 18-20
M14x1.5 19-23 25-30 G1/4-19 19-23 25-30
M16x1.5 33-40 45-55 G3/8-19 33-40 45-55
M18x1.5 37-44 50-60 G1/2-14 55-70 75-95
M20x1.5 52-66 70-90 G3/4-14 103-118 140-160
M22x1.5 55-70 75-95 G1-11 162-184 220-250
M26x1.5 81-96 110-130 G1 1/4-11 170-192 230-260
M27x2 96-111 130-150 G1 1/2-11 258-347 350-470
M33x2 162-184 220-250 ** "G" denotes parallel threads, other than ISO 6149
M42x2 170-192 230-260 (Port connection only)
M48x2 258-347 350-470
Eaton Aeroquip Fluid Conveyance Products A-HOOV-MC001-E January 2005
3.92
WEIGHTS OF COMMERCIAL WOOD
SPECIES KG/M3 LB/FT3 SPECIES KG/M3 LB/FT3

Alder, Red 737 46 Maple, Big Leaf 753 47
Ash, White 769 48 Maple, Black 865 54
Aspen, Quaking 689 43 Maple, Red 801 50
Bald Cypress 817 51 Maple, Silver 721 45
Basswood, American 673 42 Maple, Sugar 897 56
Beech, American 865 54 Oak, Black 1009 63
Birch, Paper 801 50 Oak, Chestnut 977 61
Birch, Yellow 929 58 Oak, Red 1009 63
Cedar, Alaska 577 36 Oak, Red, Swamp 1073 67
Cedar, Incense 721 45 Oak, Swamp Chestnut 1041 65
Cedar, Northern White 449 28 Oak, White 993 62
Cedar, Port-Orford 897 36 Oak, White, Swamp 1105 69
Cedar, Western Red 433 57 Pine, Jack 801 50
Cherry, Black 721 45 Pine, Loblolly 993 62
Cottonwood, Eastern 785 49 Pine, Lodgepole 625 39
Douglas Fir, Coast 881 55 Pine, Long Leaf 993 62
Douglas Fir, Inland North 577 36 Pine, Norway, Red 673 42
Elm, American 865 54 Pine, Short Leaf 993 62
Fir, Alpine 449 28 Pine, Slash 993 62
Fir, Balsam 721 45 Pine, Sugar 817 51
Fir, Nobel 481 30 Pine, Western Yellow 721 45
Fir, Red 769 48 Pine, White-Western 561 35
Fir, Silver 577 36 Pine, White-Eastern 577 36
Fir, White 753 47 Poplar, Yellow 609 38
Gum, Black 721 45 Redwood 801 50
Gum, Blue 1121 70 Spruce, Black 513 32
Gum, Red 801 50 Spruce, Engleman 625 39
Gum, Tupelo 897 56 Spruce, Red 545 34
Hemlock, Eastern 801 50 Spruce, Sitka 529 33
Hemlock, Western 657 41 Spruce, White 545 34
Hickory, Pecan 993 62 Sweetgum 801 50
Hickory, True 1009 63 Sycamore, American 833 52
Larch, Western 769 48 Tamarack 753 47
Locust, Black 929 58 Walnut, Black 929 58
Magnolia, Cucumber 785 49 Willow, Black 801 50
NOTE: The values shown here are green weights.
3.93
TIRE PRESSURES
Inflation Pressure
Tigercat Part # Manufacturer Size
psi kPa
BP012 Bridgestone/Firestone 23.1-26 14PR LS2 35 240
BP021 Bridgestone/Firestone 24.5-32 16 PR LS2 35 240
BP056 Bridgestone/Firestone 28L-26 16PR LS2 DW (FS) 35 240
BP111 Bridgestone/Firestone 30.5L-32 20PR LS2 (FS) 35 240
BP112 Bridgestone/Firestone 30.5L-32 26PR SS LS2 DH (FS) 45 310
BP013 Bridgestone/Firestone 67x34-26 14PR HF4 40 275
BP022 Bridgestone/Firestone 73x44-32 16PR HF3 DH (FS) 40 275
BP113 Bridgestone/Firestone 35.5L-32 20PR LS2 DH (FS) 30 205
BP114 Bridgestone/Firestone 35.5L-32 24PR LS2 DH (FS) 35 240
BP139 Goodyear 30.5L-32 20 PR LOGLUGIII LS2 TL 35 240
BP137 Goodyear 30.5L-32 26 PLY CRC SS TUBELESS 45 310
BP145 Goodyear 35.5L-32 26PR LOGLUGIII TLL S2 40 275
BP100 GPX Tire (Primex) 66/4300-26 20PR HF4 DW (GPX) 50 345
BP193 GPX Tire (Primex) 67x34-26 20PR HF4 PRIMEX TL 55 380
BP190 Nokian 710/45-26.5 20PR FOREST KING TRS2 SF 80 550
BP066 Nokian 750/55-26.5 20PR F (N) 87 600
BP039 Nokian 750/55-26.5 20PR TRS (N) 87 600
BP175 Nokian 750/55 26.5 24 PR FOREST KING F2 87 600
BP143 Nokian 780/55-26.5 20PR F 87 600
BP174 Nokian 780/50 28.5 24PR FOREST KING TRS2 87 600
BP167 Nokian 780-50-28.5 24PR FOREST KING F2 SF 87 600
BP180 Nokian 30.5L-32 26PR FOREST KING TRS LS-2 TL 45 310
BP182 Nokian 35.5L-32 26PR FOREST KING TRS LS-2 TL 40 275
SKIDDER TIRE PRESSURES R5 04/16
Common Conversions
To Convert... Into... Multiply By To Convert... Into... Multiply By
BAR�� PSI�� 14.5 in3�� cm3�� 16.39
cm ��
3
in ��
3
0.06102 °F�� °C�� (°F - 32) / 1.8
°C�� °F�� (°C x 9/5) + 32 US Gal�� L�� 3.785
kg�� lb�� 2.205 hp�� kW�� 0.7457
kW�� hp�� 1.341 in�� mm�� 25.4
L�� US Gal�� 0.2642 lb�� kg�� 0.4535
mm�� in�� 0.03937 lbf•ft�� Nm�� 1.356
Nm�� lbf•ft�� 0.7375 psi�� par�� 0.06896
N�� lbf�� 0.22481 in Hg�� psi�� 0.4912
in H2O�� psi�� 0.03613
lb�� N�� 4.4482
3.94
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTERS.......................................................................................................................6

SECTION 6– ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTERS
Always read and understand the entire contents of this manual, and all manuals for any attachments or
accessories associated with this machine, prior to operating or servicing this equipment.
CONTENTS – SECTION 6 ISSUE 1.0, OCTOBER 2017
ALARMS AND GAUGES............................................................................................................................................. 6.50

C
CHANNELS................................................................................................................................................................. 6.28
INPUTS
DIGITAL IN (DIN).................................................................................................................................................. 6.28
FREQUENCY IN (FIN).......................................................................................................................................... 6.28
VOLTAGE IN (VIN)................................................................................................................................................ 6.28
OUTPUTS
CURRENT OUT (COUT)...................................................................................................................................... 6.28
DIGITAL OUT (DOUT).......................................................................................................................................... 6.28
PWM OUT (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION)........................................................................................................ 6.28
COMPUTER................................................................................................................................................................ 6.11
COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM............................................................................................................................ 6.4
COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS.................................................................................................. 6.4
INFORMATION MODE MENU................................................................................................................................. 6.14
MAIN MENU............................................................................................................................................................. 6.12
MAIN MENU PAGE.................................................................................................................................................. 6.16
MAIN MENU PAGE - ADJUST MENU..................................................................................................................... 6.17
CLUTCH ADJUST GROUP................................................................................................................................... 6.22
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE ADJUST GROUP............................................................................................................ 6.19
MACHINE CONFIGURATION.............................................................................................................................. 6.20
SERVICE ADJUST GROUP (ADDTIONAL SETTINGS WHEN LOGGED IN TO IQANRUN 3)........................... 6.18
STEERING ADJUST GROUP (JOYSTICK STEERING ONLY)............................................................................ 6.22
TELEMATICS........................................................................................................................................................ 6.23
MAIN MENU PAGE - INFO MENU........................................................................................................................... 6.32
MAIN MENU PAGE - MEASURE MENU................................................................................................................. 6.25
EXAMPLE – MEASURE MENU........................................................................................................................... 6.30
INPUT AND OUTPUT CHANNELS....................................................................................................................... 6.26
MAIN MENU PAGE - PREFERENCES MENU........................................................................................................ 6.32
MESSAGES............................................................................................................................................................. 6.33
CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 3............................................................................................................. 6.40
D
DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESSES.................................................................................................................. 6.29

DOWNLOADING APPLICATIONS FROM DEALER WEBSITE.................................................................................. 6.37
E
ELECTRICAL KIT - SERVICE AND DIAGNOSTICS................................................................................................... 6.34

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS..................................................................................................... 6.55
F
FUSE AND RELAY PANELS...................................................................................................................SEE SECTION 3

G
GAUGES AND ALARMS............................................................................................................................................. 6.50

I
ID-TAG......................................................................................................................................................................... 6.10
INPUT AND OUTPUT CHANNELS............................................................................................................................. 6.26
IQAN MODULES
MD3 MODULE........................................................................................................................................................... 6.6
XA2 MODULE............................................................................................................................................................ 6.9
XC21 MODULE.......................................................................................................................................................... 6.8
XS2 MODULE............................................................................................................................................................ 6.7
Electrical and Computers Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder
IQANRUN 3................................................................................................................................................................. 6.38
ADJUST................................................................................................................................................................... 6.49
CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 3.......................................................................................................... 6.40
IQANRUN 3 QUICK SUMMARY.............................................................................................................................. 6.38
ADJUST................................................................................................................................................................ 6.39
CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 3....................................................................................................... 6.38
GET CLONE......................................................................................................................................................... 6.38
GET SETTINGS.................................................................................................................................................... 6.38
LOGIN................................................................................................................................................................... 6.38
LOGS.................................................................................................................................................................... 6.39
MEASURE (GRAPH)............................................................................................................................................ 6.39
SEND CLONE....................................................................................................................................................... 6.38
SEND SETTINGS................................................................................................................................................. 6.38
SYSTEM............................................................................................................................................................... 6.47
UPDATE................................................................................................................................................................ 6.38
LOGIN...................................................................................................................................................................... 6.42
LOGS....................................................................................................................................................................... 6.47
MEASURE/ GRAPH................................................................................................................................................. 6.48
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT & INFORMATION........................................................................................................... 6.38
SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 3.............................................................................................................. 6.38
SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................................................. 6.47
UPDATE APPLICATION........................................................................................................................................... 6.43
GET CLONE FILE................................................................................................................................................. 6.43
GET SETTINGS FILE........................................................................................................................................... 6.44
UPDATE APPLICATION TO MD3......................................................................................................................... 6.45
IQAN SOFTWARE...................................................................................................................................................... 6.36
APPLICATION PROGRAM UPDATES
FOR PRODUCT SERVICE BULLETINS................................................................................................................. 6.37
DOWNLOADING APPLICATIONS FROM DEALER WEBSITE............................................................................... 6.37
SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 3.............................................................................................................. 6.38
S
SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 3................................................................................................................. 6.38

SWITCH AND SENSOR LOCATIONS
CAB.......................................................................................................................................................................... 6.54
ENGINE FUEL FILTER SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)................................................................................................... 6.52
FRONT CHASSIS.......................................................................................................................................... 6.51, 6.52
HYDRAULIC FILTER PRESSURE SENSOR (IF EQUIPPED)................................................................................ 6.50
REAR CHASSIS...................................................................................................................................................... 6.53
TRANSMISSION BYPASS SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)............................................................................................. 6.50
T
TROUBLESHOOTING DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESSES............................................................................. 6.29

U
UPDATE APPLICATION.............................................................................................................................................. 6.43

W
WIRE COLOUR CODE CHART.................................................................................................................................. 6.55
6.2
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Electrical and Computers
6.3
COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM Inputs:
Machine operation is controlled electronically by the The computer monitors analogue, digital, and frequency
IQAN computer control system. During operation of inputs and CAN Bus inputs. CAN Bus is a data bus
the electronic joysticks foot pedals, winch lever, dozer system that allows several input signals to be sent to the
lever or control switches, the computer system provides MD3 through a reduced number of wires.
integrated control of the engine, hydrostatic drive and all
of the valve functions. Outputs:
• MD3 Computer and Display Module The computer directs output signals to the solenoids on
the front control valve (steer, dozer, grapple rotate), rear
• XS2 Expansion Module (Cab)
control valve (winch, arch, grapple, boom), multifunction
• XC21 Expansion Module (Seat) manifold, loadsense/autobrake manifold, drive pump
• XA2-A1 Expansion Module (Front Chassis 2) and drive motors. The computer controls engine RPM
• XA2-A0 Expansion Module (Front Chassis) by sending appropriate signals to the engine’s control
computer.
• Engine Electronic Control Unit Module
(Tigercat/FPT NEF 6.7L) NOTE: The computer control system is software-based.
• Various controls, switches, sensors and valves not This software may be updated after the machine is
shown. in service as a part of on-going product improvement
programs and service newsletters. The information
The computer and display module is the main control
contained in this manual is accurate at the time of
unit in the system. The computer program is the
printing. Improvements to the machine and/or software
operating system for the computer display as well as the
are on-going and may not be covered. In these cases
control system for the machine operating parameters.
contact your Tigercat dealer for appropriate information.
The computer also monitors and analyzes inputs and
produces outputs (as defined in its program) to control
the machine valve functions.
Valve functions are:
• Winch A
• Dozer
• Arch and Boom
• Grapple (open/close and rotate)
• Differential locks
• Steering 620E-043
• Service Brakes XS2-A0 Module - Cab

(Located In Cab Behind Left Kick Panel)
• Fan (if equipped with variable pitch fan option) A Connector
• Parking brake
A B C D E
F C4 C3 C2 C1
632E-001X
Computer Control System Components

A MD3 Computer Module E XA2-A0 Expansion Module (Front Chassis )
B XS2 Expansion Module (Cab) F Engine Diagnostic Connector
C XC21 Expansion Module (Seat) G Engine Electronic Control Unit Module
D XA2-A1 Expansion Module (Front Chassis 2)
6.4
615C-007
XA2 Modules - Located Under Cab, Right Rear

Remove Cover To Access Modules
A XA2-A0 Expansion Module (Front Chassis)
B XA2-A1 Expansion Module (Front Chassis 2)
C Connector
632E-016
XC21 Module - Mounted On Back Of Operator Seat

Remove Cover To Access Module
A Connectors
6.5
MD3 MODULE
REAR OF MD3 MODULE
A B C
MD3-BACK
Rear of MD3 Module

A Tag With Serial Number and Part Number
B Connector C2 (VIN inputs, USB communication,alarm output)
C Connector C1 (voltage supply, CAN communication J1939,
expansion modules)
D Membrane valve for condensation prevention inside unit
MD3 MODULE WIRING PIN ASSIGNMENT
6 7 6 7
6
7
6
7
C2 C1
8
5
5
8
1 2 3 4
12 11 10 9
4
9
12 11 10
1 2 3
1 12 1 12
1
2
DIN-A / VIN-A
DIN-B / VIN-B
7
8
USB-D+
+VREF
1
2
-BAT
CAN-A-L
7
8
+RTC
RS232 DATA OUT MD3 MODULE REPLACEMENT
3 DIN-C / VIN-C 9 DIN-E / VIN-E 3 CAN-B-L 9 CAN-C-H/Diag
4 DIN-D / VIN-D 10 DIN-F / VIN-F 4 CAN-C-L/Diag 10 CAN-B-H 1. Turn battery disconnect switch OFF.
5 -VREF 11 DIN-G / VIN-G 5 RS232 DATA IN 11 CAN-A-H
6 USB-D- 12 DOUT-A 6 Reserved 12 +BAT 2. Remove the 6 screws holding the instrument
panel assembly in place and carefully remove the
assembly.
NOTE: Refer to the MD3 MODULE SCHEMATIC and
3. Remove 4 screws holding MD3 in place as shown in
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC in THIS SECTION for the illustration.
detailed pin and wiring assignment.
4. Lift the module out of the instrument panel carefully.
5. Disconnect the wiring harness at the module C1 and
C2 connectors.
6. Install module in reverse order as removed.
NOTE: Refer to IQANrun 3 – APPLICATION UPDATE
in THIS SECTION for procedure to update the
application in an MD3 module.
When replacing a MD3 module the machine serial
number information will need to be reset. Refer to
IQANrun 3 – SYSTEM for more information regarding
access and maintenance of logs using IQANrun 3.
6.6
XS2 MODULE • Three red primary flashes in a row and two yellow
secondary flashes in a row indicates that the fault is
related to the address.
A B • Four red primary flashes in a row and one yellow
secondary flash indicates a memory error.
• Continuous red primary flashing indicates a fatal
error.
Internal diagnostics in the master (MD3) can be used
to get more information about the XS2 module. The
following values are supervised:
• Internal temperature (°C)
XS2 Module LED Indicators • Power supply (V)
A Supply Voltage LED (green)
B Status Indicator LED (yellow/red) • Reference voltage (V)
• CAN address voltage (V)
XS2 MODULE LED INDICATORS
XS2 MODULE WIRING PIN ASSIGNMENT
If there is an error detected, the MD3 controller will
present a message on the display. The XS2 module also
indicates error status through the red blinking LED.This
gives an immediate diagnosis as to the nature of the
error that has occurred.
LED indicator showing different XS2 and XA2 modes
42 29
Status Flash 28 15
Normal operation (yellow) 14 1
Error Error Primary Flash (red) Secondary Flash (yellow) 1 ADDR-H 15 -BAT 29 -VREF
code Error category Error description 2 DOUT-G 16 DIN-I 30 DIN-J
Output errora
3 DOUT-H 17 DIN-K 31 DIN-L
1:1
4 DOUT-I 18 DIN-M 32 DIN-N
1:2 Input errora 5 DOUT-J 19 DIN-O 33 DIN-P
6 DOUT-K 20 DIN-Q 34 DIN-R
1:3 Vref errora
7 DOUT-L 21 DIN-S 35 DIN-T
2:1 Voltage High/Low errora 8 DOUT-A 22 DOUT-C 36 DOUT-E
9 DOUT-B 23 DOUT-D 37 DOUT-F
2:2 Low/High temperaturea
10 VIN-A/DIN-A 24 VIN-E/DIN-E 38 VIN-G/DIN-G
3:1 CAN error 11 VIN-B/DIN-B 25 VIN-F/DIN-F 39 VIN-H/DIN-H
12 VIN-C/DIN-C 26 CAN2-H 40 CAN2-L
3:2 Address error 13 VIN-D/DIN-D 27 CAN-H 41 CAN-L
4:1 Memory errorb 14 ADDR-L 28 +BAT(+12V, +24V) 42 +VREF
FE Fatal error
XS2-WIREASSIGN
a. Error groups 1:n and 2:n are controlled by the master, see also on screen warnings.
b. FRAM memory error.
Note that the XS2 module is equipped with eight voltage
SUPPLY VOLTAGE LED (GREEN) inputs (VIN-A to VIN-H) which may be configured as
digital inputs (DIN-A to DIN-H). The function of these
LED with green light ON indicates supply voltage is ON. inputs is determined by the machine program.
LED OFF indicates supply voltage is OFF. NOTE: Refer to the XS2-A0 FRONT CHASSIS MODULE
SCHEMATICS and ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC in THIS
STATUS INDICATOR LED (YELLOW/RED)
SECTION for detailed pin and wiring assignment.
LED yellow flashing light indicates status is correct.
LED flashing red light indicates error status as follows:
• One red primary flash and one secondary yellow
flash indicates an error controlled by the master
(MD3).
• Two red primary flashes in a row and one yellow
secondary flash indicates an error controlled by the
master (MD3).
• Three red primary flashes in a row and one yellow
secondary flash indicates that the fault is related to
the CAN-bus.
6.7
XC21 MODULE REFERENCE VOLTAGE, VREF
The LX Module is equipped with an internal voltage
A regulator to generate the 5 Vdc reference voltage
(VREF).
XC21 MODULE PIN ASSIGNMENT
C4
C3
C2
C1
1055C-026
XC21 Module LED Indicator

A Status Indicator LED (yellow/red)
XC21 STATUS AND ERROR CODES

LED indicator showing different XC21 modes
Status Flash (yellow) 12 7 6 4 8 5 10 6
6 1 3 1 4 1 5 1
Normal operation
C4 C3 C2 C1
Error Error Primary flash (red) Secondary flash (yellow) 1055C-026

code Error category Error description
1:1 DOUT error

(open load)
1:3 VREF error
2:1 VBAT warning
2:2 Temperature warning
3:1 CAN error/Timeout
3:2 IdTag error
FE Critical error
Status Yellow Flashing LED

Normal (no errors) Constant
Error Error Primary Secondary Sympton Action
Code Flash (red Flash (yellow
LED) Error LED) Error
Category Description
1.1 DOUT error 1 flash 1 flash Open/short circuit Check connections to pod
(open load) joystick and buttons
1.3 VREF error 1 flash 3 flashes Battery voltage is out of Check voltage supply
range VREF <4.9 Vdc, > 5.1 Vdc
2.1 VBAT 2 flashes 1 flash VREF is out of range Check voltage supply
warning +BAT <6.5 Vdc, >36 Vdc
2.2 Temperature 2 flashes 2 flashes Internal temp sensor Contact service
warning error
3.1 CAN error/ 3 flashes 1 flash CAN-bus off. Check CAN-bus
timeout All outputs shut off
3.2 ID Tag error 3 flashes 2 flashes Poor ID Tag connection Check ID connection and
or defective ID Tag measure resistance of ID tag.
6.8
XA2 MODULE • Three red primary flashes in a row and two yellow
secondary flashes in a row indicates that the fault is
related to the address.
A B • Four red primary flashes in a row and one yellow
secondary flash indicates a memory error.
• Continuous red primary flashing indicates a fatal
error.
Internal diagnostics in the master (MD3) can be used
to get more information about the XA2 module. The
following values are supervised:
• Internal temperature (°C)
XA2 Module LED Indicators • Power supply (V)
A Supply Voltage LED (green)
B Status Indicator LED (yellow/red) • Reference voltage (V)
• CAN address voltage (V)
XA2 MODULE LED INDICATORS XA2 MODULE WIRING PIN ASSIGNMENT
If there is an error detected, the MD3 controller will
present a message on the display. The XA2 module also
indicates error status through the red blinking LED.This
gives an immediate diagnosis as to the nature of the
error that has occurred.
LED indicator showing different XS2 and XA2 modes 42 29
28 15
Status Flash 14 1
Normal operation (yellow)

1 ADDR-H 15 -BAT 29 -VREF
Error Error Primary Flash (red) Secondary Flash (yellow) 2 COUT-A/DOUT-G 16 CRET-A+/DIN-I 30 CRET-A-/DIN-J
code Error category Error description 3 COUT-B/DOUT-H 17 CRET-B+/DIN-K 31 CRET-B-/DIN-L
4 COUT-C/DOUT-I 18 CRET-C+/DIN-M 32 CRET-C-DIN-N
1:1 Output errora
5 COUT-D/DOUT-J 19 CRET-D+/DIN-O 33 CRET-D-/DIN-P
1:2 Input errora 6 COUT-E/DOUT-K 20 CRET-E+/DIN-Q 34 CRET-E-/DIN-R
7 COUT-F/DOUT-L 21 CRET-F+/DIN-S 35 CRET-F-/DIN-T
1:3 Vref errora 8 DOUT-A 22 DOUT-C 36 DOUT-E
2:1 Voltage High/Low errora 9 DOUT-B 23 DOUT-D 37 DOUT-F
10 VIN-A/DIN-A 24 VIN-E/DIN-E/FIN-A 38 VIN-G/DIN-G/FIN-B
2:2 Low/High temperaturea DFIN-A+ DFIN-B+
3:1 CAN error 11 VIN-B/DIN-B 25 VIN-F/DIN-F/DFIN-A- 39 VIN-H/DIN-H/DFIN-B-
12 VIN-C/DIN-C 26 CAN2-H 40 CAN2-L
3:2 Address error 13 VIN-D/DIN-D 27 CAN-H 41 CAN-L
4:1 Memory errorb 14 ADDR-L 28 +BAT(+12V, +24V) 42 +VREF
FE Fatal error
XA2-WIREASSIGN
a. Error groups 1:n and 2:n are controlled by the master, see also on screen warnings.
b. FRAM memory error.
Note that the XA2 module is equipped with eight voltage
SUPPLY VOLTAGE LED (GREEN). inputs (VIN-A to VIN-H) which may be configured as
digital inputs (DIN), frequency inputs (FIN) or directional
LED with green light ON indicates supply voltage is ON. frequency inputs (DFIN). The XA2 module is also
LED OFF indicates supply voltage is OFF. equipped with six double proportional ouputs (COUT-A
to COUT-F) which may be configured as digital outputs
STATUS INDICATOR LED (YELLOW/RED). (DOUT) and digital inputs (DIN). See wiring pin
assignment diagram above for details. The function of
LED yellow flashing light indicates status is correct.
these inputs is determined by the machine program.
LED flashing red light indicates error status as follows:
NOTE: Refer to the XA2-A0 SCHEMATIC, XA2-A1
• One red primary flash and one secondary yellow SCHEMATIC in THIS SECTION or MACHINE
flash indicates an error controlled by the master ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC for detailed pin and wiring
(MD3). assignment.
• Two red primary flashes in a row and one yellow
secondary flash indicates an error controlled by the
master (MD3).
• Three red primary flashes in a row and one yellow
secondary flash indicates that the fault is related to
the CAN-bus.
6.9
ID-TAG ASSEMBLING OF THE ID-TAG
The Id-Tag is placed in the connector in order to
ADDRESSING
address/ terminate the module. The Id-Tag is mounted
Each module has a specific address, enabling the under the connector casing. Bend the Id-Tag’s cables
MD3 controller (master module) to communicate towards the opposite side, where the other cables enter
with it through the CAN-bus. Practically, the system the connector.
distinguishes between different modules through firstly
verifying the module type and then, secondly, through
the modules having a unique addresses.
EXAMPLE
If a system has an XS2 module with address 0, the
system will denote this one as XS2-A0, The letter “A”
refers to CAN-bus A. 42 29
In order to assign any XS2 module a unique CAN- 28 15

address, an Id-Tag will have to be connected to the 14 1
positions ADDR-H and ADDR-L.
ADDR-L, pos. 14 ADDR-H, pos. 1
TERMINATING
To eliminate interference in communication, through the
CAN-bus, the CAN-bus must be terminated. Because Id-Tag
the master module always is located at the beginning
of the bus, the master is provided with an internal Connecting ID Tag (XS2 or XA2)
termination. If an IQAN-XA2 module is located at
the end of the CAN-bus then use an Id-tag having a
combined address and terminating function. This is
denoted with a “T” for terminating, after the appropriate
address such as; 0T, 1T, 2T...
SELECTING APPROPRIATE ID-TAG

• Check the address number of the module.
• If the module is located at the end of the CAN-bus
then select the appropriate Id-Tag denoted with a
“T”.
MODULE ID-TAG RESISTANCE
MD3 NO TAG -
Assembling Id-Tag (XS2 or XA2)
XS2 -A0 0 287 Ω
XC21-A3 3 1500 Ω
XA2-A1 1 590 Ω
XA2 -A0 0T 432 Ω
ADDR-H
ADDR-L
ID-Tag
Connecting ID Tag (XC21)
6.10
COMPUTER ELECTRONIC CONTROL
& DISPLAY
A
B
632E-301A F G
Computer, Electronic Control And Display

A Colour Display E Arrow (Scroll) Down
B Computer Display Module F Esc (Back)
C Arrow (Scroll) Up G Menu
D OK (Enter)
The computer electronic control and display (MD3 A B C D

display module) is the operator interface with the
electronic control system. This is the central unit in the
control system which works as both a master controller
and a display unit. It has a backlit colour graphic
transflective display for reading system information.
The front of the module consists of a control panel with
a display and nine buttons. The buttons are arranged on
the bottom and right side of the display.
• F1 through F4 function buttons.
Programmed buttons that are configured by program 73068BUNI
software to bring up a display page, bring up an Instrument Panel

adjustment group or act as an input. A Computer USB Plug
B Alarm Light
• Up and down arrow buttons. C Master Alarm
Navigation buttons that are used to scroll through D Computer
selections on a menu page. The buttons are
configured by program software to bring up a display • Menu button .
page, bring up an adjustment group or act as a Always brings up the Menu page. It is not
virtual input. programmable.
• OK button. • ’Esc’ or BACK button .
Pushing this button equals ’enter’. Saves the value Returns you to the previous display page. May be
or confirms the selection you have made. configured by program software to bring up a display
page, bring up an adjustment group or act as a
virtual input.
6.11
COMPUTER MAIN MENU
A B C D E F G
H
Q
N
I
632E-301
J K L M
Main Menu Screen

A ** Parking Brake - Engaged/Disengaged J Adjustment Menu - Press F2 To Select
B ** Rear Differential Lock - Engaged/Disengaged K Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge***
C ** Front Differential Lock - Engaged/Disengaged L Information Menu - Press F3 To Select
D *Grapple Constant Pressure On/Off M Alarm Indicators - Press F4 To Select
E * Winch On/Off ( ) N Hydraulic Oil Grade Indicator
F * Winch Free Spool ( ) O Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge***
G * Machine Warm Up On/Off P DEF Level Indicator*****
H Engine Tachometer Gauge Q Fuel Level Gauge****
I Engine Menu - Press F1 To Select R Maximum Speed Control Setting Indicator (%)
* When the icon is illuminated, function is ON.
** When the icon is illuminated, function is ENGAGED.
*** Note that gauge symbol colour changes indicate temperature range (blue=low, white=normal, red=high)
**** Note yellow fuel symbol indicates fuel level low.
***** DEF level indicator applicable to Tier 4f machines only.
6.12
The engine functions on display are as follows:
ENGINE MENU
Charge Air Temperature °C or °F
Engine Coolant Temperature °C or °F
Engine Oil Temperature °C or °F
Fuel Temperature °C or °F
Engine Speed rpm
Turbocharger Boost Pressure bar or psi
Engine Oil Pressure psi or bar
Engine Torque %
Engine hours h
Voltage V
From the Main Display press the F1 button to go to Fuel Rate (instantaneous) L/h or gph
the ENGINE MENU.

warm up function ON/OFF. Refer to
MACHINE WARM UP OPERATION and
MACHINE WARM UP SPEED ADJUSTMENT
in SECTION 2.
Press the F1 button to toggle between metric
or imperial units of measure.
display.
For more detailed information refer to COMPUTER –
ENGINE MENU - ENGINE FUNCTIONS in SECTION 2.
When selected the engine menu icon is on display and

the engine functions are displayed.
6.13
ADJUSTMENT MENU
INFORMATION MODE MENU
From the main menu press F2 button to select the

ADJUSTMENT MENU. Press the F3 button to access the information menu.
When selected the information menu icon is on display
and the information functions will also be displayed.
When selected the adjustment menu icon is on display

and all the adjustment selections will also be displayed.
The adjustment selections are as follows:
• Engine Settings - Shown first by default.
• Fan Settings - Press F2 to select
• Service Settings - Press F3 to select
Press the back button to return to the main menu.
ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2.
6.14
The information functions on display are as follows: When is selected the next screen appears and more
information functions are on display as follows:
Drive Pressure Forward bar or psi
Main Pump Pressure bar or psi
Drive Pressure Reverse bar or psi
Load Sense Pressure bar or psi
Travel Speed km/h or mph Differential Pressure (Differential between
bar or psi
Main Pump and Load Sense pressures)
Drive Motor Speed rpm
Pilot Pressure (Multifunction Manifold) bar or psi
Machine Serial Number #

Grapple Constant Pressure bar or psi
Machine Hours h
Hydraulic Filter Pressure bar or psi
Hydraulic Oil Temp °C or °F

Service Brake Pressure bar or psi
Transmission Temperature
°C or °F Parking Brake Pressure P bar or psi
(EHS Transmission Only)
Total fuel information L/h or gph Clutch Pressure (EHS Transmission only) bar or psi
Trip fuel information L/h or gph

Press the F1 button access accumulator screen.
Press F1 button to reset the trip average fuel rate and trip fuel
used functions. Press the F2 button access telematics screen (if equipped).
Press the F2 button to toggle between metric or imperial units

Press F3 button to return to the first information menu display.
of measure.
Press F3 to move to the next information screen. OR

Press the back button to return to the main display.
Press the back button to return to the main display.
Press again to return to the information menu.

INFORMATION MODE MENU in SECTION 2.
6.15
MAIN MENU PAGE
From any menu page.
Press the menu button to go to the main menu page.

The main menu page displays the following selections:
• Adjust - Press F1 to select
• Measure - Press F2 to select
• Preferences - Press F3 to select
• Info - Press F4 to select
Press the back button to return to the page which
was displayed when the main menu page was
selected.
OR
Press the menu button again to return to the page
which was displayed when the main menu page
was selected.
6.16
ADJUST MENU ENGINE ADJUST GROUP*
FAN ADJUST GROUP* (IF EQUIPPED)

From the main menu page press the F1 button (Adjust)
to access the adjust menu.
SERVICE ADJUST GROUP*

• Engine Adjust Group*
• Fan Adjust Group* (if equipped)
• Service Adjust Group*
Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to select the menu
item. Press OK to confirm the selection.
*NOTE: Marked menu items can also be accessed from
the main menu. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
MENU in THIS SECTION for more information.
6.17
SERVICE ADJUST GROUP ** NOTE: Service technicians have access to more
options when logged in using IQANrun 3. Some adjust
From the adjust menu use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down
groups are only visible on screen for users with the
to select the Service Adjust Group. Press OK to confirm
appropriate username and password login rights.
the selection.
Service related or owner/supervisor use related adjust
Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to select the menu groups are restricted by passwords on screen or
item. Press OK to confirm the selection. available only through IQANrun 3 with username and
password restrictions.
Press the back button to return to the adjust menu.
Refer also to SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANrun 3
Press F1 to return to the main menu page. – LOGIN and SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANrun 3 –
ADJUST for more information.
Press the back button again to return to the main
menu. Log into IQANrun 3 and from the main menu page press
the F1 button (Adjust) to access the adjust menu.
The following additional menu items can be selected

when logged in using IQANrun 3: The following additional menu items can be selected
when logged in using IQANrun 3:
DOZER DOWN MAX mA
• Hydrostatic Drive Adjust Group**
Range 410 to 510 mA (510* mA)
• Machine Configuration**
This setting can be used to slow dozer down speed to • Clutch Adjust Group**(EHS transmission only)
match preference and/or operating conditions.
• Steering Adjust Group**
DOZER UP MAX mA • Telematics Operations**
Range 410 to 510 mA (510* mA) • Engine Operations**
This setting can be used to slow dozer up speed to Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to select the menu
match preference and/or operating conditions. item. Press OK to confirm the selection.
Press the back button (or F1) to return to the main
menu page.
6.18
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE ADJUST GROUP The hydrostatic drive adjust group is used as part of the
hydrostatic setup procedure. Refer to HYDROSTATIC
From the adjust menu use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down
SETUP PROCEDURE in SECTION 8 of THIS MANUAL.
to select the Hydrostatic Drive Adjust Group. Press OK
to confirm the selection. The adjustable hydrostatic drive settings are:
PUMP MAX CURRENT
Range 500 mA to 620 mA (*560 mA)
MOTOR MAX CURRENT
Press F1 to return to the main menu page.
Range 700 mA to 1100 mA (*950 mA)
menu. RH MOTOR MAX CURRENT
(EHS TRANSMISSION ONLY)
Range 400 mA to 1300 mA (*760 mA)
LH MOTOR MAX CURRENT

(EHS TRANSMISSION ONLY)
Range 700 mA to 1300 mA (*1190 mA)
RH MA MOTOR REG SETUP

LH MA MOTOR REG SETUP

in SECTION 2 for an example of adjustment menu
navigation.
6.19
MACHINE CONFIGURATION FRONT TIRE SIZE
From the adjust menu use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down Also available through the service settings menu.
to select Machine Configuration. Press OK to confirm Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU –
the selection. SERVICE SETTINGS – FRONT TIRE SIZE in THIS
SECTION for more information.
item. Press OK to confirm the selection. STEERING CONTROL
Press the back button to return to the adjust menu. Joystick Steering*
Steering Wheel
DRIVE PUMP SIZE
menu. Not configured*
165
210
ARCH TYPE
Dual Function*
Single Function
WINCH EQUIPPED
No*
Auxilliary Function
Carco Standard WInch
Carco High Speed WInch
Allied Standard Winch
Allied High Speed Winch
Allied High Capacity Winch
FAN TYPE
Fixed Pitch*
Variable Pitch
The adjustable machine configuration settings are:
HYDRAULIC OIL GRADE
MACHINE MODEL
Also available through the service settings menu.
Not configured*
632E
SERVICE SETTINGS – HYDRAULIC OIL GRADE
635G
in THIS SECTION for more information.
TRANSMISSION TYPE
MACHINE HOURS
Not configured*
Locked for service users.
1.91
2.18
BLADE GRAB EQUIPPED (OPTIONAL)
2.53
2.89 No*
3.16 Yes
3.56
EHS - 200RH1.91, 160LH3.95 ELECTRONIC SERVICE BRAKE
EHS - 200RH2.41, 160LH3.95 (TIER 2, PSB 2248, OPTIONAL TIER 4F)
No*
AXLE TYPE Yes
Severe Duty
Standard Duty EMISSION LEVEL SP (STATE PARAMENTER)
T4F*
T2F
6.20
TRANSMISSION FILTER BYPASS (IF EQUIPPED)
False*
True
NOTE*: Reset default settings are marked.
EXAMPLE – ADJUSTMENT MENU NAVIGATION for an
example of adjustment menu navigation.
6.21
CLUTCH ADJUST GROUP STEERING ADJUST GROUP
From the adjust menu use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down (JOYSTICK STEERING ONLY)
to select Clutch Adjust Group. Press OK to confirm the From the adjust menu use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down
selection. to select Steering Adjust Group. Press OK to confirm
the selection.
item. Press OK to confirm the selection. Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to select the menu
menu. Press the back button again to return to the main
menu.
The adjustable clutch adjust group settings are:

The steer adjust group settings are intended to adjust
CLUTCH MAX CURRENT settings for smooth operation of joystick steering.
Range 0 mA to 600 mA (*470 mA) The adjustable steering adjust group settings are:
CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT CURRENT STEER RIGHT MIN CURRENT
Range 0 mA to 600 mA (*425 mA) Range 280 mA to 350 mA (*305 mA)
STEER LEFT MIN CURRENT
example of adjustment menu navigation. * NOTE: Reset default settings are marked.
6.22
TELEMATICS The adjustable steering adjust group settings are:
TELEMATICS
No* or Yes
SEQUENCE NUMBER
Range 0 to 9999
This setting should be set to match the last four digits of
the machine serial number when configuring a machine
for telematics use.
The first three digits are set automatically by Machine
Model. Refer to COMPUTER – MAIN MENU PAGE -
ADJUST MENU – MACHINE CONFIGURATION in THIS
SECTION.
When configured correctly the machine serial number

will appear correctly on the telematics information
screen.
From the adjust menu use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down NOTE: Sequence Number is locked when Telematics is
to select Telematics. Press OK to confirm the selection. set to NO.
Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down to select the menu * NOTE: Reset default settings are marked.
Press the back button to return to the adjust menu. EXAMPLE – ADJUSTMENT MENU NAVIGATION for an
menu.
6.23
ENGINE OPERATIONS
NOTE: This adjustment function is intended for use
to only when instructed to do so by Tigercat customer
service.
6.24
MEASURE MENU
The following menu items can be selected.

From the main menu page press the F2 button
(Measure) to access the measure menu. • Inputs
• Outputs
• J1939 Parameter Inputs
• Drive/HP Test
• Function Valve
• Variable Pitch Fan
• Differential Locks
• Module Diagnostics
• Clutch Engage
• Carco winch control commands
• Hydrostatic Set-up
• Engage/Release Time
• Telematics (if equipped)
Press the back button (or F1) to return to the main
menu page.
Refer to COMPUTER – MAIN MENU PAGE - MEASURE
MENU – EXAMPLE – MEASURE MENU in SECTION 2
for an example of measure menu navigation.
This menu is used by Tigercat Service technicians to
view measured values on the MD3 display. Refer also to
SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANrun 3 – MEASURE/
GRAPH for more information about graphing and
exporting measured values for service diagnostics.
6.25
INPUT AND OUTPUT CHANNELS
Type Channel Name Module Function Group Activating Control/Sensor/Switch Location

Voltage in Drive Pedal Fwd VIN [%] Display (MD3[0]) (VIN-A) Drive Logic Front drive pedal potentiometer Cab - Joystick Steering
Voltage in Drive Pedal Rev VIN [%] Display (MD3[0]) (VIN-B) Engine Control/J1939 Rear drive pedal potentiometer Cab - Joystick Steering
Voltage in Drive Pedal Fwd VIN [%] Display (MD3[0]) (VIN-A) Drive Logic Forward drive pedal potentiometer Cab - Steering Wheel
Voltage in Drive Pedal Rev VIN [%] Display (MD3[0]) (VIN-B) Engine Control/J1939 Reverse drive pedal potentiometer Cab - Steering Wheel
Voltage in Winch Lever VIN [%] Display (MD3[0]) (VIN-C) Main Hydraulics Winch Select Switch/ Winch Lever Control panel
Voltage in Load Sense Pressure VIN [psi] Cab Module (XS2[0]) (VIN-A) Main Hydraulics Load Sense Pressure Sensor Control Valve, Front - Left Step
Voltage in Main Pump Pressure VIN [psi] Cab Module (XS2[0]) (VIN-B) Main Hydraulics Main Pump Pressure Sensor Load Sense/Autobrake Manifold
Voltage in Manifold Pressure VIN [psi] Cab Module (XS2[0]) (VIN-C) Main Hydraulics Pilot/Manifold Pressure Sensor Load Sense/Autobrake Manifold
Voltage in Hyd Filter Pressure VIN [psi] Cab Module (XS2[0]) (VIN-D) Fault Management Hydraulic Return Filter Pressure Sensor Hydraulic Return Filter Manifold
Voltage in Drive Pressure Fwd VIN [psi] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (VIN-A) Drive Logic Drive pump forward pressure sensor Drive pump
Voltage in Drive Pressure Rev VIN [psi] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (VIN-B) Drive Logic Drive pump reverse pressure sensor Drive pump
Voltage in Hyd Oil Temp VIN [°F] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (VIN-D) Main Hydraulics Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Hydraulic tank
Voltage in Brake Pressure VIN [psi] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (VIN-F) Main Hydraulics Service brake pressure switch Main pump outlet manifold
Voltage in Fuel Level VIN [%] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (VIN-G) Fault Management Fuel level sender/sensor Rear chassis
Voltage in Park Brake Sensor VIN [psi] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (VIN-H) Drive Logic Parking Brake Pressure Sensor Multifunction Manifold
Voltage in Clutch Pressure VIN [psi] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (VIN-A) Drive Logic / EHS Transmission Inputs EHS Clutch Pressure Sensor EHS transmission manifold
Voltage in Transmission Oil Temp VIN [°F] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (VIN-B) Drive Logic EHS Transmission Temperature Sensor EHS transmission manifold
Voltage in Engine Coolant Level Low = 5V [%] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (VIN-D) Blade Grab Enable Coolant Level Switch Surge Tank Front Chassis
Voltage in Blade Grab Lever VIN [%] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (VIN-F) Dozer grapple control lever Beside Right Joystick
Voltage in Grapple Close psi VIN [psi] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (VIN-G) Main Hydraulics Grapple Close button Right Joystick button
Voltage in Joystick X Steer VIN [%] Seat Module (XC21[3]) (VIN-A) Joystick Steering Enable Joystick movement left/right Left Steer Joystick
Voltage in Travel Direction Select VIN [%] Seat Module (XC21[3]) (VIN-B) Joystick Steering Enable Direction selection switch Left Steer Joystick
Voltage in Drive Trigger VIN [%] Seat Module (XC21[3]) (VIN-C) Travel Speed Travel/Engine Speed Trigger Left Steer Joystick
Voltage in Travel Speed Control VIN [%] Seat Module (XC21[3]) (VIN-D) Drive Logic / EHS Transmission Inputs Maximum speed control - Joystick Steer Left Steer Joystick
Voltage in Travel Speed Control VIN [%] Seat Module (XC21[3]) (VIN-D) Drive Logic / EHS Transmission Inputs Maximum speed control - Steering Control panel
Voltage in Dozer Lever VIN [%] Seat Module (XC21[3]) (VIN-E) Main Hydraulics Dozer control lever Beside Right Joystick
Voltage in Joystick X Arch VIN [%] Seat Module (XC21[3]) (VIN-F) Main Hydraulics Joystick movement left/right Right Joystick
Voltage in Joystick Y Boom VIN [%] Seat Module (XC21[3]) (VIN-G) Fan Control Logic Joystick movement forward/back Right Joystick
Voltage in Engine Speed Trigger VIN [%] Seat Module (XC21[3]) (VIN-H) Dual Function Arch Enable Engine speed control trigger Right Joystick
Digital in Winch Free Spool DIN Display (MD3[0]) (DIN-D) Main Hydraulics Winch Select Switch Control panel
Digital in Fan Full On DIN Display (MD3[0]) (DIN-E) Fan Control Logic Fan Control Switch Control panel
Digital in Fan Clean DIN Display (MD3[0]) (DIN-F) Fan Control Logic Fan Control Switch Control panel
Digital in Seat Direction DIN Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DIN-H) Drive Logic Seat direction switch Rotating Seat
Digital in Transmission Filter Bypass = 0V DIN Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DIN-I) Transmission Filter bypass switch Transmission Filter head
Digital in Charge Filter Bypass = 0V DIN Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DIN-J) Fault Management Charge filter bypass switch Charge Pressure Filter head
Digital in Front Diff Indicator DIN Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DIN-K) Diff Lock Logic Differential Lock Selector Switch Control panel
Digital in Hyd Oil Level Low = 5V DIN Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DIN-L) Fault Management Hydraulic oil level switch Hydraulic tank
Digital in Key Start Signal DIN Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DIN-M) Fan Control Logic Start Solenoid Relay Cab Fuse and Relay Panel
Digital in Rear Diff Indicator (6 wheel) Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DIN-N) Diff Lock Logic Differential Lock Selector Switch Control panel
Digital in Rear Diff Indicator (4 wheel) Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DIN-N) Diff Lock Logic Curvic Coupling Rear Bogie Axle
Digital in AC Compressor DIN Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DIN-R) Main Hydraulics Air Conditioner Switch Control panel
Digital in Air Filter Restricted = 5V DIN Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DIN-T) Fault Management Air Filter Restrictor Sensor Front Chassis
Digital in Steer Damping Sensor DIN Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (DIN-C) Diff Lock Logic Steering Proximity Sensor Center Joint (Joystick Steer only)
Digital in Park Brake Cmd DIN Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (DIN-C) Fuel Filter Monitoring Park Brake Off Relay Cab Fuse and Relay Panel
Digital in Fuel Filter Differential Pressure Switch DINFront Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (DIN-H) Engine Control/J1939 Fuel Filter Differential Pressure Switch Engine Fuel filter
(if equipped)
Digital in Diff Lock DIN Seat Module (XC21[3]) (DIN-F) Fault Management Differential lock on/off Joystick button
Digital in Constant Pressure DIN Seat Module (XC21[3]) (DIN-G) Main Hydraulics Constant Pressure (Grapple) button Right Joystick button
Digital in Grapple Close DIN Seat Module (XC21[3]) (DIN-H) Main Hydraulics Grapple Close button Right Joystick button
Digital in Grapple Open DIN Seat Module (XC21[3]) (DIN-I) Main Hydraulics Grapple Open button Right Joystick button
Digital in Grapple Rotate CCW DIN Seat Module (XC21[3]) (DIN-J) Main Hydraulics Grapple Rotate CCW button Right Joystick button
Digital in Grapple Rotate CW DIN Seat Module (XC21[3]) (DIN-K) Main Hydraulics Grapple Rotate CW button Right Joystick button
Frequency in Drive Motor RH Speed FIN [hz] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (FIN-A) Travel Speed Drive Motor Speed Sensor Right Drive Motor
Frequency in Drive Motor RH Speed FIN [hz] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (FIN-A) Travel Speed Drive Motor Speed Sensor Right Drive Motor
Frequency in Drive Motor Left Speed FIN [rpm] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (FIN-A) Drive Logic (EHS) Drive Motor Speed Sensor Left Drive Motor
632E 635G INPUTS OUTPUTS R0.XLS 10/17
6.26
Type Channel Name Module Function Group Activating Control/Sensor/Switch Location

Current out Drive Pump Fwd-/Rev+ COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (COUT-A) Drive Logic Drive Pump Directional Solenoids Drive pump - front chassis
Current out Drive Motor RH COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (COUT-B) Drive Logic Proportional Solenoid Control Right Drive Motor
Current out Arch In-/Out+ COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (COUT-C) Main Hydraulics Control Valve Arch Section Control Valve, Rear
Current out Boom Up-/Dn+ COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (COUT-D) Main Hydraulics Control Valve Boom Section Control Valve, Rear
Current out Dozer Up-/Dn+ COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (COUT-E) Main Hydraulics Control Valve Dozer Section Control Valve, Front (Left Step)
Current out Steer Left-/Right+ COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (COUT-F) Main Hydraulics Control Valve Steer Section Control Valve, Front (Left Step)
Current out Clutch Motor LH COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (COUT-ADrive Logic Clutch Pressure Control EHS transmission manifold
Current out Drive Motor LH COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (COUT-BDrive Logic Proportional Solenoid Control Left Drive Motor
Current out Winch In-/Out+ COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (COUT-CDrive Logic Control valve winch section Control Valve, Rear
Current out Blade Grab Open-/Close+ COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (COUT-DMain Hydraulics Control valve dozer grapple section Control Valve, Front (Left Step)
Current out OS Brake or H6H Winch COUT [mA] Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (COUT-F Main Hydraulics Electronic Service Brake Load Sense/Autobrake Manifold
Digital out Park Brake Off DOUT Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (DOUT-BDrive Logic Park Brake Solenoid Multifunction Manifold
Digital out Alarm DOUT Display (MD3[0]) (DOUT-A) Engine Control/J1939 / ECUDM1 ReadeAlarm Light and Master Alarm Instrument Panel
Digital out Grapple Open DOUT Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DOUT-A) Main Hydraulics Control valve grapple open/close section Control Valve, Rear
Digital out Grapple Close DOUT Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DOUT-B) Main Hydraulics Control valve grapple open/close section Control Valve, Rear
Digital out Grapple Rotate CW DOUT Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DOUT-C) Main Hydraulics Control valve grapple rotate CW Control Valve, Front (Left Step)
Digital out Grapple Rotate CCW DOUT Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DOUT-D) Main Hydraulics Control valve grapple rotate CCW Control Valve, Front (Left Step)
Digital out Back-Up Alarm DOUT Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DOUT-G) Drive Logic Back-up alarm signal Cab
Digital out Unloading Valve Off DOUT Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DOUT-H) Main Hydraulics Main pump unloading valve solenoid Load Sense/Autobrake Manifold
Digital out Front Diff Lock DOUT Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DOUT-J) Diff Lock Logic Rear Differential Lock Solenoid Multifunction Manifold
Digital out Rear Diff Lock DOUT Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DOUT-K) Fault Management Front Differential Lock Solenoid Multifunction Manifold
Digital out Winch Drag Brake DOUT Cab Module (XS2[0]) (DOUT-L) Main Hydraulics Winch Drag Brake Solenoid Multifunction Manifold
Digital out Load Sense Override DOUT Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (DOUT-A) Main Hydraulics Load Sense Override Solenoid Load Sense/Autobrake Manifold
Digital out Secondary POR DOUT Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (DOUT-C) Main Hydraulics Secondary POR Solenoid Secondary POR Valve
Digital out Starter Signal DOUT Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (DOUT-D) Fan Control Logic Starter Relay Electrical Box
Digital out Fan Decrease/Block DOUT Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (DOUT-E) Main Hydraulics Fan Decrease/Block Solenoid Multifunction Manifold
Digital out Fan Block/Increase DOUT Front Chassis Module (XA2[0]) (DOUT-F) Fan Control Logic Fan Block/Increase Solenoid Multifunction Manifold
Digital out Clutch Load DOUT Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (DOUT-AEngine Control/J1939 Clutch Load Solenoid EHS transmission Manifold
Digital out Winch Free Spool DOUT Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (DOUT-CMain Hydraulics Winch Freespool Solenoid Multifunction Manifold
Digital out Winch Brake Off DOUT Front Chassis Module 2 (XA2[1]) (DOUT-DDiff Lock Logic HC Winch application only - special mod only
6.27
CHANNELS DIGITAL OUT (DOUT)
The definition ‘channels’ is a collective name for the A PWMOUT with 100% duty cycle is a Digital Out
inputs and outputs found on the different IQAN modules. (DOUT). The outputs have a value of low or high. These
There are also channels internally in the system, to are mostly used to activate lamps, on/off valves or to pull
handle for example, MD3 messages and mathematical relays.
calculations. The channels are used to collect and/
or send data. Input and output channels are described
below.
INPUTS
VOLTAGE IN (VIN)
The input signal at these inputs comes primarily from
analog sensors, levers, and switches. These devices use
a power/signal/ground system to provide an input value
(VIN) between the high (+5V) and low (-5V) signals
generated in the modules.
DIGITAL IN (DIN)
An input that is typically on or off, such as a switch. This
input is often used to determine if an event has occurred,
such as pushing a button or engaging a relay.
FREQUENCY IN (FIN)
Typical functions are speed measure or revolution
measure. This input can count the number of signals
per second to determine the speed of a rotating or
reciprocating body.
OUTPUTS
PWM OUT (PWMOUT)
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) Out is a way of
producing an analog signal level with a digital output
that turns on and off many times a second. By varying
the ratio between on and off time (duty cycle) an output
proportional to the system voltage can be obtained.
PWMOUT maintains a constant output voltage, and the
output current is governed by output voltage and the
resistance in the circuit.
CURRENT OUT (COUT)

In this application outputs labeled COUT are actually
PWM signals programmed to operate in closed loop
mode. The close loop mode features a PWM signal
with current regulation. The programmed COUT
channel maintains a constant output current to control
proportional solenoids. The voltage is regulated to
maintain the constant current based on the programmed
input command independant of the resistance of the
circuit.
6.28
TROUBLESHOOTING
DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESSES
630C-211
Diagnostic Breakout Harness
Diagnostic breakout harnesses are available for use to

verify computer readings independently.
Refer to ELECTRICAL KIT - SERVICE AND
DIAGNOSTICS in THIS SECTION for more information
about diagnostic breakout harnesses.
6.29
EXAMPLE – MEASURE MENU:
Use the Arrow Up or Arrow Down move through the list

From the main menu page press the F2 button of measured values in a measure group.
(Measure) to access the measure menu. • Module and pin information for the highlighted
channel is shown on screen.
• The grey arrow(s) to the right at the top and/or
bottom of the screen indicate that more channels
can be viewed above or below those currently on
screen.

Press F2 to toggle between scaled value and raw value

readings.
• Scaled values show the measured value in a scaled
unit of measure (°C, %, psi etc).
• Raw value (where applicable) shows same readings
as the raw value (mV, Hz etc) in which they are
measured.
NOTE: The raw value selection is not applicable
for some channel types and the reading will be
displayed as “-” when viewing these raw values.
6.30
F1 Press F1 (Main) to return to the main menu page.

Press the back button to return to the page which
was displayed when the main menu page was
selected.
OR
Press the back button to return to the measure
menu.
Press again to return to the main menu page.
6.31
PREFERENCES MENU INFO MENU
From the main menu page press the F3 button From the main menu page press the F4 button (Info) and
(Preferences) to access the preferences menu. the access the info menu.
The following menu items can be selected for The machine ID information will be displayed on the
adjustment. screen.
• Display - Press F1 to select The following menu items can be selected:
• Date/Time - Press F2 to select
• Modules - Press F1 to select
• Language - Press F3 to select
• Logs - Press F3 to select
Press the back button to return to the main menu
Press the back button to return to the main menu
page.
page.
For more detailed information refer to COMPUTER
For more detailed information refer to COMPUTER
– MAIN MENU PAGE - PREFERENCES MENU in
– MAIN MENU PAGE - PREFERENCES MENU in
SECTION 2.
SECTION 2.
6.32
MESSAGES
A B C
73068BUNI
Instrument Panel
A Alarm Light
B Master Alarm
C Computer
The computer displays messages, activates the master

alarm and alarm light whenever a system fault occurs.
Note that the computer control system will automatically
perform a bulb test at engine start-up to ensure that
master alarm and alarm light are functioning. Refer to
STARTING ENGINE in THIS SECTION.
There are different types of Messages and Alarms, they
appear on the screen as a block message.
The types of messages are:
• CRITICAL MESSAGE - Colour RED
• ERROR MESSAGE - Colour RED
• ALERT MESSAGE - Colour YELLOW
• INFORMATION MESSAGE - Colour BLUE
Messages can be hidden or acknowledged by pressing
the F2 button (Hide or OK).
All messages that have been hidden or acknowledged
are stored in the computer.
In some instances it will be necessary to immediately
stop the machine, turn the engine OFF and repair the
problem causing the message.
Active fault messages that have been hidden can be
reviewed by pressing the F4 button. Recalled messages
will be displayed in order starting with the highest priority
first.
MESSAGES in SECTION 2.
6.33
ELECTRICAL KIT - SERVICE AND DEUTSCH 2 POLE SERVICE HARNESS (24860B)
DIAGNOSTICS This harness is used to bypass a wiring harness while
This kit includes a variety of electrical connectors, troubleshooting electrical problems. This will identify or
tools, cable, IQAN components, diagnostic break-out eliminate the wiring harness as a cause.
harnesses and service harnesses (Tigercat part number
20045B). AMP 2 POLE SERVICE HARNESS (24859B)
This harness is used to bypass a wiring harness while
SELECTED ITEMS FROM KIT 20045B: troubleshooting electrical problems. This will identify or
eliminate the wiring harness as a cause.
ADDITIONAL CABLES/ITEMS REQUIRED:

USB CABLE (TYPE A-B) (AN154)
This cable is used to connect the IQAN MD3 (via the
machine USB port) to an isolated USB hub plugged into
a PC/Laptop.
IMPORTANT!
Connecting the USB cable directly to the USB port on
a PC/Laptop is not recommended. Using an isolated
USB hub will protect your PC/Laptop USB port and
the MD3 module from ground loops which can cause
communication signal problems or damage to the PC/
Laptop and MD3 module.
630C-211
USB HUB (4 PORT, TYPE A, ISOLATED ) (AN155)
Diagnostic Breakout Harness
This isolated USB hub is used to protect your PC/Laptop
and the MD3 module from ground loops which can
DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESSDEUTSCH cause communication signal problems or damage to the
CONNECTOR - CURRENT (20036B)
PC/Laptop or module.
This harness is used to check current (amps) flow to a
component with a Deutsch connector and verify outputs.
DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESS DEUTSCH

CONNECTOR - VOLTAGE (20037B)
This harness is used to check voltage (volts) to a
component with a Deutsch connector and verify inputs.
DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESS AMP

CONNECTOR - CURRENT (20038B)
This harness is used to check current (amps) flow to a
component with a Amp connector and verify outputs.
DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESS AMP

CONNECTOR - VOLTAGE (20039B)
This harness is used to check voltage (volts) to a
component with an Amp connector and verify inputs.
ID-TAG ‘0’ (AN068)

This is a replacement address tag. Refer to ID-TAG in
this section for more detailed information.
ID-TAG ‘0T’ (AN071)

This is a replacement address/terminating tag. Refer to
ID-TAG in this section for more detailed information.
6.34
A B G
C D H
E F I
J K
SERV DIAG KIT 2
Selected Items - Electrical Kit - Service and Diagnostics

A Diagnostic Breakout Harness Deutsch Connector - Current G Deutsch 2 Pole Service Harness
B Diagnostic Breakout Harness Deutsch Connector - Voltage H Amp 2 Pole Service Harness
C Diagnostic Breakout Harness Amp Connector - Current I Twisted Pair Wire Repair Harness
D Diagnostic Breakout Harness Amp Connector - Voltage J USB Cable (Type A-B) (not included in 20045B)
E ID-Tag ‘0’ K USB Hub (4 Port, Type A, Isolated ) (not included in 20045B)
F ID-Tag ‘0T’
6.35
IQAN SOFTWARE
IQAN Active Studio 2 (used for Tier 3 and Tier 4i
programs) and IQAN Active Studio 3 (used for Tier 4f
and Tier 2 programs) software can be downloaded from
the Tigercat Dealer Website.
All software required for PC/Laptop use is included in
this download. A user’s manual in PDF format is also
included. Some of the software requires a software key
(available from Tigercat).
Contact Tigercat Customer Service for more information
about specific hardware requirements for PC/Laptop.
6.36
APPLICATION PROGRAM UPDATES DOWNLOADING APPLICATIONS FROM THE
FOR PRODUCT SERVICE BULLETINS TIGERCAT DEALER WEBSITE
Machine program updates are available on the Tigercat NOTE: The following downloading instructions apply
dealer website. The latest version of the application to the Tigercat dealer website format at the time of
can be run on any machine provided that all applicable printing. If you experience difficulty due to changes
Product Service Bulletin updates have been completed. on the website contact Tigercat Customer Service for
assistance.
1. Choose category Machine Software and Programs
in the drop down menu.
2. Enter machine model in the search box and click on
SEARCH to find the relevant programs.
3. Identify the correct program for the machine and

click on VIEW DOWNLOADS.
4. Click on DOWNLOAD and choose Save.

5. The IQAN program file has now been downloaded to
your downloads folder.
6.37
SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANrun 3 IQANrun 3 QUICK SUMMARY
(TIER 4F/TIER 2 PROGRAMS) CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH IQANrun 3
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT & INFORMATION Servicing the computer system requires a PC/Laptop,
1. PC/Laptop the use of IQANrun 3 software, a USB hub and a
USB cable. Refer to CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH
2. IQAN MD3 SERVICE KIT (40705B)
IQANrun 3 in THIS SECTION for details.
a. IQAN Active Studio software,Tigercat part
number DG047. Refer to IQAN SOFTWARE in LOGIN
THIS SECTION for dealer website download
information. Some service operations require username and
password access. Refer to LOGIN in THIS SECTION
b. USB hub (4 port, Type A, isolated ) , Tigercat
for details.
part number AN155
c. USB cable (Type A-B), Tigercat part number UPDATE
AN154
Most commonly used operation. Use to update the
3. Service Password. Contact Tigercat Service MD3 to a newer program or program revision. Does not
department to obtain passwords and additional overwrite settings. Refer to UPDATE APPLICATION in
information. THIS SECTION for details.
GET SETTINGS
Gets and saves the existing settings from the MD3.
Recommended as a backup prior to tuning or updating
the applicaton. Refer to IQANRUN 3 – UPDATE
APPLICATION – GET SETTINGS in THIS SECTION for
details.
GET CLONE
Gets and saves the existing application, settings and
machine ID from the MD3. Recommended as a backup
prior to tuning or updating the application. Refer to
IQANRUN 3 – UPDATE APPLICATION – GET CLONE
in THIS SECTION for details.
SEND SETTINGS
Sends a previously saved settings file to the MD3.
Overwrites factory default, adjustable and stored values.
Only to be used under the direction of Tigercat Customer
Service or Engineering. Refer also to important notes
on the use of settings files at the end of IQANRUN 3
– UPDATE APPLICATION – GET SETTINGS in THIS
SECTION.
SEND CLONE
Sends a previously saved clone file to the MD3.
Overwites the application, factory defaults, adjustable
values, stored values and machine ID. Only to be used
under the direction of Tigercat Customer Service or
Engineering. Refer also to important notes on the use
of settings files at the end of IQAN RUN 3 – UPDATE
APPLICATION – GET CLONE in THIS SECTION.
SYSTEM
Allows the user to access system information including
machine serial number information. Refer to IQANRUN
3 – SYSTEM in THIS SECTION for details.
6.38
LOGS
Allows the user to access to logs for service
troublshooting, maintenance documentation or clearing.
Some log operations require sufficient rights to perform.
Refer to IQANRUN 3 – LOGS in THIS SECTION for
details.
MEASURE (GRAPH)
Allows the user record, graph and measure group
channel readings during machine operation, testing or
setup procedures. These recordings can be saved or
printed. Refer to IQANRUN 3 – MEASURE (GRAPH) in
THIS SECTION for details.
ADJUST
Allows access to adjustment groups. In addition to
adjust groups normally accessible on screen additional
adjust groups that require sufficient rights restricted by
username and password login. Refer to IQANRUN 3 –
ADJUST in THIS SECTION for details.
6.39
CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH IQANrun 3
3. Connect the USB Hub into the PC/Laptop USB jack.

Then connect the USB cable into the hub.
IMPORTANT !
Connecting the USB cable directly to the USB
port on a PC/Laptop is NOT recommended. Using
an isolated USB hub will protect your PC/Laptop
USB port and the MD3 module from ground loops
which can cause communication signal problems or
damage to the PC/Laptop and MD3 module.
A Grey Indicates, Not Connected To MD3
1. Turn on PC/Laptop and launch IQANrun by double

clicking the shortcut on your desktop. IQANrun 3 is
part of the IQAN Active Studio 3.
4. Connect the other end of the USB A/B Cable to

2. Turn the machine key switch to the ‘ON’ position, so the MD3 USB connector. Exact location of the
the MD3 has power. Do not start machine. connector will vary between machine models.
6.40
A Green Indicates, Connected To MD3
5. IQANrun will now indicate that it is online. Proceed

with service operations and login if required. Refer
to LOGIN in THIS SECTION.
NOTE: If the MD3 does not contain an application
(replacement module), the application will have to be
Updated, before a user can login. Refer to UPDATE
APPLICATION and LOGIN in THIS SECTION.
6.41
LOGIN
1. Press the Login link at the top right.
A B
NOTE: After a successfully login, Windows provides

the option to save the password. If Yes is selected,
only the Username will be required at the next login.
A Not Logged In
B Login
2. A dialog box will appear, asking for a Username and 4. Note that each username and password combination
Password. Contact the Tigercat Service Department comes with access rights appropriate for that user’s
for the Username and Password. function.
If a user has insufficient rights to perform an
operation (or is not logged in when login is required)
a dialog box will pop up to inform the user that this
operation is not possible without the correct login
and password.
A B NOTE - SERVICE PASSWORDS:

Contact Tigercat Service department to obtain
passwords and additional information.
A Logged In Username
B Logout
3. Login status at the top right will change to Logged in

as Username and a Logout link replaces the Login
link.
6.42
UPDATE APPLICATION GET CLONE FILE
Before updating an application, it is recommended that a
Clone file and Settings file are taken from the MD3 and
saved.
1. Get Clone file and save (*.irc3).
A Clone file contains the application, machine ID,
the settings and logs from the MD3. It is a good
record of exactly what was in the machine before
the update.
2. Get Settings file and save (*.irs3).
Settings file contains only the settings (factory
defaults and adjustable values) from the MD3.
3. Update application (project file).
Application programs (*.ida3) are available on the
Tigercat dealer website. Refer to DOWNLOADING A B
APPLICATIONS FROM THE TIGERCAT DEALER
WEBSITE in THIS SECTION.
A Get Clone
B Yes
1. Click on the Get button on the left and select Get

Clone.
A dialog box will appear prompting the user to select
whether or not to get the logs with the clone.
Click on Yes to continue.
2. IQANrun will now get a clone. This might take

several minutes. When complete click OK.
6.43
GET SETTINGS FILE
3. A dialog box will appear prompting selection of a

suitable folder and file name to save the Clone file A B
(.irc3).
The file name by default is the machine ID (serial A Get Clone
number). It is recommended to use the serial B Yes
number followed by the date for the file name.
4. Click on the Get button on the left and select Get
Press Save to continue. Settings.
IMPORTANT ! 5. A dialog box will appear prompting selection of a
A Clone file should rarely be used. It should only be suitable folder and file name to save the Settings file
used if updating the application and/or settings file is (.irs3).
not successful in returning a machine’s performance The file name by default is the machine ID. It is
to a previously acceptable state. A Clone file may be recommended to use the serial number followed by
date sensitive and should only be used on the day the date for the file name.
that they were taken.
Press Save to continue.
A Clone should NOT be used on a machine different
than that which it was taken from, as machine IMPORTANT !
specific configurations may differ and cause the A Settings file should rarely be used. It should only
machine to function improperly. be used if manually adjusting machine settings is not
successful in returning a machine’s performance to
a previously acceptable state. Settings files may be
date sensitive and should only be used on the day
that they were taken.
If a Settings file is used on a machine different than
that which it was taken from, all adjustments must
be reviewed in IQANrun to ensure machine specific
parameters (such as options, pump/motor currents,
hour counters) are correct. If this is not done the
machine may function improperly.
6.44
UPDATE APPLICATION TO MD3
Ensure that a Clone file and Settings file are saved as a
backup prior to Update. Refer to GET CLONE FILE and
GET SETTINGS FILE in THIS SECTION.
10. IQANrun 3 will provide warning to ensure the

machine is not moving and that the engine is shut
down (keyswitch in the run position to power the
A
MD3, engine not running).
Press OK to continue, if the machine is inactive.
A Update
6. Click on the Update link. 11. IQANrun will now send the application to the MD3.
7. A dialog box will appear, prompting the selection of
an MD3 application file (.ida3).
Select the appropriate application file (project file) for
the machine.
8. Click on Open to continue.
9. IQANrun 3 will request confirmation that the

application being loaded is correct.
Click on Yes to continue, if the application is correct.
6.45
12. Once the application (project file) is loaded

successfully, the dialog box will indicate the
application was successfully sent.
The MD3 will restart and show the main screen of

the application.
The Update is now complete.
6.46
SYSTEM LOGS
1. Click on the System button on the left. 1. Click on the Logs button on the left.
B C
A System A Logs
B Clear Log
2. System info is on the right including the application C Backup Log
program name and the Machine ID (Serial Number).
2. Logs available to view and/or clear will be shown on
3. The Machine ID (Serial Number) is factory set. the right.
However, in the event that the MD3 is replaced, this
information would need to be configured for the new NOTE: User name and password access level
module. rights determine whether the logs can be viewed
and/or cleared. Some log items are restricted to
Updating Machine ID information requires a Login
higher level users only.
with sufficient rights.
3. Double click on the log you wish to view or click on
Click on the Machine Id button. Enter the correct a log and click on Select to view the records in the
Serial Number. Click Set. log. Click on Done to return to the logs screen.
If the update is successful a dialog box will pop up. 4. Click on Add Record to add a comment to the
Click OK to acknowlege the update. system log. For example to record a filter change or
other service event in the log. Entries are restricted
A restart of the module will be requested. Follow to 250 characters.
the on screen instructions to restart the module 5. Click on Clear Log to clear log entries for the
before continuing. If further service work is being selected log. Note that this function is rights
performed you will need to login to IQANrun 3 again. restricted.
6. Click on Backup Log to save as a *.irf3 file.
This file cannot be viewed without access to the
corresponding application (project) file.
7. Click on File then Print to print the log being viewed.
8. Click on File then Save to save the log file as *.irl3
file. This file can be viewed without access to the
corresponding application (project) file.
6.47
MEASURE/ GRAPH
1. Click on the Measure button on the left.
A B C
B
E F G
A Start
B Pause
C Stop
A Stop D Check Box
B Expand Measure Group E Comment
C Measure F Zoom Out
G Done
2. All of the measure groups available will be shown on
the right. 7. Click on the red square to stop measuring and
Each group can be expanded to view the channels access save function. Click on Save to save the
in the groups. measure data as a *.irm3 file.
8. Click on the red square to stop measuring and
3. To graph the channels in a measure group, double access print function. Click print to print the graph
click the measure group and the graph will appear. and data recorded.
Individual channels can be shown or hidden from the
graph by clicking on the check box to the left of each 9. Click on done to to return to the Measure groups.
channel. IQANrun 3 will ask if the graph should be saved.
4. Click on the red square to stop measuring. Click on
the green arrow to start measuring. Click on pause
to pause the graph illustration while continuing to
measure.
5. Click on Comment to add comments to the measure
file at any time. The measure file data must be
saved (*.irm3) to retain comments for later viewing.
6. Click on the red square to stop measuring and
access the zoom function. Select an area of the
graph to zoom in an view in more detail. Click on
Zoom Out to return to the full graph view.
Click on Yes to save and return to measure groups,
No to return to measure groups without saving and
Cancel to remain on the graph display.
6.48
ADJUST
1. Click on the Adjust button on the left.
Example Adjust Screen Without Login Access
A Lock Symbol Indicates Pin Required

B Adjust
2. The adjust groups available will be shown on the

right.
3. Double click an adjust group to adjust channels in
that group.
Note that a lock symbol to the left of an adjust group
indicates that a PIN/password is required to access
that group. Contact Tigercat Service department to
obtain password information.
Note also that some adjust groups are accessible
through the MD3 menus unrestricted during normal
operation.
Other service related or owner/supervisor use
related adjust groups are restricted by passwords
on screen or available only through IQANrun 3 with
username and password restrictions.
Some adjust groups are only visible on screen for
users with the appropriate username and password
login rights.
Example Adjust Screen With Login Access
6.49
GAUGES AND ALARMS
This machine is monitored for proper operation by
sensors located in the hydraulic system and on the
engine. These sensors are connected to the IQAN
control system, which displays this information on the
MD3 controller display in the cab and sounds all alarms.
For operation of the switches and sensors shown in
the following diagram, refer to SECTION 2 of the
OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
A
The operator may sound the warning horn at any time.
A back-up alarm will also sound when the machine
is travelling in reverse based on the position of the
operator’s seat.
600011
Hydraulic Filter Pressure Sensor (if equipped)

A Hydraulic Return Filter Pressure
C
B
630E-203
Transmission Bypass Switch (if equipped)

Right Side Engine Compartment
A Transmission Filter Bypass Switch
B Transmission Filter
C Charge Filter
6.50
A C
W E
B
H
F G I
V J
K L M
N
R S
Q P O
600002
Switch and Sensor Locations - Front Chassis

A Batteries M Coolant Level Sensor
B Control Valve, Front (Grapple Rotate, Steer, Dozer) N Ground Strap
C Hydraulic Oil Level Switch O Surge Tank
D Charge Pressure Bypass Switch P Hydraulic Oil Fill Pump Switch
E Hydraulic Oil Temperature Sensor Q Hydraulic Oil Fill Pump
F Multifunction Manifold R Right Motor Speed Sensor
G Parking Brake Pressure Sensor S Left Motor Speed Sensor (EHS Transmission only)
H Main Pump Pressure Sensor T Steer Proximity Sensor (Joystick Steer only)
I Pilot/Manifold Pressure Sensor U Transmission Clutch Manifold
J Load Sense/Autobrake Manifold V Transmission Clutch Pressure Sensor
K Electrical Box W Load Sense Pressure Sensor
L Battery Disconnect Switch
6.51
A B C D E
600003
Switch and Sensor Locations - Front Chassis

A Service Brake Pressure Switch D Starter
B Drive Pressure Sensor Forward E Alternator
C Drive Pressure Sensor Reverse
630E-202
Engine Fuel Filter Switch (if equipped)

Left Side of Engine
A Engine Fuel Filter Switch
6.52
A B
600004
Switch and Sensor Locations - Rear Chassis

A Fuel Level Sender (Standard Fuel Tank) C Control Valve, Rear (Arch, Boom, Winch)
B Fuel Level Sensor (High Capacity Fuel Tank)
6.53
600005
Switch and Sensor Locations - Cab

A Left Door Switch E Ground Strap
B XS2 Cab Module F XA2 -A0 Front Chassis Module
C Right Door Switch G XA2 -A1 Front Chassis Module 2
D Horn H XC21-A3 Seat Module (mounted on back of seat)
6.54
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
The following pages (or CD) of electrical schematic diagrams represent the complete electrical system for this
machine. Use sheet 1 (shown below and also enlarged on later pages) as a guide or flow chart to help trace circuits
and troubleshoot the electrical system. Circuit wires are numbered, and each wire from the source component to its
connecting component should retain the same number. See note for wire number exceptions.
NOTE: There are some exceptions to this wire numbering system. Where a wire branches off or a wire from a special
prewired component connects to a machine harness, two numbers may be used on the same circuit wire.
A B ▲ C D E F ▲ G H
A B C D E F G H
1 1
I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X
2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3
2 2 2 2
4 4
3 3 3 3
◄ 5 Tigercat Industries Inc. 5 2

4 4 4 4
A B C D E F G H
5 Tigercat Industries Inc. 5 5 Tigercat Industries Inc. 5
2 2
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X
6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9
10 Tigercat Industries Inc.10 10 Tigercat Industries Inc.10 10 Tigercat Industries Inc.10
3 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X 3
11 11 11 11 11 11 #
12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14
4 4
15 Tigercat Industries Inc.15 15 Tigercat Industries Inc.15 15 Tigercat Industries Inc.15
◄ 2
16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18
5 5
19 19 19 19 19 19
20 Tigercat Industries Inc. 20 20 Tigercat Industries Inc. 20 20 Tigercat Industries Inc. 20
A B 4
C D E F 4
G H
Electrical Schematic Flow Chart - Example
Tigercat wire colour code chart applicable to all products manufactured by Tigercat Industries Inc.
Colour Function Example
Red Power (Fused and Unfused)
Black Ground
White Engine Control (Fuel Shut-off, Start Aid)
Blue Propulsion Control (Transmission/Reverser Solenoids)
Purple Monitor, Electrical and Mechanical Systems (Air Cleaner, Alternator, Wheel Speed, Engine
Speed)
Tan Electrical and Electromechanical Control (Park Brake, Alternator Excitation)
(Power Door Motor, Backup Alarm)
Yellow Monitors (Flow, Pressure, Temperature, Level)
Grey Standard Monitor System (Logic Module to Monitor)
Brown Lights
Green Electro-hydraulic Control (Pilot Solenoids)
Orange Accessories (Horn, A/C, Heater)
6.55
6.56
A B ▲ C D E F ▲ G H
A B C D E F G H
1 1
2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3
2 2 2 2
4 4
3 3 3 3
5 Tigercat Industries Inc. 5

◄ 2
4 4 4 4
A B C D E F G H
5 Tigercat Industries Inc. 5 5 Tigercat Industries Inc. 5
2 2
6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9

3 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X 3
11 11 11 11 11 11 #
12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14
4 4
◄ 2
16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18
5 5
19 19 19 19 19 19

4 4
A B C D E F G H
I J ▲ K L M N ▲ O P
R
1 1
1 3
2 2
USB
3 3
4 4
1 3
5 5
5 5
I J K L M N O P
Q R ▲ S T U V ▲ W X
ROTATE CW
ROTATE CCW
GRAPPLE OPEN
1 GRAPPLE CLOSE 1
CONSTANT PRESSURE
DIFF LOCKS
TRIGGER, THROTTLE
2 ►
2 2
3 3
SEAT ROTATE
TRAVEL DIRECTION
LEFT SLIDER
(3-POSITION HOLD)
GROUND SPEED CONTROL

RIGHT SLIDER
3-POS, NEUTRAL RETURN)
4 4
DRIVE TRIGGER
2 ►
NOT USED
5 5
6 6
Q R S T U V W X
A B 1 C D E F 1 G H
6 6
◄ 5
7 W
7
W
W
8
W
8 W
W
W
W
9 9
W
◄ 5
W
W
10 10
7 7
A B C D E F G H
I J 2 K L M N 2 O P
6 6
4 6
7 7
8
8
9 9
4 6
10 10
8 8
I J K L M N O P
Q R 3 S T U V 3 W X
6 6
5 ►
7 7
8 8
9 9
5 ►
10 10
9 9
Q R S T U V W X
A B 4 C D E F 4 G H
11 11
◄ 8
W W
W
12 12
13 13
A
A
B
14 14
◄ 8
15 15
10 10
A B C D E F G H
I J 5 K L M N 5 O P
B A
B A
11 B A
11
7 9
12 12
13 13
14 14
7 9
15 15
11 11
I J K L M N O P
Q R 6 S T U V 6 W X
11 6
8 ►
12 7
13 8
14 9
8 ►
15 10
12 12
Q R S T U V W X
A B 7 C D E F 7 G H
16 16
◄ 11
T
17 17
18 18
19 19
◄ 11
20 20
▼ ▼
A B C D E F G H
I J 8 K L M N 8 O P
P
16 16
10 12
17 17
18 18
19 19
+ -
B+ B-
- +
10 12
20 + - 20
▼ ▼
I J K L M N O P
Q R 9 S T U V 9 W X
16 16
11 ►
17 17
18 18
19 19
11 ►
20 20
▼ ▼
Q R S T U V W X
ENGINE START AND STOP................................................................................................................................7
Tigercat 632E/635G
SECTION 7– ENGINE START AND STOP
CONTENTS – SECTION 7 ISSUE 1.1, OCTOBER 2017
ENGINE FLEX DRIVE COUPLER INSTALLATION...................................................................................................... 7.8

M
MAIN PUMP UNLOADING VALVE................................................................................................................................ 7.3

S
START CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................................................. 7.2

START CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS................................................................................................................7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7
STARTING ENGINE................................................................................................................................SEE SECTION 2
STARTING IN COLD WEATHER............................................................................................................SEE SECTION 2
START MOTOR AND SOLENOID................................................................................................................................. 7.2
STOPPING ENGINE...............................................................................................................................SEE SECTION 2
Engine Start and Stop Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder
ENGINE START CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
For detailed engine information refer to engine With the battery disconnect switch ON, current is
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL. supplied to the start solenoid contact, the start relay
contact, the positive connection on the alternator and
For engine starting and stopping procedures refer the BATTERY (BAT) contact of the key switch (ignition
to engine starting and stopping in section 2 of the switch). Current is also supplied to the accessory fuses,
OPERATOR’S MANUAL. the constant power fuses and the engine DCU and ECU
The parking brake must be in the ON position to allow power supplies.
the engine to start. When the battery disconnect switch is ON, the
The engine starting circuit is controlled by the parking parking brake is ON and the key switch is turned to
brake switch on the instrument panel which prevents the RUN position, current is supplied to the accessory
the engine from being started when the parking brake is power relay contact (wire 58D). The accessory power
OFF. relay closes and current is supplied to the parking brake
off relay contact (wire P159A) and the engine ECU (wire
The engine is started by turn the ignition switch to the 53). When the parking brake is ON current is supplied
RUN position and observing the computer display. Wait to the park brake on relay (wire 159E). The parking
for WAIT TO START warning on computer display to turn brake on relay closes. When the parking brake on relay
off. Always wait until WAIT TO START warning turns off is closed and the parking brake off relay is open current
before proceeding. Turn ignition switch to the START is supplied to the start relay contact (wire P147) and to
position to crank engine. When engine starts, release the main pump unloading valve (wire 135B) via the open
ignition key to RUN position. unloading valve off relay. The main pump unloading
valve energizes to unload the main pump (standby
If the engine stalls during operation of the vehicle, the
pressure only will be available while the parking brake is
key must be turned to the OFF position to reset the
ON).
ignition switch before the engine can be restarted.
Refer to simplified START CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS in
THIS SECTION. Refer also to machine ELECTRICAL
SCHEMATICS in SECTION 6.
A B C D
A
54827B
620E-132
Control Panel Start Motor and Solenoid
A Start A Start Motor
B Run B Solenoid
C Off
D Parking Brake Switch When the battery disconnect switch is ON, the
parking brake is ON and the key switch is turned to
the START position, current is supplied to the parking
brake off relay contact (wire P159A) and the start relay
(wire 189A). When the parking brake is ON current is
supplied to the park brake on relay (wire 159E). The
parking brake on relay closes. When the parking brake
on relay is closed and the parking brake off relay is open
current is supplied to the start relay contact (wire P147)
and to the main pump unloading valve (wire 135B) via
the open unloading valve off relay. The main pump
7.2
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Engine Start and Stop
unloading valve energizes to unload the main pump MAIN PUMP UNLOADING VALVE
(standby pressure only will be available while the parking
brake is ON). A B
The start relay closes and supplies current, via the

starter lockout relay, to the start solenoid. The start
solenoid closes and supplies current to the starter to turn D
the engine. Fuel supply is controlled by the engine ECU.
The engine is equipped with a STARTER LOCKOUT
feature that prevents the starter motor from being
engaged when the engine is running. C
When the battery disconnect switch is ON, the

parking brake is OFF, cab doors are closed and and
the key switch is turned to the RUN position, current
is supplied to the accessory power relay contact (wire
58D). The accessory power relay closes and current
is supplied to the parking brake off relay contact (wire
E
P159A) and the engine ECU (wire 53). When the parking
brake is OFF current is sent to the parking brake off
relay contact (wire 159A) current passes through the
closed door switches to latch the parking brake off relay
closed (wire 159B), an input signal DIN Park Brake 600014
Cmd) (wire 159C) is sent to the computer control system Main Pump Unloading Valve
which sends an output signal (DOUT Park Brake) (wire A Differential Pressure Adjustment (Margin Pressure, ▲P)
159F) which energizes the parking brake valve. When B Main Pump Pressure Adjustment
C Main Pump Control
the parking brake off relay closes current to the main
D Loadsense/Autobrake Manifold
pump unloading valve is blocked. The main pump
E Main Pump Unloading Valve Solenoid SV1
unloading valve de-energizes to load the main pump (full
pump pressure will be available while the parking brake To relieve the load on the engine during start-up, the
is OFF). Note that the computer control system has main pump is destroked to differential pressure by the
interlocks in place to prevent the machine from being main pump unloading valve. The main pump unloading
driven with the doors open or the parking brake ON. valve is located in the loadsense/autobrake manifold.
The main pump unloading valve solenoid is energized
through wire 135B when the parking brake is placed
in the ON position. The main pump unloading valve
improves cold weather starting ability. The parking brake
must be ON to activate the main pump unloading valve.
When the parking brake is ON and the main pump
unloading valve is energized the differential pressure
can be read using the MAIN test port.
When the parking brake is OFF, the main pump
unloading valve is de-energized and the main pump is
fully loaded the main pump pressure can be read using
the MAIN test port.
NOTE: In some service procedure setup modes the
computer control system can also signal (DOUT
Unloading Valve off Relay) (wire 135) to close the
unloading valve off relay, the main pump unloading
valve is de-energized and the main pump is fully loaded.
For more information on the setup mode settings refer
to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU - SERVICE
SETTINGS – PROGRAM MODE in SECTION 6 of THIS
MANUAL.
7.3
600015
Start Circuit -at Rest
7.4
600015A
Start Circuit
A Battery Disconnect ON
B Parking Brake ON
C Ignition Key - RUN Position
7.5
600015B
Start Circuit
B Parking Brake ON
C Ignition Key - START Position
7.6
600015C
Start Circuit
B Parking Brake OFF
C Ignition Key - RUN Position
D Cab Doors - CLOSED
7.7
ENGINE FLEX DRIVE COUPLER PUMP MOUNTING DRIVE
INSTALLATION PLATE THICKNESS PUMP
When installing a new flex drive coupling (hub and/or mm in cc
element) care must be taken to install the element in 21 ⁄16
13
165
the correct orientation. Incorrect installation will result in
interference and/or premature failure of components. 27 1 ⁄16
1
210
Shallow side of coupler element faces the drive pump for

165cc drive pumps.
Deep side of coupler element faces the drive pump for
A
210 cc drive pumps. B
GUIDELINE FOR INSTALLING AN ENGINE

COUPLER (ELEMENT AND/OR HUB)
C
PROCEDURE:
1. Park the machine on level ground. Install the G
articulation lock bar. Lower the grapple and dozer
blade to rest firmly on the ground.
D
B
E
F
620E-227
Coupler Layout for Pump Mounting

Plate Thickness of 21 mm (13⁄16 in)
A Drive Pump Mounting Plate 21 mm (13⁄16 in) Flange
B Engine Flywheel
C Engine Flywheel Housing
D Hub Snap Ring Butts Against Drive Pump Shaft
E Coupler Hub
F Shallow Side Of Element Faces Drive Pump
G Drive Pump
7. For 165cc Drive pump (Pump Mounting Plate flange

thickness equal to 21 mm (13⁄16 in) refer to illustration
above for the element orientation and hub location.
Shallow side of coupler element faces the drive
pump for 165cc drive pumps.
'A'
620E-226
Pump Mounting Plate Flange Thickness

A Dimension 'A'
B Pump Mounting Plate Thickness
6. Determine the thickness of the Pump Mounting Plate

flange.
7.8
B
'A'
A
C
C
D
G
D
G
E 620E-229
Hub Location Check

F
620E-228
Coupler Layout for Pump Mounting

Plate Thickness of 27 mm (1 1⁄16 in)
A Drive Pump Mounting Plate 27 mm (11⁄16 in) Flange E
B Engine Flywheel
C Engine Flywheel Housingl
D Hub Snap Ring Butts Against Drive Pump Shaft
E Coupler Hub
F Deep Side Of Element Faces Drive Pump
G Drive Pump
8. For 210cc Drive pump (Pump Mounting Plate flange

thickness equal to 27 mm (1 1/16 in) refer illustration
above for the Element orientation.
'B'
Deep side of coupler element faces the drive pump
for 210 cc drive pumps.
9. Verify the correct flex drive coupler installation
orientation by determining dimension ‘A’ and
dimension ‘B’. Dimension ‘A’ should be equal
to dimension ‘B’ with a tolerance of +0/-1.5mm G
(+0/-1⁄16 in).
F H
10. Check hub location. Determine dimension ‘A’ by
620E-230
measuring the distance between the Pump Mounting
Plate Flange (surface ‘C’) and the outside of the Hub Element Location Check
Teeth (surface ‘D’) as shown. A Dimension 'A'
B Dimension 'B'
11. Check element location. Determine dimension ‘B’ by C Surface 'C'
measuring from the inside of the Element (surface D Surface 'D'
‘E’) to the Pump Mounting Plate surface (surface ‘F’) E Surface 'E' (inside face of element)
on the engine flywheel housing as shown. F Surface 'F'
12. Torque all fasteners to specifications refer to G Straight Edge
TORQUE CHART in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL H Coupler Element
for pump mounting torque specifications. I Coupler Hub
7.9
7.10
DRIVE..................................................................................................................................................................8

SECTION 8– DRIVE
CONTENTS – SECTION 8 ISSUE 1.1, DECEMBER 2017
AXLES
AXLE LEVEL CHECK, FILL AND DRAIN LOCATIONS...................................................................... SEE SECTION 3
AXLE PINION SEAL GREASE FITTING.............................................................................................. SEE SECTION 3
LIMITED SLIP ADDITIVES...................................................................................................................SEE SECTION 3
LUBRICATION.....................................................................................................................................SEE SECTION 3
OSCILLATION SHIM CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT (FRONT AXLE)..................................................................... 8.110
REAR (BOGIE) AXLE
BOGIE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION................................................................................................................... 8.112
SLEW BEARING LUBRICATION......................................................................................................SEE SECTION 3
AXLES........................................................................ SEE ALSO TIGERCAT AXLES SERVICE AND REPAIR MANUAL
DIFFERENTIALS....................................SEE ALSO TIGERCAT DIFFERENTIALS SERVICE AND REPAIR MANUAL
PLANETARIES........................................... SEE ALSO TIGERCAT PLANETARIES SERVICE AND REPAIR MANUAL
C
CAB CONTROLS
DIRECTION SELECTION SWITCH
ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING........................................................................................................ 8.12
LEFT JOYSTICK (ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING)
DIRECTION SELECTION SWITCH...................................................................................................................... 8.12
MAXIMUM SPEED CONTROL............................................................................................................................. 8.13
ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING........................................................................................................ 8.13
CHARGE PUMP (DRIVE)............................................................................................................................................. 8.6
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................................................. 8.3
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
JOYSTICK STEERING
EHS TRANSMISSION.......................................................................................................................................... 8.23
SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION............................................................................................... 8.17
STEERING WHEEL
EHS TRANSMISSION.......................................................................................................................................... 8.22
SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION............................................................................................... 8.18
CIRCUIT HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
EHS TRANSMISSION WITH FORCED LUBRICATION.......................................................................................... 8.25
SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION.................................................................................................. 8.19
D
DRIVE MOTOR............................................................................................................................................................. 8.7

DRIVE MOTOR SPEED VERIFICATION.................................................................................................................... 8.26
DRIVE PUMP................................................................................................................................................................ 8.4
DRIVE PUMP PRESSURE CHECKS......................................................................................................................... 8.26
H
HYDRAULIC OIL HEATING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................................. 8.105

HYDROSTATIC DRIVE SYSTEM................................................................................................................................. 8.3
HYDROSTATIC SETUP PROCEDURE
EHS TRANSMISSION MACHINES.......................................................................................................................... 8.63
HYDROSTATIC SETUP SHEET........................................................................................................................... 8.64
SETUP PREPARATION........................................................................................................................................ 8.65
DRIVE PUMP CHARGE PRESSURE.................................................................................................................. 8.69
DRIVE PUMP HYDRAULIC NEUTRAL................................................................................................................ 8.70
DRIVE PUMP BEGINNING OF DISPLACEMENT............................................................................................... 8.72
Drive Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder
DRIVE PUMP MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT........................................................................................................ 8.74
DRIVE PUMP HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF........................................................................................................... 8.76
MOTOR BEGINNING OF DISPLACEMENT CONTROL PRESSURE................................................................. 8.78
METHOD A (RECOMMENDED)........................................................................................................................ 8.78
METHOD B (ALTERNATE METHOD/CHECK).................................................................................................. 8.84
MOTOR MAXIMUM SPEED/MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT................................................................................... 8.87
RIGHT DRIVE MOTOR MAX CURRENT............................................................................................................. 8.90
DRIVE PUMP MAX CURRENT............................................................................................................................ 8.93
LEFT DRIVE MOTOR MAX CURRENT................................................................................................................ 8.96
CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND PARKING BRAKE RELEASE TEST................................................................. 8.102
CLUTCH PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE PERFORMANCE TEST.............................................................. 8.102
CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT & PARK BRAKE RELEASE TIME......................................................................... 8.104
SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION MACHINES.............................................................................. 8.29
HYDROSTATIC SETUP SHEET........................................................................................................................... 8.30
SETUP PREPARATION........................................................................................................................................ 8.31
DRIVE PUMP CHARGE PRESSURE.................................................................................................................. 8.35
DRIVE PUMP HYDRAULIC NEUTRAL................................................................................................................ 8.36
DRIVE PUMP BEGINNING OF DISPLACEMENT................................................................................................ 8.38
DRIVE PUMP MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT........................................................................................................ 8.40
DRIVE PUMP HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF........................................................................................................... 8.42
MOTOR BEGINNING OF DISPLACEMENT CONTROL PRESSURE................................................................. 8.44
METHOD A (RECOMMENDED)........................................................................................................................ 8.44
METHOD B (ALTERNATE METHOD/CHECK).................................................................................................. 8.50
MOTOR MAXIMUM SPEED/MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT................................................................................... 8.53
DRIVE MOTOR MAX CURRENT......................................................................................................................... 8.56
DRIVE PUMP MAX CURRENT............................................................................................................................ 8.59
HYDROSTATIC SETUP SHEET
EHS TRANSMISSION.............................................................................................................................................. 8.64
SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION.................................................................................................. 8.30
M

STATIONARY SEAT & STEERING WHEEL............................................................................................................ 8.15
T
TRANSMISSION
EHS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 8.20
EHS TRANSMISSION CLUTCH MANIFOLD.......................................................................................................... 8.21
SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL.............................................................................................................................. 8.16
TRANSMISSION COOLER......................................................................................................................................... 8.21
TRANSMISSION PUMP................................................................................................................................................ 8.6
ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING............................................................................................................ 8.10
STATIONARY SEAT & STEERING WHEEL............................................................................................................ 8.15
W
WHEEL INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................ 8.114
8.2
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Drive
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE SYSTEM A hydraulic system is termed closed loop when the
hydraulic oil returning from the motor is fed straight back
The primary components of the hydrostatic drive to the pump without first returning to tank. When the
system are a hydraulic pump and two hydraulic motors machine is travelling forward, one side of the closed loop
connected together by four hydrostatic hoses. The pump is a high pressure supply while the other side is a low
converts the mechanical power of the diesel engine into pressure return. The supply and return will alternate from
hydraulic power. This high pressure flow of hydraulic oil side to side of the closed loop as the direction of travel
is then transmitted to the hydraulic motors through the of the vehicle goes from forward to reverse.
first two connecting hoses. The motors then reconvert
the hydraulic power back into the mechanical power Hydrostatic drives are used because they offer
used to propel the machine. Low pressure hydraulic oil enhanced operator control of vehicle speed and tractive
flow then returns from the motors to the pump through effort. As well hydrostatic drive systems give flexibility in
the other two connecting hoses thereby completing a the positioning of components within the machine when
continuous closed loop hydraulic circuit. compared to mechanical drive systems.
D
B
C
A
630C-12
Continuous Closed Loop Hydraulic Circuit

A From Diesel Engine C Bent Axis Piston Motor
B Swashplate, Axial Piston Pump D To Vehicle Drive
8.3
DRIVE PUMP charge pump oil is introduced into the closed loop
hydrostatic circuit and the swashplate control system.
A Should this pressure filter become clogged with debris,
charge pump flow is diverted to tank thus preventing the
entry of unfiltered charge pump oil.
B
The drive pump is equipped with an electro-hydraulic
control which consists of two proportional solenoid
C
valves (Mz and My), an actuation piston and a pilot
valve.
When no current is flowing to either of the proportional
solenoid valves the pump will remain in the neutral
position with the swashplate at an angle of zero and no
flow.
When a travel foot pedal is operated a VOLTAGE IN
(Drive Pedal Fwd or Drive Pedal Rev) signal is sent to
635D-42A the computer control system. The computer control
system generates a corresponding signal (CURRENT
Drive Pump
A Electro-Hydraulic Control
OUT - Drive Pump) and sends it to one of the drive
B Swashplate pump proportional solenoid valves (forward or reverse).
C Drive Shaft A magnetic force is generated at the solenoid coil, in
the proportional valve a pressure corresponding to the
The hydrostatic drive pump is mounted to the engine solenoid signal is sent to the actuation piston. The
flywheel via a torsional drive shaft coupling and has a actuation piston shifts accordingly. Fluid on the opposite
through shaft to the main pump and two section gear side is discharged to tank via the proportional valve.
pumps. The pilot valve is moved and supplies charge pressure
to the control piston connected to the swashplate.
The drive pump is a variable displacement, swashplate, The opposite control piston is relieved to tank. The
axial piston type pump. This pump is made variable by swashplate tilts in the corresponding direction. If the
slipping the pump pistons against a tiltable swashplate signal at the solenoid is lessened, the proportional valve
cradle. The volume and direction of oil flow from reduces pressure to the actuation piston and the swash
the piston pump is determined by the angle of this plate angle becomes smaller.
swashplate. When the swashplate is stroked to a
maximum displacement angle, the piston pump will The drive footpedal control functions only when the
produce maximum flow in one direction in the closed parking brake is OFF. Drive prevent logic in the
loop. As the swashplate is de-stroked the flow smoothly computer control system uses the parking brake signal
decreases until there is no flow at an angle of zero (0°). (DIGITAL IN - Park Brake Sensor) to prevent driving the
Continuing to angle the swashplate past this neutral machine when the parking brake is ON.
position steplessly reverses the direction of flow from the
piston pump. The hydrostatic piston pump is equipped with two
combined high pressure relief/charge check (make-
A separate charge pump (part of the gear pump up) valves to protect the closed loop hydrostatic drive
assembly) provides charge oil via the charge filter for the components from excessive pressure. These relief
drive pump controls. Charge oil continuously introduces valves are cartridge style, factory set and nonadjustable.
oil from the hydraulic tank back into the hydrostatic
drive system. The charge relief valve (in the drive pump) In addition forward and reverse pressure sensors
maintains a constant charge pressure for use by the connected to the drive pump provide feedback signals
swashplate control system. In addition, the charge pump (VOLTAGE IN - Drive Pressure Rev and VOLTAGE IN -
oil is used as make up oil to the low pressure side of the Drive Pressure Fwd) to the computer control system for
closed loop to replenish losses due to internal leakage in use in overall control of the drive circuit and protection of
the hydrostatic pump and motor. This same flow acts as the system from pressure spikes during operation.
a cooling fluid for the piston pump and motors to ensure
peak hydrostatic drive performance and long service life.
Excess charge pump oil is relieved by the charge pump
relief valve back into the case of the piston pump. The
charge pump pressure filter ensures that only clean
8.4
DRIVE PUMP CHARACTERISTICS
• Start of Control: 0 cc / 225 mA / 58 psi
Non-Adjustable (0 cc/ 225 mA /4 bar)
• End of Control : 210cc / 555 mA / 232 psi Non-
Adjustable (210cc / 555 mA /16 bar)
• High Pressure Relief: 6090 psi (420 bar) differential
(Non-Adjustable)
• Charge Pressure Relief: 350-375 psi (24-26 bar)
(Non-Adjustable)
• Coil Resistance : 26.5 ohms
635D-42
Drive Pump Electrical Schematic Drive Pump Characteristics

250
200
Displacement cc
150
100
50
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
(41) (93) (144) (196) (248)
Control Current mA
Control Pressure (psi)
D E F
C
G
B H
A
I
600038
Drive Pump Schematic

A From Charge Pump Via Charge Filter F To Motors B Reverse (Counterclockwise)
B Charge Relief G Swash Plate
C High Pressure Reliefs H Pilot Valve
D To Suction Strainer I Actuation Piston
E To Motors A Forward (Clockwise) J Proportional Solenoid Valves
8.5
CHARGE PUMP (DRIVE)
B
The drive charge pump is a fixed displacement gear
pump.
C D
On machines with the single speed mechanical
transmission not equipped with forced lubrication it
is part of a two section gear pump which includes
the cooling and drive charge pumps (not shown in
illustrations).
transmission equipped with forced lubrication it is part
of a multi section gear pump which includes the cooling,
drive charge and transmission pumps.
On machines with an EHS transmission it is part of a
multi section gear pump which includes the cooling, GEAR1 A
drive charge and transmission pumps. Typical Gear Pump
A Inlet
This pump stack is driven off the power take off of the
B Outlet
main pump.
C Driven (Idler) Gear
The operation of a typical external gear pump (so called D Drive Gear
because the gear teeth are on the external surface of the
hub) is shown in Figure gear1.
A gear pump carries oil from the inlet to the outlet in
A B C
the spaces between gear teeth. The pumping chamber
is formed by the gears, the pump housing, and thrust
plates. One of the two gears, called the drive gear, will
be connected to the drive shaft. The other idler gear is
driven by the drive gear.
TRANSMISSION PUMP (IF EQUIPPED)

The transmission pump is a fixed displacement gear
600020
pump.
Multi Section Gear Pump
On machines with a single speed mechanical A Transmission Pump
transmission equipped with forced lubrication it is part B Cooling Pump
of a multi section gear pump which includes the cooling, C Drive Charge Pump
multi section gear pump which includes the cooling,
drive charge and transmission pumps..
This pump stack is driven off the power take off of the
main pump.
The operation of a typical external gear pump (so called
driven by the drive gear.
8.6
DRIVE MOTOR a displacement control spool.
Two motors are used to drive the skidder. They are The displacement control spool is operated by an
mounted to the input side of the transmission. electrical control with proportional solenoid. The control
• EHS transmission: left motor 200cc, right motor is proportional to the applied electrical signal (CURRENT
160cc OUT - Drive Motor) from the computer control system.
When sufficient pressure from the proportional electrical
• Single speed mechanical transmission: left and right
motors 160 cc control is directed to the spool, it shifts against a spring
and directs oil past the POR valve to the displacement
The motor is an axial piston, variable displacement type. control cylinder thus decreasing the displacement of the
It forms a closed loop circuit with the pump. motor. Removal of the pressure signal from proportional
High pressure oil from the pump enters the motor via electrical control will cause the displacement control
port 'A' or port 'B', depending on the direction of travel. spool to return to the neutral position, shutting off the
The oil is directed to the back of a set of pistons in the pressure to the displacement control cylinder thus
motor's rotary group. The pistons push against the back increasing displacement to maximum.
of the drive shaft at an angle causing it to rotate. For this application the POR valve is set at a high
The angle of the pistons relative to the drive shaft pressure so that it does not interfere with the operation
determine the speed of the motor and the available of the computer control system. The motor POR must
torque. Reducing the angle provides increased speed be correctly set for the system to function properly.
with less torque. Increasing the angle will reduce the Refer to DRIVE MOTOR PRESSURE SETTINGS for in
speed and provide more torque. THIS SECTION .
The angle of the pistons is variable and is changed by A minimum displacement adjusting screw on the outside
an internal control cylinder that receives high pressure of the motor housing limits the maximum speed of the
oil via the MOTORS' pressure override valve (POR) and motor.
C D E F
PORT PORT
'B' 'A'
'A'
B
'E'
AQ083-1
AQ083 'E' G VIEW 'A'
AQ083-3X
SECTION 'E-E'
Drive Motor – (160 cc Size Shown)
A Flushing Valve E Minimum Displacement Adjusting Screw
B Rotating Group F Proportional Solenoid
C Drive Shaft G NOTE: Orifice must be removed before installation of
D Speed Ring replacement motors (3 Parts - 1 Throttle Pin & 2 Throttle Screws)
8.7
H G
D
C
D
C
B E
B E
F
A
F
A
620E-026
620E-027
H G
Drive Motor Schematic (EHS Transmission)
A POR Drive Motor Schematic
B Test Port M1 (Single Speed Mechanical Transmission)
C Control Cylinder A POR
D Flushing Valve B Test Port M1
E Beginning Of Displacement C Control Cylinder
F To Suction Strainer D Flushing Valve
G From Drive Pump Port 'S' E Beginning Of Displacement
H From Drive Pump Port 'P' F To Suction Strainer
G From Drive Pump Port 'S'
MPORTANT ! H From Drive Pump Port 'P'
Improper adjustment of Minimum displacement adjusting
screw can result in motor and transmission failure due
to overspeeding. When installing a new motor always
ensure stroke limiting screw is set correctly. Refer
to SET MOTOR MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT, in this
section.
A speed ring on the motor's drive shaft generates a
signal picked up by the speed sensor in the 'T' port of
the right motor. The speed sensor signal (FREQUENCY
IN - Drive Motor Speed) is sent to the computer control
system for use in controlling the drive system.
A flushing valve is incorporated into the motor. This valve
provides a regulated flow of oil from the low pressure
side of the loop in the motor case. This action reduces
the possibility of particle build up in the loop by providing
a continuous change of oil, it also assists with cooling.
Flushing occurs only when there is a pressure differential
between the high pressure and low pressure sides of the
loop. This valve is factory set (2.6 US gpm [9.8 L/min])
and requires no adjusting.
8.8
DRIVE MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 200 cc DRIVE MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 160 cc
(EHS TRANSMISSION - RIGHT MOTOR (SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION)
• Start of Control : 200 cc / 200 mA • Start of Control:160 cc / 400 mA
• End of Control : 115cc (210 cc drive pump) • End of Control: 58cc (210 cc drive pump)
• Motor POR : Turn Fully In • Motor POR : Turn Fully In
• Coil Resistance: 5.5 ohms • Coil Resistance: 5.5 ohms
Drive Motor Characteristics

200 160
180
140
160
120
Displacement cc
140
Displacement cc
120 100
100 80
80
60
60
40 40
20 20
0
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
Control Current ma
Control Current mA
DRIVE MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 160 cc

(EHS TRANSMISSION - LEFT MOTOR)
• Start of Control:160 cc / 400 mA
• End of Control: 0cc (210 cc drive pump)
• Motor POR : Turn Fully In
• Coil Resistance: 5.5 ohms
160
140
120
Displacement cc
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
Control Current mA
630E-016
Drive Motor Electrical Schematic
8.9
• Press the foot pedal to drive in the direction selected B A
on the direction selection switch on the left joystick.
The position of the foot pedal is directly proportional to
the travel/engine speed of the machine.
NOTE: A backup alarm will sound when travelling in
reverse based on the position of the operator's seat.
Refer to LEFT JOYSTICK – DIRECTION SELECTION
SWITCH in THIS SECTION.
632E-025
This function can also be performed with the travel/
Forward Facing Foot Pedals
engine speed trigger. Refer also to CAB CONTROLS (Seat Facing Front Of Machine)
– LEFT JOYSTICK (ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK A Travel/Engine Speed Pedal
STEERING) – TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED TRIGGER in B Brake Pedal
THIS SECTION.
Two travel/engine speed pedals are located on the floor
of the operator's cab ( one forward facing and one rear
facing).
Each foot pedal is used to move the machine in the
direction selected on the direction selection switch on
the left joystick.
A backup alarm will sound when travelling in reverse
based on the position of the operator’s seat. A drive B A
interlock circuit built into the computer control system
prevents the machine from being driven when the
parking brake is ENGAGED. Refer also to PARKING
BRAKE in SECTION 9 of THIS MANUAL.
FORWARD FACING PEDALS AND REAR FACING
PEDALS
The rotating seat cab is equipped with two sets of pedals
one set forward facing and the other set rear facing.
620E-014
transferred by the computer control system from the Rear Facing Foot Pedals
forward facing travel/engine speed pedal to the rear (Seat Facing Rear Of Machine)
A Travel/Engine Speed Pedal
facing travel/engine speed pedal based on the position
B Brake Pedal
of the operator’s seat. Both brake pedals operate
regardless of seat position.
For safe operation of all controls the operator’s seat
must be locked in either the forward facing or rear facing
position.
FRONT AND REAR ORIENTATION NOTE:
The dozer blade is considered to be at the front of the
machine. The attachment is considered to be at the rear
of the machine. Therefore in the forward facing position
the operator’s seat is facing the dozer blade and in the
rear facing position the operator’s seat is facing the
attachment.
8.10
FOOT PEDAL CHARACTERISTICS
• Electric Potentiometer
• Start of Control:0% / 0 Deg / 750 (±250) mV
• End of Control:100%/ 17 Deg/ 3875 (±375) mV
Foot Pedal Characteristics
4800
4000
3200
Milli-Volts
2400
1600
800
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Pedal Position %
Pedal motion is transmitted to the potentiometer through

a mechanical linkage. A spring return automatically
returns the pedal to the neutral position when not in use.
The pedal moves through 17° of motion. The
potentiometer signal ranges from 750 mV (at 0°) to
3875 mV (at 17°) (VOLTAGE IN - Drive Pedal Fwd or
Drive Pedal Rev). These signals are sent to the IQAN
XS module of the computer control system to control
the travel/engine speed and direction of travel of the
machine. Through internal logic the computer control
system uses the signal from the pedal to control engine
speed, drive pump stroke and drive motor stroke.
A three pin connector is used to connect each pedal to
the machine electrical system:
• Pin A: ground (white)
• Pin B: signal
• Pin C: supply (red)
The position of the foot pedal is directly proportional to
the travel/engine speed of the machine. Travel speed
may also be limited by the position of the maximum
speed control. Refer MAXIMUM TRAVEL SPEED
CONTROL in THIS SECTION for more information.
8.11
A B C DIRECTION SELECTION SWITCH

This switch selects the direction of travel for the travel/
engine speed pedal in use (either forward facing or rear
facing).
This is a three position switch.
• Place switch in the forward position to travel in a
FORWARD* direction .
• Place switch in the centre position for neutral.
• Place switch in the rear position to travel in a
REVERSE* direction .
This control is a three position switch with a proportional
output. The signal generated by the switch position
(VOLTAGE IN - Travel Direction Selection) is sent to
the IQAN XS2 module of the computer control system
to control travel direction FORWARD*, NEUTRAL or
REVERSE* based on the position of the switch.
*NOTE: Control of machine travel is automatically
transferred by the computer control system from the
forward facing travel/engine speed pedal to the rear
632E-026
facing travel/engine speed pedal based on the position
Left Joystick (Rotating Seat & Joystick Steering) of the operator's seat. Therefore FORWARD and
A Direction Selection Switch REVERSE as described above are considered to be
B Maximum Speed Control forward and reverse as viewed by the operator either
C Travel/Engine Speed Trigger from the forward facing seat position or the rear facing
seat position.
Refer also to TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED PEDAL,
MAXIMUM SPEED CONTROL in THIS SECTION and
TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED TRIGGER in THIS SECTION
or SECTION 2..
Forward Facing Seat
Rear Facing Seat
8.12
MAXIMUM SPEED CONTROL DIRECTION SELECTION SWITCH and TRAVEL/
(ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING) ENGINE SPEED TRIGGER in THIS SECTION or
SECTION 2.
The maximum speed control allows the operator to set
the maximum travel speed of the machine to maintain
a given travel speed without having to feather the drive
pedal.
• Push and hold control forward to increase the
maximum travel speed. Control spring returns to
centre when released.
• Pull and hold control back to decrease the maximum
travel speed of the machine. Control returns to
centre when released.
This control can be used while the machine is in motion.
Small movements of this control change setting slowly.
Larger movements of this control change settings faster.
NOTE: Maximum speed control settings for forward

and reverse travel can be adjusted to the same setting
(factory default) or independently. Refer to COMPUTER
– ADJUSTMENT MENU -SERVICE SETTINGS –
TRAVEL SPEED DIRECTION SYNC in SECTION 2.
NOTE: Maximum speed control settings can be adjusted
in increments of 1% (factory default) or in steps (0%,
2.5%, 5%, 7.5%,10%,15%,20%,30%,40%,50%,60%,
80%,100%). Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
MENU -SERVICE SETTINGS – TRAVEL SPEED STEP
MODE in SECTION 2.
NOTE: A travel speed preset (25-100%) can be set to
a frequently used maximum travel speed. Travel speed
preset setting is indicated on screen by an orange
arrowhead. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
MENU -SERVICE SETTINGS – TRAVEL SPEED
When adjusting maximum speed control computer
PRESET FORWARD and TRAVEL SPEED PRESET
display will show setting (Turtle 0% to 100% Rabbit).
REVERSE in SECTION 2.
A maximum speed control setting indicator is also shown
on the top right side of the main menu of the computer
display (Turtle 0% to 100% Rabbit).
CAUTION
Setting the maximum speed control to the
minimum setting lowers maximum travel speed
only, it will NOT prevent the machine from
travelling when the forward or reverse travel
controls are used.
This control is a friction maintained proportional slider.

The signal generated by the slider control position
(VOLTAGE IN - Travel Speed Control) is sent to the
computer control system to limit the travel speed of the
machine based on the position of the slider.
Refer also to TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED PEDAL,
8.13
TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED TRIGGER
A B C (ROTATING SEAT & JOYSTICK STEERING)
The drive trigger (travel/engine speed trigger)service
setting must be set to ON to enable this control to
function. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU
- SERVICE SETTINGS – Drive Trigger (Travel/Engine
Speed Trigger) in THIS SECTION.
• Pull trigger to drive in the direction selected on the
direction selection switch on the left joystick.
The position of the trigger is directly proportional to the
travel/engine speed of the machine.
NOTE: A backup alarm will sound when travelling in
reverse based on the position of the operator's seat.
Refer to LEFT JOYSTICK – DIRECTION SELECTION
SWITCH in THIS SECTION.
This function can also be performed with the travel/
engine speed pedal. Refer also to CAB CONTROLS –
TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED PEDAL (ROTATING SEAT &
JOYSTICK STEERING) in THIS SECTION.
632E-026
Left Joystick (Rotating Seat & Joystick Steering)

A Direction Selection Switch
B Maximum Speed Control
C Travel/Engine Speed Trigger
Forward Facing Seat
Rear Facing Seat
8.14
TRAVEL/ENGINE SPEED PEDALS MAXIMUM SPEED CONTROL DIAL
(STATIONARY SEAT & STEERING WHEEL) (STATIONARY SEAT & STEERING WHEEL)
A
A
B
54827B
Control Panel
A Maximum Speed Control Dial
INFORMATION TO FOLLOW IN A LATER ISSUE OF

620E-013 THIS MANUAL.
Foot Pedals (Stationary Seat & Steering Wheel)
A Travel/Engine Speed Pedal
B Brake Pedal
INFORMATION TO FOLLOW IN A LATER ISSUE OF

THIS MANUAL.
8.15
TRANSMISSION
SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL
The single speed transmission drives both the front
and rear axles of the machine. Power is supplied by
two hydraulic motors mounted to the input side of the
transmission. The output shafts transmit the power to
both the front and rear axles.
A B
The gears and bearings in the transmission are
lubricated by splash lubrication inside the case. 632E-012
Transmission Dipstick And Fill Location

Some machines are factory equipped (or field updated)
Below Right Cab Door
with forced lubrication to improve input bearing A Transmission Dipstick
lubrication on extreme slopes. These machines are also B Transmission Oil Fill Location
equipped with a transmission pump and transmission
filter.
A
The oil level in the transmission must always be kept
up to the proper level indicated on the dipstick. Refer
SECTION 3 of this manual for the recommended
lubricant.
The transmission disconnect lever is used to shift
the transmission between the DRIVE and NEUTRAL
positions, e.g. NEUTRAL for towing the machine.
The transmission disconnect lever is located under the
cab near the front yoke of the transmission. A short
bar is placed through the hole in the lever and pulled
upwards to put the transmission into neutral.
IMPORTANT !
When the transmission is in neutral, never tow the
machine at over 2 mph (3.2 km/h) and never press the
forward or reverse pedals, as this will cause significant
damage to the transmission. 620E-016
Transmission Disconnect Lever (Shown In Neutral)

For more information on towing, Refer to TOWING
A Disconnect Lever
INSTRUCTIONS in SECTION 2.
Refer also to Tigercat Single Speed Transmission
Service and Repair Manual.
A
630E-085
Forced Lubrication Single Speed Transmission

A Return From Transmission Filter
8.16
600029 DRIVE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM - JOYSTICK STEERING (SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION)
8.17
INFORMATION TO FOLLOW IN A LATER

ISSUE OF THIS MANUAL.
DRIVE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM - STEERING WHEEL (SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION)

8.18
600031 DRIVE CIRCUIT HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC (SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION)

8.19
TRANSMISSION - EHS (OPTIONAL)
The EHS transmission drives both the front and rear
axles of the machine. Power is supplied by two hydraulic
motors mounted to the input side of the transmission.
The output shafts transmit the power to both the front
and rear axles.
The EHS transmission is capable of providing the A B
tractive effort of the deepest gear ratio offered in
Tigercat’s single speed mechanical transmission as well 632E-012
as the top speed of the shallowest gear ratio offered in Transmission Dipstick And Fill Location
the single speed mechanical transmission. Below Right Cab Door
A Transmission Dipstick
This is accomplished with more sophisticated computer B Transmission Oil Fill Location
logic. When operating conditions demand high tractive
effort, both hydrostatic motors are working. When
tractive effort requirements are reduced (when traveling
empty or loaded on flat terrain) all of the pump flow is
directed to one motor for higher travel speeds.
A
The gears and bearings in the transmission are
lubricated by splash lubrication inside the case.
Some machines are factory equipped (or field updated)
with forced lubrication to improve input bearing
lubrication on extreme slopes. These machines use the
existing transmission pump and transmission filter for
this purpose. 630E-085
The oil level in the transmission must always be kept Forced Lubrication EHS Transmission
. A Return From Transmission Filter
up to the proper level indicated on the dipstick. Refer
SECTION 3 of this manual for the recommended
lubricant.
IMPORTANT!
Before towing, the transmission must always be
disconnected from the drive wheels.
Never tow a machine in gear. If the machine is subjected
to hard pulling while in gear, the extremely high forces
created will cause significant damage to the components
of the hydrostatic drive system and the transmission
For more information on towing, Refer to TOWING
INSTRUCTIONS - EHS TRANSMISSION in SECTION 2
Refer also to Tigercat EHS Transmission Service and
Repair Manual.
8.20
EHS TRANSMISSION CLUTCH MANIFOLD
(IF EQUIPPED)
A B
630E-022
EHS Transmission Clutch Manifold Hydraulic Schematic

C
630E-031
Ehs Transmission Clutch Manifold

A Pressure/Temperature Sensor
B Clutch Unloading Solenoid Valve
C Clutch Pressure Control Reducing/Relieving Solenoid Valve
The EHS transmission clutch manifold controls the

clutch pressure of the EHS transmisssion.
630E-017
This manifold contains:
EHS Transmission Manifold Electrical Schematic
TS1 Adjustable clutch pressure control proportional
reducing/relieving solenoid valve. (CURRENT
OUT - Clutch Motor LH) clutch pressure control.
RV1 Adjustable relief valve
SV1 Clutch pressure solenoid valve. (DIGITAL OUT
- Clutch Load).
G Pressure/temperature sensor(VOLTAGE IN -
Clutch Pressure) (VOLTAGE IN - Transmission
Oil Temperature)
T Tank port
T2 Tank port
C Clutch pressure control
8.21
TRANSMISSION COOLER
A B C D
632E-015
A/C Condenser and Cooler Package

A Radiator
B A/C Condenser
C Charge Air Cooler (CAC)
D Hydraulic Oil Cooler
E Transmission Cooler (if equipped)
Machines equipped with an EHS transmission or a single

speed mechanical transmission equipped with forced
lubrication have an transmission cooler mounted in front
of the cooler package. Some early machines may not
have been factory equipped with a transmission cooler.
Refer also to COOLER PACKAGE in SECTION 10.
For detailed cleaning procedures, refer to CLEANING
A/C CONDENSER AND COOLER PACKAGE in
SECTION 3.
8.22
600030 DRIVE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM - JOYSTICK STEERING (EHS TRANSMISSION)

8.23
INFORMATION TO FOLLOW IN A LATER

ISSUE OF THIS MANUAL.
DRIVE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM - STEERING WHEEL (EHS TRANSMISSION)

8.24
600032 DRIVE CIRCUIT HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC (EHS TRANSMISSION WITH FORCED LUBRICATION)
8.25
DRIVE PUMP PRESSURE CHECKS DRIVE MOTOR SPEED VERIFICATION
The drive pump is electro-hydraulically controlled and Drive motor speed should be checked prior to making
factory set. It requires no adjustment. any drive motor pressure checks or adjustments.
NOTE: Charge pressure is regulated by a nonadjustable Fasten your seat belt and move the machine to a
cartridge style relief valve in the drive pump . suitable test area, where it can be safely driven at full
speed for approximately 150 ft (45 m). Grapple UP,
CHECK CHARGE PRESSURE CLOSED and ROTATED TO CENTER. Dozer blade UP.
CHECK FOR FULL DRIVE PUMP FLOW
632E/635G SERIES
2. Check that all personnel are clear of the machine
before starting the engine.
3. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine start-up.
A
4. Insert the ignition key
B 5. Start the engine and allow to idle.
6. Set the maximum speed control to its lowest setting
).
632E-036
Charge Pressure Test Port

A Charge Pressure Filter
B Charge Test Port
3. Connect a 0-1000 psi (0 -70 bar) gauge to the

CHARGE test port.
8. Start the engine and allow to idle.
9. Ensure that hydraulic oil is at operating temperature.
Refer to HYDRAULIC OIL HEATING PROCEDURE
in THIS SECTION. 7. Use the computer display to view motor speed
information from the cab. From the main menu
10. Check charge pressure. navigate to INFORMATION MENU (F3) . Refer to
Reading should be 300-400 psi (21-28 bar) at an COMPUTER – INFORMATION MODE MENU in
engine speed of 950 rpm. SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL for more information.

14. Remove the gauge from the charge pressure test
port.
15. If charge pressure readings are not correct check
the charge filter for proper operation before taking
further corrective action.
8.26
EHS TRANSMISSION MACHINES
The drive motor speed display should read:
Drive Drive Motor RH Speed

Pump Tier 4f Tier 2
165cc 725-755 rpm 692-722 rpm
210cc 927-957 rpm 885-915 rpm
210cc 857-895 rpm 815-845 rpm
w/200 cc
RH motor
610E/615E/620E/625E machines are equipped with

a 165cc pump.
630E/635E machines are equipped with a 210cc
drive pump.
632E/635G machines (EHS transmission)are
8. Change the program mode from NORMAL to equipped with a 210cc drive pump with a 200cc RH
ENGINE HP TEST and press OK. motor.
Using the computer display from the main menu 10. A correct reading indicates the there is full flow in the
navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) ~SERVICE drive pump.
SETTINGS~Program Mode~Engine HP Test Mode.
An incorrect reading indicates a problem with flow
Refer to COMPUTER~ADJUSTMENT MENU in
from the drive pump or drive pump max current
settings may be out of calibration.
IMPORTANT !
When setup program modes are chosen an Refer to HYDROSTATIC SETUP PROCEDURE in
information message is shown on the electronic THIS SECTION.
display until the message is acknowledged. 11. Change the program mode back to NORMAL and
press OK.
deactivated for safety during setup procedures. Using the computer display from the main menu
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) ~SERVICE
information message. SETTINGS~Program Mode~Normal. Refer to
COMPUTER ~ ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 6
9. Drive the machine forward with the drive pedal fully of THIS MANUAL.
depressed.
IMPORTANT !
SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION
MACHINES
The drive motor speed display should read: display until the message is acknowledged.
Drive Drive Motor RH Speed In each program mode some controls are
Pump deactivated for safety during setup procedures.
Tier 4f Tier 2
165cc 1120-1150 rpm 1069-1099 rpm information message.
210cc 1428-1458 rpm 1363-1393 rpm
610E/615E/620E/625E machines are equipped with

a 165cc pump.
630E/635E machines are equipped with a 210cc
drive pump.
632E/635G machines (single speed transmission)
are equipped with a 210cc drive pump.
8.27
CHECK FOR CORRECT MOTOR MINIMUM
DISPLACEMENT
2. Set the maximum speed control to its highest setting
).
3. Use the computer display to view motor speed
information from the cab. From the main menu
navigate to INFORMATION MENU (F3) . Refer
to COMPUTER~INFORMATION MODE MENU in
SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL for more information.
4. Drive the machine forward with the drive pedal fully
depressed. The drive motor speed display should
read:
On machines equipped with single speed
mechanical transmission 3750 rpm ± 50.
On machines equipped with EHS transmission 4000
rpm ± 50.
5. A correct reading indicates the motor minimum
displacement is set correctly if the drive motor max
current settings are calibrated correctly. Refer to
HYDROSTATIC SETUP PROCEDURE~DRIVE
MOTOR MAX CURRENT in THIS SECTION.
An incorrect reading indicates the motor minimum
displacement requires adjustment or drive motor
max current settings may be out of calibration.
Refer to HYDROSTATIC SETUP PROCEDURES
for EHS transmission or single speed mechanical
transmission in THIS SECTION.
8.28
HYDROSTATIC SETUP PROCEDURE H. Drive Motor Max Current
SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL Drive motor max current may be adjusted
TRANSMISSION MACHINES independently of other procedures (sections
DO NOT adjust drive motor and drive pump pressure PREPARATION,H,I).
settings without first confirming the need to do so. I. Drive Pump Max Current
All motor adjustments must be performed on BOTH Drive pump max current may be adjusted
MOTORS. independently of other procedures.
The hydrostatic setup procedure is a series of steps that J. Parking Brake Release Test
must be done in a proper sequence to achieve optimum The parking brake release test may be performed
performance from the machine. Any deviation from the independently of other procedures.
procedures could present a safety hazard, damage
components and/or affect the operation of the machine.
WARNING
Setup Preparation.
Setup preparation is required prior to performing all
drive pump and drive motor adjustments (sections
B,C,D,E,F,G,H).
To prevent injury caused by accidental steering
A. Drive Pump Charge Pressure. of the machine when setting pressures, make
Drive pump charge pressure may be checked sure the articulation lock bar is held securely in
independently of other procedures. Refer also place by the lynch pins provided.
to DRIVE PUMP PRESSURE CHECKS in THIS
SECTION. IMPORTANT !
• When installing a new or rebuilt motor, ensure
B. Drive Pump Hydraulic Neutral
minimum displacement screw is set correctly.
Drive pump hydraulic neutral may be checked • Improper adjustment of minimum displacement
and adjusted independently (sections adjusting screw can result in motor failure due to
PREPARATION,B,H,I). overspeeding.
C. Drive Pump Beginning of Displacement • It may be necessary to verify the length of adjusting
screw used by removing and measuring the screw.
Drive pump hydraulic beginning of displacement
may be checked and adjusted independently
(sections PREPARATION,C,H,I).
D. Drive Pump Maximum Displacement
Drive pump maximum displacement may be
checked and adjusted independently (sections
PREPARATION,D,H,I).
E. Drive Pump High Pressure Relief.
Drive pump high pressure relief may be
PREPARATION,E,H,I).
F. Drive Motor Beginning of Displacement
Motor Beginning of displacement may be
PREPARATION,F,H,I).
G. Drive Motor Maximum Speed/Minimum
Displacement
Motor maximum speed/minimum displacement may
be checked and adjusted independently (sections
PREPARATION,G,H,I).
8.29
HYDROSTATIC SETUP SHEET – SINGLE SPEED MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION
Make copies to use as a guide and a record of each setup.
Date
Serial Number
Technician
Setup Preparation
□ Ensure orifices have been removed from M1 ports in both motors
□ Ensure drive motor minimum displacement set screws on the left and right drive motors are set correctly.
□ Turn in the Pressure Override Screw fully and back out ¼ turn on both drive motors
□ Ensure latest IQAN program is installed on the MD3
□ Use IQANrun to login to the MD3. (Use IQANrun2 for Tier 3 and Tier 4i. Use IQANrun3 for Tier 2/Tier 4F)
□ Maximize pump and motor currents (Hydrostatic Drive adjust group)
□ Set RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA
□ Set LH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA
□ Ensure Engine High Idle is set to 2200 rpm (Tier 2 set to 2100 rpm)
□ Ensure Auto rpm is set to Max rpm
□ Check maximum speed control readings (Travel Speed Control MAC 0% to 100%)
A. Drive pump charge pressure B. Drive pump Hydraulic neutral C. Drive pump beginning of displacement
Forward/Reverse
psi or bar psi or bar mA
Drive Pump Drive Pressure Drive Pressure Fwd VIN
Charge Pressure Forward start to increase
Drive Pressure Drive Pressure Rev VIN
Reverse start to increase
D. Drive pump maximum E. Drive pump high pressure relief F. Drive motor beginning of displacement
displacement Forward/Reverse METHOD A mA
rpm psi or bar Right Motor shifting point
Drive Motor RH Drive Pressure Left Motor shifting point
Speed Forward Fwd VIN METHOD B psi or bar mA
Drive Motor RH Drive Pressure Left Motor M1 port pressure
Speed Reverse Rev VIN Right Motor M1 port pressure
Drive Pressure VIN
G. Drive motor maximum

speed/minimum
Right Drive Left Drive
Motor Motor
Drive Motor Speed (rpm)
Exposed length(mm)
H. Drive Motor Max Current I. Drive pump Max Current J. Parking Brake Release Time
Right Drive Motor Max Current Drive Pump Max Current Maximum Release Time [ms]
RH Motor RH Motor RH Drive Pump Max RH Drive
Parking Brake
Max Current Max Current Motor Current Motor
Release Time
(165cc) (210cc) Speed Speed (rpm)
(rpm)
1100 mA 1100 mA 600 mA
1030 mA 960 mA 590 mA
1020 mA 950 mA 580 mA
1010 mA 940 mA 570 mA
1000 mA 930 mA 560 mA
990 mA 920 mA 550 mA
980 mA 910 mA 540 mA
970 mA 900 mA 530 mA
960 mA 890 mA 520 mA
950 mA 880 mA 510 mA
940 mA 870 mA EARLIER PUMP Final should be:
930 mA 860 mA COILS 535-560 mA
920 mA 850 mA LATER PUMP Final should be:
910 mA 840 mA COILS 560-600 mA
Final should be: Final should be:
940-1010 mA 870-940 mA
COMMENTS:
8.30
SETUP PREPARATION 9. Ensure the drive motor minimum displacement set
screws on the right and left drive motors are set
NOTE: This procedure as written can be completed with correctly for the machine configuration.
all four wheels on the ground.
A clear open area with fairly flat ground and at least 80
"X"
m (250 ft) of space to drive the machine during setup is
required to complete some sections of this procedure
with all four wheels on the ground.
If an open flat area of sufficient size is not available
hydrostatic setup can also be completed with all four
wheels lifted clear of the ground on suitable stands. DIM X
1. Park the machine on level ground. Drive Motor Minimum Displacement Screw "X" Dimension
2. Lower grapple and dozer blade to rest firmly on the
The “X” dimension is the measured from the top of
ground.
the locknut to the end of the exposed screw. Always
3. Engage the parking brake. check the overall length of the adjusting screw
4. Turn OFF the engine. before setting the “X” dimension.
Table 1
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch Minimum X = setting
7. Install the articulation lock bar. displacement 165 CC 210CC
8. The shifting time of the Drive Motors is controlled by screw length PUMP PUMP
the computer controls system software, not using RH MOTOR 90 mm 14 mm 9 mm
hydraulic timing orifices.
LH MOTOR 90 mm 14 mm 9 mm
If installing a new or rebuilt motor ensure orifices are
out of M1 port on both Drive Motors. 604C/610C/615C, 620D, 610E/615E/620E/625E
machines are equipped with a 165cc drive pump.
630E/635E/632E/635G machines are equipped with
a 210cc drive pump.
D These measurements are a starting point and may
have to be adjusted for proper calibration
C
10. On both the left and right drive motors, turn the drive
motor POR adjusting screw all the way IN until lightly
seated, then back out 1/4 turn.
B
12. Insert the ignition key.
A
13. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position to
620E-131 provide power to the computer system.
Drive Motor
A POR Screw
B Minimum Displacement Screw
C Beginning of Displacement Screw
D M1 Ports Located on Bottom Left Side of Each Motor
8.31
14. Connect a PC/Laptop to the MD3 control module
using the proper communication cable, open the
appropriate IQANrun program. Refer to CONNECT
TO THE MD3 WITH IQANrun 2 or IQANrun 3 as
applicable in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL for
connection information.
NOTE: IQANrun 2 (used for Tier 3 and Tier 4i
machine programs) and IQANrun 3 (used for Tier 4f
and Tier 2 machine programs).
15. If you are updating the program refer to the Tigercat
Dealer Website and open the appropriate application
for the machine then update it in the MD3. Refer to
IQAN SOFTWARE – APPLICATION PROGRAM
UPDATES , IQAN SOFTWARE – DOWNLOADING
APPLICATIONS FROM DEALER WEBSITE and
IQANrun – UPDATING APPLICATION in SECTION
6 of THIS MANUAL. Proceed to step 16.
If you are not updating the program proceed to step
16. 18. For accurate setup it is necessary to temporarily
NOTE: Update of the program may be required increase the motor maximum current setting.
as a result of PSB updates, program improvement Adjust the Motor Max Current as high as it will go
updates or other component updates. and press OK.
16. Login to the application from the MD3 to access the Using the computer display from any screen MENU
hydrostatic drive adjust group. Refer to IQANrun – BUTTON ~ADJUST~ Hydrostatic Drive Group
LOGIN in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL.
Adjust ~ Motor Max Current. Refer to MAIN MENU
PAGE ~ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 of THIS
17. For accurate setup it is necessary to temporarily

increase the pump maximum current setting.
Adjust the Pump Max Current as high as it will go
and press OK.
Using the computer display from any screen MENU
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Group
Adjust – Max Pump Current. Refer to MAIN MENU
PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 of THIS
8.32
21. For accurate setup it is necessary to ensure Engine

19. Set RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA and High Idle is set to 2200 rpm (Tier 2 only 2100 rpm).
press OK. Using the computer display from any screen MENU
Using the computer display from any screen MENU BUTTON – ADJUST – Engine Adjust – Engine
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Adjust High Idle. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
Group – RH mA Motor Reg Setup. Refer to MAIN MENU- ENGINE SETTINGS – ENGINE HIGH IDLE
MENU PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for ADJUST in SECTION 2 for more information.
more information.
22. For accurate setup it is necessary to ensure Auto

20. Set LH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA and rpm is set to Max rpm.
press OK. Using the computer display from any screen MENU
Using the computer display from any screen MENU BUTTON – ADJUST – Engine Adjust – Engine
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Adjust High Idle. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
Group – LH mA Motor Reg Setup. Refer to MAIN MENU- ENGINE SETTINGS – ENGINE HIGH IDLE
MENU PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for ADJUST in SECTION 2 for more information.
more information.
8.33
and at its highest setting ( ) the reading should be
100%.
Using the computer display press the menu button
, press Measure (F2) then select the Drive/
HP test group. Refer to COMPUTER – MAIN
MENU PAGE - MEASURE MENU – EXAMPLE -
MEASURE MENU in SECTION 2.
in THIS SECTION.
23. Ensure the program mode is set to NORMAL.

Using the computer display from the main menu
navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2 of THIS
MANUAL.
IMPORTANT !
display until the message is acknowledged.
deactivated for safety during setup procedures.
24. Check speed control channel readings (Travel

Speed Control MAC) in the Drive HP Test Group.
When the maximum speed control is at its lowest
setting ( ) the reading should be should be 0%
8.34
A. DRIVE PUMP CHARGE PRESSURE 610E/615E
CHARGE test port.
A
B
7. Check charge pressure. 610E-016
Reading should be 300-400 psi (21-28 bar) @ low Charge Pressure Test Port
idle. A Charge Pressure Filter
B Charge Test Port
8. If charge pressure readings are not correct check 620E/625E/630E/635E
the charge filter for proper operation.
The charge pressure is non-adjustable.
A
10. Remove the ignition key. B

620E-051
port. Charge Pressure Test Port
B Charge Test Port
600C/600D SERIES
615C-039

B Charge Test Port
632E/635G SERIES
632E-036

B Charge Test Port
8.35
B. DRIVE PUMP HYDRAULIC NEUTRAL Pump Neutral Adjustment (if Required)
Check for Correct Pump Neutral Adjustment 11. Remove the ignition key.
1. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch. 12. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
D
provide power to the computer system.
A B C E
F
Y
630E-193
Drive Pump (Later)

A Reverse Maximum Displacement Screw (Forward on Bottom)
B Reverse Beginning of Displacement Sleeve (Forward on Bottom)
C Hydraulic Neutral Adjustment
D MS (MP on Bottom)
E Forward High Pressure Relief (Reverse on Bottom)
4. Use the computer display to view Forward and F Charge Pressure Relief
Reverse drive pressure information from the cab.
From the main menu select INFORMATION 13. Two 0-600 psi (0-41 bar) gauges are required to
perform this adjustment (or a single differential
MODE MENU (F3). Forward and Reverse pressure gauge may be used).
drive pressure displayed on this screen. Refer to
14. Connect 0-600 psi (0-41 bar) gauges to the MP and
COMPUTER – INFORMATION MODE MENU in
MS ports.
6. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine start-up. A
8. Perform the following check:
Engage the parking brake and check to ensure that
the Forward and Reverse drive pressure readings
differ by less than 75 psi (5.2 bar) .
9. Turn the engine OFF. B
10. If the drive pressure readings differ by more than 75
psi (5.2 bar), the drive pump neutral will need to be
reset. Proceed to step 11.
If the pump does not require adjustment proceed to
Section C.
630E-192
Disconnect Two Connectors On Drive Pump

Prior To Performing Procedure
A Drive Pump
B Connectors
8.36
15. Prior to performing this procedure disconnect the
two connectors on the drive pump. This is a safety
precaution to prevent the machine from travelling
during the procedure.
18. Start the engine and allow to idle with the parking
brake engaged.
19. Turn the hydraulic neutral adjustment until the
gauge readings are less than 30 psi (2 bar) apart
(preferably equal).
20. Turn the engine OFF.
23. Remove the gauges.
24. Reconnect the two connectors on the drive pump.
25. Proceed to Section C.
8.37
C. DRIVE PUMP BEGINNING OF 9. Using IQANrun click on the MEASURE tab, select
DISPLACEMENT Drive/HP Test measure group and observe the
channels:
• Drive Pump Fwd-/Rev+ COUT
2. Remove the articulation lock bar. • Drive Pressure Fwd VIN
3. Insert the ignition key. • Drive Pressure Rev VIN
4. Check that all personnel are clear of the machine NOTE: The Forward and Reverse drive pressures
before starting the engine. should be approximately equal to the charge
5. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine start-up. pressure reading as noted in Section A step 7 (+/-
6. Start the engine. 50 psi [3.4 bar]). Note these readings.
10. Disengage the parking brake.
11. Move the machine to a suitable* area to perform this
procedure.
*NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and
at least 80 m (250 ft) of space to drive the machine.
( ).
13. JOYSTICK STEERING & ROTATING SEAT
With seat facing forward and direction selection
switch in the forward position, apply left foot
firmly against service brake and apply the drive
pedal all the way to the floor with the right foot.
STEERING WHEEL & STATIONARY SEAT
Apply left foot firmly against service brake and
apply the forward drive pedal all the way to the
floor with the right foot.
7. Change the program mode from NORMAL to DRIVE
PUMP REGULATION SETUP and press OK.
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER A
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2.
IMPORTANT !
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the B
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the Table Title (If Required)
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct A Drive Pressure Increasing
application program on screen as described in B Drive Pump COUT 220-230 mA
Preparation step 14.
14. Slowly move maximum speed control towards
. and watch the Drive Pump COUT value increase
in mA. As the value reaches 220-230 mA, Drive
Pressure Fwd VIN should start to increase from the
original reading.
8.38
18. Change the program mode back to NORMAL and
D press OK.
A B C E navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
Z
procedures only.
F When setup program modes are chosen an
Y information message is shown on the electronic
630E-193
Drive Pump (Later)
B Reverse Beginning of Displacement Sleeve (Forward on Bottom) Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the
C Hydraulic Neutral Adjustment information message.
D MS (MP on Bottom)
F Charge Pressure Relief 20. Remove the ignition key.
15. If readings are correct proceed to step 18.
If Drive Pressure Fwd VIN increases earlier than 220
mA or later than 230 mA adjustment is required.
16. To adjust Drive Pressure if required:
a. Turn the engine OFF.
b. Remove the ignition key.
c. Install the articulation lock bar.
d. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
e. Loosen the lock nut on the forward beginning of
displacement sleeve.
f. Turn the sleeve IN to increase current or OUT to
decrease current.
g. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch
h. Remove the articulation lock bar
i. Insert the ignition key.
j. Start the engine.
17. Repeat the steps 12 to 16 for the reverse direction.
8.39
D. DRIVE PUMP MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT
2. Remove the articulation lock bar. A
A Drive Motor RH Speed FIN
9. Using IQANrun click on the MEASURE tab, select

Drive/HP Test measure group and observe the
channel:
• Drive Motor RH Speed FIN
Refer to IQANrun – MEASURE/GRAPH in
SECTION 6.
procedure.
7. Change the program mode from NORMAL to at least 80 m (250 ft) of space to drive the machine.
ENGINE HP TEST and press OK.
Using the computer display from the main menu ( )..
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2. With seat facing forward and direction selection
switch in the forward position and apply the drive
IMPORTANT ! pedal all the way to the floor.
information message is shown on the electronic STEERING WHEEL & STATIONARY SEAT
Apply the forward drive pedal all the way to the
In each program mode some controls are floor.
14. Measure the Drive Motor Speed RH FIN.
information message. The drive motor speed display should read:
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the Drive Drive Motor RH Speed
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct Pump Tier 4f, 4i, 3 Tier 2
application program on screen as described in
Preparation step 14. 165cc 1120-1150 rpm 1069-1099 rpm
210cc 1428-1458 rpm 1363-1393 rpm
15. Repeat steps 13 to 14 for the reverse direction.
8.40
D press OK.
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
Z
procedures only.
630E-193
Drive Pump (Later)
D MS (MP on Bottom)
16. If the forward and reverse readings are
approximately equal proceed to step 19. 23. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
If the forward and reverse readings are not equal
adjustment of maximum displacement is required.
17. To adjust maximum displacement if required
e. Adjust the maximum displacement screws as
required.
f. Turn screw IN to decrease setting or OUT to
increase setting (1 turn changes motor speed
reading by 30 rpm).
18. Repeat steps 13 to 17 until readings are correct.
8.41
E. DRIVE PUMP HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF
E
A B C
G
Z
I
F
H
Y
635D-175
Drive Pump (Earlier)

A Reverse Maximum Displacement Screw (Forward on Bottom) 8. Change the program mode from NORMAL to DRIVE
PUMP POR SETUP and press OK.
D MS (MP on Bottom) Using the computer display from the main menu
E Forward High Pressure Relief (Reverse on Bottom) navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
F Charge Pressure Relief SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER
G POR Control Pressure Screw – ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2.
H POR Control Pressure Screw
I POR Control Pressure Screw IMPORTANT !
1. For earlier drive pumps POR is non-adjustable. information message is shown on the electronic
Mechanical controls must be disabled as described display until the message is acknowledged.
below, for proper operation of this machine.
Turn drive pump POR controls, items 'G' and In each program mode some controls are
'H', all the way IN. These screws will remain deactivated for safety during setup procedures.
permanently disabled. Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the
Turn the drive pump POR control, item 'I', all
the way OUT (it is mechanically restricted from 9. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct
being removed completely).
For later drive pumps POR is non-adjustable and Preparation step 14.
pumps are not equipped with mechanical controls.
3. Remove the articulation lock bar.
8.42
D
19. To find the average relief pressure, select the
Drive Pressure Fwd channel below the graph page
(the graph data for the selected channel will be
highlighted or bold when selected and the statistics
A B C will be shown to the right.
The True RMS of the selected portion of the graph
should read:
E F Drive Drive Pressure True RMS

Pump psi bar
165cc 6200-6400 427-441
210cc 6500-6700 448-461
The relief valves on this pump are cartridge style,

A Start factory set and nonadjustable.
B Pause
C Stop 20. Repeat steps 13 to 19 for the reverse direction
D Drag Time Markers (Drive Pressure Rev).
E Check to Select Channel
POR is non-adjustable.
F True RMS
10. Using IQANrun click on the MEASURE tab, select press OK.
channels: Using the computer display from the main menu
• Drive Pressure Fwd VIN SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER
• Drive Pressure Rev VIN
IMPORTANT !
SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL for more information
about graphing.
operate normally.
12. Move the machine to a suitable* area to perform this procedures only.
procedure.
*NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and When setup program modes are chosen an
at least 80 m (250 ft) of space to drive the machine. information message is shown on the electronic
13. Start measuring.
With seat facing forward and direction selection Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the
switch in the forward position, apply left foot information message.
pedal slowly with the right foot.
Apply left foot firmly against service brake and 25. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
apply the forward drive pedal slowly with the
right foot.
15. Pressure reading will stabilize at the relief setting.
Maintain relief pressure for 3 seconds.
16. Release the drive pedal and the service brake.
Engage the parking brake.
17. Stop measuring.
18. Drag the time markers to select the section where
the pressure stabilized.
8.43
F. DRIVE MOTOR BEGINNING OF 9. Ensure that RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel is set
DISPLACEMENT to 0 mA per Preparation step 19
In this section two procedures will be described. Tigercat NOTE: LH mA Motor Reg Setup channel remains set
strongly recommends to proceed as per method “A”. at 0 mA per Preparation step 20.
Method “B” can be performed as a double check
D
method.
METHOD A (RECOMMENDED)
A B C
4. Check that all personnel are clear of the machine E F
A Start
B Pause
C Stop
D Drag Time Markers
F True RMS

Hydrostatic Set-up measure group and observe the
channel:
• RH Drive Motor COUT
about graphing.
procedure.
PUMP REGULATION SETUP and press OK. *NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and
navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE 12. Start measuring.
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER 13. Disengage the parking brake.
IMPORTANT ! ( ).
When setup program modes are chosen an 15. JOYSTICK STEERING & ROTATING SEAT
display until the message is acknowledged. With seat facing forward and direction selection
switch in the forward position, apply the drive
In each program mode some controls are pedal all the way to the floor with the right foot.
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the STEERING WHEEL & STATIONARY SEAT
information message. Apply the forward drive pedal all the way to the
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the floor with the right foot.
16. Allow motors to reach maximum speed. Observe
speed reading on RH mA Motor Reg Setup screen.
• Maximum Drive Motor RH Speed FIN
8.44

Pump Tier 4f, 4i, 3 Tier 2
165cc 1120-1150 rpm 1069-1099 rpm
210cc 1428-1458 rpm 1363-1393 rpm
18. Set RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 350 mA.

This is a start point.
19. Begin increasing RH mA Motor Reg Setup until the
Drive Motor RH Speed FIN reading on the computer
display begins to increase.
NOTE: Motor Reg Setup should be increased 1 mA
17. Check Drive Motor Speed readings with RH mA
at a time by tapping the up arrow to obtain a graph
Motor Reg setup at 0, 100, 200 and 300 mA. These
readings should be approximately the same. which can be used to find the shifting point easily.
Drive Motor RH Speed FIN reading will oscillate as
Using the computer display from any screen MENU the setting is increased. The shifting point (motor
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Adjust beginning of displacement) will be the point at which
Group – RH mA Motor Reg Setup. Refer to MAIN the reading oscillates at a slightly higher range just
MENU PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for before drive motor speed increases more quickly.
more information.
Example results are shown in Table 2
If readings are not consistent the motor beginning
of displacement screw may be out of position. This 20. Continue increasing RH mA Motor Reg Setup well
past 410 mA to make finding the shifting point easier.
is rare but may cause the motor to start shifting
before expected. To correct adjust beginning of 21. Stop measuring.
displacement screw before proceeding. See step 26 22. Engage parking brake
below
Table 2 Motor Beginning of Displacement example

Drive Motor COUT (mA) Drive Motor Speed (RPM) Observations
Ensure Drive Motor Speed is approximately the same
0 1123-1124
at 0, 100, 200 and 300 mA.
100 1124-1125 If not, the beginning of displacement screw may be out of
position. This is rare but may cause the motor to start
200 1123-1125 shifting before expected. To correct adjust beginning of
300 1123-1124 displacement screw before proceeding.
350-398 1123-1124 Increase 1 mA at a time.
399 1123-1124
400 1124-1125
401 1123-1125
402 1123-1124
403 1125-1126 <Shifting point
405 1126-1128
407 1129-1130
8.45
23. Select channel Drive Motor RH Speed FIN and 25. If the beginning of displacement is within the 400-
slowly drag arrow to find the point at which the drive 410 mA range proceed to step 28.
motor speed starts to increase. Adjust graph scale
If beginning of displacement is not within the 400-
for accuracy if necessary.
410 mA range adjustment is required.
620E-131
Drive Motor
A POR Screw
NOTE: To Scale RH Speed FIN channel or any other C Beginning of Displacement Screw
channel. Double click on it. Select MIN and MAX D M1 Ports Located on Bottom Left Side of Each Motor
scale values.
26. To adjust RH motor beginning of displacement
24. At the point of right drive motor beginning of
displacement Drive Motor RH COUT must read 400- a. Turn the engine OFF.
410 mA b. Remove the ignition key.
630E-204
Graph With Scale Adjusted For Accuracy

A Motor Displacement = Maximum D Beginning of Displacement Shifting Point
B Drive Motor RH Speed FIN E Motor Displacement < Maximum
C Drive Motor LH COUT
8.46
d. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch D
e. Adjust the RH motor beginning of displacement
set screw. .
f. Turn OUT if reading is less than 400 mA. Turn A B C
IN if reading is greater than 410 mA
i. Insert the ignition key. E F

27. Repeat steps 12 to 26 until right drive motor
beginning of displacement occurs with Drive Motor
RH COUT between 400-410 mA
28. Save the final graph for your records.
A Start
B Pause
C Stop
D Drag Time Markers
F True RMS

channel:
• Drive Motor LH COUT
about graphing.
( ).
29. Reset RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA.
165cc 1120-1150 rpm 1069-1099 rpm
210cc 1428-1458 rpm 1363-1393 rpm
630E-199
Graph Without Scale Adjustment

8.47
36. Check Drive Motor Speed readings with LH mA 37. Set LH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 350 mA.
Motor Reg setup at 0, 100, 200 and 300 mA. These This is a start point.
readings should be approximately the same. 38. Begin increasing LH mA Motor Reg Setup until the
Using the computer display from any screen MENU Drive Motor RH Speed FIN on the computer display
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Adjust begins to increase.
Group – RH mA Motor Reg Setup. Refer to MAIN NOTE: Motor Reg Setup should be increased 1 mA
MENU PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for at a time by tapping the up arrow to obtain a graph
more information. which can be used to find the shifting point easily.
Drive Motor RH Speed FIN reading will oscillate as
the setting is increased. The shifting point (motor
of displacement screw may be out of position. This
beginning of displacement) will be the point at which
is rare but may cause the motor to start shifting
the reading oscillates at a slightly higher range just
before expected. To correct adjust beginning of
before drive motor speed increases more quickly.
displacement screw before proceeding. See step 44
below. Example results are shown in Table 2.
39. Continue increasing RH mA Motor Reg Setup well
past 410 mA to make finding the shifting point easier.
40. Stop measuring.
41. Engage parking brake

0 1123-1124
at 0, 100, 200 and 300 mA.
399 1123-1124
400 1124-1125
401 1123-1125
402 1123-1124
405 1126-1128
407 1129-1130
8.48
42. Select channel Drive Motor RH Speed FIN and e. Adjust the RH motor beginning of displacement
slowly drag arrow to find the point at which the drive set screw. .
motor speed starts to increase. Adjust graph scale f. Turn OUT if reading is less than 400 mA. Turn
for accuracy if necessary. IN if reading is greater than 410 mA
47. Reset LH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA and
press OK.
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Adjust
Group – RH mA Motor Reg Setup. Refer to MAIN
MENU PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 of
the SERVICE MANUAL for more information.
NOTE: To Scale RH Speed FIN channel or any other
NOTE: RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel remains
channel. Double click on it. Select MIN and MAX
set at 0 mA per Preparation step 19.
scale values.
D
Proceed to section G step 1 if motor beginning of
C displacement has been set successfully using method A.
620E-131
Drive Motor
A POR Screw
43. If the beginning of displacement is within the 400-

410 mA range proceed to step 46 .
If beginning of displacement is not within the 400-
44. To adjust LH motor beginning of displacement
8.49
METHOD B (ALTERNATE METHOD/CHECK) 8. Wheels may turn during this procedure. If the
machine is on the ground place the dozer blade
NOTE: In this section two procedures to set drive motor
against a hard stop (a stump can be used as a hard
beginning of displacement will be described. Tigercat stop).
strongly recommends to proceed as per method “A”.
method.
B C
620E-064
Partial Tilt with Cab Support Brace

A Support Brace (3291B)
B Safety Cable
C Cab Locking Pin
MOTOR SETUP and press OK.
1. Tilt the cab over and install the cab tilt support brace. navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
IMPORTANT !
D
C
B Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the
A 10. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the

620E-131 application program on screen as described in
Drive Motor Preparation step 14.
A POR Screw
2. Connect two 0-5000 psi (0 - 345 bar) gauges to the

RM1 (Right Motor M1) and LM1 (Left Motor M1) test
ports.
8.50
17. Slowly move maximum speed control towards .
Drive Motor COUT will increase.
The motor current readings should start increasing
A from 0 mA.
Continue increasing the maximum speed control
setting until one of the M1 gauges reaches half of
system pressure. Note the current value on the
computer display for the first motor.
NOTE: If the Drive Motor LH COUT and Drive Motor
RH COUT readings increase in different proportions
ensure the Drive Motor Current is adjusted to as
B high as it will go, as described in Preparation step
18.
18. Continue increasing the maximum speed control
setting until the second M1 gauge reaches half
of system pressure. Again note the current value
displayed on the computer display for the second
A Drive Motor Current 400-410 mA motor.
B Drive Pressure Stable 19. Although both motors do not have to reach half of
system pressure at the same time or amperage,
11. Select Measure and scroll to the Drive/HP Test each motor should reach half of system pressure
measure group and observe channels: no earlier than 400 mA and no later than 410 mA.
• Drive Pressure Fwd VIN If both motors are set correctly, proceed to step 25.
• Drive Motor RH COUT
• Drive Motor LH COUT If either motor does not meet this requirement the
Refer to IQANrun – MEASURE/GRAPH in beginning of displacement screw on the motor(s)
SECTION 6 for more information. must be adjusted, proceed to next step.
12. Disengage the parking brake. NOTE: It is NOT NECESSARY for both motors
to have the same settings. Motors may perform
( ). differently from one machine to another or even from
one motor to another on the same machine.
20. With the service brake and drive pedal fully applied,
adjust the maximum speed control so that Drive
switch in the forward position, apply left foot Motor RH COUT is 405 mA.
pedal all the way to the floor with the right foot. 21. With the aid of an assistant maintain this condition
and adjust the left motor beginning of displacement
STEERING WHEEL & STATIONARY SEAT screw until the gauge pressure is half of the Drive
Pressure FWD [psi] value.
Adjust the right motor to the same pressure.
floor with the right foot. Release the drive pedal and service brake.
15. The drive system should build and then maintain a NOTE: While adjusting the second motor, it may be
constant pressure. The wheels may creep at a slow difficult to achieve exactly half of the Drive Pressure
speed. FWD [psi] value while trying to zero in the pressure,
16. The drive motors will not begin to displace until the the gauge will continue to move and settle either
LM1 and RM1 control pressures on the gauges above or below half of system pressure. If this is the
reach half of the system pressure. case, have the beginning of displacement screw set
For example, if the system pressure stabilizes at as close as possible to this “switch point”.
2600 psi (180 bar) while holding the service brake
and drive pedal in the drive motor setup program
mode , the motors will not be physically shifting until
the control pressure reaches 1300 psi (90 bar).
8.51
22. Return the maximum speed control to its lowest 28. Remove the ignition key.
setting ( ). 29. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
Repeat steps 15 to 24 until each motor reaches half 30. Remove the gauges from the motor test ports.
of system pressure no earlier than 400 mA and no
31. Remove the cab tilt support brace and return the cab
later than 410 mA.
to its normal position.
23. Verify beginning of displacement settings
a. With the service brake and drive pedal fully
applied, adjust the maximum speed control so
that LH Drive Motor COUT and RH Drive Motor
COUT channel readings are 385 mA.
b. Take an M1 gauge reading.
c. Repeat for 390 mA, 395 mA, 400 mA, 405 mA,
410 mA.
d. Example results are shown in Table 3.
e. Verify that each motor reaches half of system
pressure no earlier than 400 mA and no later
than 410 mA.
press OK.
25. Using the computer display from the main menu
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
procedures only.
26. Engage the parking brake
Table 3 Example results for Verification of Beginning of Displacement Settings

Drive Pressure Drive Pressure
Drive Motor M1 Pressure M1 Pressure
VIN VIN
COUT (mA)
psi bar
385 2600 0 180 0
390 2600 500 180 34
400 2600 1100 180 76
405 2600 1300= ½ 2600 180 90= ½ 180
410 2600 1500 180 103
8.52
G. MOTOR MAXIMUM SPEED/MINIMUM D
DISPLACEMENT
2. Remove the articulation lock bar. A B C

E F
A Start
B Pause
C Stop
D Drag Time Markers
F True RMS
9. Select Measure and scroll to the Drive/HP Test

measure group and observe channel:
SECTION 6 for more information about graphing.
7. Change the program mode from NORMAL to MAX procedure.
CURRENT SETUP and press OK. *NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and
Using the computer display from the main menu at least 80 m (250 ft) of space to drive the machine.
navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE 12. Set the maximum speed control to its highest setting
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER ( ).
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2. 13. Start measuring.
IMPORTANT ! 14. JOYSTICK STEERING & ROTATING SEAT
information message is shown on the electronic With seat facing forward and direction selection
display until the message is acknowledged. switch in the forward position, fully
apply the drive pedal.
deactivated for safety during setup procedures. STEERING WHEEL & STATIONARY SEAT
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the Fully apply the forward drive pedal.
Allow the machine to reach top speed and maintain
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the for 3 seconds. Release the drive pedal and allow the
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct wheels to stop.
Preparation step 14. 15. Stop measuring.
16. Drag the time markers to select a smooth section of
the graph where the machine was at top speed.
17. To find the average maximum drive motor speed at
, select the Drive Motor RH Speed channel at the
bottom of the graph page (the graph data for the
selected channel will be highlighted or bold when
selected and the statistics will be shown to the right.
8.53
18. The True RMS of the selected portion of the graph
should read 3750 rpm ± 50
If the value recorded does not fall into this range, the
minimum displacement screw must be adjusted on
the RH and LH drive motor. D
19. If the average top speed is acceptable, proceed to C

step 22.
If the average top speed is not acceptable
adjustment is required. B

a. Turn the engine OFF. A
b. Remove the ignition key. 620E-131
c. Install the articulation lock bar. Drive Motor

A POR Screw
g. Turning each screw OUT 1/4 turn should

A
increase the top speed by approximately 100
rpm. Turning each screw IN 1/4 turn should
decrease the top speed by approximately 100
B C
rpm.
h. Remove the cab tilt support brace and return the
cab to its normal position.
i. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch
j. Remove the articulation lock bar
k. Insert the ignition key.
620E-064
l. Start the engine.
A Support Brace (3291B) 21. Repeat steps 12 to 20 until Drive Motor average top
B Safety Cable speed falls in the correct range, 3750 rpm ± 50.
C Cab Locking Pin
press OK.
e. Tilt the cab over and install the cab tilt support
brace. Using the computer display from the main menu
f. Adjust the RH and LH drive motors as required. navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
procedures only.
8.54
8.55
H. DRIVE MOTOR MAX CURRENT PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for more
1. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch. information.
2. Remove the articulation lock bar. D
A B C
7. Change the program mode from NORMAL to MAX E F
CURRENT SETUP and press OK.
IMPORTANT ! A Start
When setup program modes are chosen an B Pause
information message is shown on the electronic C Stop
display until the message is acknowledged. D Drag Time Markers
In each program mode some controls are F True RMS
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the 11. Select Measure and scroll to the Drive/HP Test
information message. measure group and observe channel:
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct Refer to IQANrun – MEASURE/GRAPH in
application program on screen as described in SECTION 6 for more information about graphing.
9. Ensure the Drive Motor Current is adjusted to as
high as it will go, as described in Preparation step 13. Move the machine to a suitable* area to perform this
18. procedure.
( ).
switch in the forward position, fully apply the
drive pedal.
Fully apply the forward drive pedal.
for 3 seconds.
Release the drive pedal , allow the wheels to stop
and engage the parking brake.
10. For accurate setup temporarily adjust the pump
maximum current setting to 350 mA and press OK. 17. Stop measuring.
18. Drag the time markers to select a smooth section
of the Drive Motor Speed graph where the machine
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Group was at top speed.
8.56
19. To find the average maximum drive motor speed 22. Lower the motor max current to start point:
at , select the Drive Motor Speed channel at the • 1030 mA (165cc pump)
selected channel will be highlighted or bold when • 960 mA (210cc pump)
selected and the statistics will be shown to the right. 23. Continue lowering the motor max current in 10
20. The True RMS of the selected portion of the graph mA increments and repeating steps 13 to 19 until
should be approximately: the RH drive motor speed drops by at least 7 rpm
from the value found in the previous adjustment 3
Drive Drive Motor RH Speed True RMS consecutive times.
Pump Tier 4f, 4i, 3 Tier 2 Example results are shown in Table 4.
165cc 1520 rpm 1451 rpm 24. Increase the motor max current by 30 mA to the final
210cc 1330 rpm 1269 rpm setting (drop of 7 rpm for the 1st time). This will be
the final setting as it will ensure the drive motors will
be responsive to sudden changes in torque load.
25. Final Motor Max Current should be:
• 940-1010 mA (165cc drive pump)
• 870-940 mA (210cc drive pump)
NOTE: Tier 2 setting may be higher by up to 40 mA.
press OK.
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
21. Use the computer display to reset the Motor Max procedures only.
Current as follows.
Using the computer display from any screen MENU information message is shown on the electronic
BUTTON ~ADJUST~ Hydrostatic Drive Group display until the message is acknowledged.
PAGE ~ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for more In each program mode some controls are
information deactivated for safety during setup procedures.
Table 4 Example results for setting Drive Motor Max Current
Motor Max Drive Motor RH Motor Max Drive Motor
Current RH Speed Current RH Speed Observations
165cc pump 165cc pump 210cc pump 210cc pump
1100 mA 1537 rpm 1100 mA 1340 rpm < Maximum speed control @
1030 mA 1536 rpm 960 mA 1341 rpm
1020 mA 1535 rpm 950 mA 1341 rpm
1010 mA 1524 rpm 940 mA 1330 rpm
1000 mA 1524 rpm 930 mA 1329 rpm
990 mA 1523 rpm 920 mA 1331 rpm
980 mA 1523 rpm 910 mA 1330 rpm
970 mA 1523 rpm 900 mA 1329 rpm
960 mA 1523 rpm 890 mA 1325 rpm
950 mA 1516 rpm 880 mA 1315 rpm < Final setting - decrease ≥ 7rpm for 1st time
940 mA 1508 rpm 870 mA 1300 rpm < Verify Drive Motor rpm decreased ≥ 7rpm
8.57
32. Drive pump max current must be reset correctly to
complete this procedure. Proceed to SECTION I.
8.58
I. DRIVE PUMP MAX CURRENT D
A B C
E F
A Start
B Pause
C Stop
D Drag Time Markers
F True RMS
7. Change the program mode from NORMAL to DRIVE procedure.
PUMP REGULATION SETUP and press OK. *NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and
IMPORTANT !
display until the message is acknowledged. switch in the forward position, fully apply the
drive pedal.
8. Ensure the Pump Max Current is adjusted to as for 3 seconds.
high as it will go and both RH and LH mA Motor Reg
Setup are set to 0 mA as described in Preparation Release the drive pedal, allow the wheels to stop
steps 17, 18 and 19. and engage the parking brake.
9. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the 16. Stop measuring.
18. To find the average maximum drive motor speed
at , select the Drive Motor Speed channel at the
8.59
19. The True RMS of the selected portion of the graph 22. Increase the pump max current by 30 mA to the final
should be approximately: setting (10 mA above the drop of 7 rpm for the 1st
time).
Drive Drive Motor RH Speed True RMS
Pump This will be the final setting as it will ensure that the
Tier 4f, 4i, 3 Tier 2 drive pump is fully stroking and drawing maximum
165cc 1125 rpm 1074 rpm horsepower, but will prevent excess current from
210cc 1430 rpm 1365 rpm delaying the pump response.
23. The final pump max current should be:
615E-020

A Earlier Design Coils
• 530-560 mA for drive pumps with earlier design

20. Use the computer display to reset the Pump Max coils.
Current as follows.
BUTTON ~ADJUST~ Hydrostatic Drive Group
Adjust ~ Max Pump Current. Refer to MAIN MENU
PAGE ~ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for more
information
21. Begin with the pump max current set to 600 mA, A
then lower in 10 mA increments repeating steps 14
to 20 until the drive motor speed drops by at least 7
rpm from the value found in the previous adjustment
3 consecutive times. 630E-193
Example results are shown in Table 5. Drive Pump (Later)

A Later Design Coils
• 560-600 mA for drive pumps with later design

coils.
Table 5 Example results for setting Drive Pump Max Current (later coil results shown)
Drive Motor Drive Motor
Drive Pump RH Speed RH Speed Notes
Max Current 165cc pump 210cc pump
600 mA 1121 rpm 1426 rpm < Maximum speed control @
590 mA 1119 rpm 1425 rpm
580 mA 1120 rpm 1430 rpm
570 mA 1120 rpm 1425 rpm
560 mA 1119 rpm 1425 rpm
550 mA 1111 rpm 1414 rpm < Decrease ≥ 7rpm for 1st time
540 mA 1100 rpm 1400 rpm < Verify Drive Motor rpm decreased ≥ 7rpm
530 mA 1083 rpm 1392 rpm < Verify Drive Motor rpm decreased ≥ 7rpm
560 mA 1119 rpm 1423 rpm < Increase to final setting from 1st time decrease ≥ 7rpm
8.60
press OK.
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
procedures only.
8.61
J. PARK BRAKE RELEASE TIME
8. Use the computer display to observe:

1. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch. • Park Brake Release Time
2. Remove the articulation lock bar. Using the computer display from any screen MENU
3. Check that all personnel are clear of the machine BUTTON – MEASURE – Engage/Release Time
before starting the engine. Group. Refer to MAIN MENU PAGE – MEASURE
4. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine start-up. MENU in SECTION 6 for more information
5. Insert the ignition key. 9. Move the machine to a suitable* area to perform this
6. Start the engine. procedure.
7. Ensure the program mode is set to NORMAL. *NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and
navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE 10. Fully depress the drive pedal for forward travel for 5
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER seconds. Wait 5 seconds and fully depress the drive
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2. pedal for forward travel again for 5 seconds
11. Repeat previous step 6 times.
IMPORTANT !
When setup program modes are chosen an 12. Record highest value for Park Brake Release Time.
information message is shown on the electronic 13. Park Brake Release Time should be 250 ms or less.
14. If Park Brake Release Time is greater the maximum
In each program mode some controls are values above contact Tigercat Customer Service.
deactivated for safety during setup procedures. 15. Engage the parking brake.
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the 16. Turn OFF the engine.
8.62
HYDROSTATIC SETUP PROCEDURE H. RH Drive Motor Max Current
EHS TRANSMISSION MACHINES Right drive motor max current may be adjusted
DO NOT adjust drive motor and drive pump pressure independently (sections PREPARATION H,I,J).
settings without first confirming the need to do so. I. Drive Pump Max Current
All motor adjustments must be performed on BOTH Drive pump max current may be adjusted
MOTORS. independently of other procedures.
The hydrostatic setup procedure is a series of steps that J. LH Drive Motor Max Current
must be done in a proper sequence to achieve optimum Left drive motor max current may be adjusted
performance from the machine. Any deviation from the independently of other procedures.
procedures could present a safety hazard, damage K. Clutch Max Current / Clutch Engagement Current
components and/or affect the operation of the machine.
The clutch max current and clutch engagement
Setup Preparation. current may be adjusted independently of other
procedures.
Setup preparation is required prior to performing all
drive pump and drive motor adjustments (sections L. Clutch Engagement and Parking Brake Release
B,C,D,E,F,G,H). Test
The clutch engagement and parking brake release
A. Drive Pump Charge Pressure. test may be performed independently of other
Drive pump charge pressure may be checked procedures.
independently of other procedures. Refer also
to DRIVE PUMP PRESSURE CHECKS in THIS
SECTION. WARNING
B. Drive Pump Hydraulic Neutral
Drive pump hydraulic neutral may be checked
and adjusted independently (sections
PREPARATION,B,H,I,J). To prevent injury caused by accidental steering
C. Drive Pump Beginning of Displacement of the machine when setting pressures, make
sure the articulation lock bar is held securely in
Drive pump hydraulic beginning of displacement
place by the lynch pins provided.
may be checked and adjusted independently
(sections PREPARATION,C,H,I,J).
IMPORTANT !
D. Drive Pump Maximum Displacement • When installing a new or rebuilt motor, ensure
Drive pump maximum displacement may be minimum displacement screw is set correctly.
checked and adjusted independently (sections • Improper adjustment of minimum displacement
PREPARATION,D,H,I,J). adjusting screw can result in motor failure due to
E. Drive Pump High Pressure Relief. overspeeding.
Drive pump high pressure relief may be • It may be necessary to verify the length of adjusting
checked and adjusted independently (sections screw used by removing and measuring the screw.
PREPARATION,E,H,I,J)..
F. Drive Motor Beginning of Displacement
Motor Beginning of displacement may be
PREPARATION,F,H,I,J).
G. Drive Motor Maximum Speed/Minimum
Displacement
Motor maximum speed/minimum displacement may
be checked and adjusted independently (sections
PREPARATION,G,H,I,J).
8.63
HYDROSTATIC SETUP SHEET – EHS TRANSMISSION
Make copies to use as a guide and a record of each setup.
Date
Serial Number
Technician
Setup Preparation
□ Ensure orifices have been removed from M1 ports in both motors
□ Ensure drive motor minimum displacement set screws on the left and right drive motors are set correctly.
□ Turn in the Pressure Override Screw fully and back out ¼ turn on both drive motors
□ Ensure latest IQAN program is installed on the MD3
□ Use IQANrun to login to the MD3. (Use IQANrun2 for Tier 3 and Tier 4i. Use IQANrun3 for Tier 2/Tier 4F)
□ Maximize pump and motor currents (Hydrostatic Drive adjust group)
□ Set RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA
□ Set LH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA
□ Ensure Engine High Idle is set to 2200 rpm (Tier 2 set to 2100 rpm)
□ Ensure Auto rpm is set to Max rpm
□ Check maximum speed control readings (Travel Speed Control MAC 0% to 100%)
A. Drive pump charge pressure B. Drive pump Hydraulic neutral C. Drive pump beginning of displacement
Forward/Reverse
psi or bar psi or bar mA
Drive Pump Drive Pressure Drive Pressure Fwd VIN
Charge Pressure Forward start to increase
Drive Pressure Drive Pressure Rev VIN
Reverse start to increase
D. Drive pump maximum E. Drive pump high pressure relief F. Drive motor beginning of displacement
displacement Forward/Reverse METHOD A mA
rpm psi or bar Right Motor shifting point
Drive Motor RH Drive Pressure Left Motor shifting point
Speed Forward Fwd VIN METHOD B psi or bar mA
Drive Motor RH Drive Pressure Left Motor M1 port pressure
Speed Reverse Rev VIN Right Motor M1 port pressure
Drive Pressure VIN
G. Drive motor maximum

speed/minimum
Right Motor Left Motor

Drive Motor Speed (rpm)
Exposed length(mm)
H. Right Drive Motor Max Current I. Drive pump Max Current J. Left Drive Motor Max Current
Right Drive Motor Max Current Drive Pump Max Current Left Drive Motor Max Current
RH Motor RH Motor RH Motor RH Drive Motor Pump Max RH Drive LH Motor LH Drive Motor
Max Current Max Current Max Current Speed (rpm) Current Motor Max Current Speed
(165cc) (210cc) (210cc with Speed (rpm)
200cc right
motor)
1300 mA 1300 mA 1300 mA 600 mA 1300 mA
590 mA
810 mA 720 mA 840 mA 580 mA 1220 mA
800 mA 710 mA 830 mA 570 mA 1210 mA
790 mA 700 mA 820 mA 560 mA 1200 mA
780 mA 690 mA 810 mA 550 mA 1190 mA
770 mA 680 mA 800 mA 540 mA 1180 mA
760 mA 670 mA 790 mA 530 mA 1170 mA
750 mA 660 mA 780 mA 520 mA 1160 mA
740 mA 650 mA 770 mA 510 mA 1150 mA
730 mA 640 mA 760 mA EARLIER PUMP Final should be: 1140 mA
720 mA 630 mA 750 mA COILS 530-560 mA 1130 mA
710 mA 620 mA 740 mA Final should be: 1120 mA
700 mA 610 mA 730 mA LATER PUMP COILS 560-600 mA 1110 mA
1100 mA
Final should be: Final should be: be:
720-790 mA 630-700 mA 750-820 mA Final should be:
1120-1200 mA
K. Clutch max current/clutch engagement current

Clutch manifold Gauge port psi or bar
Clutch max current # plates mA
Clutch engagement current # plates mA
L. Clutch engagement and park release test

Clutch Pressure VIN: @140 mA & @180 mA psi or bar psi or bar
Clutch Pressure VIN: @ 470 mA psi or bar
Clutch Engagement time ms
Park Brake Release time ms
COMMENTS:
8.64
SETUP PREPARATION
NOTE: This procedure as written can be completed with "X"
all four wheels on the ground.
A clear open area with fairly flat ground and at least 80
m (250 ft) of space to drive the machine during setup is
required to complete some sections of this procedure
with all four wheels on the ground.
DIM X
If an open flat area of sufficient size is not available
Drive Motor Minimum Displacement Screw "X" Dimension
hydrostatic setup can also be completed with all four
wheels lifted clear of the ground on suitable stands. The “X” dimension is the measured from the top of
1. Park the machine on level ground. the locknut to the end of the exposed screw. Always
check the overall length of the adjusting screw
2. Lower grapple and dozer blade to rest firmly on the
before setting the “X” dimension.
ground.
3. Engage the parking brake. Table 1
4. Turn OFF the engine. X = setting
Minimum 210CC
5. Remove the ignition key. PUMP
displacement 165cc 210cc
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. screw length (with
PUMP PUMP
200cc RH
motor)
8. The shifting time of the Drive Motors is controlled by 110 mm 20 mm 11 mm 15 mm
the computer controls system software, not using RH MOTOR
90 mm 0 mm N/A N/A
hydraulic timing orifices.
LH MOTOR 50 mm 17 mm 17 mm 17 mm
If installing a new or rebuilt motor ensure orifices are
out of M1 port on both Drive Motors. 604C/610C/615C, 620D, 610E/615E/620E/625E
9. Ensure the drive motor minimum displacement machines are equipped with a 165cc drive pump.
set screws on the RH and LH drive motors are set 630E/635E machines are equipped with a 210cc
correctly for the machine configuration.
drive pump.
632E/635G machines are equipped with a 210cc
B drive pump with a 200cc RH motor.
These measurements are a starting point and may
A
have to be adjusted for proper calibration.
C 10. On both the left and right drive motors, turn the drive
motor POR adjusting screw all the way IN until lightly
seated, then back out 1/4 turn.
D 11. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.
E 13. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position to
615C-031
Drive Motors
A M1 Ports Located on Bottom Left Side of Each Motor
B RH Minimum Displacement Screw
C Beginning Of Displacement Screw
D POR Screw
E LH Minimum Displacement Screw
8.65
14. Connect a PC/Laptop to the MD3 control module
using the proper communication cable, open the
appropriate IQANrun program. Refer to CONNECT
TO THE MD3 WITH IQANrun 2 or IQANrun 3 as
applicable in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL for
connection information.
NOTE: IQANrun 2 (used for Tier 3 and Tier 4i
machine programs) and IQANrun 3 (used for Tier 4F
and Tier 2 machine programs).
15. If you are updating the program refer to the Tigercat
Dealer Website and open the appropriate application
for the machine then update it in the MD3. Refer to
IQAN SOFTWARE – APPLICATION PROGRAM
UPDATES , IQAN SOFTWARE – DOWNLOADING
APPLICATIONS FROM DEALER WEBSITE and
IQANrun – UPDATING APPLICATION in SECTION
6 of THIS MANUAL. Proceed to step 16.
If you are not updating the program proceed to step
16 .
NOTE: Update of the program may be required
as a result of PSB updates, program improvement
updates or other component updates.
16. Login to the application from the MD3 to access the
hydrostatic drive adjust group. Refer to IQANrun –
LOGIN in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL.
18. For accurate setup it is necessary to temporarily

increase motor maximum current settings.
Adjust the LH Motor Max Current as high as it will go
and press OK.
Adjust the RH Motor Max Current as high as it will
go and press OK.
17. For accurate setup it is necessary to temporarily Using the computer display from any screen MENU
increase the pump maximum current setting. BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Adjust
Group – LH Motor Max Current or RH Motor Max
Adjust the Pump Max Current as high as it will go
Current. Refer to MAIN MENU PAGE ~ADJUST
and press OK.
MENU in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL for more
Using the computer display from any screen MENU information.
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Group
PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 of THIS
8.66
19. Set RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA and 21. For accurate setup it is necessary to ensure Engine
press OK. High Idle is set to 2200 rpm (Tier 2 only 2100 rpm).
Using the computer display from any screen MENU Using the computer display from any screen MENU
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Adjust BUTTON – ADJUST – Engine Adjust – Engine
Group – RH mA Motor Reg Setup. Refer to MAIN High Idle. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
MENU PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for MENU- ENGINE SETTINGS – ENGINE HIGH IDLE
more information. ADJUST in SECTION 2 for more information.
20. Set LH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA and 22. For accurate setup it is necessary to ensure Auto
press OK. rpm is set to Max rpm.
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Adjust BUTTON – ADJUST – Engine Adjust – Engine
Group – LH mA Motor Reg Setup. Refer to MAIN High Idle. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
MENU PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for MENU- ENGINE SETTINGS – ENGINE HIGH IDLE
more information. ADJUST in SECTION 2 for more information.
8.67
and at its highest setting ( ) the reading should be
100%.
Using the computer display press the menu button
, press Measure (F2) then select the Drive/
HP test group. Refer to COMPUTER – MAIN
MENU PAGE - MEASURE MENU – EXAMPLE -
MEASURE MENU in SECTION 2.
in THIS SECTION.
23. Ensure the program mode is set to NORMAL.

– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2 of the
OPERATOR'S MANUAL.
IMPORTANT !
24. Check speed control channel readings (Travel

Speed Control MAC) in the Drive HP Test Group.
When the maximum speed control is at its lowest
setting ( ) the reading should be should be 0%
8.68
A. DRIVE PUMP CHARGE PRESSURE 610E/615E
CHARGE test port.
A
B
7. Check charge pressure. 610E-016
Reading should be 300-400 psi (21-28 bar) @ low Charge Pressure Test Port
idle. A Charge Pressure Filter
B Charge Test Port
8. If charge pressure readings are not correct check 620E/625E/630E/635E
the charge filter for proper operation.
The charge pressure is non-adjustable.
A
10. Remove the ignition key. B

620E-051
port. Charge Pressure Test Port
B Charge Test Port
600C/600D SERIES
615C-039

B Charge Test Port
632E/635G SERIES
632E-036

B Charge Test Port
8.69
B. DRIVE PUMP HYDRAULIC NEUTRAL Pump Neutral Adjustment (if Required)
Check for Correct Pump Neutral Adjustment 11. Remove the ignition key.
1. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch. 12. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
D
A B C E
F
Y
630E-193
Drive Pump (Later)

D MS (MP on Bottom)
4. Use the computer display to view Forward and F Charge Pressure Relief
Reverse drive pressure information from the cab.
From the main menu select INFORMATION 13. Two 0-600 psi (0-41 bar) gauges are required to
perform this adjustment (or a single differential
MODE MENU (F3). Forward and Reverse pressure gauge may be used).
drive pressure displayed on this screen. Refer to
14. Connect 0-600 psi (0-41 bar) gauges to the MP and
COMPUTER – INFORMATION MODE MENU in
MS ports.
6. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine start-up. A
8. Perform the following check:
Engage the parking brake and check to ensure that
the Forward and Reverse drive pressure readings
differ by less than 75 psi (5.2 bar) .
9. Turn the engine OFF. B
10. If the drive pressure readings differ by more than 75
psi (5.2 bar), the drive pump neutral will need to be
reset. Proceed to step 11.
If the pump does not require adjustment proceed to
Section C.
630E-192

A Drive Pump
B Connectors
8.70
18. Start the engine and allow to idle with the parking
brake engaged.
19. Turn the hydraulic neutral adjustment until the
gauge readings are less than 30 psi (2 bar) apart
(preferably equal).
23. Remove the gauges.
24. Reconnect the two connectors on the drive pump.
25. Proceed to Section C.
8.71
C. DRIVE PUMP BEGINNING OF 9. Using IQANrun click on the MEASURE tab, select
DISPLACEMENT Drive/HP Test measure group and observe the
channels:
• Drive Pump Fwd-/Rev+ COUT
2. Remove the articulation lock bar. • Drive Pressure Fwd VIN
3. Insert the ignition key. • Drive Pressure Rev VIN
4. Check that all personnel are clear of the machine 10. Disengage the parking brake.
before starting the engine. 11. Move the machine to a suitable* area to perform this
5. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine start-up. procedure.
6. Start the engine. *NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and
( ).
7. Change the program mode from NORMAL to DRIVE A

IMPORTANT !
information message is shown on the electronic B
In each program mode some controls are Table Title (If Required)
deactivated for safety during setup procedures. A Drive Pressure Increasing
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the B Drive Pump COUT 220-230 mA
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the and watch the Drive Pump COUT value increase
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct in mA. As the value reaches 220-230 mA, Drive
application program on screen as described in Pressure Fwd VIN should start to increase from the
Preparation step 14. original reading.
8.72
D press OK.
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
Z
procedures only.
630E-193
Drive Pump (Later)
D MS (MP on Bottom)
15. If readings are correct proceed to step 18.
If Drive Pressure Fwd VIN increases earlier than 220
mA or later than 230 mA adjustment is required.
16. To adjust Drive Pressure if required:
e. Loosen the lock nut on the forward beginning of
displacement sleeve.
f. Turn the sleeve IN to increase current or OUT to
decrease current.
17. Repeat the steps 12 to 16 for the reverse direction.
8.73
D. DRIVE PUMP MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT
1. Check that all personnel are clear of the Turn ON the
battery disconnect switch. A
A Drive Motor RH Speed FIN

channel:
SECTION 6.
procedure.
7. Change the program mode from NORMAL to
ENGINE HP TEST and press OK. 12. Set the maximum speed control to its lowest setting
( )..
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER With seat facing forward and direction selection
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2. switch in the forward position and apply the drive
pedal all the way to the floor.
IMPORTANT !
When setup program modes are chosen an STEERING WHEEL & STATIONARY SEAT
display until the message is acknowledged. Apply the forward drive pedal all the way to the
floor.
deactivated for safety during setup procedures. 14. Measure the Drive Motor RH Speed FIN.
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the The drive motor speed display should read:
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the Pump
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct Tier 4f, 4i, 3 Tier 2
application program on screen as described in 165cc 725-755 rpm 692-722 rpm
210cc 927-957 rpm 885-915 rpm
210cc 857-895 rpm 815-845 rpm
w/200 cc
RH motor
15. Repeat steps 13 to 14 for the reverse direction.
8.74
D press OK.
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
Z
procedures only.
630E-193
Drive Pump (Later)
D MS (MP on Bottom)
16. If the forward and reverse readings are
approximately equal proceed to step 19. 23. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
If the forward and reverse readings are not equal
adjustment of maximum displacement is required.
e. Adjust the maximum displacement screws as
required.
f. Turn screw IN to decrease setting or OUT to
increase setting (1 turn changes motor speed
reading by 30 rpm).
18. Repeat steps 13 to 17 until readings are correct.
8.75
E. DRIVE PUMP HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF
E
A B C
G
Z
I
F
H
Y
635D-175

A Reverse Maximum Displacement Screw (Forward on Bottom) 8. Change the program mode from NORMAL to DRIVE
PUMP POR SETUP and press OK.
D MS (MP on Bottom) Using the computer display from the main menu
E Forward High Pressure Relief (Reverse on Bottom) navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
F Charge Pressure Relief SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER
G POR Control Pressure Screw – ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2.
H POR Control Pressure Screw
I POR Control Pressure Screw IMPORTANT !
1. For earlier drive pumps POR is non-adjustable. information message is shown on the electronic
Mechanical controls must be disabled as described display until the message is acknowledged.
below, for proper operation of this machine.
Turn drive pump POR controls, items 'G' and
'H', all the way IN. These screws will remain
permanently disabled.
Turn the drive pump POR control, item 'I', all 9. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the
the way OUT (it is mechanically restricted from MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct
being removed completely). application program on screen as described in
For later drive pumps POR is non-adjustable and
pumps are not equipped with mechanical controls.
8.76
10. Using IQANrun click on the MEASURE tab, select 19. To find the average relief pressure, select the
Drive/HP Test measure group and observe the Drive Pressure Fwd channel below the graph page
channels: (the graph data for the selected channel will be
• Drive Pressure Fwd VIN highlighted or bold when selected and the statistics
will be shown to the right.
• Drive Pressure Rev VIN
The True RMS of the selected portion of the graph
Refer to IQANrun – MEASURE/GRAPH in should read:
about graphing. Drive Drive Pressure True RMS
Pump psi bar
12. Move the machine to a suitable* area to perform this 165cc 6200-6400 427-441
procedure. 210cc 6500-6700 448-461
at least 80 m (250 ft) of space to drive the machine. 20. The relief valves on this pump are cartridge style,
factory set and nonadjustable.
13. Start measuring. 21. Repeat steps 13 to 19 for the reverse direction
14. JOYSTICK STEERING & ROTATING SEAT (Drive Pressure Rev).
With seat facing forward and direction selection POR is non-adjustable.
firmly against service brake and apply the drive press OK.
pedal slowly with the right foot.
STEERING WHEEL & STATIONARY SEAT navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
apply the forward drive pedal slowly with the
right foot. IMPORTANT !
15. Pressure reading will stabilize at the relief setting.
operate normally.
Maintain relief pressure for 3 seconds.
16. Release the drive pedal and the service brake. procedures only.
Engage the parking brake.
17. Stop measuring.
18. Drag the time markers to select the section where display until the message is acknowledged.
the pressure stabilized.
8.77
F. DRIVE MOTOR BEGINNING OF D
DISPLACEMENT
In this section two procedures will be described. Tigercat
strongly recommends to proceed as per method “A”. A B C
method.
METHOD A (RECOMMENDED)
E F
5. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine start-up. A Start
B Pause
6. Start the engine. C Stop
7. Change the program mode from NORMAL to DRIVE D Drag Time Markers
PUMP REGULATION SETUP and press OK. E Check to Select Channel
F True RMS
navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE 10. Using IQANrun click on the MEASURE tab, select
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER Hydrostatic Set-up measure group and observe the
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2. channel:
IMPORTANT ! • RH Drive Motor COUT
When setup program modes are chosen an • Drive Motor RH Speed FIN
information message is shown on the electronic Refer to IQANrun – MEASURE/GRAPH in
display until the message is acknowledged. SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL for more information
about graphing.
deactivated for safety during setup procedures. 11. Move the machine to a suitable* area to perform this
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the procedure.
information message. *NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the at least 80 m (250 ft) of space to drive the machine.
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct 12. Start measuring.
Preparation step 14. 13. Disengage the parking brake.
9. Ensure that RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel is set 14. Set the maximum speed control to its highest setting
to 0 mA per Preparation step 19 ( ).
NOTE: LH mA Motor Reg Setup channel remains set 15. JOYSTICK STEERING & ROTATING SEAT
at 0 mA per Preparation step 20. With seat facing forward and direction selection
8.78
Drive Drive Motor RH Speed before expected. To correct adjust beginning of

Pump displacement screw before proceeding. See step 26
Tier 4f, 4i, 3 Tier 2 below
165cc 725-755 rpm 692-722 rpm
210cc 927-957 rpm 885-915 rpm
210cc 857-895 rpm 815-845 rpm
w/200 cc
RH motor
18. Set RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 350 mA.

This is a start point.
19. Begin increasing RH mA Motor Reg Setup until
the Drive Motor RH Speed FIN reading on the MD3
display begins to increase.
17. Check Drive Motor Speed readings with RH mA Example results are shown in Table 2.
Motor Reg setup at 0, 100, 200 and 300 mA. These
readings should be approximately the same. NOTE: Motor Reg Setup should be increased 1 mA
at a time by tapping the up arrow to obtain a graph
Using the computer display from any screen MENU which can be used to find the shifting point easily.
BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Adjust Drive Motor RH Speed FIN reading will oscillate as
Group – RH mA Motor Reg Setup. Refer to MAIN the setting is increased. The shifting point (motor
MENU PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for beginning of displacement) will be the point at which
more information. the reading oscillates at a slightly higher range just
of displacement screw may be out of position. This 20. Continue increasing RH mA Motor Reg Setup well
is rare but may cause the motor to start shifting past 410 mA to make finding the shifting point
easier.
0
723-724 at 0, 100, 200 and 300 mA.
399 723-724
400 724-725
401 723-725
402 723-724
405 726-728
407 729-730
8.79
21. Stop measuring. 25. If the beginning of displacement is within the 400-
22. Engage parking brake 410 mA range proceed to step 28.
23. Select channel Drive Motor RH Speed FIN and If beginning of displacement is not within the 400-
slowly drag arrow to find the point at which the drive 410 mA range adjustment is required.
motor speed starts to increase. Adjust graph scale
for accuracy if necessary.
B
615C-031
Drive Motors
D POR Screw
NOTE: To Scale RH Speed FIN channel or any other E LH Minimum Displacement Screw
channel. Double click on it. Select MIN and MAX
scale values. 26. To adjust RH motor beginning of displacement
24. At the point of right drive motor beginning of
displacement Drive Motor RH COUT must read 400- b. Remove the ignition key.
410 mA c. Install the articulation lock bar.
630E-204
Graph With Scale Adjusted For Accuracy

A Motor Displacement = Maximum D Beginning of Displacement Shifting Point
B Drive Motor RH Speed FIN E Motor Displacement < Maximum
C Drive Motor LH COUT
8.80
d. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch D
e. Adjust the RH motor beginning of displacement
set screw. .
f. Turn OUT if reading is less than 400 mA. Turn A B C
IN if reading is greater than 410 mA
i. Insert the ignition key. E F

28. Save the final graph for your records
A Start
B Pause
C Stop
D Drag Time Markers
F True RMS

channel:
• LH Drive Motor COUT
about graphing.
. 33. Set the maximum speed control to its highest setting
( ).
29. Reset RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA.

165cc 725-755 rpm 692-722 rpm
210cc 927-957 rpm 885-915 rpm
210cc 857-895 rpm 815-845 rpm
w/200 cc
630E-199 RH motor
Graph Without Scale Adjustment
8.81
36. Check Drive Motor Speed readings with LH mA 37. Set LH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 350 mA.
Motor Reg setup at 0, 100, 200 and 300 mA. These This is a start point.
readings should be approximately the same. 38. Begin increasing LH mA Motor Reg Setup until
If readings are not consistent the motor beginning the Drive Motor RH Speed FIN on the MD3 display
of displacement screw may be out of position. This begins to increase.
is rare but may cause the motor to start shifting NOTE: Motor Reg Setup should be increased 1 mA
before expected. To correct adjust beginning of at a time by tapping the up arrow to obtain a graph
displacement screw before proceeding. See step 44 which can be used to find the shifting point easily.
below. Drive Motor RH Speed FIN reading will oscillate as
the setting is increased. The shifting point (motor
beginning of displacement) will be the point at which
the reading oscillates at a slightly higher range just
Example results are shown in Table 2.
39. Continue increasing RH mA Motor Reg Setup well
past 410 mA to make finding the shifting point
easier.
40. Stop measuring.

0
723-724 at 0, 100, 200 and 300 mA.
399 723-724
400 724-725
401 723-725
402 723-724
405 726-728
407 729-730
8.82
41. Engage parking brake d. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
42. Select channel Drive Motor RH Speed FIN and e. Adjust the RH motor beginning of displacement
slowly drag arrow to find the point at which the drive set screw. .
motor speed starts to increase. Adjust graph scale f. Turn OUT if reading is less than 400 mA. Turn
for accuracy if necessary. IN if reading is greater than 410 mA
47. Reset LH mA Motor Reg Setup channel to 0 mA and
press OK.
Group – RH mA Motor Reg Setup. Refer to MAIN
MENU PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 of
the SERVICE MANUAL for more information.
NOTE: To Scale RH Speed FIN channel or any other
channel. Double click on it. Select MIN and MAX NOTE: RH mA Motor Reg Setup channel remains
scale values. set at 0 mA per Preparation step 19.
43. If the beginning of displacement is within the 400- 48. Turn OFF the engine.
410 mA range proceed to step 46 . 49. Remove the ignition key.
If beginning of displacement is not within the 400- 50. Install the articulation lock bar.
Proceed to section G step 1 if motor beginning of
B displacement has been set successfully using method A.
615C-031
Drive Motors
D POR Screw
44. To adjust LH motor beginning of displacement

8.83
METHOD B (ALTERNATE METHOD/CHECK) 6. Insert the ignition key.
NOTE: In this section two procedures to set drive motor 7. Start the engine.
beginning of displacement will be described. Tigercat 8. Wheels may turn during this procedure. If the
strongly recommends to proceed as per method “A”. machine is on the ground place the dozer blade
Method “B” can be performed as a double check against a hard stop (a stump can be used as a hard
method. stop).
B C
620E-064

A Support Brace (3291B)
B Safety Cable
C Cab Locking Pin
1. Tilt the cab over and install the cab tilt support brace.
MOTOR SETUP and press OK.
B navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
A
IMPORTANT !
C When setup program modes are chosen an
D
E Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the
615C-031
Drive Motors 10. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the
A M1 Ports Located on Bottom Left Side of Each Motor MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct
B RH Minimum Displacement Screw application program on screen as described in
C Beginning Of Displacement Screw Preparation step 14.
D POR Screw
2. Connect two 0-5000 psi (0 - 345 bar) gauges to the

RM1 (Right Motor M1) and LM1 (Left Motor M1) test
ports.
8.84
15. The drive system should build and then maintain a
constant pressure. The wheels may creep at a slow
speed.
A 16. The drive motors will not begin to displace until the
LM1 and RM1 control pressures on the gauges
reach half of the system pressure.
For example, if the system pressure stabilizes at
2600 psi (180 bar) while holding the service brake
and drive pedal in the drive motor setup program
mode , the motors will not be physically shifting until
the control pressure reaches 1300 psi (90 bar).
B . Drive Motor LH COUT and Drive Motor RH COUT
will increase.
The motor current readings should start increasing
from 0 mA.
Continue increasing the maximum speed control
setting until one of the M1 gauges reaches half of
A Drive Motor Current 400-410 mA
B Drive Pressure Stable system pressure. Note the current value displayed
on the MD3 for the first motor.
measure group and observe channels: NOTE: If the Drive Motor LH COUT and Drive Motor
RH COUT readings increase in different proportions
• Drive Pressure Fwd VIN ensure the LH Drive Motor Current and RH Drive
• Drive Motor RH COUT Motor Current are adjusted to as high as it they will
• Drive Motor LH COUT
go, as described in Preparation step 18.
SECTION 6 for more information. 18. Continue increasing the maximum speed control
setting until the second M1 gauge reaches half
12. Disengage the parking brake. of system pressure. Again note the current value
displayed on the MD3 for the second motor.
( ). 19. Although both motors do not have to reach half of
system pressure at the same time or amperage,
each motor should reach half of system pressure
With seat facing forward and direction selection no earlier than 400 mA and no later than 410 mA.
switch in the forward position, apply left foot If both motors are set correctly, proceed to step 25.
pedal all the way to the floor with the right foot. If either motor does not meet this requirement the
beginning of displacement screw on the motor(s)
STEERING WHEEL & STATIONARY SEAT must be adjusted, proceed to next step.
Apply left foot firmly against service brake and NOTE: It is NOT NECESSARY for both motors
apply the forward drive pedal all the way to the to have the same settings. Motors may perform
floor with the right foot. differently from one machine to another or even from
one motor to another on the same machine.
8.85
20. With the service brake and drive pedal fully applied, 24. Change the program mode back to NORMAL and
adjust the maximum speed control so that LH Drive press OK.
Motor COUT and RH Drive Motor COUT channel
readings are 405 mA.
21. With the aid of an assistant maintain this condition SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER
and adjust the left motor beginning of displacement – ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2.
screw until the gauge pressure is half of the Drive
Pressure FWD [psi] value. IMPORTANT !
Adjust the right motor to the same pressure.
operate normally.
Release the drive pedal and service brake.
NOTE: While adjusting the second motor, it may be procedures only.
difficult to achieve exactly half of the Drive Pressure
FWD [psi] value while trying to zero in the pressure,
the gauge will continue to move and settle either
above or below half of system pressure. If this is the
case, have the beginning of displacement screw set In each program mode some controls are
as close as possible to this “switch point”. deactivated for safety during setup procedures.
22. Return the maximum speed control to its lowest Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the
setting ( ). information message.
Repeat steps 16 to 25 until each motor reaches half 25. Engage the parking brake
of system pressure no earlier than 400 mA and no 26. Turn OFF the engine.
later than 410 mA.
23. Verify beginning of displacement settings 28. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch
a. With the service brake and drive pedal fully 29. Remove the gauges from the motor test ports.
applied, adjust the maximum speed control so
that LH Drive Motor COUT and RH Drive Motor 30. Remove the cab tilt support brace and return the cab
COUT channel readings are 385 mA. to its normal position.
b. Take an M1 gauge reading.
c. Repeat for 390 mA, 395 mA, 400 mA, 405 mA,
410 mA.
d. Example results are shown in Table 3.
e. Verify that each motor reaches half of system
pressure no earlier than 400 mA and no later
than 410 mA.
Table 3 Example results for Verification of Beginning of Displacement Settings

Drive Pressure Drive Pressure
Drive Motor M1 Pressure M1 Pressure
VIN VIN
COUT (mA)
psi bar
385 2600 0 180 0
390 2600 500 180 34
400 2600 1100 180 76
405 2600 1300= ½ 2600 180 90= ½ 180
410 2600 1500 180 103
8.86
G. MOTOR MAXIMUM SPEED/MINIMUM D
DISPLACEMENT
2. Remove the articulation lock bar. A B C

E F
A Start
B Pause
C Stop
D Drag Time Markers
F True RMS

measure group and observe channels:
• Drive Motor RH Speed FIN.
procedure.
7. Change the program mode from NORMAL to MAX
CURRENT SETUP and press OK. *NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and
navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE 12. Set the maximum speed control to its highest setting
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2. 13. Start measuring.
IMPORTANT ! 14. JOYSTICK STEERING & ROTATING SEAT
switch in the forward position, fully
apply the drive pedal.
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the for 3 seconds. Release the drive pedal and allow the
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct wheels to stop.
Preparation step 14. 15. Stop measuring.
17. To find the average maximum drive motor speed at
, select the Drive Motor RH Speed channel at the
8.87
18. The True RMS of the selected portion of the graph
should read 4000 rpm ± 50.
B
If the value recorded does not fall into this range, the
minimum displacement screw must be adjusted on
the RH drive motor. A
NOTE: At top speed, Drive Motor LH Speed FIN C

should be 0 rpm.
19. If the average top speed is acceptable, proceed to
step 22. D
If the average top speed is not acceptable

adjustment is required. E
20. To adjust maximum displacement if required 615C-031
a. Turn the engine OFF. Drive Motors

b. Remove the ignition key. B RH Minimum Displacement Screw
c. Install the articulation lock bar. C Beginning Of Displacement Screw
D POR Screw
g. Turning each screw OUT 1/4 turn should

increase the top speed by approximately 100
rpm. Turning each screw IN 1/4 turn should
A
decrease the top speed by approximately 100
rpm.
B C h. Remove the cab tilt support brace and return the
cab to its normal position.
i. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch
j. Remove the articulation lock bar
k. Insert the ignition key.
l. Start the engine.
620E-064 21. Repeat steps 12 to 20 until the RH Drive Motor
Partial Tilt with Cab Support Brace average top speed falls in the correct range, 4000
A Support Brace (3291B) rpm ± 50.
B Safety Cable 22. Change the program mode back to NORMAL and
C Cab Locking Pin press OK.
e. Tilt the cab over and install the cab tilt support Using the computer display from the main menu
brace. navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
f. Adjust the RH and LH drive motors as required. SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
procedures only.
8.88
8.89
H. RH DRIVE MOTOR MAX CURRENT
10. For accurate setup temporarily adjust the pump

maximum current setting to 350 mA and press OK.
Group – Max Pump Current. Refer to MAIN MENU
PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for more
information.

CURRENT SETUP and press OK. A B C
E F
IMPORTANT !
deactivated for safety during setup procedures. A Start
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the B Pause
information message. C Stop
D Drag Time Markers
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the E Check to Select Channel
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct F True RMS
Preparation step 14. 11. Select Measure and scroll to the Drive/HP Test
9. Ensure the RH Drive Motor Current is adjusted to as measure group and observe channel:
high as it will go, as described in Preparation step • Drive Motor RH Speed FIN
18.
8.90
13. Move the machine to a suitable* area to perform this 20. The True RMS of the selected portion of the graph
procedure. should be approximately:
*NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and Drive Drive Motor RH Speed
at least 80 m (250 ft) of space to drive the machine. Pump True RMS
14. Set the maximum speed control to its highest setting Tier 4f, 4i, 3 Tier 2
( ).
165cc 1655 rpm 1579 rpm
15. Start measuring. 210cc 1445 rpm 1379 rpm
16. JOYSTICK STEERING & ROTATING SEAT 210cc 1343 rpm 1282 rpm
With seat facing forward and direction selection w/200 cc
switch in the forward position, fully apply the RH motor
drive pedal.
Fully apply the forward drive pedal.
for 3 seconds.
Release the drive pedal , allow the wheels to stop
and engage the parking brake.
17. Stop measuring.
the Drive Motor RH Speed graph where the machine
was at top speed.
19. To find the average maximum right drive motor
speed at , select the Drive Motor RH Speed
channel at the bottom of the graph page (the graph
data for the selected channel will be highlighted or
bold when selected and the statistics will be shown
to the right. 21. Use the computer display to reset the RH Motor
Max Current as follows.
Table 4 Example results for setting RH Drive Motor Max Current
RH Motor Max
RH Motor Max Drive Motor RH Motor Max Current Drive Motor Observations
Current RH Speed Current 210cc pump RH Speed
165cc pump 165cc pump 210cc pump w/200cc right motor 210cc pump
1300 mA 1667 rpm 1300 mA 1300 mA 1440 rpm < Maximum speed control @
810 mA 1665 rpm 720 mA 840 mA 1445 rpm
800 rpm 1667 rpm 710 mA 830 mA 1440 rpm
790 mA 1665 rpm 700 mA 820 mA 1445 rpm
780 mA 1670 rpm 690 mA 810 mA 1447 rpm
770 mA 1660 rpm 680 mA 800 mA 1448 rpm
760 mA 1650 rpm 670 mA 790 mA 1445 rpm
750 mA 1660 rpm 660 mA 780 mA 1440 rpm
740 mA 1661 rpm 650 mA 770 mA 1443 rpm
730 mA 1649 rpm 640 mA 760 mA 1430 rpm < Final setting - decrease ≥ 7rpm for 1st time
720 mA 1638 rpm 630 mA 750 mA 1418 rpm < Verify Drive Motor rpm decreased ≥ 7rpm
8.91
information
22. Lower the motor max current to start point:
• 810 mA (165cc pump)
• 720 mA (210cc pump)
• 840 mA (210 cc pump w/200 cc right motor)
23. Continue lowering the motor max current in 10
mA increments and repeating steps 13 to 19 until
the RH drive motor speed drops by at least 7 rpm
from the value found in the previous adjustment 3
consecutive times.
24. Increase the motor max current by 30 mA to the final
setting (drop of 7 rpm for the 1st time). This will be
the final setting as it will ensure the drive motors will
be responsive to sudden changes in torque load.
25. Final RH Motor Max Current should be:
• 720-790 mA (165cc pump)
• 630-700 mA (210cc pump)
• 750-820 mA (210cc pump w/200cc right motor)
NOTE: Tier 2 setting may be higher by up to 40 mA.
press OK.
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
procedures only.
32. Drive pump max current must be reset correctly to
complete this procedure. Proceed to SECTION I.
8.92
I. DRIVE PUMP MAX CURRENT D
A B C
E F
A Start
B Pause
C Stop
D Drag Time Markers
F True RMS

7. Change the program mode from NORMAL to DRIVE procedure.
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER 13. Set the maximum speed control to its highest setting
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2. ( ).
IMPORTANT ! 14. Start measuring.

display until the message is acknowledged. switch in the forward position, fully apply the
drive pedal.
8. Ensure the Pump Max Current is adjusted to as for 3 seconds.
high as it will go and both RH and LH mA Motor Reg
Setup are set to 0 mA as described in Preparation Release the drive pedal, allow the wheels to stop
steps 17, 18 and 19. and engage the parking brake.
16. Stop measuring.
application program on screen as described in 17. Drag the time markers to select a smooth section of
Preparation step 14. the graph where the machine was at top speed.
18. To find the average maximum drive RH motor speed
at , select the Drive Motor RH Speed channel at
the bottom of the graph page (the graph data for the
8.93
19. The True RMS of the selected portion of the graph 22. Increase the pump max current by 30 mA to the final
should be approximately: setting (10 mA above the drop of 7 rpm for the 1st
time).
Drive Drive Motor RH Speed True RMS
Pump This will be the final setting as it will ensure that the
Tier 4f, 4i, 3 Tier 2 drive pump is fully stroking and drawing maximum
165cc 743 rpm 709 rpm horsepower, but will prevent excess current from
210cc 945 rpm 902 rpm delaying the pump response.
210cc 890 rpm 849 rpm 23. The final pump max current should be:
w/200 cc
RH motor
615E-020

A Earlier Design Coils
• 530-560 mA for drive pumps with earlier design

coils.
20. Use the computer display to reset the Pump Max

Current as follows.
Adjust ~ Max Pump Current. Refer to MAIN MENU A
information
21. Begin with the pump max current set to 600 mA,
630E-193
then lower in 10 mA increments repeating steps 14
to 20 until the drive motor speed drops by at least 7 Drive Pump (Later)
rpm from the value found in the previous adjustment A Later Design Coils
3 consecutive times.
• 560-600 mA for drive pumps with later design
Example results are shown in Table 5. coils.
Table 5 Example results for setting Drive Pump Max Current (later coil results shown)
Drive Motor
Drive Motor Drive Motor
RH Speed
RH Speed RH Speed Notes
Drive Pump 210cc pump
165cc pump 210cc pump
Max Current w/200cc right motor
600 mA 743 rpm 943 rpm 895 rpm < Maximum speed control @
590 mA 742 rpm 945 rpm 894 rpm
580 mA 741 rpm 945 rpm 895 rpm
570 mA 740 rpm 943 rpm 895 rpm
560 mA 739 rpm 945 rpm 894 rpm
550 mA 723 rpm 928 rpm 887 rpm < Decrease ≥ 7rpm for 1st time
540 mA 700 rpm 896 rpm 880 rpm < Verify Drive Motor rpm decreased ≥ 7rpm
530 mA 680 rpm 875 rpm 875 rpm < Verify Drive Motor rpm decreased ≥ 7rpm
560 mA 740 rpm 928 rpm 894 rpm < Increase to final setting from 1st time decrease ≥ 7rpm
8.94
press OK.
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
procedures only.
8.95
J. LH DRIVE MOTOR MAX CURRENT D
A B C
E F
A Start
B Pause
C Stop
D Drag Time Markers
F True RMS

• Drive Motor LH Speed FIN
procedure.
CURRENT SETUP and press OK.
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER 13. Set the maximum speed control to its lowest setting
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2. ( ).
IMPORTANT ! 14. Start measuring.
switch in the forward position, fully apply the
In each program mode some controls are drive pedal.
information message. Fully apply the forward drive pedal.
8. Ensure that a PC/Laptop is still connected to the Allow the machine to reach top speed and maintain
MD3 with IQANrun program open and the correct for 3 seconds.
Preparation step 14. Release the drive pedal , allow the wheels to stop
9. Ensure the LH Drive Motor Current is adjusted to as and engage the parking brake.
high as it will go, as described in Preparation step 16. Stop measuring.
18.
the Drive Motor LH Speed graph where the machine
was at top speed.
8.96
18. To find the average maximum left drive motor speed BUTTON – ADJUST – Hydrostatic Drive Adjust
at select the Drive Motor LH Speed channel at
Group – LH Motor Max Current. Refer to MAIN
the bottom of the graph page (the graph data for the
selected channel will be highlighted or bold when MENU PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for
selected and the statistics will be shown to the right. more information
19. The True RMS of the selected portion of the graph 21. Lower the motor max current to 1200 mA then in 10
should be approximately: mA increments repeating steps 14 to 20 until the LH
drive motor speed drops by at least 50 rpm from the
Drive Drive Motor LH Speed value found in the previous adjustment.
Pump True RMS
Tier 4f, 4i, 3 Tier 2
22. Increase the LH motor max current to the final
165cc 1275 rpm 1258 rpm setting 10 mA above the point the LH drive motor
210cc 3300 rpm 3150 rpm speed drops by at least 50 rpm.
210cc 2780 rpm 2654 rpm 23. The final LH motor max current should be
w/200 cc 1120-1200 mA.
RH motor 24. Change the program mode back to NORMAL and
press OK.
IMPORTANT !
operate normally.
procedures only.
20. Use the computer display to reset the LH Motor Max information message.
Current as follows.
Table 6 Example results for setting LH Drive Motor Max Current
LH Drive Drive Motor LH rpm
Motor Drive Motor LH rpm Drive Motor LH rpm 210cc pump Notes
Max Current 165cc pump 210cc pump w/200cc right motor
1300 mA 2576 rpm 3304 rpm 2780 rpm < Maximum speed control @
1210 mA 2580 rpm 3300 rpm 2781 rpm
1200 mA 2588 rpm 3292 rpm 2779 rpm
1190 mA 2576 rpm 3288 rpm 2781 rpm
1180 mA 2575 rpm 3285 rpm 2760 rpm
1170 mA 2579 rpm 3290 rpm 2770 rpm
1160 mA 2578 rpm 3270 rpm 2781 rpm
1150 mA 2574 rpm 3275 rpm 2770 rpm
1140 mA 2575 rpm 3274 rpm 2760 rpm
1130 mA 2581 rpm 3275 rpm 2770 rpm
1120 mA 2505 rpm 3200 rpm 2715 rpm < Drive motor rpm decreased ≥ 50 rpm
1110 mA 2459 rpm 3120 rpm 2600 rpm < Verify Drive Motor rpm decreased
1100 mA 2400 rpm 3000 rpm 2520 rpm < Verify Drive Motor rpm decreased
1130 mA 2581 rpm 3272 rpm 2770 rpm < Increase to final setting
8.97
8.98
K. CLUTCH MAX CURRENT / CLUTCH
ENGAGEMENT CURRENT
NOTE: This section applies to two versions of the EHS
transmission. To determine which version is in the
machine locate the serial number stamp on the gearbox A B
housing or patent plate.
C
EHS 4-Plate Serial Numbers
44862BXXXXX
52424BXXXXX
53769BXXXXX
54145BXXXXX
EHS 6-Plate Serial Numbers
615C-037
60765BXXXXX
Any Gearbox w/Black Serial Number Plate Clutch Manifold
A Clutch Manifold Relief
B Clutch Manifold Test Port
C Gearbox Serial Number
615C-040
Serial Number Location (Earlier Design)

630E-194
Clutch Manifold Test Port 632E

A Clutch Manifold Test Port

CLUTCH MANIFOLD test port.
615C-042
Serial Number Location (Later Design) ( ).
8.99
8. Change the program mode from NORMAL to MAX 10. Ensure that transmission oil temperature is 100-
CURRENT SETUP and press OK. 120 °F (38-93 °C) before performing this procedure.
Using the computer display from the main menu From the main menu select INFORMATION MODE
navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE MENU (F3). Transmission oil temperature
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER displayed on this screen. Refer to COMPUTER –
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2. INFORMATION MODE MENU in SECTION 2 for
more information.
IMPORTANT !
When setup program modes are chosen an 11. Check clutch manifold relief pressure at low idle. The
information message is shown on the electronic gauge reading should be 850 psi (58.5 bar).
D
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the A B C
application program on screen as described in E F
A Start
B Pause
C Stop
D Drag Time Markers
F True RMS

• Clutch Pressure VIN
SECTION 6.
8.100
13. Use the computer display to adjust the Clutch Max 16. Use the computer display to adjust the Clutch
Current as follows. Engagement Current as follows.
BUTTON – ADJUST – Clutch Adjust Group – BUTTON – ADJUST – Clutch Adjust Group –
Clutch Max Current. Refer to MAIN MENU PAGE – Clutch Engagement Current. Refer to MAIN MENU
ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for more information PAGE – ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for more
information
14. First, before setting Clutch Max Current find the
correct setting for Clutch Engagement Current (to be 17. Adjust the Clutch Engagement Current to match the
used later). value recorded in step 14.
At low idle decrease Clutch Max Current until the Press OK to confirm the setting.
Clutch Pressure VIN reading reaches:
EHS 4-PLATE TRANSMISSION press OK.
425 psi (29 bar). Clutch Max Current will be Using the computer display from the main menu
approximately 450-470 mA. navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
EHS 6-PLATE TRANSMISSION SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER
325 psi (22 bar). Clutch Max Current will be – ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2.
approximately 390-410 mA. IMPORTANT !
Record the Clutch Max Current value. It will be
operate normally.
used later to set the Clutch Engagement Current.
Do not Press OK.
procedures only.
15. Next set Clutch Max Current.
At low idle increase Clutch Max Current until the information message is shown on the electronic
Clutch Pressure VIN reading reaches: display until the message is acknowledged.
EHS 4-PLATE TRANSMISSION In each program mode some controls are
575 psi (40 bar). Clutch Max Current will be deactivated for safety during setup procedures.
approximately 540-560 mA. Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the
EHS 6-PLATE TRANSMISSION information message.
425 psi (29 bar). Clutch Max Current will be 19. Engage the parking brake.
approximately 450-470 mA.
Press OK to confirm the setting. 21. Remove the ignition key.
8.101
L. CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND PARK BRAKE
RELEASE TEST
L1 CLUTCH PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
PERFORMANCE TEST
A B

615C-037 CURRENT SETUP and press OK.
Clutch Manifold Using the computer display from the main menu
A Clutch Manifold Relief navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE
B Clutch Manifold Test Port
C Gearbox Serial Number
IMPORTANT !
A display until the message is acknowledged.
630E-194
Clutch Manifold Test Port 632E

A Clutch Manifold Test Port

CLUTCH MANIFOLD test port.
8.102
9. Ensure that transmission oil temperature is 100- 14. Adjust the Clutch Max Current setting to 0 mA to
120 °F (38-93 °C) before performing this procedure. start.
From the main menu select INFORMATION MODE Using the computer display from any screen MENU
MENU (F3). Transmission oil temperature BUTTON – ADJUST – Clutch Adjust Group –
displayed on this screen. Refer to COMPUTER – Clutch Max Current. Refer to MAIN MENU PAGE –
INFORMATION MODE MENU in SECTION 2 for ADJUST MENU in SECTION 6 for more information.
more information.
15. Adjust the Clutch Max Current setting each of the 12
10. Set the maximum speed control to its lowest setting settings shown in Table 7 and observe the Clutch
( ). Pressure VIN readings for each setting.
11. Check clutch manifold relief pressure at low idle. The 16. Clutch Pressure VIN readings should fall within the
gauge reading should be 850 psi (58.5 bar). expected range for each setting as shown in the
12. If necessary adjust clutch manifold relief pressure. table.
13. Using IQANrun click on the MEASURE tab, select 17. The 4th reading must be greater than the 3rd.
Drive/HP Test measure group and observe the 18. If Clutch Pressure VIN doesn’t fall within range
channels: or 4th reading is not greater that the 3rd reading,
• Clutch Pressure VIN contact Tigercat Customer Service.
19. Reset Clutch Max Current by repeating section K of
this procedure.
Table 7 Clutch Pressure Reducing Valve Performance Test

Expected Clutch
Clutch Max
Pressure VIN Observations
Current mA psi bar
1st 0 0-25 0-1.7
2nd 100 0-25 0-1.7
3rd 140 0-25 0-1.7
4th 180 10-50 0.7-3.4 <- At this point (180 mA) pressure must be greater than previous point (140 mA
5th 220 35-85 2.4-5.9
6th 260 80-130 5.5-8.9
7th 300 135-185 9.3-12.8
8th 340 185-235 12.8-16.2
9th 380 250-308 17.2-21.2
10th 420 310-380 21.3-26.2
11th 470 392-465 27.0-32.1 <- Record this Value on the Hydrostatic Setup Sheet.
12th 520 480-560 33.1-38.6
8.103
L.2 CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT & PARK BRAKE
RELEASE TIME
8. Use the computer display to observe:

• Clutch Engagement Time
• Park Brake Release Time
BUTTON – MEASURE – Engage/Release Time
Group. Refer to MAIN MENU PAGE – MEASURE
MENU in SECTION 6 for more information
procedure.
7. Ensure the program mode is set to NORMAL. *NOTE: A clear open area with fairly flat ground and
navigate to ADJUSTMENT MENU (F2) – SERVICE 10. Fully depress the drive pedal for forward travel for 5
SETTINGS – Program Mode. Refer to COMPUTER seconds. Wait 5 seconds and fully depress the drive
– ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2. pedal for forward travel again for 5 seconds
11. Repeat previous step 6 times.
IMPORTANT !
When setup program modes are chosen an 12. Record highest value for both Clutch Engagement
information message is shown on the electronic Time and Park Brake Release Time.
display until the message is acknowledged. 13. Clutch Engagement Time should be 800 ms or less.
In each program mode some controls are 14. Park Brake Release Time should be 250 ms or less.
deactivated for safety during setup procedures. 15. If either Clutch Engagement Time or Park Brake
Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the Release Time are greater the maximum values
information message. above contact Tigercat Customer Service.
8.104
HYDRAULIC OIL HEATING PROCEDURE 15. Make sure that the area is clear operate
EITHER the arch out or boom down in function
There is a specific procedure to heat up the (whichever you have chosen) and HOLD in the
hydraulic oil in the machine in preparation for operating position, while monitoring the ENGINE
performing pressure measurements and setups. coolant temperature and the HYDRAULIC oil
temperature. Temperatures can be monitored on the
INFORMATION CENTER - IQAN MDM COMPUTER
2. Lower grapple and dozer blade to rest firmly on the DISPLAY (ENGINE TEMP, HYD OIL TEMP). This
ground. should be done at full throttle and will take 10 to 45
3. Engage the parking brake. minutes.
4. Turn OFF the engine. IMPORTANT !
DO NOT leave the machine while heating the oil,
5. Remove the ignition key. as overheating of engine or oil can cause serious
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch damage.
7. Install the articulation lock bar. 16. Ensure that the hydraulic oil temperature is between
120 and 140°F (49 and 60°C).
17. Once the hydraulic oil is up to temperature, proceed
to required hydraulic set-up procedure.
A
IMPORTANT !
Remove the cardboard blocking the oil cooler if
necessary to maintain the proper temperature.
630E-192

A Drive Pump
B Connectors

9. Place a sheet of cardboard in front of oil cooler
section of the heat exchanger. The radiator and
charge air cooler must remain uncovered to prevent
engine overheating.
14. Start the engine and set to high idle.
8.105
8.106
DRIVE MOTOR SPEED SENSOR
INSTALLATION
1. Carefully screw the speed sensor by hand into the
adapter until internal contact is reached with the
gear crown, see DETAIL A.
2. Unscrew the sensor by 90° ±30° (1 to 2 flats), see
DETAIL B.
3. Hold the sensor body in place with a wrench and
tighten the lock nut.
Drive Motor Speed Sensor Installation
8.107
AXLES
MORE INFORMATION TO FOLLOW IN A LATER ISSUE
OF THIS MANUAL. A
Refer to Tigercat Axles Service and Repair Manual.

Refer to Tigercat Differentials Service and Repair
Manual.
Refer to Tigercat Planetaries Service and Repair
632E-001
Manual.
Front Axle
AXLE LUBRICATION A Pinion Seal Grease Fitting
Refer to SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE and SERVICE

AND LUBRICATION POINTS in SECTION 3 for more
information.
A B C D
4634D02
E
Severe Duty Axle Drain and Fill Locations (632E/635G Front Axle)
A Axle Level Check and Fill (Far Side) D Axle Level Check and Fill
B Brake Inspection Port (Far Side) E Axle Drain / Sample Location
C Brake Inspection Port
A B A
C D C
69514B01
B20 Severe Duty Axle Drainand Fill Locations (632E Rear Axle)
A Planetary Level Check and Fill C Planetary Drain / Sample Location
B Differential Level Check And Fill / Brake Inspection Port D Axle Drain / Sample Location
8.108
C D
71542B01
Bogie Axle Fill, Drain and Level Plugs (635G Severe Duty Axle Shown)
A Differential Fill/Level Plug (1 Place) C Differential Drain Plug (1 Place)/ Sample Location
B Bogie Housing Drain Plug (4 Places ) / Sample Locations D Bogie Housings Fill/Level Plug (2 Places)/ Sample Locations
8.109
FRONT AXLE OSCILLATION SHIM CHECK 4. Using a long pry bar between the chassis and the
AND ADJUSTMENT axle housing pry the axle backward. It may be
necessary to tip the axle from side to side to position
1. The axle must be securely bolted to the chassis the axle fully back for a proper reading.
through the axle supports (front and back). Torque
all axle mounting bolts. Refer to TORQUE CHART
in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL.
E620C-34 E620C-36
Remove Grease Hose Use Long Pry Bar
E620C-33
Remove Grease Hose
2. Temporarily remove the two grease hoses from the

axle pivot to prevent grease pressure from affecting E620C-35
the set-up. Plug hose ends to avoid contamination. Between Chassis and Axle Housing
5. Zero the dial indicator.

6. Using a long pry bar between the chassis and
the axle housing pry the axle forward. It may be
necessary to tip the axle from side to side to position
the axle fully forward for a proper reading.
620E-103
Set Dial Indicator
3. Set a dial indicator against the spiral bevel input

pinion shaft on the input end of the axle.
8.110
Care must be taken to ensure that the thrust washer
and shims do not fall.
620E-105
620E-104
Thrust Washer and Shims

A Shims
B Thrust Washer
11. If the measurement was below 0.1 mm (.004 in)

ADD shims to get the required range. A 0.25 mm
(0.010 in) shim will change the reading by 0.25 mm
(0.010 in). Stock shims are 0.25 and 1.0 mm (0.010
and 0.040 in) thick.
12. If the measurement was above 0.4 mm (.014 in)
REMOVE SHIMS to correct the reading. A 0.25 mm
(0.010 in) shim will change the reading by 0.25 mm
620E-106 (0.010 in). Stock shims are 0.25 and 1.0 mm (0.010
Tip Axle Side to Side and 0.040 in) thick.
13. Replace the thrust washer.
7. Read the dial indicator. Axle movement should be
0.1 to 0.4 mm (0.004 to 0.014 in). Check the reading All metal thrust washers can be installed either side
twice by repeating steps 4 to 7. out.
8. If the reading is within the required range go to step 14. Replace the center pivot cover plate. Make sure that
16. the thrust washer and shims do not slide out of place
9. If the reading is not within the required range follow and become damaged. Torque cover bolts (12) to
steps 10 to 15 to adjust. 135 Nm (100 lbf-ft).
15. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to check the adjustment again.
This reading should be checked twice.
16. Reinstall grease hoses in the axle pivot and add
grease until back pressure is felt.
E620C-30
Remove Center Pivot Cover
10. Remove the outer cover plate. Carefully remove

the center pivot cover plate from the axle (12 bolts).
8.111
BOGIE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
1. Ensure the mounting surfaces on both the rear
chassis and bogie axle assembly are clean and free
of damage.
615E-002
2. Use chains positioned as shown for a balanced lift of

the bogie axle assembly to position it for installation.
55379-29
Bottom View
5. Measure the gaps between the differential and
the rear of the differential mounts. Record these
measurements.
6. Choose two shims for each gap that are
approximately 0.127mm (0.005 in) larger than the
measured gap.
The shims have a 0.127mm (0.005 in) taper on one
side. They should be placed back to back so that the
A
tapers face outwards.
55379-30 NOTE: A maximum of three shims may be used if

necessary to fill the measured gap.
A M30 Bolts
3. Install the four M30 bolts through the chassis into

the top of the axle leaving the bolts loose enough to
allow adjustment of the differential position.
4. Position the differential against the front of the
differential mounts.
55379-22
7. Correctly sized shims can be inserted into the gap

about halfway up the taper by hand.
8.112
55379-21
8. Tap the shims into place so that the holes in the

shims line up with the holes in the differential
mounts.
55379-29
Bottom View
A MD3 Computer and Display
10. Thread a nut onto the short thread end of each stud
by hand until the end of the stud is flush with the
bolt.
11. Install the each stud and washer from front to
55379-17 back through the holes in the differential mount,
differential and shims. Use the stud to knock the
32 mm shim alignment tool out if needed.
(1.25 in)
5°
12. Install the nut and washer on other end of each stud.
13. Hold the nut at one end of each stud and torque the
305 mm other nut to 1830 N-m (1350 lbf-ft).
(12 in) 14. The differential should now be positioned firmly
DG069-1 against the front of the differential mounts and held
Shim Alignment Tool (Part # DG069) in place with the studs.
15. Torque the four M30 bolts on the top of the
9. Use the shim alignment tool (or a similar tool) and a differential to 1830 N-m (1350 lbf-ft).
hammer to fully align the holes in the shims and the
holes in the differential mount.
NOTE: If the tool gets stuck it can be knocked out
with the stud in a later step.
8.113
WHEEL INSTALLATION
NOTE: All wheel installation joints and surfaces should
be clean free of paint, grease and oil etc. Use grade 8
bolts, hardened washers and standard torque practices.
• Use tapered assembly studs to help with wheel
installation. Two or three studs can be used on each
side.
55 mm
A 2.17 in
20 mm
0.79 in
1.5 mm
0.06 x 45° 10.3 mm
22.2 mm (⅞ in) (0.406 in)
– 14 UNF THREAD DRILL
20°
67 mm
2.64 in
86.5 mm
600019 3.417 in
Tapered Assembly Stud for 7⁄8 in Bolts

A Minimum Full Thread
The tapered assembly stud shown can be fabricated

to aid in wheel installation on an axle flange.
• Thoroughly clean the wheel bolts, washers and the
tapped holes in the axle flange.
• When cleaning in flange, double check and be sure
to use the proper size tap , ⅞ in – 14 UNF thread.
• Install the wheel with the aid of the tapered
assembly studs.
• Install wheel bolts by hand to insure bolts are not
cross threaded.
• Remove assembly studs and install the remaining
bolts.
• Torque wheel bolts to 678 – 746 N-m (500 – 550 lbf-ft)
lubricated.
IMPORTANT !
If a power wrench is used, be sure that the wheel bolts
are first hand-engaged to prevent stripping. Operate the
wrench slowly to prevent damage to the threads.
8.114
COOLING SYSTEM...........................................................................................................................................10

SECTION 10 – COOLING SYSTEM
CONTENTS – SECTION 10 ISSUE 1.1, DECEMBER 2017
COOLER PACKAGE................................................................................................................................................... 10.3

COOLING PUMP........................................................................................................................................................ 10.4
E
EHS TRANSMISSION COOLER...................................................................................................SEE ALSO SECTION 8

H
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK...........................................................................................................................SEE SECTION 3

M
MULTIFUNCTION MANIFOLD.................................................................................................................................. 10.10

MULTIFUNCTION MANIFOLD......................................................................................................SEE ALSO SECTION 9
O
OIL COOLER
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................................................... 10.6
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM................................................................................................................................................. 10.7
CIRCUIT HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC....................................................................................................................... 10.8
S
SUCTION STRAINER................................................................................................................................................. 10.5

V
VARIABLE PITCH FAN (OPTIONAL).......................................................................................................................... 10.9

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................................................... 10.12
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM............................................................................................................................................... 10.13
CIRCUIT HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC..................................................................................................................... 10.13
Cooling System Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder
10.2
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Cooling System
COOLER PACKAGE
A
A B C D
632E-015
A/C Condenser and Cooler Package 632E-007

A Radiator
B A/C Condenser
Engine Fan
A Surge Tank
C Charge Air Cooler (CAC)
D Hydraulic Oil Cooler
E Transmission Cooler (if equipped)
The side by side A/C condenser, radiator, charge air

cooler (CAC) and hydraulic oil cooler is mounted at the
front of the machine. The engine fan draws air from the
engine compartment, through the A/C condenser and
cooling package and blows it out through the front door
screen. The screened access panels on each side of
the engine compartment act as debris screens to prevent
debris from being drawn into the engine compartment.
Machines equipped with an EHS transmission are also
have an EHS transmission cooler mounted in front of the
cooler package.
The complete oil cooler/radiator/CAC/A-C condenser
assembly is rubber isolation mounted to reduce the
transmission of noise and to isolate the components
from vibration.
For detailed cleaning procedures, refer to CLEANING
A/C CONDENSER AND COOLER PACKAGE in
SECTION 3.
10.3
COOLING PUMP B
The cooling pump is a fixed displacement gear pump.
On machines with the single speed mechanical C D
transmission not equipped with forced lubrication it
is part of a two section gear pump which includes
the cooling and drive charge pumps. (not shown in
illustrations).
transmission equipped with forced lubrication it is part
of a multi section gear pump which includes the cooling,
multi section gear pump which includes the cooling,
drive charge and transmission pumps. GEAR1 A
This pump stack is driven off the power take off of the Typical Gear Pump
A Inlet
main pump.
B Outlet
The oil cooler bypass manifold is mounted on the outlet C Driven (Idler) Gear
side of the cooling pump. The oil cooler bypass manifold D Drive Gear
ensures that the differential pressure between the oil
cooler inlet and outlet does not exceed 100 psi (6.7 Bar).
The operation of a typical external gear pump (so called
A B C
driven by the drive gear. 600020
Multi Section Gear Pump

A Transmission Pump
B Cooling Pump
C Drive Charge Pump
10.4
SUCTION STRAINER
AY061
Suction Strainer
A Strainer Head
B O-ring
C Suction Strainer
The suction strainer collects hydraulic oil from case

drains (drive pump, main pump, and drive motor),
brake valve drain line, loadsense/auto brake manifold,
multifunction manifold, front axle and rear chassis
(winch and grapple) drain line. This oil passes through
the suction strainer element before entering the cooling
circuit.
The suction strainer element requires no regular
maintenance over the life of the machine. This element
requires maintenance only in the case of damage or
contamination due to a hydraulic pump or motor failure.
IMPORTANT !
The suction strainer element is NOT a filter element.
Always use the correct replacement element. Use of an
incorrect (filter type) element will result in pump damage.
10.5
OIL COOLER CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The suction strainer collects hydraulic oil from case
drains (drive pump, main pump, and drive motor),
brake valve drain line, loadsense/auto brake manifold,
multifunction manifold, front axle and rear chassis
(winch and grapple) drain line. This oil passes through
the suction strainer element before entering the cooling
circuit.
The cooling pump draws oil from the suction strainer and
hydraulic tank and sends it to the oil cooler via the cooler
bypass manifold. The cooler bypass manifold ensures
that the differential pressure between the oil cooler inlet
and outlet does not exceed 100 psi (6.7 Bar). Pressure
increases within the oil cooler can occur in cold weather
when oil temperatures at start-up are very low.
Cooling of the oil occurs as air is drawn over the oil
cooler cooling fins. Cooled oil then passes through the
front chassis return manifold, the return filter elements
and back to the hydraulic tank.
Oil is added to the hydraulic reservoir using the electric
hydraulic fill pump, located under the engine, is used
to add oil to the hydraulic oil tank. The pump switch
is located on the right side at the front of the engine
compartment
Oil entering the hydraulic tank passes through a diffuser
situated inside the tank below the oil surface.
Refer to HYDRAULIC FILL PUMP and FILLING THE
HYDRAULIC TANK in SECTION 3.
NOTE: Winch drain lines may vary slightly from those
shown in the illustration based on the type of winch in
use.
10.6
600047 OIL COOLER CIRCUIT

10.7
600045 OIL COOLER CIRCUIT HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

10.8
FLEXXAIRE® VARIABLE PITCH FAN
(OPTIONAL)
635D-171X
Variable Pitch Fan
The Flexxaire® variable pitch cooling fan is designed to

control fan air flow and direction to achieve the optimum
operating temperatures for the engine coolant, engine
intake air and hydraulic oil. In addition, CLEAN cycle
reverses air flow which blows debris from the machines
engine enclosure to eliminate potential overheating and
poor machine performance caused by overheating.
Fan blade pitch is hydraulically varied 30 degrees in both
directions and spring applied to FULL ON.
10.9
MULTIFUNCTION MANIFOLD
The multifunction manifold controls the winch freespool,
rear differential lock, front differential lock, parking brake
and variable pitch fan (if equipped) functions.
Refer to SECTION 9 for a full description of the
multifunction manifold.
Section F is controlled by two solenoid operated pilot
valves operating together to provide pilot oil to the
variable pitch fan functions (FULL ON, AUTO, CLEAN)
when a function is operated.
For information about the variable pitch fan function refer
to THIS SECTION.
For information about the rear differential lock, parking
brake release and front differential lock functions refer to 600022
SECTION 9. Multifunction Manifold

For information about the winch freespool and winch
brake functions refer to SECTION 13.
I J
A
B
E
F
G
H
600042
Multifunction Manifold
A Winch Freespool
B WInch Brake Off
C WInch Freespool Tank
D Winch Brake Off Tank
E Rear Differential Lock
F Parking Brake
G Front Differential Lock
H Variable Pitch Fan (if equipped)
I Pilot Pressure Test Port 'P1'
J Main Pump Pressure Test Port 'P'
10.10
600043
Multifunction Manifold Electrical Schematic
600041
Multifunction Manifold Hydraulic Schematic
10.11
FAN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION range settings. For proper operation ensure that the
correct hydraulic oil grade for the type of hydraulic oil in
Oil is supplied to the multifunction manifold from the
use is selected. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
main pump.
MENU - SERVICE SETTINGS – HYDRAULIC OIL
The position of fan control switch sends an electrical GRADE in SECTION 2 for hydraulic oil grade selection
signal to the computer control system (DIGITAL IN - Fan settings information. Refer also to APPROVED
Full ON or DIGITAL IN - Fan Clean). The computer HYDRAULIC OILS in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for
control system generates an electrical signals based hydraulic oil operating range information.
on the position of the fan control switch (full on,
With the fan control switch in the:
automatic or clean), the air conditioning controls (on/
off), hydraulic oil temperature sensor readings, engine
AUTOMATIC POSITION - AUTOMATIC is the normal
coolant temperature sensor readings and charge air
operating position for the fan control switch. When the
cooler temperature sensor readings ( DIGITAL OUT -
switch is in the AUTOMATIC position, the fan will operate
Fan Decrease/Block and/or DIGITAL OUT - Fan Block/
completely in an automatic mode. The computer control
Increase). These signals are sent to the multifunction
system will automatically control the fan pitch to
manifold to control the flow of oil to the cooling fan blade
minimize system energy losses and improve
pitch control. The pitch of the fan blades is adjusted
performance based on the temperature of the charge
to adjust the speed/ direction of air flow as required by
air, engine coolant and/or the temperature of the
control settings and/or operating conditions.
hydraulic oil. The computer system automatically
The cooling fan is designed control fan air flow to adjusts fan air flow to the minimum required level to
achieve the optimum operating temperatures for the maintain optimal operating conditions.
engine coolant, engine intake air and hydraulic oil.
Note that when the switch is in the AUTOMATIC position
These optimum temperatures are dictated by the engine
and the air flow is minimal due to low charge air, engine
and hydraulic component manufacturers for maximum
coolant and hydraulic oil temperatures, turning ON the
life and efficiency of their components. Significant power
A/C will cause the computer system to immediately place
savings and reduced warm up times can be realized by
the fan blades at a pitch to provide 30% air flow. This is
reducing air flow when it is not needed.
to ensure that sufficient air flow is available for the cab
The operating temperature of the engine and hydraulic A/C even while the machine is still warming up.
system will vary greatly depending on the operating
In addition, when the switch is in the AUTOMATIC
conditions and cannot be specifically stated. Factors
position, the system will automatically cycle through an
such as ambient air temperature, hydraulic oil viscosity,
auto clean cycle.
type of wood harvested, undergrowth and operator
technique all have a major impact on the effectiveness of The auto clean cycle is adjustable through the
the cooling system. computer control system menu (ADJUSTMENT MENU
– FAN SETTINGS). Refer also to COMPUTER –
The computer control system begins to regulate air flow
ADJUSTMENT MENU - FAN SETTINGS in SECTION 2.
at the following temperature sensor readings:
• Coolant 190°F (88°C) FULL ON Position - When the switch is in the FULL
ON position, the fan control system is overridden
• Charge Air Cooler 110°F (43°C) and the fan will run at FULL air flow (blades pitched
• Hydraulic Oil 68%* to 100%), for cooling regardless of charge air, engine
The computer control system will continue to increase air coolant or hydraulic oil temperatures. Normally the fan
flow until the following temperature sensor readings are control switch is placed in the AUTOMATIC position for
reached: optimal cooling. The FULL ON position is intended for
use in the event of a temporary failure of the control
• Coolant 205°F (96°C) system.
• Charge Air Cooler 158°F (70°C)
CLEAN Position - start the automatic clean cycle,
• Hydraulic Oil 85%* reversing the flow of air (there is no need to hold the
When any one of these three readings are reached, the switch down). The pitch of the fan blades is changed
fan will be at maximum air flow (FULL ON). and the direction of airflow through the engine enclosure
is reversed. This change in airflow blows debris from
* NOTE: Hydraulic oil temperature set points are the machines engine enclosure to eliminate potential
expressed as a percentage of the hydraulic oil overheating and poor machine performance caused
temperature high set point for the hydraulic oil grade by overheating. Ensure that there are no personnel
in use. Each hydraulic oil grade has its own operating standing directly to the sides of the machine when
10.12
600049 FAN CIRCUIT HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
600050 FAN CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

10.13
performing this operation, as dust and debris will fly out.
When the CLEAN cycle is complete the fan automatically
returns to normal air flow direction.
The auto clean cycle is adjustable through the
computer control system menu (ADJUSTMENT MENU
– FAN SETTINGS). Refer also to COMPUTER –
ADJUSTMENT MENU - FAN SETTINGS in SECTION 2.
It is also important to manually clean debris from the
machine on a regular basis to maintain low machine
operating temperatures. Refer to CLEANING A/C
CONDENSER AND COOLER PACKAGE in SECTION 3.
For more information about the computer control system
refer to SECTION 2 and SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL.
For more information about electrical schematics refer to
10.14
DOZER BLADE..................................................................................................................................................14

SECTION 14 – DOZER BLADE
CONTENTS – SECTION 14 ISSUE 1.1, JANUARY 2018
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................................ 14.4

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................................................................................................................................... 14.5
CONTROL VALVE, FRONT.........................................................................................................SEE ALSO SECTION 11
DOZER SECTION.................................................................................................................................................... 14.2
D
DOZER BLADE CONTROL LEVER........................................................................................................ SEE SECTION 2

H
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC, CIRCUIT......................................................................................................................... 14.3

P
PRESSURE CHECKS
DOZER UP/DOWN RELIEFS.................................................................................................................................. 14.6
Dozer Blade Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder
FRONT CONTROL VALVE
The control valve is located on the rear chassis above
the rear axle and under the cover plate.
This control valve consists of an inlet section; three B B B
spool sections; and an end section with integrated pilot
supply. A A A
For detailed information and an operating description of

the control valve refer to FRONT CONTROL VALVE in B B B
SECTION 11.
DOZER SECTION
Pressure relief ports in the dozer spool section are
equipped with pressure relief cartridges on both the A
and B sides. All relief valves are cartridge style, factory
set for each function and nonadjustable. A A A
The dozer spool section is equipped with a feed reducer
which is adjusted to specifications for the dozer function.
49016AUNI R2
14.2
Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Dozer Blade
600033 DOZER HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC

14.3
DOZER CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer also to SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL for complete
electrical schematics and more detailed information
Oil is supplied to the dozer hydraulic system by a
about the computer control system.
variable displacement piston pump (main pump).
The main pump supplies oil to the front control valve
(steering, dozer, grapple rotate) circuits and rear control
valve (winch, arch, grapple, boom) circuits. The front
and rear control valves are equipped with load sensing
connected to the main pump control. The front control
valve is equipped with an inlet relief valve which acts as
a load sense relief.
NOTE: The main pump also provides pilot oil to the
multifunction manifold (differential locks, winch freespool,
parking brake, variable pitch fan). In addition, main
pump oil is directed through a check valve to the brake
accumulator. The oil from the brake accumulator side of
the check valve is sent to the brake foot control valve to
operate the service brakes.
Oil enters the inlet section of the front control valve
and is allowed to pass through the closed center spool
sections to the end section. Internal pilot pressure supply
is generated by a pressure reducing valve in the end
section for use in operating the spool sections. A load
sense signal is sent to the main pump control.
Two cylinders are used to move the dozer blade UP
or DOWN. Each electro-hydraulically controlled spool
section has a closed centred 3 position spool with spring
centring.
When the operator moves the dozer control lever
forward or back a signal (VOLTAGE IN - Dozer Lever)
is sent to the computer control system. The computer
control system generates a signal (CURRENT OUT –
Dozer Up-/Dn+) which is sent out to a solenoid on the
dozer section of the front control valve activating the
DOZER UP or DOZER DOWN function.
When the DOZER UP or DOZER DOWN function is
activated electrical current from the computer control
system creates a magnetic force proportional to the
current supplied within the solenoid. The corresponding
solenoid shifts the actuator and allows the spool to be
shifted by internal pilot pressure applied to the end of
the spool. Shifting the spool directs oil from the pressure
gallery to either end of the two cylinders to move the
DOZER UP or DOWN. The dozer section of the control
valve is equipped with cartridge style relief valves to
protect the circuit from over pressurizing.
Return oil is directed through the control valve to the T1
port where it returns to tank.
Refer to LOAD SENSING in SECTION 9 for more
information on load sense systems.
14.4
600051 DOZER CIRCUIT

14.5
DOZER PRESSURE 15. Change the program mode from NORMAL to
FEED REDUCER ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION SETUP and press OK.
WARNING – ADJUSTMENT MENU in SECTION 2.
IMPORTANT !
IMPORTANT !
Avoid blowing oil over the relief for longer than 5
seconds, as this will cause excessive heating of the
hydraulic fluid and possible damage to hydraulic
components.
2. Ensure that the hydraulic oil is at operating
temperature. See HYDRAULIC OIL HEATING A
PROCEDURE in SECTION 8 of THIS MANUAL.
3. Lower the grapple and dozer blade to rest firmly on
the ground.
7. Block wheels.
Monitor Load Sense Pressure Reading
10. Insert the ignition key and turn to the RUN position. A Load Sense Pressure
16. Use the computer display to view the second, ,
12. Start the engine. information mode menu screen to view Load Sense
13. Set engine speed to 2200 rpm. Pressure from the cab.
14. Disengage the parking brake. This deactivates the From the main menu select INFORMATION MODE
main pump unloading valve. The main pump must MENU (F3) – MORE INFORMATION (F3).
be fully loaded to correctly set pressures. Refer to COMPUTER – INFORMATION MODE
MENU in SECTION 2 for more information.
17. Make sure that the area is clear.
18. Ensure the front door is closed.
IMPORTANT !
Dozer blade will damage the door if operated with
the front door open.
19. Operate the DOZER UP control until end of cylinder
travel and hold.
20. Monitor the load sense pressure reading until it
stabilizes.
14.6
600058
Front Control Valve

Dozer Feed Reducer Adjusting Screw
A
(10mm Wrench, 3mm Allen key)
21. If required, with the aid of an assistant adjust dozer

valve section feed reducer set screw (located on the
front control valve) to the specified setting.
• 230-238 bar (3350-3450 psi). press OK.
B B B
IMPORTANT !
A A A
operate normally.
B B B
procedures only.
A A A Attempting to use these controls will reactivate the
49016AUNI R2 26. Replace the covers.
27. Remove articulation lock.
22. Lower the dozer blade to rest firmly on the ground.
14.7
14.8

Service Manual 632e e 635g - 47997aeng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual 632e e 635g - 47997aeng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

632E/635G SKIDDER

PRELIMINARY ISSUE 1.1, OCTOBER 2017

Tigercat Industries Inc.

MACHINE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS..................................................................................... vi

SAE STANDARDS FOR MACHINE OPERATOR PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES.............................................vii

NON-APPROVED FIELD PRODUCT CHANGES.............................................................................................viii

CONTROLS & OPERATION................................................................................................................................2

LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE......................................................................................................................3

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTERS.......................................................................................................................6

ENGINE START AND STOP................................................................................................................................7

632E/635G AVAILABLE LITERATURE

Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder

Tigercat Industries Inc.

Introduction Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder

MACHINE IDENTIFICATION AND

Engine Identification Label Location

The engine identification label is location

Machine Serial Number Plate Location– Cab Engine Date of Manufacture:_______________________

The machine serial number plate is located inside the

Engine Serial Number Plate Location

The engine serial number is also stamped location.

The machine serial number is also stamped on the front

Machine Model Number:__________________________

Machine Serial Number:__________________________

Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Introduction

SAE STANDARDS FOR MACHINE OPERATOR PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES

MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIRS

Introduction Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder

NON-APPROVED FIELD PRODUCT CHANGES

Tigercat Industries Inc.

Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder Introduction

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION NOTIFICATIONS TO USER

INDUSTRY CANADA NOTIFICATIONS TO USER

Tigercat 632E/635G Skidder

CONTENTS - SECTION 1 ISSUE 2.0 FEBRUARY 2017

ARTICULATION LOCK............................................................................................................................. 1.31

Wear suitable hearing protective device such as

SAFETY SYMBOLS GENERAL

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous

NOTICE indicates a potentially damaging situation

Use recommended protective clothing and safety

Avoid mounting or dismounting the

Avoid Injury from Backover Accidents

For additional information, refer to EMERGENCY

Never operate the boom or grapple over the heads

Before moving the machine, lift the grapple and

Before performing maintenance or repair work on

LOCATED IN • Before servicing the machine, allow the

XA2-A0 FRONT CHASSIS

XA2-A1 FRONT CHASSIS 2

615C-007 XA2 MODULES

When searching for leaks, wear work gloves and

Pressure can be maintained in a hydraulic system

Explosive release of fluids from pressurized

CAB AT FULL TILT SUPPORTED

TILTED CAB SUPPORTED

632E-029 ACCESS PANELS LEFT SIDE

Work in a ventilated area. If it is necessary to run

632E-028 ACCESS PANELS RIGHT SIDE

WHAT IS A LIGHTNING STRIKE? • Monitor daily weather forecasts

FIRE PREVENTION (twigs, pine needles, branches, bark, leaves,

EQUIPMENT FIRES ADVERSELY EFFECT

WHAT TO DO TO PREPARE FOR A MACHINE FIRE